rn_crm_60_02_en

SAP CRM 2007 SP01 and SP02

Release Notes

______________________________________________________________

CopyrightCopyright(c) 2008 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

Neither this document nor any part of it may be copied or reproduced in any form or by anymeans or translated into another language, without the prior consent of SAP AG. Theinformation contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

SAP is a registered trademark of SAP AG.

All other products which are mentioned in this documentation are registered or not registeredtrademarks of their respective companies.

1 CRM Customer Relationship Management 11.1 Uniform User Interface in CRM (New) 11.2 Enterprise Services (Changed) 31.3 Help Center for SAP CRM (New) 31.4 Terminology in CRM (Changed) 41.5 New, Changed and Removed IMG Activities in SAP CRM 5.2 61.6 New, Changed and Removed IMG Activities in SAP CRM 2007 91.7 New, Changed and Removed Customizing Activities in SAP CRM 2007 (Enhanced for SP02) 20 1.8 CRM-MD Master Data 331.8.1 New, Changed and Removed IMG Activities in SAP CRM 5.1 and SAP CRM 5.2 331.8.2 CRM-MD-BP Business Partners 481.8.2.1 Account Life Cycle (New) 481.8.2.2 Account Management Functions (New) 491.8.2.3 Internet User in Account (new) 501.8.2.4 Billing Account Hierarchies (New) 511.8.2.5 Rule-Based Assignment of Employees (New) 511.8.2.6 Business Partner Fields (New) 521.8.2.7 Data Quality Administration (New for SP02) 531.8.2.8 Account Fact Sheet: BI 7.x Templates (Enhanced for SP02) 541.8.2.9 Business Partners: Qualification Requirements (New for SP02) 551.8.2.10 Authorization Object CRM_BPROLE (New) 551.8.2.11 CRM WebClient UI for IS-M Processes in Interaction Center 561.8.3 CRM-MD-PRO Products 581.8.3.1 Up-Selling and Cross-Selling via Interlinkages (New) 581.8.3.2 Package Group Maintenance (Enhanced) 591.8.3.3 Interlinkage Maintenance User Interface (New) 591.8.3.4 Interlinkage Types (Enhanced) 611.8.3.5 Packages and Products with Dependent Components (New) 621.8.4 CRM-MD-PCT Product Catalog 641.8.4.1 Product Catalog Staging (New) 641.8.4.2 Programming Interface SAP TREX API (New) 661.8.4.3 Additional Product Category Information (New) 661.8.5 CRM-MD-PPR Partner/Product Range 671.8.5.1 Partner/Product Ranges (PPRs) (Enhanced in SP02) 671.8.5.2 Partner/Product Ranges (PPRs) (New) 681.8.6 CRM-MD-CON Condition Technique 691.8.6.1 Terminology in Condition Maintenance (Changed) 691.9 CRM-BF Basic Functions 701.9.1 Worklist (New) 701.9.2 Authorization Check at Field Level (Enhanced) 70

______________________________________________________________SAP AG iii

Release-Informationen Inhaltsverzeichnis SAP AG______________________________________________________________

1.9.3 New, Changed and Removed IMG Activities in SAP CRM 5.1 and SAP CRM 5.2 711.9.4 Worklist (Enhanced for SP02) 861.9.5 Worklist (Enhanced) 871.9.6 Worklist (New) 881.9.7 CRM-BF-PD Partner Processing 891.9.7.1 Partner Processing: Alternative Partner Proposal (New for SP02) 891.9.8 CRM-BF-COU Counter 891.9.8.1 891.9.8.2 Language-Dependent Counter Descriptions (New in SP02) 901.9.9 CRM-BF-CFG Product Configuration 901.9.9.1 Display Options for Characteristics and Characteristic Values (Enhanced) 901.9.9.2 Display of Messages when Loading a New Knowledge Base (New) 921.9.9.3 Comparison of Product Configurations (New) 931.9.9.4 Performing Standard Configuration in the Background (New) 941.9.9.5 Product Config: Using Sales Order Fields as Object Characteristics (New) 941.9.9.6 Characteristics for Display of Messages (New) 971.9.9.7 Product Modeling (Enhanced) 991.9.10 CRM-BF-PR Pricing 1001.9.10.1 Terminology in Condition Maintenance (Changed) 1001.9.10.2 Credit Analyst Workbench (New) 1011.9.10.3 Approval Process for Price Changes in Sales Orders (New 1021.9.10.4 Display Price List(s) for an Account (New) 1031.9.11 CRM-BF-COM Content Management 1031.9.11.1 Enhancements for Content Management (Changed) 1031.9.12 CRM-BF-WST Web Services Tool 1041.9.12.1 Web Services Tool (New) 1041.9.12.2 Web Service Consumption Tool (New for SP02) 1051.9.12.3 Web Services Tool (Enhanced) 1051.10 CRM-BE Billing 1071.10.1 Transfer of Accounting Indicator to Billing (New) 1071.10.2 Intercompany Billing (Enhanced) 1071.10.3 Transfer of Billing Data to SAP GTS for Intrastat Declarations (New) 1081.10.4 Claim Settlements (New) 1081.10.5 CRM-BE-DL Billing Due List 1111.10.5.1 Reference to Letter of Credit in Billing Documents (New) 1111.10.6 CRM-BE-FI Transfer to Accounting 111

______________________________________________________________SAP AG iv


1.10.6.1 Controlling Integration for Intercompany Billing (New) 1111.11 CRM-RB Rebate Processing 1121.11.1 Terminology in Condition Maintenance (Changed) 1121.11.2 SAP CRM Rebate Processing WebClient UI (Enhanced) 1131.11.3 1141.12 CRM-EM CRM Entitlement Management 1171.12.1 Entitlements Management (Enhanced ) 1171.13 CRM-BTX Business Transactions 1181.13.1 Use of the Maintenance Framework for Business Transactions (New) 1181.13.2 Sale of External Products (New) 1191.13.3 Sold-To Party Profiles in Sales Orders (New) 1211.13.4 Different Actions in Sales Orders Depending on Transaction Mode (New) 1211.13.5 Displaying Customer-Specific Fields/Business Transaction Components in 1211.13.6 Subsequent assignment of transactions 1221.13.7 Business Object Layer and Web Services (Enhanced) 1231.13.8 CRM-BTX-LEA Lead Management 1231.13.8.1 Duplicate Check for Leads (New) 1231.13.9 CRM-BTX-OPP Opportunities 1241.13.9.1 Opportunity Assessment Determination Based on Expected Sales (New) 1241.13.9.2 Transfer Buying Center Between Opportunity and Account (New) 1251.13.9.3 Competitor Information for an Opportunity (Enhanced) 1251.13.9.4 Enhancements to Opportunities in CRM (Changed) 1261.13.10 CRM-BTX-SLO Sales Transaction 1271.13.10.1 Use of Product Proposals (Enhanced) 1271.13.10.2 Use of Provider Orders (New) 1291.13.10.3 Automatic Creation of Provider Orders for Lock/Unlock Services (New) 1311.13.10.4 Settlement of Recurring and One-Time Fees (Enhanced) 1311.13.10.5 Status Management in Provider Order Maintenance (Enhanced) 1331.13.10.6 Abnormal Demand in Sales Order Items (New) 1341.13.10.7 Assignment of Internal Orders to Sales Orders (New) 1341.13.10.8 Integration of Letters of Credit in the Sales Order (New) 1351.13.10.9 Mass Changes at Header Level (New) 1361.13.10.10 Maximum Number of Locations in Availability Check (New) 1361.13.10.11 Determine Maximum Partial Deliveries (New) 1371.13.10.12 Use of Objects in Service Recall Orders (Enhanced) 1381.13.10.13 Third-Party Order Processing with Consolidation (New) 1391.13.10.14 Third-Party Order Processing with Supersession (New) 140

______________________________________________________________SAP AG v


1.13.10.15 Using Grid Products in the Sales Order (New for SP02) 1411.13.11 CRM-BTX-ERP BSP for ERP Sales Order 1421.13.11.1 Creating and Changing ERP Sales Transactions in SAP CRM (New) 1421.13.12 CRM-BTX-SVO Service Processes 1431.13.12.1 CRM-BTX-SVO-QUT Service Inquiries / Quotations 1431.13.12.1.1 Packages in Service Order Quotations (New) 1431.13.13 CRM-BTX-SCO Service Confirmation 1441.13.13.1 Serial Number Entry in Confirmations (New) 1441.13.14 CRM-BTX-BRQ Billing Request 1451.13.14.1 Transfer of Accounting Indicator to Billing (New) 1451.13.15 CRM-BTX-COM Complaints / Returns / In-House Repair 1451.13.15.1 Use of Complaints and Returns to Update Sales Contracts (New) 1451.13.15.2 Complaint with reference to trade promotion (New) 1471.13.15.3 Exchange Group for Used Part Returns (New) 1491.13.15.4 Complaints for External Products (New) 1501.13.15.5 Complaint Creation with Reference to a SAP ECC Handling Unit (New) 1511.13.15.6 Inventory Adjustment for Complaints (New) 1521.13.16 CRM-BTX-CTR Contracts 1531.13.16.1 CRM-BTX-CTR-CCO Sales Contract 1531.13.16.1.1 Provider Contracts (New) 1531.13.16.2 CRM-BTX-CTR-SCO Service Contract 1561.13.16.2.1 Provider Contracts (New) 1561.13.16.3 CRM-BTX-CTR-UCO Usage-Based Service Contract 1581.13.16.3.1 1581.13.17 CRM-BTX-PRV Provider Transactions 1591.13.17.1 New Functions in the Provider Contract and Dispute Management (New) 1591.14 CRM-CMG Case Management 1611.14.1 Automatic Case Notes in Case Management (New) 1611.14.2 Case Management (Enhanced) 1611.14.3 Case Management (Enhanced) 1631.15 CRM-ACP Account Planning 1651.15.1 Account Planning (Enhanced) 1651.16 CRM-FM Funds Management 1661.16.1 Funds Management (New) 1661.16.2 Funds Analytics (New) 1671.16.3 CRM-FM-ACL Accruals 167

______________________________________________________________SAP AG vi


1.16.3.1 Accruals (new) 1671.16.4 CRM-FM-AVC Availability Control 1691.16.4.1 Availaibility Control (New) 1691.16.5 CRM-FM-BER Budget Expiration 1701.16.5.1 Budget Expiration (new) 1701.16.6 CRM-FM-BFW Batch Framework 1711.16.6.1 Batch Processing Framework (new) 1711.16.7 CRM-FM-BPO Budget Posting 1721.16.7.1 Budget Postings (New) 1721.16.8 CRM-FM-FND Fund Plans and Funds 1731.16.8.1 Fund Determination (Enhanced for SP02) 1731.16.8.2 Funds Plans and Funds (New) 1731.16.9 CRM-FM-FPO Fund Posting 1741.16.9.1 Fund Postings (New) 1741.16.10 CRM-FM-FU Fund Usages 1751.16.10.1 Fund Usage (New) 1751.17 CRM-CLA Claims Management 1761.17.1 Claims Management for SP02 (Enhanced) 1761.17.2 Claims Management (New) 1781.17.3 Claim Settlements (New) 1791.17.4 Aggregation and Distribution of Amounts in Marketing Projects for Claims 1811.17.5 CRM-CLA-BI BI Integration 1831.17.5.1 Claims Management: BI Extractors 1831.18 CRM-ISA Internet Sales 1841.18.1 Shopping Basket (Enhanced) 1841.18.2 Enabling Links to Web Channel Applications from CRM WebClient UI (New) 1841.18.3 Improved Usability (Enhanced) 1861.18.4 Multiple Campaign Assignment (New) 1871.18.5 Campaign Enrollment (New) 1881.18.6 Dynamic Field Control for Orders (New) 1891.18.7 Generic Filter Solution (Enhanced) 1911.18.8 Customer Role (New) 1921.18.9 Collaborative Views: Search and Create (New) 1921.18.10 CRM-ISA-CAT Internet Sales Catalog 1931.18.10.1 Basic Eye-Catcher Text in Web Shop (New) 1931.18.11 CRM-ISA-CFG Product Configuration Internet Sales 1941.18.11.1 Configurable Products Attribute Display (Enhanced) 1941.18.11.2 Comparing Products (New) 1951.18.12 CRM-ISA-BCS Business-to-Consumer Sales 1961.18.12.1 Provider Shop and Interaction Center Mode (New) 196

______________________________________________________________SAP AG vii


1.18.12.2 Price Eye-Catcher Text (New) 1961.18.12.3 Recurring Prices in the Provider Web Shop (New) 1981.18.12.4 Special Price Display in the Web Shop (New) 1991.18.13 CRM-ISA-CNT Contracts 2001.18.13.1 Contract Duration in Web Shop (New) 2001.18.13.2 Contract Negotiation: User Status Profiles (New) 2001.18.13.3 Contract Negotiation: Status Display (New) 2011.18.14 CRM-ISA-BAS Shopping Basket and Order Entry 2021.18.14.1 Block View Format in Web Shop (New) 2021.18.14.2 Direct Debit Payment Method in Web Shop (New) 2041.18.14.3 Save and Upload Shopping Baskets (Enhanced) 2051.18.14.4 Separate Payment Methods for Web Shop Purchases 2061.18.14.5 Shopping Basket (Enhanced) 2071.18.14.6 Technical Data in Provider Web Shop Order 2081.18.15 CRM-ISA-AUC Web Auction 2091.18.15.1 B2C Checkout in Selling Via eBay (Enhanced) 2091.18.16 CRM-ISA-UM User Management 2091.18.16.1 Internet User in Account (new) 2091.18.17 CRM-ISA-TEC Technical Infrastructure 2101.18.17.1 Extended Product Detail Page (New) 2101.18.18 CRM-ISA-SHA Shop Management 2111.18.18.1 Verification Word for Web Shop Assistance 2111.19 CRM-ISE Internet Service 2121.19.1 CRM-ISE-COM Complaints and Returns 2121.19.1.1 E-Service: Extended Complaints and Returns (Enhanced) 2121.19.2 CRM-ISE-WBF Web Forms 2131.19.2.1 New Link Type for Web Requests (Changed) 2131.19.2.2 External Interface for Web Requests with Attachments (New) 2141.19.2.3 2141.20 CRM-RPL Resource Planning for Personnel Resources 2151.20.1 Resource Planning (Enhanced for SP02) 2151.20.2 Project-Based Resource Planning (New for SP02) 2161.20.3 Service Resource Planning (New) 2171.21 CRM-MKT Marketing 2181.21.1 Pertinent Master Data Changes (New) 2181.21.2 Personalized Mail (Changed) 2191.21.3 Trade Promotion Upload Using SAP Exchange Interface (New) 2191.21.4 Deals 2201.21.5 TPM and Account Planning: BI 7.x Templates (Enhanced for SP02) 221

______________________________________________________________SAP AG viii


1.21.6 Purchasing Products and Services in Marketing Projects (New for SP02) 2211.21.7 Trade Promotion Agreements (New) 2221.21.8 Mass Copy, Mass Change, Mass Approval (New) 2231.21.9 Enhancements in CRM Marketing (New and changed) 2241.21.10 Overlap Checks (New) 2241.21.11 Scheduled Claims (New) 2251.21.12 Trade Promotion Templates (New) 2261.21.13 Tiered Growth Rebates (New) 2271.21.14 Enhancements in Trade Promotion Management (New) 2271.21.15 Take Rates (new) 2291.21.16 Attribute Filters (New) 2301.21.17 Causals (New) 2311.21.18 Trade Promotion Critical Changes (new) 2311.21.19 Editable Overview Pages (Enhancement) 2321.21.20 TPM Funds Integration (New) 2331.21.21 Long-Term Trade Promotion Planning (New) 2341.21.22 Price Simulation Within a Trade Promotion (New) 2341.21.23 Trade Promotion Guidelines (new) 2351.21.24 Trade Promotion Versions (new) 2361.21.25 CRM-MKT-MPL Marketing Planner 2361.21.25.1 Enrolling for Marketing Projects (New) 2361.21.25.2 Enhancements to Campaigns and Trade Promotions 2371.21.25.3 Mass Generation of Sales Orders via Campaigns or Trade Promotions (New) 2381.21.25.4 CRM-MKT-MPL-CAL Marketing Calendar 2391.21.25.4.1 Marketing Calendar (Enhanced in SP02) 2391.21.25.4.2 Marketing Calendar (Enhanced) 2391.21.25.5 CRM-MKT-MPL-ST Basic Functions 2411.21.25.5.1 CRM-MKT-MPL-ST-KFP Key Figure Planning 2411.21.25.5.1.1 Free Goods in Trade Promotions (Enhanced) 2411.21.25.6 CRM-MKT-MPL-DEF Customer Defaults 2421.21.25.6.1 Trade Promotion Management - Product Hierachy Promotions (Enhanced) 2421.21.25.7 CRM-MKT-MPL-MDF Marketing Development Funds 2451.21.25.7.1 MDF BI Extractors (Enhanced in SP02) 2451.21.25.7.2 Market Development Funds (Changed) 2451.21.25.7.3 Authorization and User Management (Enhanced) 2481.21.25.7.4 Market Development Funds: Extractors 2501.21.25.7.5 Determination of Reimbursement Rates in the MDF Process (New) 2511.21.25.8 CRM-MKT-MPL-TPM Trade Promotion Management 252

______________________________________________________________SAP AG ix


1.21.25.8.1 Product Planning Basis for Trade Promotions and Deals (Enhanced for 2521.21.25.8.2 Key Figure Planning Enhancements (New for SP02) 2531.21.25.8.3 Effective Dates in Trade Promotions and Deals (New) 2541.21.25.8.4 TPM BI Extractors 2541.21.25.8.5 Indirect Relationships (New) 2561.21.25.8.6 Listings in Product Proposals (New) 2571.21.25.8.7 Cross-Order Caps for Discounts in TPM (New) 2581.21.25.8.8 Significant Uplifts and Transfer to APO (New) 2591.21.26 CRM-MKT-SEG Segmentation 2591.21.26.1 Product Segments (New) 2591.22 CRM-ANA CRM Analytics 2601.22.1 Integration of PPM into SAP CRM (New) 2601.22.2 CRM-ANA-OR Operative Reporting 2611.22.2.1 CRM Interactive Reports (New) 2611.23 CRM-IC Interaction Center WebClient 2611.23.1 Interaction Center WebClient in CRM WebClient UI Framework (New) 2621.23.2 Intent-Driven Interaction Guidance (New) 2621.23.3 Client Switch (New for SP02) 2631.23.4 Selection Dialog Boxes (New) 2641.23.5 Listing Based Product Proposals (New) 2641.23.6 Multi Chat (New for SP02) 2651.23.7 Cancel Button in Business Transactions (New) 2651.23.8 CRM-IC-MDB Manager Dashboard 2661.23.8.1 Monitoring of Statistics from Multiple Telephony Systems (New) 2661.23.9 CRM-IC-SEA Account Identification 2671.23.9.1 Account Identification (Enhanced) 2671.23.9.2 Index Table for Simple Business Partner Searches (New) 2681.23.9.3 Mixed Business-to-Business and Business-to-Consumer Scenario (New) 2681.23.9.4 Related Business Partners (New) 2691.23.9.5 CRM WebClient UI for IS-M Processes in Interaction Center 2701.23.9.6 Registered Products (Enhanced) 2721.23.9.7 Account Identification (Enhanced) 2721.23.10 CRM-IC-PRO Products 2731.23.10.1 Product Search in the Interaction Center (New) 2731.23.10.2 Product Catalog Search (New) 2741.23.11 CRM-IC-FCA Financial Contract Accounting 2741.23.11.1 Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management (Enhanced) 274

______________________________________________________________SAP AG x


1.23.11.2 Financial Customer Care for Insurance (Enhanced) 2771.23.12 CRM-IC-ALT Alert 2781.23.12.1 Alert Editor (New) 2781.23.13 CRM-IC-CHA Communication Channels 2781.23.13.1 Display and Maintenance of Contact Attached Data (New) 2781.23.13.2 Presence - Availability of Agents When Transferring Contacts (New) 2791.23.13.3 CRM-IC-CHA-TEL Telephony Integration 2801.23.13.3.1 Dual Tone Multi Frequency Tones (New) 2801.23.13.3.2 Simple Computer Telephony Integration (New) 2811.23.13.4 CRM-IC-CHA-EMA E-Mail Integration 2811.23.13.4.1 Inserting Agent Signatures and Standard Responses in E-Mail Editor (New) 2811.23.14 CRM-IC-EMS E-Mail Response Management System 2821.23.14.1 Pushing E-Mails to Agents (New) 2821.23.14.2 Rules Policies (Enhanced) 2821.23.14.3 CRM-IC-EMS-RUL Rule Maintenance 2831.23.14.3.1 Transport of Rule Policies and Rules (New) 2831.23.14.4 CRM-IC-EMS-CAT Categories 2841.23.14.4.1 Merge and Import of Categorization Schemas (New) 2841.24 CRM-MSA Mobile Sales 2851.24.1 CSDT and Infocenter (Deleted) 2851.24.2 Security Enhancements for CRM Mobile Applications (Enhanced in SP02) 2851.24.3 Trade Promotion Management Enhancements (Enhanced) 2861.24.4 CRM-MSA-BP Business Partner 2881.24.4.1 Life Cycle Stage for Business Partners (New) 2881.24.4.2 Account Classification for Business Partners (New) 2891.24.5 CRM-MSA-PAS Products & Services 2901.24.5.1 Using Configurable Products Created in the CRM Server (Enhanced) 2901.24.6 CRM-MSA-ACT Activity 2911.24.6.1 Activity Scheduling Functions (Enhanced) 2911.24.6.2 Synchronization of Attachments in Activities with MS Outlook (New) 2921.24.6.3 Attachment of Account Fact Sheet to Activities (New) 2931.24.7 CRM-MSA-OPP Opportunities 2941.24.7.1 Assessments in Opportunities Based on Expected Sales Volume (New) 2941.24.7.2 Maintenance of Competitor Product Information in Opportunities (New) 2941.24.8 CRM-MSA-AMT Authorization Management Tool 295

______________________________________________________________SAP AG xi


1.24.8.1 Mass Assignment and Unassignment of Roles to Users in AMT (New) 2951.24.8.2 Authorization in AMT for Pricing Details (New) 2951.24.9 CRM-MSA-SAD Sales Document 2961.24.9.1 Comparing Product Configurations (New) 2961.24.10 CRM-MSA-PAC Campaigns & Promotions 2971.24.10.1 Product Planning Basis for Trade Promotions and Deals (New) 2971.25 CRM-MSE Mobile Service 2981.25.1 Mobile Service Functions (Changed) 2981.25.2 Security Enhancements for CRM Mobile Applications (Enhanced in SP02) 2981.25.3 Local Stock Information Update (New in SP02) 2991.25.4 Goods Movement (New) 3001.25.5 Reservations and Purchase Requisitions (New) 3021.25.6 Stock Overview (New) 3051.26 CRM-FRW Framework 3061.26.1 Portal Integration (Enhanced) 3061.26.2 Portal Integration (New) 3071.26.3 Working Context (New) 3081.26.4 CRM-FRW-AFP Application Frame 3091.26.4.1 Central Search (New) 3091.26.4.2 Central Search (New) 3101.26.5 CRM-FRW-CON UI Configuration Tool 3101.26.5.1 UI Configuration (Enhanced) 3101.26.5.2 UI Configuration Tool (Enhanced) 3121.26.6 CRM-FRW-ROL Roles Management 3121.26.6.1 User roles (changed, new) 3121.26.6.2 Business Role Customizing (Enhanced) 3141.26.6.3 User Role IPM Rights Manager (New) 3151.26.7 CRM-FRW-UI User Interface 3161.26.7.1 User Interface Personalization (Enhanced) 3161.26.7.2 UI Configuration: Usability (Enhanced) 3161.26.7.3 CRM WebClient User Interface (Enhanced) 3171.26.7.4 Personalization (Enhanced) 3181.27 CRM-CHM Channel Management 3191.27.1 Partner Channel Management (Changed) 3191.27.2 Partner Channel Management (Enhanced) 3191.27.3 Partner Channel Management: SAP NetWeaver Portal (New) 3211.28 CRM-LAM CRM Leasing 3211.28.1 Functions No Longer Available in Leasing 3211.28.2 Mass Change Processes (New) 322

______________________________________________________________SAP AG xii


1.28.3 Integration of Contractual Services (New) 3231.28.4 Unique Item Identifier (UIID) (New) 3281.28.5 Management of Third-Party Relationships (New) 3291.28.6 Grouping Leasing Documents und FS Documents (New) 3301.28.7 Functions for Lease Payment Structures (New) 3301.28.8 Change Processes (New) 3321.28.9 Classification (New) 3351.28.10 Management of Billing Request Items (New) 3361.28.11 Asset Handling and Depreciation (New) 3381.28.12 Collections Function (New) 3391.28.13 Calculation of Late Fees (New) 3401.28.14 Changing the Status of Objects (New) 3421.28.15 Pricing (New) 3421.28.16 One-Time Taxes and Fees (New) 3431.28.17 Termination Quotation (New) 3441.28.18 Modification of the CRM WebClient UI for Leasing Manager (New) 3451.28.19 Selection for Floating Rate Adjustment (Changed) 3471.28.20 Partial Processing of Leases (New) 3481.28.21 Floating Rate Adjustment (New) 3491.28.22 New Functions for SAP Leasing (New) 3501.29 CRM-IFS Financial Services 3511.29.1 Installment Loans (Changed) 3511.30 CRM-IPS Public Sector 3521.30.1 Case Management for Grantor (Enhanced) 3521.30.2 Business Rule Framework in CRM (Enhanced) 3541.30.3 Business Rule Framework in CRM (Enhanced) 3551.30.4 Event-Driven CRM Activities (New) 3551.30.5 BRF Action Types for Social Services (New) 3561.30.6 Case Assignment for Social Applications and Social Service Plans (New) 3571.30.7 Change Processes in Social Service Plans (New) 3571.30.8 Item Proposal for Social Applications (New) 3581.30.9 Business Object Social Application (New) 3591.30.10 Business Intelligence Analysis of Social Services Data (New) 3601.30.11 User Role Social Services (New) 3611.30.12 Social Services Eventing (New) 3611.30.13 Business Object Social Service Plan (New) 3621.30.14 Successor Processing of Public Sector Business Transactions (New) 3631.30.15 Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management (Enhanced) 3641.30.16 Financial Customer Care for Insurance (Enhanced) 367

______________________________________________________________SAP AG xiii


1.30.17 Financial Customer Care for Public Sector (Enhanced) 3671.30.18 Grantor Claims 3681.30.19 CRM-IPS-MD Master Data 3691.30.19.1 CRM-IPS-MD-PRG Grantor Programm 3691.30.19.1.1 Grantor Delivery Customizing (New and Enhanced) 3691.30.20 CRM-IPS-BTX Business Transaction 3711.30.20.1 CRM-IPS-BTX-AGR Grantor Agreement 3711.30.20.1.1 Change Request (New) 3711.31 CRM-IHT High Tech 3721.31.1 High Tech: Mass Search and Replace (New for SP02) 3721.31.2 High Tech: Partner Manager Role (New for SP02) 3731.31.3 CRM-IHT-PP Price Protection 3741.31.3.1 High Tech: Reverse Price Protection (Enhanced for SP02) 3741.31.4 CRM-IHT-PDP Partner Design Projects 3751.31.4.1 High Tech: Design Registration (Enhanced for SP02) 3751.32 CRM-IM Media 3761.32.1 CRM-IM-IPM Intellectual Property Management 3761.32.1.1 Applications Available Through the Transaction Launcher (New) 3761.32.1.2 Uniform User Interface for Intellectual Property Management (New) 3771.32.1.3 CRM-IM-IPM-MD Master Data 3791.32.1.3.1 Intellectual Property Rights Maintenance Check (Enhanced) 3791.32.1.3.2 Intellectual Property Maintenance from SAP GUI (Changed) 3791.32.1.3.3 Rights Templates (New) 3801.32.1.3.4 Rights Consumption (New) 3811.32.1.3.5 Rights Maintenance for Intellectual Property Management (Changed) 3821.32.1.4 CRM-IM-IPM-BTX Business Transactions Licensing 3831.32.1.4.1 Rights Consumption (New) 3831.32.1.4.2 CRM-IM-IPM-BTX-PUR License Acquisition 3841.32.1.4.2.1 License Contract Maintenance (Changed) 3841.32.1.4.3 CRM-IM-IPM-BTX-SAL License Sales 3851.32.1.4.3.1 License Contract Maintenance (Changed) 3851.32.1.5 CRM-IM-IPM-RO Royalty Accounting 3861.32.1.5.1 CRM-IM-IPM-RO-ROO Outgoing Royalties 3861.32.1.5.1.1 Outgoing Royalties Settlement Without Differential Billing (New) 3861.32.1.6 CRM-IM-IPM-RIN Rights Inventory Analysis 3881.32.1.6.1 Rights Availability Analysis (Changed) 3881.33 CRM-IPH Pharmaceuticals 390

______________________________________________________________SAP AG xiv


1.33.1 Account Hierarchy Affiliation and Class of Trade (New) 3901.33.2 Contract Management for Life Sciences (Enhanced) 3921.33.3 Products: Pharmaceutical Attributes and NDC (New) 3941.33.4 Time Dependencies for Business Partners (Telco) - New 3961.33.5 CRM-IPH-CB Chargebacks 3971.33.5.1 Chargeback Claims BI Extractors (New) 3971.34 CRM-IT Telecommunications 3981.34.1 Functions in Dispute Management (New for SP02) 3981.34.2 Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management (Enhanced) 3991.34.3 Financial Customer Care for Insurance (Enhanced) 4021.34.4 CRM-IT-CI Billing 4031.34.4.1 Dispute Management (Enhanced) 4031.35 CRM-IU Utilities Industry 4031.35.1 CRM-IU-IC Utilities Industry: Interaction Center 4031.35.1.1 Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management (Enhanced) 4031.35.1.2 Financial Customer Care for Insurance (Enhanced) 4061.36 CRM-MW Middleware 4061.36.1 CRM-MW-MON Monitoring 4071.36.1.1 Data Integrity Manager (Enhanced for SP02) 4071.36.2 CRM-MW-GWI Groupware Integration 4071.36.2.1 Migration of GWI Data from the Java-Based MapBox to the ABAP-Based 4081.37 CRM-CA CRM Cross-Application Components 4081.37.1 Survey Suite (Enhanced) 4081.37.2 Multilevel Categorization (Enhanced) 409

______________________________________________________________SAP AG xv


1 CRM Customer Relationship Management

1.1 Uniform User Interface in CRM (New)

Use

This release note is only relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0.

With the CRM WebClient UI, a uniform and clearly arranged user interface is now available. TheWeb-based user interface has been completely remodeled and simplified following the example of SAPCRM on-demand solution. The user interface has the following advantages:

- Clearly arranged page layout

- Flexible and convenient interface configuration

- Simple and intuitive navigation

- Easy to handle personalization

- Advanced search concept

- Function bars with icons

- Terminology adjusted to the new user interface

- User-centered online help and online tutorials

You can now use functions from all areas of CRM and the most important industries, all in a single userinterface.

Note

SAP GUI is only supported for administrative tasks. The People-Centric UI (PC UI) is no longersupported. For more information, see SAP Note 1118231.

Effects on Customizing

For trouble-free functioning of SAP CRM, you must use transaction HTTP Service Tree Maintenance(SICF) to activate BSP services on the SAP Web Application Server.

You can configure the SAP CRM user interface yourself with the new configuration tool, for example,hide or show fields on pages, rename them or put them in new groups. In the Implementation Guide, useIMG activity UI Framework-> UI Framework Definition -> Maintain Design Layers and/or ConfigureUser Interface.

You can configure business roles in SAP CRM yourself, for example, you can define the navigationframework, the navigation structure, and the role content. In the Implementation Guide, use the followingIMG activity:

- UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> Define Navigation Bar Profile

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 1

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Business Roles -> Define Navigation Frame

- Business Roles -> Define Business Role

You can assign exactly one authorization role to each business role. In the implementation Guide, useIMG activity UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> Define Authorization Role.

You can use the transaction launcher to include external Internet addresses or call different transactions inthe SAP GUI via the SAP Internet Transaction Server (ITS). In the Implementation Guide, use IMGactivity UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> Configure Transaction Launcher.

See also

For more online information about the new user interface, see Jump Start in the Help Center.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 2

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.2 Enterprise Services (Changed)

Use


As of SAP CRM 5.1 SP02, the XI content for enterprise services previously delivered is available in anew namespace, http://sap.com/xi/CRM/SE/Global (SAP CRM ABAP 5.1). The existing XI content hasbeen designated as "deprecated".

Other changes made are as follows:

- All Web service definitions have been renamed, by replacing the prefix "CRMXI" with "CRM". Forexample, CRMXI_BPBASICDATABYCOMQR has been renamedCRM_BPBASICDATABYCOMQR.

- A number of Web service definitions have been renamed altogether:

- CRMXI_CUSTOMERQUOTEACCEPTACKRC -> CRM_CUSTQTACCEPTACKRC

- CRMXI_CUSTOMERQUOTEBYIDQR -> CRM_CUSTQTBYIDQR

- CRMXI_CUSTOMERQUOTECHGRC -> CRM_CUSTQTCHGRC

- CRMXI_CUSTOMERQUOTECRTRC -> CRM_CUSTQTCRTRC

- CRMXI_SRVCONF_CONFCRTRC -> CRM_SRVCONFSRVPROVCRTRC

- Message types have been given a suffix "sync". For example, BusinessPartnerBasicDataByIDQueryhas been renamed BusinessPartnerBasicDataByIDQuery_sync.

1.3 Help Center for SAP CRM (New)

Use


The Help Center for users is now available to you. You can access it from the interface using the link tothe Help Center. Specific information on a certain application can be directly accessed using a helpsymbol in the application. The Help Center offers the following content:

- Jump Start Guide: All the information you need to quickly find your way around the user interface.

- Online-Tutorial: Supplements the jump start guide and gives an overview of the CRM userinterface.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 3

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Tell Me About...: Application overview for all CRM functions, such as sales orders, opportunities,and campaigns.

Note that the Help Center is not available in the E-Commerce applications.

Adjustment of User Documentation

You can adjust the SAP user documentation to be company- and process-specific. In order to do this, usethe authoring-, translation- or administrator environments in the SAP NetWeaver Knowledge Warehouse(KW), with which you can create, translate and manage documentation content.

Prerequisite: You have installed SAP GUI as well as the appropriate components of SAP NetWeaver KWon the computers being used.

You can find information on working with SAP NetWeaver KW in the SAP Help Portal under SAPNetWeaver -> SAP NetWeaver 2004s -> SAP NetWeaver Library -> Power User Guide -> EnterpriseKnowledge Management.

The user documentation was created with XML. Pay attention therefore, to the notes on working withXML content.

You can find information about connecting the user documentation to the CRM system in SAP Note1038204.

1.4 Terminology in CRM (Changed)

Use


The following terms on the new CRM WebClient user interface were changed:

Master Data

Use Current English New English Current German New German

Accounts Address Usage Address Type Adressverwendung Adressart

Accounts Account Corporate Account / Individual Account AccountUnternehmens -Account / Privat-Account

Accounts BP Group Hierarchy Account Hierarchy GeschäftspartnergruppenhierarchieAccount-Hierarchie

Products Vendor Supplier Lieferant (unchanged)

Products Category Hierarchy Product Hierarchy Kategoriehierarchie Produkthierarchie

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 4

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Objects Individual Object Object Individuelles Objekt Objekt

Marketing


All Areas Person Responsible Employee Responsible Verantwortlicher ZuständigerMitarbeiter

ELM Type of Field Separator Delimiter Feldtrennzeichen Trennzeichen

ELM Escape Character Text Qualifier MaskierungszeichenTexterkennungszeichen

Segment Builder Master Group Segmentation Basis MastergruppeSegmentierungsbasis

Segment Builder Segment Type Usage Segmenttyp Verwendung

Segment Builder Segment Category Usage Category Segmentkategorie Verwendungstyp

Sales


Opportunities Phase Sales Stage Phase Verkaufsphase

Contracts Sales Contract (unchanged) Verkaufskontrakt Verkaufsvertrag

Activities Owner Employee Responsible Verantwortlicher ZuständigerMitarbeiter

Service


Service Order Contract Service Contract Vertrag Servicevertrag

Service Order Retroactive Assignment Subsequent Assignments NachträglicheVerknüpfungen Nachträgliche Zuordnungen

Contracts Listing Product List Listung Produktliste

Cross Functions


Business Transactions Document Flow Transaction History Belegfluss Vorgangshistorie

Sales and Distribution,Service SurveyQuestionnaire Survey Fragebogen

All Areas Contact Person Contact Ansprechpartner (unchanged)

All Areas R/3 ECC R/3 ECC

All Areas Administrative Data Administration Administrative Daten Administration

All Areas Organization Organizational Data Organisation Organisationsdaten

All Areas Texts Notes Texte Notizen

All Areas Partner Parties Involved Partner BeteiligtePersonen/Organisationen

Note

For information on terminology changes in condition maintenance, see the release note Terminology inCondition Maintenance (Changed).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 5

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.5 New, Changed and Removed IMG Activities in SAP CRM 5.2

Use

Master Data - Product Catalog

New IMG activities:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Define Catalog VariantIndexing

- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Maintain IMS Serverfor Catalog Indexing

- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Business Add-Ins forProduct Catalog -> Implementation: Indexing New Product Category Information

Master Data - Business Partner

New IMG activity:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Business Partner -> Basic Settings ->Define Profiles.

Transactions

New IMG activity:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Additional Settings -> Assign MarketingUsage Types to Transaction Types

Moved IMG activity:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Assign Amount Allocation Profile toTransaction Type and Item Category can now be found under Transactions -> Additional Settings.

Renamed node and activities:

- The IMG node Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Complaints ->Integration -> Business Add-Ins for Document Referencing is renamed to Transaction Referencing

- The IMG activities under the node Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settingsfor Complaints -> Integration -> Transaction Referencing are renamed:

- Business Add-In: Create Complaints with Reference to External Document is renamed toBAdI: Create Complaint with Reference to External Transaction

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 6

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Define Object Types for Document Reference is renamed to Define Object Types forTransaction Reference

- Assign Business Object Types to Transaction Types is renamed to Assign Business ObjectTypes to Transaction Types

- Business Add-In: Create Document Flow for Subsequent Document Reference is renamed toBAdI: Create Transaction History for Subsequent Transaction Reference

- Define Business Object Type for Subsequent Document Reference is renamed to DefineBusiness Object Type for Subsequent Document Reference

Billing

New IMG section: Billing -> Integration -> Transfer of Billing Documents to Foreign Trade -> Transferto SAP GTS 3.0 and Later Releases -> Transfer of BiIling Data for Intrastat Declarations.

Rebate Processing

New IMG Activities:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Configure Application

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Set Up Rebate Determination ->Assign Maintenance Group for Mass Processing

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> Settlement Profiles-> Define Filters for Cancellation Requirements

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> ConsumableRebate Profiles -> Define Filters for Consumable Value Calculation

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> ConsumableRebate Profiles -> Define Consumable Rebate Profile

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Reason Codes -> Define ReasonCodes

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Reason Codes -> Assign ReasonCodes to Process Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> System Enhancements -> BusinessAdd-Ins -> BAdI: Cancellation Requirements

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> System Enhancements -> BusinessAdd-Ins -> BAdI: Calculation of Consumable Rebate Value

Changed IMG Activities:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Set Up Rebate Determination ->Create Condition Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Define Settlement Document Type

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> Define RebateProfile

Renamed IMG Activities:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 7

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> Define Filtersfor Base Calculation

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> Define Filtersfor Scale Base Calculation

- Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> Define Filtersfor Payment Value Calculation

E-Commerce

New IMG activities:

- Customer Relationship Management -> E-Commerce -> Basic Settings for E-Commerce -> DefineAuthorizations

- Customer Relationship Management -> E-Commerce -> Basic Settings for E-Commerce ->Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for E-Commerce -> BAdI: Additional Search Filter

Entitlement Management

New IMG Activities:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions ->Entitlement Program Types -> Intercompany Related Customizing Setup

- Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions -> Inbound/Outbound Processing -> Inbound Number Range Object Maintenance

- Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions -> Inbound/Outbound Processing -> Outbound Number Range Object Maintenance

- Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> System Enhancements ->Assign Workflow Events to Business Workflow Events

Renamed IMG Activites:

- From : Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions ->Entitlement Program Types -> Assign Pricing Procedure for Automatic Deposit Determination To: Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions ->Entitlement Program Types -> Setup Application Parameters

- From: Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions ->Entitlement Program Types -> Define Document TypesTo: Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions ->Entitlement Program Types -> Define Entitlement-Specific Transaction Categories

Removed IMG Activities:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> System Enhancements ->Maintain Appearance of Selection and Results Screens

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 8

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> System Enhancements ->Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: User Interface Toolbar Enhancements

- Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> System Enhancements ->Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Customer Exits for Serial Number

Basic Functions

New IMG Activities:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Pricing -> Pricing in the BusinessTransaction -> Define Mapping for Condition Types from Application BBP to Application CRM

Effects on Existing Data

1.6 New, Changed and Removed IMG Activities in SAP CRM 2007

Use

This release note is relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0 or from SAP CRM 5.2.

The following IMG activities were moved from Marketing to Trade Promotion Management:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data for TradePromotion Management -> Define Default Buying Pattern Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data for TradePromotion Management -> Assign Planning Account Hierarchy Tree

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data for TradePromotion Management -> Define Product Planning Basis

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Product Assignments -> Assign Product Hierarchies

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data for TradePromotion Management -> Listings and Partner/Product Ranges -> Map Listing Fields

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data for TradePromotion Management -> Listings and Partner/Product Ranges -> Assign Listing Procedures andSet PPR Indicator

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data for TradePromotion Management -> Listings and Partner/Product Ranges -> BAdI: Define Listing Checks

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 9

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data for TradePromotion Management -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Advanced Checks for Additional DateRanges

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Key Figure Planning ->Define Planning Profile Groups

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Spends -> DefineTrade Spends for Values

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Spends -> BAdI:Trade Spends in Marketing Planning

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Condition Maintenance-> Assign Condition Maintenance Group

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Condition Maintenance-> Define Condition Generation

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Condition Maintenance-> Assign Condition Generation Type

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Condition Maintenance-> Check Data Volumes for Condition Generation

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Condition Maintenance-> Define Currency Units for Cross-Order Caps

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Condition Maintenance-> BAdI for Generating Conditions

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Check Data Volume forDeal Generation

Trade Promotion Management - Basic Data

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> DefineStatus Driven Events

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> DefineUplift

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> General Settings -> Define Rates Origin

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Products-> Select Item Category Groups for Display Pallets

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> AddTPM-Specific Fields in Segmentation

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Versions-> Define Version Based on Status

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Versions-> Define Versions User Interface

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 10

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Versions-> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Versioning

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> RulesSetup -> Define Rule Contexts

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> RulesSetup -> Define Rule Events

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> RulesSetup -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Rule Messages

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> RulesSetup -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Critical Change Runs

Trade Promotion Management - Key Figure Planning

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Key Figure Planning ->Settings for Display of BI Key Figures -> Define Key Figure Queries

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Key Figure Planning ->Settings for Display of BI Key Figures -> Map BI Key Figures to List Fields

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Key Figure Planning ->Settings for Display of BI Key Figures -> Maintain Design Layers

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Funds Integration

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Funds Integration -> Define Settings for Funds Integration

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Claims Integration

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Claims Integration -> Maintain Transaction Types for Invoice Claims

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Claims Integration -> Business Add-Ins > BAdI: Data Modifications for Scheduled Claims

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Causals

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Causals -> Define Causal Profiles, Causal Types and Default Values

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Causals -> Assign Causal Profiles for Marketing Planning

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Causals -> Maintain Attributes and Key Values for Causals

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Causals -> Map Key Figures for Causals

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 11

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Causals -> Maintain Customer Fields for Causals

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Trade Spends

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> Define Trade Spends for Values

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> Tiered Growth Rebates -> Define Tiered Growth Rebate Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> Tiered Growth Rebates -> Define Trade Spend Combinations for Tiered GrowthRebates

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> Tiered Growth Rebates -> Define BI Content

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> Tiered Growth Rebates -> Business Add-Ins > BAdI: Performance EvaluationCriteria and Calculation Method

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> Businesss Add-Ins: BAdI: Trade Spends in Marketing Planning

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Promotion Guidelines

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Promotion Guidelines -> Define Parameters

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Promotion Guidelines -> Define Pricing Level

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Promotion Guidelines -> Rule Categories -> Define Rule Sets

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Indirect Relationships

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Indirect Relationships -> Define Business Line Levels

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Overlap Checks

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Overlap Checks -> Define Attributes

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Overlap Checks -> Define Additional Date Ranges for Overlap Checks

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Overlap Checks -> Define Overlapping Trade Promotion Types

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 12

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Overlap Checks -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Overlap Checks

Trade Promotion Management - Agreements

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Agreements -> DefineAttributes for Agreement Overlap Check

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Agreements -> DefineStatuses to Ignore for Overlap Check

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Agreements -> DefinePlanning Transactions for Agreements

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Agreements -> BusinessAdd-Ins -> BAdI: Agreement Overlap Check

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Agreements -> BusinessAdd-Ins -> BAdI: Automatic Agreement Determination

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Agreements -> BusinessAdd-Ins -> BAdI: Agreement Validation

Marketing - Marketing Planning and Campaign Management

Changed IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Basic Data -> Define Types/Objectives/Tactics

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Basic Data -> Define Additional Date Ranges

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> Businesss Add-Ins: BAdI: Trade Spends in Marketing Planning

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Partner Processing -> Assign Partner Determination Procedure

Marketing - Marketing Calendar Enhancements

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Define Field Catalog Attributes for Marketing ProjectDisplay

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Define Selection of Calendar Attributes

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Define Permitted Row Context Attributes

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Define Split Calendar Options

Funds Management

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 13

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Define Fiscal Year Variant

Funds Management - Funds Determination

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Determination -> DefineFund Determination Profiles

Funds Management - Funds Plan and Funds

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Funds Plan and Funds -> DefineFund Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Funds Plan and Funds -> DefineFunds Plan Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Funds Plan and Funds -> DefineExpense Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Funds Plan and Funds -> AssignExpense Types to Fund Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Funds Plan and Funds -> DefineNumber Ranges for Funds Plan

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Funds Plan and Funds -> DefineNumber Ranges for Funds

Funds Management - Fund Usages

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Usage -> Maintain ResidenceTime for Archiving

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Usage -> Define NumberRanges for Fund Usages

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Usage -> Business Add-Ins ->BAdI: Define Archiving Actions for Fund Usages

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Usage -> Business Add-Ins ->BAdI: Define Additional Functions for Fund Usages

Funds Management - Checkbooks

New IMG Activities

Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Checkbooks-> Define Calculated KeyFigures for Funds Checkbook

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Checkbooks -> Define CalculatedKey Figures for Fund Usages Checkbook

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Checkbooks-> BAdI: CalculatedKey Figures

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 14

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Funds Management - Fund Postings

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Postings -> Fund PostingArchiving -> Maintain Residence Time

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Postings -> Fund PostingArchiving -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Archiving Actions for Fund Postings.

Funds Management - Budget Postings

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> Assign FundsManagement AVC Profile

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> FundDetermination -> Assign Fund Determination Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> FundDetermination -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Fund Determination Parameters

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> FundDetermination -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Fund Determination Logic

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> BusinessAdd-Ins -> BAdI: Budget Posting Class Actions

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> BusinessAdd-Ins -> BAdI: Enhancement for New Business Transaction Components

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> BusinessAdd-Ins -> BAdI: Budget Posting Search

Fund Management - Availability Control (AVC)

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Availability Control (AVC) ->Define Availability Control (AVC) Check Rules

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Availability Control (AVC) ->Define Availability Control (AVC) Tolerance Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Availability Control (AVC) ->Define Availability Control (AVC) Authorization Levels

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Availability Control (AVC) ->Define Availability Control (AVC) Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Availability Control (AVC) ->Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Fund Postings and AVC Message Variables

Fund Management - Approvals

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Approvals -> Define ApproverGroups and Thresholds

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 15

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Define Approval Settings ->Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Approval Procedure Definition

Funds Management - Workflow Settings

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Workflow Settings -> ImplementWorkflow Assignment for Funds Management

Fund Management - Accruals

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Accruals -> Define AccrualReference Data Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Accruals -> Define AccrualCalculation Methods

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Accruals -> Define Accrual Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Accruals -> Define SAP SalesVolumes Validity Period

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Accruals -> Integration -> TransferAccrual Documents to Accounting

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Accruals -> Business Add-Ins ->BAdI: Accrual Processes

Fund Management - Batch Processing Framework

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Batch Processing Framework ->Define Batch Processing Framework Component Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Batch Processing Framework ->Define Job Types


- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Workflow Settings -> MaintainStandard Settings for SAP Business Workflow

Transactions - Basic Settings


- Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Define TransactionTypes

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Define Analyzer Viewsfor Transaction Analyzer

Billing (Settlement)

New IMG Activity

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 16

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Billing -> Integration -> Transfer of Billing Documents to Accounting -> Transfer to AccountsReceivable (FI-AR) and Accounts Payable (FI-AP) -> Define Parameters for Prepayment

UI Framework - Technical Role Definition

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> DefineWorking Context Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> DefineCentral Search


- Customer Relationship Management -> UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> DefineNavigation Bar Profile

UI Framework - Portal Integration

New IMG Node

- Customer Relationship Management -> Portal Integration -> Overview

- Customer Relationship Management -> Portal Integration -> Upload Business Role

- Customer Relationship Management -> Portal Integration -> Map Portal Theme to CRM Skin

Business Roles


- Business Roles -> Define Business Role

Partner Channel Management - Market Development Funds

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Partner Channel Management -> Market DevelopmentFunds -> Causals for MDF -> Define Causal Profiles, Causal Types, and Default Values

- Customer Relationship Management -> Partner Channel Management -> Market DevelopmentFunds -> Causals for MDF -> Assign Causal Profiles for Marketing Planning

- Customer Relationship Management -> Partner Channel Management -> Market DevelopmentFunds -> Causals for MDF -> Define Values for MDF Standard Causals

- Customer Relationship Management -> Partner Channel Management -> Market DevelopmentFunds -> Causals for MDF -> Maintain Customer Fields for Causals

Interaction Center WebClient

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Business Transaction ->ERP Sales Order -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Change DDLB Values for Product Proposals

- Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Business Transaction ->ERP Sales Order -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Determine Product Proposal in ERP Sales Order


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 17

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Business Transaction ->Define Business Transaction Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Basic Functions ->Communication Channels -> Define Toolbar Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Customer-Specific SystemModifications -> Define Toolbar Buttons

Usage-Based Service Contract Processing

New IMG Node: Customer Relationship Management -> Usage-Based Service Contract Processing

Workforce Deployment

New IMG Node: Customer Relationship Management -> Workforce Deployment

Master Data

Removed IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Partner/Product Range -> Sort Routines-> Define Sort Routines for Business Partners

- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Partner/Product Range -> Sort Routines-> Define Sort Routines for Products

New IMG Activity

Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Business Partner -> Accounts and Contacts ->Business Add-Ins -> Implementation: Filtering of BP Roles by Authorization Check

Channel Sales for High Tech

The IMG activities for Channel Sales and Channel Sales for High Tech were moved from CustomerRelationship Management -> Channel Sales and Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Sales-> Industry Specific Channel Sales -> Channel Sales for High Tech to:Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> High Tech. This section has beenpartly restructured and includes two new activities:

- Maintain Business Partner Settings

- Assign Business Partner Functions to Business Partner Types

Media - Intellectual Property Management

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Basic Functions -> Pricing -> Define Scale Retroactivity

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Master Data ->Product -> Basic Settings -> Define Characteristics ofIPM IP Check Messages

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Master Data ->Define Rights Templates Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Transactions ->Define User Interface Scenarios

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 18

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Rights and Royalties Dimensions -> Define Rights Maintenance

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Rights Availability Analysis -> CRM WebClient UI -> Define NumberRanges for Rights Availability Requests

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Rights Availability Analysis -> CRM WebClient UI -> Configure RightsAvailability Wizard

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Rights Availability Analysis -> CRM WebClient UI -> Define RightsAvailability Scenarios

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Master Data ->Product -> Settings for Rights Generation -> DefineInheriting Relationship Types for Generation Formulas

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Utilities Industries ->Settings for User Interfaces -> General Functions -> Define Object Hierarchy and ObjectAttributes

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Master Data ->Product -> BAdIs -> Activate Copying of Interlinkages

Moved IMG Activities:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Basic Functions -> Pricing -> BAdI for Additional Quantity-Type Fieldsin Pricing is now found under Pricing ->BAdIs.

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Basic Functions -> Pricing -> BAdI Used to Calculate Additional DataValues is now found under Pricing ->BAdIs.

Removed IMG Activity:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Rights and Royalties Dimensions -> Generate People Centric UI forRights and Royalties Dimensions

Sales Transactions

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Sales Transactions -> DefineProfile for ERP Sales Transactions

-

User Management

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Actions -> Actions in UserManagement -> Create Actions with Wizard

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 19

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Actions -> Actions in UserManagement -> Define Change Actions and Conditions -> Define Action Profiles and Actions

- Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Actions -> Actions in UserManagement -> efine Change Actions and Conditions -> Define Start and Schedule Conditions

- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Business Partner -> Basic Settings ->Define Settings for E-Mail Notifications

1.7 New, Changed and Removed Customizing Activities in SAPCRM 2007 (Enhanced for SP02)

Use


The following IMG activities were moved from Marketing to Trade Promotion Management:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> DefineDefault Buying Pattern Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> AssignPlanning Account Hierarchies

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Products-> Define Product Planning Basis

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> ProductAssignments -> Assign Product Hierarchies

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Listingsand Partner/Product Ranges -> Map Listing Fields

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Listingsand Partner/Product Ranges -> Assign Listing Procedures and Set PPR Indicator

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Listingsand Partner/Product Ranges -> BAdI: Listing Checks

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> BAdI:Advanced Checks for Additional Date Ranges

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 20

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Key Figure Planning ->Define Planning Profile Groups


- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions->Trade Spends -> BAdI: Trade Spends in Marketing Planning

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Condition Maintenance -> Assign Condition Maintenance Group

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Condition Maintenance -> Define Condition Generation

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Condition Maintenance -> Assign Condition Generation Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Condition Maintenance -> Check Data Volumes for Condition Generation

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Condition Maintenance -> Define Currency Units for Cross-Order Caps

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Condition Maintenance -> Business AddIns (BAdIs) -> BAdI for Condition Generation

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Check Data Volume forDeal Generation

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> BAdI: Trade Spends in Marketing Planning

Trade Promotion Management - Basic Data

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> DefineStatus Driven Events

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> DefineUplifts

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data-> DefineRates Origin

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Products-> Select Item Category Groups for Display Pallets

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> AddTPM-Specific Fields in Segmentation

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Versions-> Define Version Based on Status

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Versions-> Define Versions User Interface

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 21

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Versions-> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Versioning

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> RulesSetup -> Define Rule Contexts

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> RulesSetup -> Define Rule Events

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> RulesSetup -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Rule Messages

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> RulesSetup -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Critical Change Runs

-

Trade Promotion Management - Key Figure Planning

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Key Figure Planning ->Settings for Display of BI Key Figures -> Define Key Figure Queries

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Key Figure Planning ->Settings for Display of BI Key Figures -> Map BI Key Figures to List Fields

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Key Figure Planning ->Settings for Display of BI Key Figures -> Maintain Design Layers


- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Key Figure Planning ->Define Parameters for SAP NetWeaver BI Analysis

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Funds Integration

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Funds Integration -> Define Settings for Funds Integration

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Claims Integration

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Claims Integration -> Maintain Transaction Types for Invoice Claims

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Claims Integration -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Data Modifications for ScheduledClaims

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Causals

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Causals -> Define Causal Profiles, Types and Default Values

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 22

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Causals -> Assign Causal Profiles for Marketing Planning

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Causals -> Maintain Attributes and Key Values for Causal Fields

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Causals -> Map Key Figures for Causals

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Causals -> Maintain Customer Fields for Causals

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Trade Spends

New IMG Activities


- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> Tiered Growth Rebates -> Define Tiered Growth Rebate Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> Tiered Growth Rebates -> Define Trade Spend Combinations for Tiered GrowthRebates

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> Tiered Growth Rebates -> Define BI Content

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> Tiered Growth Rebates -> Business Add-Ins > BAdI: Performance EvaluationCriteria and Calculation Method

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Trade Spends -> BAdI: Trade Spends in Marketing Planning

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Promotion Guidelines

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Promotion Guidelines -> Define Parameters

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Promotion Guidelines -> Define Pricing Levels

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Promotion Guidelines -> Define Rule Sets

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Indirect Relationships

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Indirect Relationships -> Define Business Line Levels

Trade Promotion Management - Trade Promotions - Overlap Checks

New IMG Activities

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 23

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Overlap Checks -> Define Attributes

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Overlap Checks -> Define Additional Date Ranges for Overlap Checks

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Overlap Checks -> Define Overlapping Trade Promotion Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions ->Overlap Checks -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Overlap Checks

Trade Promotion Management - Agreements

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Agreements -> DefineAttributes for Agreement Overlap Check

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Agreements -> DefineStatuses to Ignore for Overlap Check

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Agreements -> DefinePlanning Transactions for Agreements

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Agreements -> BusinessAdd-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Agreement Overlap Check

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Agreements -> BusinessAdd-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Automatic Agreement Determination

- Customer Relationship Management -> Trade Promotion Management -> Agreements -> BusinessAdd-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Agreement Validation

Marketing - Marketing Planning and Campaign Management


- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Basic Data -> Define Types/Objectives/Tactics

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Basic Data -> Define Additional Date Ranges

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Partner Processing -> Assign Partner Determination Procedure

Account Planning


- Customer Realtionship Management -> Account Planning -> Key Figure Planning -> DefineParameters for SAP NetWeaver BI Analysis

Marketing - Marketing Planning and Campaign Management - Marketing Calendar

New IMG Activities

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 24

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Define Field Catalog Attributes for Marketing ProjectDisplay

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Define Selection of Calendar Attributes

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Define Permitted Row Context Attributes

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Define Split Calendar Options

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Add KPI to Views in the Marketing Calendar

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Map Input Variable for SAP NetWeaver BI Query

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Define KPI for KPI Grouping in a View

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Define Ranges for KPI Grouping


- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and CampaignManagement -> Marketing Calendar -> Define Views for Marketing Calendar

Marketing - Digital Asset Management


- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Digital Asset Management -> MaintainGeneral Settings in DAM

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Digital Asset Management -> Security andAuthorization Concept -> Security and Authorizations

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Digital Asset Management -> Settings inPortal

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Digital Asset Management -> ConversionService -> Define Converter

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Digital Asset Management -> ConversionService -> Define Server

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Digital Asset Management -> ConversionService -> Assign Additional Information to a File Format

- Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Digital Asset Management -> ConversionService -> Create Parameters for Conversion Service

Claims Management

This node is completely new for CRM 2007.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 25

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Funds Management

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Define Fiscal Year Variant

Funds Management - Funds Determination

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Determination -> DefineFund Determination Profiles

Funds Management - Funds Plan and Funds

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Funds Plan and Funds -> DefineFund Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Funds Plan and Funds -> DefineFunds Plan Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Funds Plan and Funds -> DefineExpense Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Funds Plan and Funds -> AssignExpense Types to Fund Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Funds Plan and Funds -> DefineNumber Ranges for Funds Plans

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Funds Plan and Funds -> DefineNumber Ranges for Funds

Funds Management - Fund Usages

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Usages -> MaintainResidence Time for Archiving

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Usages -> Define NumberRanges for Fund Usages

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Usages -> Business Add-Ins(BAdIs) -> BAdI: Define Archiving Actions for Fund Usages

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Usages-> Business Add-Ins(BAdIs)-> BAdI: Define Additional Functions for Fund Usages

Funds Management - Checkbooks

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Checkbooks-> Define CalculatedKey Figures for Funds Checkbook

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Checkbooks -> Define CalculatedKey Figures for Fund Usages Checkbook

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 26

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Checkbooks-> Business Add-Ins(BAdIs) -> BAdI: Calculated Key Figures

Funds Management - Fund Postings

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Postings -> MaintainResidence Time for Archiving

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Fund Postings -> Business Add-Ins(BAdIs) -> BAdI: Archiving Actions for Fund Postings.

Funds Management - Budget Postings

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> Assign FundsManagement AVC Profile

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> FundDetermination -> Assign Fund Determination Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> FundDetermination -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Fund Determination Parameters

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> FundDetermination -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Fund Determination Logic

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> BusinessAdd-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Budget Posting Class Actions

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> BusinessAdd-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Enhancement for New Business Transaction Components

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Budget Postings -> BusinessAdd-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Budget Posting Search

Funds Management - Availability Control (AVC)

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Availability Control (AVC) ->Define Availability Control (AVC) Check Rules

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Availability Control (AVC) ->Define Availability Control (AVC) Tolerance Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Availability Control (AVC) ->Define Availability Control (AVC) Authorization Levels

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Availability Control (AVC) ->Define Availability Control (AVC) Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Availability Control (AVC) ->Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Fund Postings and AVC Message Variables

Fund Management - Approvals

New IMG Activities

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 27

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Approvals -> Define ApproverGroups and Thresholds

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI:Approval Procedure Definition

Funds Management - Workflow Settings

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Workflow Settings -> ImplementWorkflow Assignment for Funds Management

Fund Management - Accruals

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Accruals -> Define AccrualReference Data Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Accruals -> Define AccrualCalculation Methods

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Accruals -> Define Accrual Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Accruals -> Define SAP ERP SalesVolumes Validity Period

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Accruals -> Transfer AccrualDocuments to Accounting

- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Accruals -> Business Add-Ins(BAdIs)-> BAdI: Accrual Processes

Master Data - Counters and Readings

All IMG activities for counters and readings are grouped into the sub-section Counters and Readings,which you can find in the following sections of the IMG:

- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data (replacing the section Counters)

- Customer Relationship Management -> Usage-Based Service Contract Processing

Basic Functions - Batch Processing Framework

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Batch Processing Framework -> DefineBatch Processing Framework Component Types

- Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Batch Processing Framework -> DefineJob Types


- Customer Relationship Management -> Funds Management -> Workflow Settings -> MaintainStandard Settings for SAP Business Workflow

Transactions - Basic Settings


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 28

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Define TransactionTypes

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Define Analysis Views

Basic Functions - Access Control Engine

Removed IMG Activity

- Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Access Control Engine -> DeliveredACE Rights and Their Uses

Billing (Settlement)

New IMG Activity

- Customer Relationship Management -> Billing -> Integration -> Transfer of Billing Documents toAccounting -> Transfer to Accounts Receivable (FI-AR) and Accounts Payable (FI-AP) -> DefineParameters for Prepayment

UI Framework - Technical Role Definition

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> DefineWorking Context Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> DefineCentral Search

- Customer Relationship Management -> UI Framework -> UI Framework Definition -> BusinessAdd-Ins (BAdIs) -> Define Configuration Access -> BAdI: Configuration Access Determination

New IMG Node

- Customer Relationship Management -> UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> TransactionLauncher


- Customer Relationship Management -> UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> DefineNavigation Bar Profile

- Customer Relationship Management -> UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> DefineParameters

UI Framework - Portal Integration

New IMG Node

- Customer Relationship Management -> Portal Integration -> Overview

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Portal Integration -> Upload Business Role

- Customer Relationship Management -> Portal Integration -> Map Portal Theme to CRM Skin

UI Framework - UI Framework Definition

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 29

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

New IMG Activity

- Customer Relationship Management -> UI Framework -> UI Framework Definition -> WebServices -> Web Service Consumption Tool: Create BOL Objects

Business Roles


- Customer Relationship Management -> Business Roles -> Define Business Role

Partner Channel Management - Basic Settings


- Customer Relationship Management -> Partner Channel Management -> Basic Settings -> AccessControl Engine

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Partner Channel Management -> CRM ACE RightsDelivered for PCM Scenarios

Partner Channel Management - Market Development Funds

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Partner Channel Management -> Market DevelopmentFunds -> Causals for MDF -> Define Causal Profiles, Causal Types, and Default Values

- Customer Relationship Management -> Partner Channel Management -> Market DevelopmentFunds -> Causals for MDF -> Assign Causal Profiles for Marketing Planning

- Customer Relationship Management -> Partner Channel Management -> Market DevelopmentFunds -> Causals for MDF -> Define Values for MDF Standard Causals

- Customer Relationship Management -> Partner Channel Management -> Market DevelopmentFunds -> Causals for MDF -> Maintain Customer Fields for Causals


New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Basic Functions -> ClientSwitch -> Define Work Client Settings

- Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Basic Functions -> ClientSwitch -> Define Client Switch Profile

- Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Business Transaction ->ERP Sales Order -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Change DDLB Values for Product Proposals

- Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Business Transaction ->ERP Sales Order -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Determine Product Proposal in ERP Sales Order


- Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Business Transaction ->Define Business Transaction Profiles

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 30

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Basic Functions ->Communication Channels -> Define Toolbar Profiles

- Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Customer-Specific SystemModifications -> Define Toolbar Buttons

Usage-Based Service Contract Processing

New IMG Node: Customer Relationship Management -> Usage-Based Service Contract Processing

Workforce Deployment

New IMG Node: Customer Relationship Management -> Workforce Deployment

Master Data


- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Partner/Product Range -> Sort Routines-> Define Sort Routines for Business Partners

- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Partner/Product Range -> Sort Routines-> Define Sort Routines for Products

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Business Partner -> Data QualityAdministration

- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Business Partner -> Business Add-Ins ->Implementation: Filtering of BP Roles by Authorization Check

Channel Sales for High Tech

The IMG activities for Channel Sales and Channel Sales for High Tech were moved from CustomerRelationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales and Customer RelationshipManagement -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales -> Industry Specific Channel Sales -> ChannelSales for High Tech to:Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> High Tech. This section has beenpartly restructured.

Media - Intellectual Property Management

New IMG Activities




- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Transactions ->Settings for IPM Transactions -> Define User InterfaceScenarios

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 31

SAP-System______________________________________________________________






- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Utility Industries -> Settingsfor User Interfaces -> General Functions -> Define Object Hierarchy and Object Attributes

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Master Data ->Product -> BAdIs -> BAdI: Activate Copying ofInterlinkages

Moved IMG Activities:



Removed IMG Activity:


Sales Transactions

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Sales Transactions -> DefineProfile for ERP Sales Transactions

User Management

New IMG Activities

- Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Actions -> Actions in UserManagement -> Create Actions with Wizard

- Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Actions -> Actions in UserManagement -> Change Actions and Conditions -> Define Action Profiles and Actions

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 32

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Actions -> Actions in UserManagement -> Change Actions and Conditions -> Define Start and Schedule Conditions

- Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Business Partner -> Basic Settings ->Define Settings for E-Mail Notifications

1.8 CRM-MD Master Data

1.8.1 New, Changed and Removed IMG Activities in SAP CRM 5.1 and SAP CRM5.2

Use


Layout of User Interface (People Centric CRM)

Removed IMG activities: Customer Relationship Management -> Layout of User Interface(People-Centric CRM)

All activities under this node have been removed.

Basic Functions

New IMG activities:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Worklist -> Define Alert Inbox andWorkflow Inbox -> Define Task-Specific Navigation

o Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Worklist -> Define Alert Inbox andWorkflow Inbox -> Define Alert-Specific Navigation

o Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Pricing -> Pricing in the BusinessTransaction -> Define Mapping for Condition Types from Application BBP to Application CRM

Master Data - Organizational Management

New IMG node:

Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Organizational Management -> Assignment of

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 33

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Organizational Units from SAP ECC

All the activities under this node are new. They have been isolated from the activities OrganizationalModel -> Create Organizational Model and -> Change Organizational Model so that you can maintainonly the mapping of the organizational units between SAP ECC and SAP CRM. The organizationalmodel itself can now be maintained in the CRM Web UI. If you have already made settings for a formerrelease, you do not need to make any further changes.

Master Data - Product

New IMG nodes:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Settings for ConfigurableProducts

- The activity Define Settings for Product Models is new.

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Settings for Packages

- The activity Assign Product Roles to Categories is new.

Removed IMG activities:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Settings for Product Type ->Define Product Template for Configurable Products

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Objects -> Specify DisplayOption for Object Structure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Objects -> Define AvailableCatalogs for Object Structure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Objects -> BAdI: IncludeExternal Catalogs for Object Structure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Objects -> Activate MapVisualization of Location

Master Data - Partner/Product Range

Removed IMG activity:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Partner/Product Range -> Assign PPRTypes to PPR Listings


New IMG activity:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Business Partner -> Basic Settings ->Define Profiles.


o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Business Partner -> Basic Settings ->Assign Templates for Content Management Folder to BP Roles


New IMG activities:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 34

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Define Catalog VariantIndexing

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Maintain IMS Serverfor Catalog Indexing

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Business Add-Ins forProduct Catalog -> Implementation: Indexing New Product Category Information

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Define Templates forFolders

Account Planning

New IMG activity:

Customer Relationship Management -> Account Planning -> Product Assignments -> Define ProductPlanning Basis


Customer Relationship Management -> Account Planning -> General Settings -> Define Field Selection

Transactions

New IMG activity:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Additional Settings -> Assign MarketingUsage Types to Transaction Types

Moved IMG activity:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Assign Amount Allocation Profile toTransaction Type and Item Category can now be found under Transactions -> Additional Settings.


o The IMG node Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Complaints ->Integration -> Business Add-Ins for Document Referencing is renamed to Transaction Referencing

o The IMG activities under the node Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions ->Settings for Complaints -> Integration -> Transaction Referencing are renamed:

- Business Add-In: Create Complaints with Reference to External Document is renamed to BAdI:Create Complaint with Reference to External Transaction

- Define Object Types for Document Reference is renamed to Define Object Types for TransactionReference

- Assign Business Object Types to Transaction Types is renamed to Assign Business Object Typesto Transaction Types


- Define Business Object Type for Subsequent Document Reference is renamed to Define BusinessObject Type for Subsequent Transaction Reference

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 35

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Removed sections (for functions not supported in this release):

Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Service Processes -> Settings forService Resource Planning

IMG activity moved: Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for ProductService Letters -> Define Object Reference Profile can now be found under Transactions -> BasicSettings.

Grantor Program Management

New IMG activities:

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Program Management -> General Settings -> Define Program Profile

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Program Management -> General Settings -> Define Availability ControlProfile

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Program Management -> General Settings -> Define Tolerance Profile

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Change Process Management -> Define Input Field Control

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Change Process Management -> Define Change Processes

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Change Process Management -> Customer Enhancements forChange Process Management

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Change Process Management -> BAdI: Customer Enhancementsfor Web Requests

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Basic Functions for Grantor Processing

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Financial Transactions -> Define Financial Execution Type

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Financial Transactions -> Pricing -> Define Value Type

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Financial Transactions -> Define Billing Plan

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Actions in Grantor Processing

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Web Requests for Grantor Management

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 36

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Customer Enhancements for GrantorAgreement

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Customer Enhancements for GrantorApplication

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Customer Enhancements for GrantorClaim

Changed IMG activities

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Transactions in Grantor Processing

Removed IMG activities

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Program Management -> Content Management

Case Management

New IMG activities:

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Process Partners -> BAdI: ReassignBusiness Partners in Linked Objects

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Basic Settings -> Define Search Scenario

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Basic Settings -> Define Case ClosingProfile

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Basic Settings -> BAdI: Define AdditionalTasks for Case Closing Profile

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Archiving-> CRM Data Archiving Process

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Archiving-> Display Archived Case Data

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Archiving-> BAdIs for Case Archiving -> BAdI: Define Checks Prior to Case Archiving

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Archiving-> BAdIs for Case Archiving -> BAdI: Archive Case Table Entries

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Archiving-> BAdIs for Case Archiving -> BAdI: Delete Case Table Entries from the Database

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Special Settings-> BAdI: BAPIs for Case Parameters -> BAdI: Change BAPI Parameters

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Special Settings-> BAdI: BAPIs for Case Parameters -> BAdI: BAPI Change Case - Change Import Parameters

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 37

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Special Settings-> BAdI: BAPIs for Case Parameters -> BAdI: BAPI Create Case - Change Import Parameters

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> Case Import and Export with XI

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> Monitor XI Case Exports

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> Manually Export Cases

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Export Case XI

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Import Case XI

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Map XI Case Export

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Map XI Case Import

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Export Case During Save

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Export Case at Business PartnerUpdate

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Export Case at Postal Code Update

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> Case Management CustomerEnhancements in XI

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> ACEImplementation for Case Management (Note: This activity describes how the delivered sample ACEimplementation has been configured in case you want to create your own ACE implementation.)


The following BAdIs were removed under Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management ->Extended Customizing -> Special Settings -> Define Processes -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs):

Business Add-In: Data Transfer When Creating a Case

Business Add-In: Filling Customer-Specific Dropdown Lists

Business Add-In: Copying Cases

BAdI: Attributes for Links in Case Record

BAdI: Process Control in Case Management

BAdI: Process Control for Case Notes

BAdI: Process Control of Derived Case Management Applications

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 38

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

BAdI: Enhancement for BSP Case Framework

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Special Settings-> Create Profiles -> Notes About the Function Profile and Terminology Profile

All of the informational nodes were removed under Customer Relationship Management -> CaseManagement -> Integration in the User Interface (People-Centric UI).

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Special Settings-> Create Profiles - > Assign Profile for Document Templates to a Case Type

Billing

New IMG activity: Customer Relationship Management -> Billing -> Intercompany Billing -> DetermineSales Area Data for Determination of Invoice Currency


Usage-Based Billing

This section has been removed since usage-based billing is not supported in this release.


Customer Relationship Management -> E-Commerce -> Basic Settings for E-Commerce -> BusinessAdd-Ins (BAdIs) for E-Selling -> BAdI: Change Target System for Calling Up Availability Check inERP

Interaction Center WinClient, and Interaction Center WebClient 2005

These sections have been removed.

Prior to SAP CRM 5.1, Interaction Center WebClient 2005 section was Interaction Center WebClient.


This section is new.

As of Service Pack 02 a new configuration activity was added under Interaction Center WebClient ->Basic Functions -> Communication Channels -> Configure E-Mail for SAPconnect.

Marketing Planning and Campaign Management

Changed IMG activities:

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management ->Key Figure Planning -> Version Management -> Define Versions

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management ->Key Figure Planning -> Version Management -> Define Version for System Status

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 39

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management ->Key Figure Planning -> Version Management -> Define Version for User Status

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> System Landscape -> Activate SAP NetWeaver BI Update


Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Key Figure Planning -> Define Parameters for BW Analyses

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Key Figure Planning -> Assign Success Key Figures to Campaign Type and Objective

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> General Settings -> Define Field Assignment for Microsoft Project

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> General Settings -> Define User Settings

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Marketing Calendar -> Define Search Tables

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Marketing Calendar -> Define Search Criteria

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Marketing Calendar -> Assign Search Criteria

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Marketing Calendar -> Define Field Settings for Table View

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Marketing Calendar -> Business Add-Ins -> Extend Standard Functions in Query for Calendar

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> User Interface Settings (all activities)

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Personalized Mail -> Maintain Print Profile

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Personalized Mail -> Define Status Profile for User Status

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Additional Fields and Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Marketing Planning -> Define Additional Fields:Set Types

IPM Solution Management


SAP Implementation Guide -> Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions ->Media -> Intellectual Property Management -> Rights and Royalties Dimensions -> Generate PeopleCentric UI for Rights and Royalties Dimensions

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 40

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Telecommunications

New IMG node:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Telecommunications ->Dispute Management

Hi-Tech

Moved

The entire node under Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales ->Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Channel Sales has been moved and renamed to CustomerRelationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> High Tech. Transactions being used incommon with Pharma have been copied to Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-SpecificSolutions -> Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals Industry.

Pharma

New:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Incompleteness Procedure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Incompleteness Procedure -> Define Incompleteness Procedure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Evaluation and Calculation Profiles -> Define Profiles

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Evaluation and Calculation Profiles -> Assign Attributes to Profiles

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs Evaluationand Calculation Profiles -> Maintain Profile Attribute Values

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Authorizations

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Authorizations -> Define Authorization Group

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 41

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance -> Define Condition Generation

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance -> Assign Condition Maintenance Group

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance -> Conflict Resolution

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance -> Activate Staging and History

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance -> Define Condition History Table

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance -> Activate History for Usage and Condition Type

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Determination of Incentive Programs -> Determine Incentive Program in Contracts

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Enhancements for Eligibility Rules

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Enhancements for Eligibility Rules -> Business Add-In: Implement Data Supply

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Enhancements for Eligibility Rules -> Enhance Rule Attribute Structures

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Enhancements -> Business Add-In: Authorization Check

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ProductAssignments -> Assign Product Hierarchy

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargebacks and Sales Tracking-> Entitlement Document -> Maintain Relevancy for Claim Document Creation

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargebacks and Sales Tracking

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 42

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

-> Reconciliation -> Assign Outbound EDI - NWDA Codes

New Textual Nodes (no activity, only reference to the actual activity):

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> TextManagement - Define Text Objects and Text Types

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->TextManagement -> Define Text Determination Procedure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> StatusProfile -> Change User Status Profile

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Notification Manager ->Maintain Condition Type for Notification

Renamed:

o Industry-Specific Solutions -> Pharmaceuticals -> Master Data is renamed to CustomerRelationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals Industry->Field Sales

Moved:

o Activate Pharma-Specific Applications has been moved from under Industry-Specific Solutions ->Pharmaceuticals -> Master Data to Customer Relationship Management -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry->

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Channel Sales for Pharma Industry

All nodes under Channel Sales for Pharma Industry that are still being used have been moved toCustomer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales -> BasicFunctions -> Configure Business Rules has been moved to Customer Relationship Management ->Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for LifeSciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> Configure Business Rules

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> ConfigureBusiness Rules -> Configure Schema Access

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> ConfigureBusiness Rules -> Configure Prerequisites for Process Step

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> Configure

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 43

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Business Rules -> Validation Classes/-Bits

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> ConfigureBusiness Rules ->Configure Reconciliation-/Duplicate Check Rules -> Maintain Field Groups

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> ConfigureBusiness Rules ->Configure Reconciliation-/Duplicate Check Rules -> Assign Field Groups to SystemSteps

o Activities under the Customer Relationship Management->Channel Management-> Channel Sales- > Industry-Specific Channel Sales ->Chargeback have been moved to Customer RelationshipManagement -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals Industry -> ContractManagement for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Channel Sales for Pharma Industry -> Settings for Claim ContractClaim Contracts has been renamed and all activities under it, moved to

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts -> Maintain Relevancies for Contracts-> Maintain Transaction Type Mapping

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts -> Maintain Relevancies for Contracts-> Maintain Partner Function Mapping

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts -> Maintain Relevancies for Contracts-> Maintain Condition Type Mapping

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts -> Maintain Relevancies for Contracts-> Maintain Date Type Mapping

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts -> Maintain Relevancies for Contracts-> Maintain Status Mapping

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts -> Enhancements -> BAdI: CMSExtract Preparation

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Chargebacks -> Business Logic Enhancements is moved to CustomerRelationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals Industry ->Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> Enhancements forBusiness Logic Flow

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Chargeback -> Map Additional Transaction Types is moved to

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 44

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> MapAdditional Transaction Types

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Chargeback -> Claim Processing -> Unit of Measurement SelectionMethod is renamed and moved to Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions ->Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback andSales Tracking -> Selection Method -> Selection Method for Unit of Measure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Chargeback -> Claim Processing -> Contract Selection Method ismoved to Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Selection Method -> ContractSelection Method

Removed:

o Customer Relationship Management->Channel Management-> Industry-Specific Channel Sales->Contracts and Chargeback for the Pharmaceutical Industry has been removed.

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Chargebacks ->Duplicate Check -> Maintain Fieldgroups

Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - > Industry-SpecificChannel Sales -> Chargebacks -> Duplicate Check -> Maintain Duplicate Check Rules

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Chargebacks ->Enhancement -> User Interface Enhancements ->Configure Selection Screens for Chargeback

Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - > Industry-SpecificChannel Sales -> Chargebacks ->Enhancement -> User Interface Enhancements -> Maintain screen labelsfor Chargeback

Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - > Industry-SpecificChannel Sales -> Chargebacks ->Enhancement -> User Interface Enhancements -> Configure Headergrid display for Chargeback

Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - > Industry-SpecificChannel Sales -> Chargebacks ->Enhancement -> User Interface Enhancements -> Configure Claim GridDisplay for Chargeback

Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - > Industry-SpecificChannel Sales -> Chargebacks ->Enhancement -> User Interface Enhancements -> ToolbarEnhancements

Renamed nodes and activities:

o The IMG node Customer Relationship Management -> E-Commerce is renamed to Web Channel

o The IMG node Customer Relationship Management -> E-Commerce -> E-Selling is renamed toCustomer Relationship Management -> Web Channel -> E-Commerce

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 45

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

o The IMG node Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management is renamed toCustomer Relationship Management -> Partner Channel Management

CRM Web Channel

New IMG activities:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Web Channel -> Basic Settings -> Define Authorizations

o Customer Relationship Management -> Web Channel -> Basic Settings -> Business Add-Ins(BAdIs) for Web Channel -> BAdI: Additional Search Filter

Rebate Processing

New IMG Activities:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Configure Application

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Set Up Rebate Determination ->Assign Maintenance Group for Mass Processing

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> SettlementProfiles -> Define Filters for Cancellation Requirements

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> ConsumableRebate Profiles -> Define Filters for Consumable Value Calculation

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> ConsumableRebate Profiles -> Define Consumable Rebate Profile

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Reason Codes -> Define ReasonCodes

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Reason Codes -> Assign ReasonCodes to Process Types

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> System Enhancements -> BusinessAdd-Ins -> BAdI: Cancellation Requirements

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> System Enhancements -> BusinessAdd-Ins -> BAdI: Calculation of Consumable Rebate Value


o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Set Up Rebate Determination ->Create Condition Types

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> SettlementProfiles -> Define Settlement Document Type

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> Define RebateProfile


o From: Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> DefineBase Calculation

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 46

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

To: Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> Define Filtersfor Base Calculation

o From: Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> DefineScale Base Calculation

To: Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> Define Filtersfor Scale Base Calculation

o From: Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> DefinePayment Value Calculation

To: Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> Define Filtersfor Payment Value Calculation


New IMG Activities:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions ->Entitlement Program Types -> Intercompany Related Customizing Setup

o Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions -> Inbound/Outbound Processing -> Inbound Number Range Object Maintenance

o Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions -> Inbound/Outbound Processing -> Outbound Number Range Object Maintenance

o Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> System Enhancements ->Assign Logical Events to Business Workflow Events


o From : Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions ->Entitlement Program Types -> Assign Pricing Procedure for Automatic Deposit Determination

To: Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions -> EntitlementProgram Types -> Setup Application Parameters

o From: Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions ->Entitlement Program Types -> Define Document Types

To: Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions -> EntitlementProgram Types -> Define Entitlement-Specific Transaction Categories


o Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> System Enhancements ->Maintain Appearance of Selection and Results Screens

o Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> System Enhancements ->Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: User Interface Toolbar Enhancements

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 47

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.8.2 CRM-MD-BP Business Partners

1.8.2.1 Account Life Cycle (New)

Use


You can use a life cycle stage to record the different stages of an account as it progresses through its lifecycle, with each stage representing a different view at a particular point in time. For example, an accountmight start off as a potential, move on to an intermediate stage as a prospect, before finally becoming acustomer.

A life cycle stage is closely related to a role. However, an account can have multiple roles at the sametime, whereas a life cycle stage is a specific status at a particular point in time. Technically, a life cyclestage is implemented as a role within a role exclusion group, which serves to define the roles whichcannot be assigned to an account at the same time, but only as a sequence.

The life cycle stage can be selected in the account header and made available as a search criterion. It isdelivered as hidden function and has to be activated in the configuration tool.


Define Account Life Cycle, Stages, and Sequence

You can specify the initial stages which can be set when an account is created, and the varioussubsequent life cycle stages which are allowed. To do this, choose Cross-Application Components ->Business Partner -> Basic Settings -> Business Partner Roles -> Define BP Role ExclusionGroups.

- A business partner role exclusion group specifies the roles that may not be assigned to a businesspartner at the same time. You have to create a role exclusion group for the account life cycle.

- You assign the relevant roles to the exclusion group. These are the life cycle stages.

- You define the transitions between the roles to establish a permitted sequence of life cycle stages. Inthis way, you can also prevent an account from returning to a previous stage.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 48

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Define Life Cycle Stage Views

You can define views for each life cycle stage. This enables you to specify which fields are displayedwithin the header for each stage, and what types of field they are (editable, read-only, or mandatory).

- You can make field modifications using the BAdI for Configuring Views.

- You can attach or detach assignment blocks dependent on specified criteria using the BAdI forConfiguring Assignments.

- You can preassign default values to fields at the header level of the account using the BAdI forSetting Attribute Defaults.

1.8.2.2 Account Management Functions (New)

Use


Account Classification

An account classification enables you to classify accounts using freely configurable criteria. This isparticularly useful for large companies where, for example, different business units can be classifiedbased on different criteria.

For a certain combination of country, sales organization, and business unit, for example, the attribute rolehas the one value, and for another combination of the same criteria, a different value. A company couldbe, for example, a customer in the business unit "Automation", but a competitor in the business unit"Mobile Phones".

The function is available as a separate assignment block on the Account overview page and can beintegrated as a search criterion in the search function.It is also integrated in SAP NetWeaver BI and enables reporting to be performed based on theclassification.

Customizing

The criteria you require can be flexibly combined. Each classification category consists of a maximum offive criteria, and any number of attributes.You define these in the Customizing activity Define Classification. Also see Note 1045146.

Account Plans

The Account Plans assignment block has been integrated in the corporate accounts overview page. Itdisplays all accounts plans available for the account, regardless of time period and status. They are sortedby planning period, with the most recent first.

You can create new account plans, and edit and delete existing account plans.

The assignment block is delivered as a hidden function for individual accounts and groups.

Buying Center

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 49

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

A buying center, representing contacts and contact relationships as already available in opportunitymangement, can now be created directly for accounts. Unlike opportunities, however, more than onebuying center can be created for an account:

- The buying center can be used as a basis for creating this data in the opportunity.

- The buying center in an opportunity can be modified without this affecting the account buyingcenter.

- The buying center in an opportunity can be saved as an account buying center.

Using the assignment block Buying Center on the Account page, you can create a buying center for anyrelated sales organization. Each specific buying center contains the contacts related to the account, withtheir respective function or functions:

- Each contact can be described in more detail by a selection of characteristics and values.

- Each contact can have relationships with other contacts involved in the same buying center.

- The relationships between contacts can be described in more detail by a selection of characteristicsand values.

The relationships between contacts can be displayed and edited in a graphical view.

Copying Nodes Between Account Hierarchies

Using a copy function, you can copy and paste or cut and paste hierarchy nodes between hierarchies. Thismeans that you are able to quickly reflect changes to your organizational structure, and have the means todeal with situations such as mergers and acquisitions.

You can copy and paste or cut and paste:

- Hierarchy nodes with all related accounts from the hierarchy you are working in to another

- Cut and paste hierarchy nodes with the category "Pricing" with all related accounts and pricingconditions to another hierarchy

You can copy hierarchy nodes from either the overview page or edit page by clicking Copy To. Thisopens a dialog box in which you can select the appropriate target hierarchy. After selecting the correcttarget hierarchy, you navigate to a screen which displays both the source and target hierarchy. You selectthe relevant nodes in the source hierarchy and copy and paste or cut and paste them to the relevant pointin the target hierarchy.

1.8.2.3 Internet User in Account (new)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 50

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You can now create and maintain Internet users in the Account. Previously, you assigned the roleInternet User to a user in the business partner transaction, in your backend SAP CRM system. Thisfunction has been moved ito the Account data maintenance in the new user interface.

1.8.2.4 Billing Account Hierarchies (New)

Use


You can structure accounts for billing. You do so by sorting accounts in a hierarchy. You can assign morethan one subordinate account to an account, which you can then assign to sub-accounts.

You can use this to split enterprises into several sub-accounts (for example, by regional organizations orsubsidiaries). For example, you can insert separate accounts (with different addresses) for billing andservice provision into the hierarchy.

This function is primarily aimed at customers in service industries, such as the telecommunicationsindustry, where it is normal for enterprises to deliver different services to different physical addresses orlocations for the same customer. Similarly, it is possible to perform differentiated billing by enterprisearea.


You create roles for billing account hierarchies in Customizing for Customer Relationship Managementunder Industry-Specific Solutions -> Telecommunications -> Master Data -> Define Customizing Rolesfor Billing Account Hierarchies.

1.8.2.5 Rule-Based Assignment of Employees (New)

Use


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 51

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can assign employees to accounts automatically based on a set of rules, which can be freely defined.These rules could, for example, be based on geography, such as country or region, or classification, suchas account role or industry. They enable you to assign employees with different relationship types,together with the relevant partner functions and sales areas. Similarly, they can be used to replaceexisting employee relationships with the necessary data.

You set up the rules you require using the rule modeler. A new context, "Account and ContactManagement", is available for this purpose.

When assigning employees automatically based on rules, you have two options:

- You can trigger rule processing directly when working with an account. This calls a fixed rulepolicy, which has already been customized. The proposed employee assignments are created directlyand shown in the Relationships assignment block. You can accept the assignments by saving yourdata.Note that you do not have the option of selecting the relevant rule policy, as is the case in otherareas which use the rule modeler, such as lead distribution.

- You can assign employees to a selection of accounts using the reportCRM_BUPA_ASSIGN_EMPLOYEE. The report can be scheduled to run as frequently as requiredand enables you to ensure employee assignments are up-to-date. It does the following:

- Deletes existing relationships with the relevant categories, including partner function and salesarea, where only one assignment is allowed.

- Creates new relationships, including partner function and sales area, based on the list returnedby the rule engine. The Standard indicator is set where applicable.

You also have the option of specifically excluding accounts from assignment. The Excluded indicator isdelivered as a hidden field, which can be activated for specific user roles, such as the administrator.


Before you can create rule policies using the rule modeler, make the necessary settings in Customizingfor Customer Relationship Management, by choosing Master Data -> Business Partner -> Accounts and Contacts -> Rule-Based Assignment of Employees.

1.8.2.6 Business Partner Fields (New)

Use


The following fields are available for service parts management in the sales and shipping data on theAccount page:

- Letter of Credit Required

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 52

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

This field indicates that business transactions involving the account in question require a letter ofcredit (LoC).The field is evaluated in order processing and passed to Global Trade Services (GTS). A check ismade during clearance as to whether a letter of credit is required, and if so whether it exists andwhether the conditions specified in it are met.See also Integration of Letters of Credit in the Sales Order.

- Maximum Number of Partial DeliveriesThe Partial Delivery Allowed indicator currently available in the account sales data has beenenhanced by a numeric field indicating the maximum number of partial deliveries allowed to satisfythe order quantity for an item. This value is defaulted in the sales order from the ship-to party andcan be overwritten.The maximum number controls the following:

- The deliveries from each facility independently: If an item is shipped, for example, from threedifferent locations, and the maximum number is two, this could result in six shipments for theitem. The overall limit of two is only met when the item is shipped from one location.

- The number of deliveries in SAP ECC: When the delivery is passed to warehousemanagement, the warehouse is not allowed to perform further splits.

SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence

To enable the new sales and shipping data to be integrated in SAP NetWeaver BI, the existing extractorshave each been extended by a new attribute. Two new InfoObjects have been created and added to theexisting InfoObject 0CRM_BP_SAL, which contains the sales-area-dependent business partner data:

- Characteristic: 0CRM_LOCF (Letter of Credit Required)

- Key Figure: 0CRM_BP_SAL (Max. Number of Deliveries)

Similarly, the transfer rules between each of the DataSources and the relevant InfoSource have beenextended.The relevant business content is available as of BI Content Release 7.03, support package 05.

Effects on Data Transfer

The Maximum Number of Partial Deliveries field is exchanged between SAP ECC and SAP CRM.The data exchange with SAP ECC is available for this field as of ERP 2005, but is not supported inreleases prior to this.

Since the Maximum Number of Partial Deliveries field is already available in SAP ECC, you must runthe report CRM_BUPA_ANTLF_ADD after upgrading to download the contents of this field to SAPCRM.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 53

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.8.2.7 Data Quality Administration (New for SP02)

Use


The data quality administration framework provides you with a set of tasks designed to eliminateduplication of data records and ensure a consistently high standard of data. The functions are available inthe business partner area, and integrate the data cleansing functions already available in earlier releases.

Data quality administration provides the following types of validation:

- Duplicate check as a technically integrated solution, including duplicate identification and duplicatemerge, using SAP software or a third-party add-on.

- Duplicate check by a service provider (agency), including export of data records, upload of results,and post-processing of results (merge).

- External postal address validation (syntax validation) using an external service provider, with exportof data records and upload of results, as above.

- Content validation for relocation and necrology using a service provider (agency), with export ofdata records and upload of results, as above.

Effects on System Administration

Data quality administration is delivered as a hidden function and has to be integrated into the role youwant to use. You do this in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management under UIFramework -> Technical Role Definition.


A number of standard task types are delivered, which have to be adjusted to meet your requirements. Youcan make the necessary settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management under Master Data -> Business Partner -> Data Quality Administration.

1.8.2.8 Account Fact Sheet: BI 7.x Templates (Enhanced for SP02)

Use


The integration of BI reports into the CRM WebClient UI and therefore the account fact sheet is nolonger restricted to BI 3.x templates, but now also includes BI 7.x templates.

BI 7.x templates are executed by the Java runtime environment and were introduced with NetWeaver2004s. Reports that have been migrated to BI 7.x templates are stored in the same namespace aspreviously.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 54

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

To use 7.x templates in the account fact sheet, you need to do the following:

1. In Customizing, you define the BI report with a report ID and the BI template 7.x, under CustomerRelationship Management -> UI Framework -> UI Framework Definition -> -> Display SAPNetWeaver BI Reports in CRM.

2. In configuration, you can specify the report ID and the additional parameters to be used for filteringpurposes.You do this in the BSP WD Workbench (transaction BSP_WD_CMPWB) for the componentBSP_DLC_FS (BP_ACCOUNT_FS).

1.8.2.9 Business Partners: Qualification Requirements (New for SP02)

Use

This release note is relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.2.

Using qualification requirements, you can specify the qualifications a business partner requires anemployee to have to perform a certain task. Qualification requirements are used in service resourceplanning to find employees who are suitably qualified to perform a particular service.

The Qualification Requirements assignment block is available for business partners with the Sold-To role.


The Qualification Requirements assignment block is available in the configuration tool as a hiddenassignment block.


You make the Customizing settings required for using qualifications under Customer RelationshipManagement -> Workforce Deployment -> General Settings for Service Resource Planning ->Qualifications.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 55

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.8.2.10 Authorization Object CRM_BPROLE (New)

Use


You can use the new authorization object CRM_BPROLE (CRM Business Partner: BP Roles) instead ofthe object B_BUPA_RLT (Business Partner: BP Roles) to check a user's authorization for working withroles in the CRM WebClient UI.

The authorization object CRM_BPROLE and authorization check have been adapted to the CRMWebClient UI. It checks whether a user is allowed to assign a certain role and which activities arepermitted. This means, for example, that if a user is not allowed to display a certain role, they are also notable enter it as a search parameter in the search, nor can they see that it is assigned when displaying thebusiness partner concerned.

Unlike B_BUPA_RLT, the authorization object CRM_BPROLE provides the following:

- Check for the deletion activity

- Only updated BP roles can be specified for the BP Role field in the authorization object

1.8.2.11 CRM WebClient UI for IS-M Processes in Interaction Center

Use


As of release 7.0, certain IS-M-specific processes now offer a UI based on the CRM WebClient in theCRM Interaction Center. The following IS-M-specific processes have been affected, with the changeslisted below:

Business Partner Maintenance

You maintain the media-specific roles Sales Customer, Retailer and Media Customer in the Roles table atthe bottom of the edit page of the Sales Area Data assignment block. This table is visible only ifmedia-specific roles are defined in Customizing.

(These roles are not to be maintained in the Roles assignment block on the overview page, as they dependon the sales area).

Note: You can maintain roles in this table only after you have specified attributes (for example, Billing ->Customer Pricing Procedure) for a sales area. A sales area assignment without attributes cannot be

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 56

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

created.

Account Identification

In the Account Identification screen, media -specific enhancements have been made to search for businesspartners. On the right hand side of the search screen, media -specific selection criteria have been created.

The following search criteria have been added for advertising management:

- Advertising Order

- Advertising Billing Document

- Advertising Box Number

- Publication (this is visible only if BAdI CRM_ICWC_ISM_FILTER_BPSEARCH is implemented)

The following search criteria have been added for sales and distribution:

- Subscription Order

- Subscription Billing Document

- Subscription Reference Document

- Publication

The search result is displayed as usual in the lower part of the search screen.

Order Lists from the IS-M Back End

You use the Transaction Launcher, a new tool in this UI, to access ERP-based advertising or subscriptiondata. Methods of BOR object types as well as BSP applications can be called this way.

You can use the following methods of the BOR object type BUSISMCIC to access Media data in ERP:

- ShowMSDOrderList: interactive list of subscription orders

- ShowMAMOrderList: interactive list of advertising orders

- ShowBPOverview: access to BP-related data as used in the ERP Interaction Center in theapplication and/or navigation area.

You can perform address changes with method AddressChangeWithDialog of object type BUSISM007.

Order Creation with Reference to an IS-M Campaign

The BSP applications ISMCAMPAIGNPICK and ISMSD_SOCREATE for creating advertising orsubscription orders have been enhanced so that they can be used in the Interaction Center WebClient.

Maintenance of IS-M-Specific Data for CRM Campaigns

The BSP application ISMCAMPAIGNMGNT for maintaining the media-specific data for CRMmarketing campaigns has been enhanced so that it can be used in the Interaction Center WebClient.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 57

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You can use the activity Define BP Roles to define media-specific roles with the role categories ISM000(Sales Customer), ISM001 (Retailer) or ISM020 (Media Customer).

If an additional filtering of accounts (for example, by publication) is required, you can implement BAdICRM_ICWC_ISM_FILTER_BPSEARCH (in enhancement spotCRM_ICWC_ISM_FILTER_BPSEARCH).

1.8.3 CRM-MD-PRO Products

1.8.3.1 Up-Selling and Cross-Selling via Interlinkages (New)

Use


You can now define up-selling and cross-selling products using interlinkage maintenance. This featurecan be used as an alternative to the definition of cross-selling and up-selling products in the Marketingapplication.

Maintaining up-selling and cross-selling products via interlinkage maintenance has the followingfeatures:

- Maintenance is product related and there is no complex integration to marketing and analytics

- Complex qualifying rules are possible, including the use of BRF events

- Rules to propagate configuration from one product to another are available

- You can set up up-selling from a single rate plan to a whole package while preserving relevant data(configuration, IBase etc.)

Please note, the up-selling and cross-selling via interlinkages functions are not available in the CRM WebChannel Web shop.

See also

For more information, see Packages and Products with Dependent Components and Interlinkage Types.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 58

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.8.3.2 Package Group Maintenance (Enhanced)

Use


You can maintain groups for use in packages directly in the CRM application. Previously, you could onlymaintain the groups in Customizing.

You use groups to structure products within packages. For example, you want to create a package ofproducts to sell in your provider Web shop. The package should contain one rate plan, nine mobilephones, and two types of handsets. You want to display the products so that the rate plans, the mobilephones, and the handsets are displayed separately from one another.

You create three separate groups called rate plan, mobile phones, and handsets. In package maintenanceyou assign these nodes to the package hierarchy and assign the various products accordingly under thesenodes.

In the provider Web shop the products are then shown in their correct groupings, so the customer has abetter overview of the products involved in the package.

1.8.3.3 Interlinkage Maintenance User Interface (New)

Use


The interlinkage maintenance UI has been enhanced to create an improved overview of the variousmaintenance processes, ensuring easier and quicker maintenance for packages and products withdependent components. The following features have been included in the new UI:

- Sales Component Maintenance screen

- Hierarchical display of package and components. You can set the sequence of the hierarchy,and the sequence defined at design time will be shown at run time. The hierarchy has threeelements, regular product, group nodes, and products in a group.

- Grouping is displayed in the hierarchy, with the group products being available later for thecustomer's selection

- Optional flag for products. Meaning a customer can later deselect a product.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 59

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Validity period for products

- Price Level field. This is an additional criterion which can later be used for pricedetermination.

- Prerequisite Product field, used to denote which product must be selected, before thisproduct can be chosen. You can also enter a product group here meaning that any product ofthis group must be selected.

- Language-dependent explanation texts field

- Dependent Components Maintenance screen

- Hierarchical display of package and components. You can set the sequence of the hierarchy,and his sequence will be defined at run time. The hierarchy has three elements, regularproduct, group nodes, and products in a group.

- Grouping is displayed in the hierarchy, with the group products being available later for thecustomer's selection


- BRF Event fields to denote BRF events which must return "true" as a condition. The BRFevents can contain formulas which access the configuration result, or any other type of datasuch as the business partner.

- Process Type field, to denote which type of process, for example contract change, or ordercreate, should be triggered when the product is selected.


- Value Propagation table to enable characteristic copying from superordinate to subordinateproducts

- Generation Quantity assignment block to determine the number of dependent products whichare generated

- Rate Plan Combinations Maintenance screen

- Rate Plan ID assignment to a combined rate plan

- Up-Selling Maintenance screen

- Target product display


- BRF Event fields to denote the complex configuration conditions, and configuration checkresult


- Value Propagation and Product Selection table to enable characteristic copying fromsuperordinate to subordinate products


- Cross-Selling Maintenance Screen

- Target product display

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 60

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


- BRF Event fields to denote the complex configuration conditions, and configuration checkresult


- Generation Quantity assignment block to determine the number of dependent products whichare generated


See also

For more information, see Up-Selling and Cross-Selling via Interlinkages, Packages and Products withDependent Components, and Intelinkage Types.

1.8.3.4 Interlinkage Types (Enhanced)

Use


You can create product packages using new interlinkage types. You use packages and products withdependent components to sell groups of products to customers in certain industries. For example, in thetelecommunications industry, it makes sense to sell a rate plan with a mobile phone. You use theseseparate products to create a package and sell this as a whole to your customers. You model packages andproducts with dependent components using interlinkage types. The following interlinkage types areavailable to you for this product modeling:

- Sales components

- Dependent components

- Rate plan combinations

The new interlinkage types supplement the previous product modeling options that are based on, amongother things, the relatively complex modeling of configurable products and thereby offers enhancedfunctions for product determination within order and contract management. The interlinkage types aredefined in the processing of the respective products and you can assign corresponding components. Inthis way, products such as activation charges, accessories, incentives, and so on, can be combined in anenhanced product model into a service product and in every order and contract process, automaticallyincluded in the corresponding documents.

You can thereby combine flexible packages and yet devise well-defined product sets. The simplest formof this new product model is a package, which is sold as a service and can, for example, consist of a

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 61

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

service contract (rate plan), for which required hardware and extras are added for strategic marketingreasons. This product set is implemented by using the interlinkage type Sales Components.

The package is only relevant in the process of order entry. In a provider contract, which results from aprovider order created with the package, only package components are applied. As a rule, this is only theservice contract (rate plan). You can influence the explosion of the package in the order entry by meansof appropriate interlinkage type attributes.

The interlinkage type Dependent Components facilitates the defining of product relationships by usingattributes in which you can formulate conditions that you can then use to control the explosion of theproducts in the provider order. The product is created in the provider order only when all conditions arefulfilled. This interlinkage type is used, for example, for charges that accrue with contract changes forproducts in the provider order.

You can also use the interlinkage type Rate Plan Combinations, in which case you are dealing with afixed rate plan combination without further dependencies. You can offer a special price for rate planswhen they are sold combined and you want to offer additional products in a package as incentives. Theindividual rate plans result in the provider contract with individual document items.

The solution configurator processes the relationships and dependencies that are defined with theseinterlinkage types between the more loosely (in comparison to the product configuration) linked productsin the background. It checks the conditions and releases the package components in the provider orderonly when the fixed conditions are fulfilled. The loose interlinkage of products in a package is chieflysignificant for the distribution and further processing of the data contained inside and the information inthe provider contract, which would not be possible in this way with product modeling using configurableproducts.


Any models you created with the product bundling function in SAP CRM 5.0 cannot simply be upgraded.Before you can continue working with them, you must remodel them appropriately using the enhancedproduct packages functionality now available.

See also

For more information, see Up-Selling and Cross-Selling via Interlinkages, Interlinkage Maintenance UserInterface, and Packages and Products with Dependent Components.

1.8.3.5 Packages and Products with Dependent Components (New)

Use


You can now create various products combinations for use in service provider business processes. Thefollowing modeling options are available to you:

- Sales Package

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 62

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Sales components which form a sales package typically have the following characteristics:

- Commercially drivenThat is to say, rate plans are packaged with incentive products, for example a top of the rangemobile phone, to drive the sales process, but can also be sold separately

- Dependencies between products are relatively simpleFor example, if you buy Rate Plan 1, you can pick the mobile phone A.

- Components selection, for example choose one cell phone from ten different phones, ispossible, as are optional package components

- Components can have validity dates. That is to say, a phone is only offered for a certain periodof time.

- Prices of components can depend on the superordinate product . For example, Mobile Phone Ahas a different price when sold with Package B , as to when it is sold with Package A..

In this package type the superordinate package product has the product role sales package. Theinterlinkage between the superordinate package product and the package components on level onefor the package hierarchy, must be the sales component interlinkage type. For example, yourpackage product, Gold Package, is linked to the package components Rate Plan 1 and Mobile Phone2 using the sales component interlinkage type.

- Combined Rate Plan PackageA combined rate plan has the following characteristics:

- Fixed combinationsThat is to say, no conditions, no time-dependencies, no components selection, no choice ofcomponents

- Commercially driven to offer a special price for rate plans, compared to prices when soldseparately

- Pricing can be done on top level, as a package price, or at individual rate plan level.

- Results in one contract with an individual contract line item per rate plan.In this package type the superordinate package product is a combined rate plan. The interlinkagebetween the superordinate package product and the package components must be the rate plancombinations interlinkage type. Only rate plans may be assigned to a combined rate plan. Forexample, your package product Combined Rate Plan Silver, is linked to package components RatePlan 1 and Rate Plan 2 using the rate plan combinations interlinkage type.

- Product with Dependent ComponentsDependent components which form this combination of products typically have the followingcharacteristics:

- Enabling productsThat is to say, they are needed for the selling process. For example an activation fee isnecessary for a rate plan. They are not commercially driven, for example as an extra to themain product, they are driven by technical or process requirements.

- Complex conditionsThese products are determined using complex Business Rules Framework (BRF) events and/orconfiguration dependencies. Generation rules are also possible for these products

- Charged and fulfilled with the sale of a new contract or a change of an existing contract. They

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 63

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

do not become part of the contract.

- The products are generated based on a simple hierarchy, but optional or alternativecomponents are also possible.

- They usually appear on the lowest level of the product hierarchy.In this case you can define products with components assigned only via the interlinkage typedependent components. For example, your product Rate Plan 1, is linked to the dependentcomponent Activation Fee 2 using the dependent components interlinkage type.

See also

For more information, see Interlinkage Types, Up-Selling and Cross-Selling via Interlinkages, andInterlinkage Maintenance UI.

1.8.4 CRM-MD-PCT Product Catalog

1.8.4.1 Product Catalog Staging (New)

Use


Catalog staging has been introduced in the product catalog of the B2B and B2C Web shop. Catalogstaging means the process of creating, validating, and activating a product catalog for productive use.According to this process, you can verify if a product catalog is correct, before it is released for generalaccess.

Prior to this release, usually one version of a catalog variant was available on the TREX server. In thiscontext, catalog variant version is used as an equivalent for a set of TREX indexes, that means, A-indexfor Area, P-index for Products, and S-index for additional information. When the indexing of a catalogvariant was started, existing indexes were overwritten by delta indexing or deleted by initial indexing.

As of this release, a versioning of catalog variants including indexes is available. That means thatindexing no longer touches existing indexes. Instead, a new version of a catalog variant creates a new setof indexes. As a result, there is no longer any downtime of the productive Web shop while the indexingprocess is running. Versioning allows the use of the master/slave principle on the TREX server, whichmakes the product catalog permanently up-to-date and available in the Web shop.

For more information about the new programming interface, see release note Programming Interface SAPTREX API (New).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 64

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Catalog Variant Versioning

To manage catalog variant versions and make them available in the productive Web shop, the followingfour version states have been introduced:

- The active status can be applied to exactly one version of a catalog variantThe active status is to be applied to a catalog variant version to be used by standard users in theproductive Web shop.

- The inactive status can be applied to several versions of a catalog variantA new catalog variant version is always inactive. It is used by internal users (external users have noaccess) to check completeness and correctness before the catalog variant is released. Therefore, theinactive variant version already looks the same as it does after it has been activated and madeavailable for customers. This also means that current and future Internet Pricing and Configurator(IPC) information is already available.After the version has been checked, it can be activated. That means that the status of the existingactive version of the same catalog variant automatically changes to obsolete.For users of the productive Web shop, activation has two effects:

- Users who start the product catalog after the inactive catalog variant version has been activateddirectly access the new catalog variant version.

- Users who have already started the product catalog before the inactive catalog variant versionhas been activated stay connected to the obsolete version. This guarantees consistent catalogbrowsing with no Web shop downtime.

- The obsolete status can be applied to several versions of a catalog variantObsolete catalog variant versions are former active catalog variant versions that enable consistentcatalog browsing. These catalog variant versions can be removed manually from the TREX server.Removal can also be performed automatically by a batch program after a predefined period of time.

- The erroneous status is only applied if errors occur during indexing


- You define the product catalog indexing in Customizing at Customer Relationship Management ->Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Define Catalog Variant Indexing.

- You define the RFC destinations for the initial- or delta indexing of the product catalog inCustomizing at Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog ->Maintain IMS Server for Catalog Indexing.

- In Extended Configuration Management (XCM), for productive Web shops, you can specifyapplication configurations that always use active catalog variant versions. Additionally, you candefine application configurations that allow selection of active, inactive, or obsolete versions of acatalog variant for a preview in the Web shop.

- Log on to Extended Configuration Management (XCM) for your Web shop at:http://<servername:port>/<b2c>or<b2b>/admin/xcm/init.do.

- Choose Start -> Components -> Customer -> webcatalog and create your own component

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 65

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

configuration for inactive catalog variants.

- Select Active or Inactive in the dropdown-box of the parameter catalogstatus underComponent Configuration Details.

- Assign the component configuration to the application configuration

1.8.4.2 Programming Interface SAP TREX API (New)

Use


The programming interface SAP TREX API has been introduced to product catalog management. Thisnew programming interface replaces the SRET API interface that was used previously. SAP TREX APIsupports UNICODE, which allows all characters to be displayed in the product catalog of the Web shop.

SAP TREX API enables indexing to be performed with the new catalog staging, which guaranteesconsistent catalog browsing with no Web shop downtime. However, you can also use this programminginterface to perform indexing without catalog staging.

For more information about the new catalog staging process, see release note Product Catalog Staging(New).


To select how you want to index the product catalog, you need to make the necessary settings inCustomizing at Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog -> DefineCatalog Variant Indexing.

1.8.4.3 Additional Product Category Information (New)

Use


Additional product category information is now available in the product catalog of the B2B Web shop.This additional product category information is indexed to the Index Management Service (IMS) serverand then displayed on the Product Details page in the product catalog.

Indexing Additional Product Category Information

The index consists of multiple documents that are described and characterized by attributes. One of these

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 66

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

documents can be a product catalog item that belongs to a certain product catalog area. The alreadyexisting attributes for a product catalog item are now enhanced by additional product categoryinformation.

As of this release, the product category information consists of four additional attributes: ProductCategory, Product Hierarchy, Category Description, and Hierarchy Description. These attributes aredesigned as multi-value attributes.

These four new multi-value attributes are indexed to the IMS server via an initial - or delta indexingprocess. During the indexing, the product category information is retrieved from master data and send asmulti-value attributes to the IMS server. The Product Category and Product Hierarchy are expected tobe always available. If the Category Description and the Hierarchy Description are missing in acatalog variant language, a placeholder is sent to the IMS server instead.

Displaying Additional Product Category Information

For every item that is displayed on the Product Details page in the product catalog, it is checked if theattribute Product Category is set.

- If the Product Category is set, it depends on the number of entries what is displayed on theProduct Details page. If there is only one entry, the Category Description and the HierarchyDescription are shown in two separate rows. If there are more entries, the data is shown in a tablewith the Category Description in the first and the Hierarchy Description in the second column.

- If the Product Category is not set, nothing is displayed on the Product Details page.


To enable the indexing of product category information, you need to meet the following prerequisites:

- Activate the parameter Enable Indexing of Product Category Data in the section IMS Indexingof the corresponding product catalog type in Customizing at Customer Relationship Management ->Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Define Catalog Types.

- Activate the BAdI implementation Indexing New Product Category Information(COM_CATHIER_MNT_PCAT) in Customizing at Customer Relationship Management -> MasterData -> Product Catalog -> Business Add-Ins for Product Catalog.

1.8.5 CRM-MD-PPR Partner/Product Range

1.8.5.1 Partner/Product Ranges (PPRs) (Enhanced in SP02)

Use

This release note is only relevant if you are upgrading from SAP CRM 5.2.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 67

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The following enhancements for PPRs are available:

- PPR RulesPPR rules are customer-defined function modules that fill PPR items with new or additional entries.You can define rules for products, accounts, and validity periods.Rules can be executed in two ways:

- automatically whenever the relevant PPR is used in an application either to carry out a PPRcheck or to generate product proposals

- manually using a report

- Additional attributes for validity periods and organizational dataYou can use additional attributes to extend PPRs with your own fields.Previously this function was only available at PPR item level for product and account assignmentblocks (for example, Product Categories or Account Hierarchy Nodes). Now additional attributescan also be defined for validity period assignment blocks and for organizational data assignmentblocks (Partner Functions, Transaction Types, Sales Organization, and Service Organization).

- Multiple descriptions in the same languageFor PPRs and PPR items, you can now create more than one description in the same language.


You make the necessary settings for PPRs in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management underMaster Data -> Partner/Product Range.

1.8.5.2 Partner/Product Ranges (PPRs) (New)

Use


A partner/product range is a combination of products and accounts that is valid for a particular time in aparticular business transaction or application.

You can use a partner/product range to:

- check whether a product is valid in a business transaction at a particular point in timeFor example, in a sales order, you can use PPRs to check whether a particular product can be sold tothe relevant customer. This also allows you to prevent products from being sold at unsuitable times(for example, you do not want to sell Easter bunnies in winter).Other applications in which you can carry out PPR checks are service contracts, account planningand marketing project.

- generate time-dependent product proposals for business transactionsFor example, in a product catalog view, you can use PPRs to propose a suitable set of products for

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 68

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

sale to particular customers during a particular period.Other application for which you can generate product proposals based on PPRs are sales orders,service contracts and top n product lists.


You make the necessary settings for partner/product ranges in Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement under Master Data -> Partner/Product Range.

1.8.6 CRM-MD-CON Condition Technique

1.8.6.1 Terminology in Condition Maintenance (Changed)

Use

As of release CRM 5.1, the terms 'condition type' and 'condition maintenance group' (or 'maintenancegroup'), previously used on the CRM Web Client UI will be replaced with a term that is more specific tothe respective use.

The following terms replace the previous term 'condition type':

Use New Description

Rebate processing Rebate element

Pricing Price element

Free goods Free goods element

The superordinate term for all uses on the Web UI is: 'condition element'.

The following terms replace the previous term 'condition maintenance group':

Use New Description

Rebate processing Rebate type

Pricing Price type

Free goods Free goods type

The superordinate term for all uses on the Web UI is: 'condition type'.

The previous terminology ('condition type' and 'condition maintenance group') will be kept in theCustomizing of the affected uses. Note that 'condition type' on the Web UI indicates something differentthan in Customizing.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 69

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.9 CRM-BF Basic Functions

1.9.1 Worklist (New)

Use

As of SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM 5.1), a combined workflow and alert inboxis available in the Worklist application.

This means that these two functions are now integrated into the user interface for CRM.

You can navigate from the workflow and alert list to the detailed view for alerts and workflow tasks, or toalert personalization.


You can find the Customizing activities for the worklist in Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement by choosing Basic Functions --> Worklist.

1.9.2 Authorization Check at Field Level (Enhanced)

Use


You can use this function to permit certain authorization groups to change fields in a business transactionsuch as Sales- or Service Order. You may want to allow only those employees with special authorizationto, for example, subsequently change quantities after the sales order has been delivered. You can also usethe authorization check for business transaction components, and so make your authorization check evenmore precise. The following business transaction components are supported:

- Order item (ORDERADM_I)For example, you can permit certain authorization groups to delete or create order items, forexample.

- Partner (PARTNER)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 70

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

For expample, you can allow only a specific authorization group to change the appropriate fields ofthe object Partner that relate exclusively to the partner function Ship-To Party (logical key:00000002).

- Transaction history (DOC_FLOW)For example, you can also control actions for campaigns and trade promotions using the objectTransaction History (DOC_FLOW), and define whether a certain authorization group can delete orcreate campaigns or trade promotions if you have activated the function Multiple Campaigns orTrade Promotions.


- You have created an authorization that applies to authorization object CRM_FLDCHK, assignedthis authorization to an authorization profile and then allocated this profile to the appropriate user.When you create the authorization that applies to the authorization object CRM_FLDCHK, you canonly specify one value (an integer) for the field Authorization Level. Intervals (1-12, for example)or multiple values (such as 5,7,9) cannot be processed in the authorization check.

- You have defined authorization groups and allocated fields to them in Customizing. Anauthorization group is a type of field group and consists of a collection of fields. You make theentries for this in the Customizing for Customer Relationship Management under DefineAuthorization Group.For performance reasons, you should determine the rules for the authorization check very carefully.In the IMG activity Maintain Authorizations at Field Level, you should only use the value Asterisk (* [=all transaction types]) in the column Transaction Type when you really want all transactiontypes to be analyzed in the authorization check for this authorization rule.

- You have granted an authorization level for each authorization group in connection with the keyfields Transaction Type, Item Category and Delivery Status. These entries are manually made in theCustomizing for Customer Relationship Management under Maintain Authorizations at Field Level.You fill the control table CRMM_AUTH_FIELD with these entries.

Note: The control table CRMM_AUTH_FIELD is created as a master data table and therefore cannot betransported. You should maintain this control table in your productive system.

1.9.3 New, Changed and Removed IMG Activities in SAP CRM 5.1 and SAP CRM5.2

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 71

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Layout of User Interface (People Centric CRM)

Removed IMG activities: Customer Relationship Management -> Layout of User Interface(People-Centric CRM)

All activities under this node have been removed.

Basic Functions

New IMG activities:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Worklist -> Define Alert Inbox andWorkflow Inbox -> Define Task-Specific Navigation

o Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Worklist -> Define Alert Inbox andWorkflow Inbox -> Define Alert-Specific Navigation

o Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Pricing -> Pricing in the BusinessTransaction -> Define Mapping for Condition Types from Application BBP to Application CRM

Master Data - Organizational Management

New IMG node:

Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Organizational Management -> Assignment ofOrganizational Units from SAP ECC

All the activities under this node are new. They have been isolated from the activities OrganizationalModel -> Create Organizational Model and -> Change Organizational Model so that you can maintainonly the mapping of the organizational units between SAP ECC and SAP CRM. The organizationalmodel itself can now be maintained in the CRM Web UI. If you have already made settings for a formerrelease, you do not need to make any further changes.

Master Data - Product

New IMG nodes:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Settings for ConfigurableProducts

- The activity Define Settings for Product Models is new.

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Settings for Packages

- The activity Assign Product Roles to Categories is new.


o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Settings for Product Type ->Define Product Template for Configurable Products

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Objects -> Specify Display

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 72

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Option for Object Structure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Objects -> Define AvailableCatalogs for Object Structure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Objects -> BAdI: IncludeExternal Catalogs for Object Structure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Products -> Objects -> Activate MapVisualization of Location

Master Data - Partner/Product Range


o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Partner/Product Range -> Assign PPRTypes to PPR Listings


New IMG activity:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Business Partner -> Basic Settings ->Define Profiles.


o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Business Partner -> Basic Settings ->Assign Templates for Content Management Folder to BP Roles


New IMG activities:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Define Catalog VariantIndexing

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Maintain IMS Serverfor Catalog Indexing

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Business Add-Ins forProduct Catalog -> Implementation: Indexing New Product Category Information

o Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Product Catalog -> Define Templates forFolders

Account Planning

New IMG activity:

Customer Relationship Management -> Account Planning -> Product Assignments -> Define ProductPlanning Basis


Customer Relationship Management -> Account Planning -> General Settings -> Define Field Selection

Transactions

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 73

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

New IMG activity:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Additional Settings -> Assign MarketingUsage Types to Transaction Types

Moved IMG activity:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Assign Amount Allocation Profile toTransaction Type and Item Category can now be found under Transactions -> Additional Settings.


o The IMG node Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Complaints ->Integration -> Business Add-Ins for Document Referencing is renamed to Transaction Referencing

o The IMG activities under the node Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions ->Settings for Complaints -> Integration -> Transaction Referencing are renamed:

- Business Add-In: Create Complaints with Reference to External Document is renamed to BAdI:Create Complaint with Reference to External Transaction

- Define Object Types for Document Reference is renamed to Define Object Types for TransactionReference

- Assign Business Object Types to Transaction Types is renamed to Assign Business Object Typesto Transaction Types


- Define Business Object Type for Subsequent Document Reference is renamed to Define BusinessObject Type for Subsequent Transaction Reference

Removed sections (for functions not supported in this release):

Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Service Processes -> Settings forService Resource Planning

IMG activity moved: Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for ProductService Letters -> Define Object Reference Profile can now be found under Transactions -> BasicSettings.

Grantor Program Management

New IMG activities:


Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Program Management -> General Settings -> Define Availability ControlProfile


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 74

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Change Process Management -> Define Input Field Control

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Change Process Management -> Define Change Processes

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Change Process Management -> Customer Enhancements forChange Process Management

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Change Process Management -> BAdI: Customer Enhancementsfor Web Requests

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Basic Functions for Grantor Processing

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Financial Transactions -> Define Financial Execution Type

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Financial Transactions -> Pricing -> Define Value Type

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Financial Transactions -> Define Billing Plan

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Actions in Grantor Processing

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Web Requests for Grantor Management

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Customer Enhancements for GrantorAgreement

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Customer Enhancements for GrantorApplication

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Customer Enhancements for GrantorClaim

Changed IMG activities

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Transactions in Grantor Processing


Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Program Management -> Content Management

Case Management

New IMG activities:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 75

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Process Partners -> BAdI: ReassignBusiness Partners in Linked Objects

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Basic Settings -> Define Search Scenario

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Basic Settings -> Define Case ClosingProfile

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Basic Settings -> BAdI: Define AdditionalTasks for Case Closing Profile

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Archiving-> CRM Data Archiving Process

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Archiving-> Display Archived Case Data

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Archiving-> BAdIs for Case Archiving -> BAdI: Define Checks Prior to Case Archiving

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Archiving-> BAdIs for Case Archiving -> BAdI: Archive Case Table Entries

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Archiving-> BAdIs for Case Archiving -> BAdI: Delete Case Table Entries from the Database

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Special Settings-> BAdI: BAPIs for Case Parameters -> BAdI: Change BAPI Parameters

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Special Settings-> BAdI: BAPIs for Case Parameters -> BAdI: BAPI Change Case - Change Import Parameters

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Special Settings-> BAdI: BAPIs for Case Parameters -> BAdI: BAPI Create Case - Change Import Parameters

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> Case Import and Export with XI

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> Monitor XI Case Exports

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> Manually Export Cases

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Export Case XI

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Import Case XI

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Map XI Case Export

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Map XI Case Import

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Export Case During Save

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 76

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Export Case at Business PartnerUpdate

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> BAdI: Export Case at Postal Code Update

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import andExport with XI -> BAdI: Perform Customer Enhancements -> Case Management CustomerEnhancements in XI

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> ACEImplementation for Case Management (Note: This activity describes how the delivered sample ACEimplementation has been configured in case you want to create your own ACE implementation.)


The following BAdIs were removed under Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management ->Extended Customizing -> Special Settings -> Define Processes -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs):

Business Add-In: Data Transfer When Creating a Case

Business Add-In: Filling Customer-Specific Dropdown Lists

Business Add-In: Copying Cases

BAdI: Attributes for Links in Case Record

BAdI: Process Control in Case Management

BAdI: Process Control for Case Notes

BAdI: Process Control of Derived Case Management Applications

BAdI: Enhancement for BSP Case Framework

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Special Settings-> Create Profiles -> Notes About the Function Profile and Terminology Profile

All of the informational nodes were removed under Customer Relationship Management -> CaseManagement -> Integration in the User Interface (People-Centric UI).

Customer Relationship Management -> Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Special Settings-> Create Profiles - > Assign Profile for Document Templates to a Case Type

Billing

New IMG activity: Customer Relationship Management -> Billing -> Intercompany Billing -> DetermineSales Area Data for Determination of Invoice Currency


Usage-Based Billing

This section has been removed since usage-based billing is not supported in this release.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 77

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Customer Relationship Management -> E-Commerce -> Basic Settings for E-Commerce -> BusinessAdd-Ins (BAdIs) for E-Selling -> BAdI: Change Target System for Calling Up Availability Check inERP

Interaction Center WinClient, and Interaction Center WebClient 2005

These sections have been removed.

Prior to SAP CRM 5.1, Interaction Center WebClient 2005 section was Interaction Center WebClient.


This section is new.

As of Service Pack 02 a new configuration activity was added under Interaction Center WebClient ->Basic Functions -> Communication Channels -> Configure E-Mail for SAPconnect.

Marketing Planning and Campaign Management

Changed IMG activities:

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management ->Key Figure Planning -> Version Management -> Define Versions

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management ->Key Figure Planning -> Version Management -> Define Version for System Status

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management ->Key Figure Planning -> Version Management -> Define Version for User Status

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> System Landscape -> Activate SAP NetWeaver BI Update


Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Key Figure Planning -> Define Parameters for BW Analyses

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Key Figure Planning -> Assign Success Key Figures to Campaign Type and Objective

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> General Settings -> Define Field Assignment for Microsoft Project

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> General Settings -> Define User Settings

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Marketing Calendar -> Define Search Tables

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 78

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

-> Marketing Calendar -> Define Search Criteria

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Marketing Calendar -> Assign Search Criteria

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Marketing Calendar -> Define Field Settings for Table View

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Marketing Calendar -> Business Add-Ins -> Extend Standard Functions in Query for Calendar

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> User Interface Settings (all activities)

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Personalized Mail -> Maintain Print Profile

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Personalized Mail -> Define Status Profile for User Status

Customer Relationship Management -> Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management-> Additional Fields and Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Marketing Planning -> Define Additional Fields:Set Types

IPM Solution Management


SAP Implementation Guide -> Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions ->Media -> Intellectual Property Management -> Rights and Royalties Dimensions -> Generate PeopleCentric UI for Rights and Royalties Dimensions

Telecommunications

New IMG node:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Telecommunications ->Dispute Management

Hi-Tech

Moved

The entire node under Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales ->Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Channel Sales has been moved and renamed to CustomerRelationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> High Tech. Transactions being used incommon with Pharma have been copied to Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-SpecificSolutions -> Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals Industry.

Pharma

New:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 79

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Incompleteness Procedure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Incompleteness Procedure -> Define Incompleteness Procedure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Evaluation and Calculation Profiles -> Define Profiles

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Evaluation and Calculation Profiles -> Assign Attributes to Profiles

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs Evaluationand Calculation Profiles -> Maintain Profile Attribute Values

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Authorizations

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Authorizations -> Define Authorization Group

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance -> Define Condition Generation

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance -> Assign Condition Maintenance Group

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance -> Conflict Resolution

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance -> Activate Staging and History

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance -> Define Condition History Table

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ConditionMaintenance -> Activate History for Usage and Condition Type

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 80

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Determination of Incentive Programs -> Determine Incentive Program in Contracts

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Enhancements for Eligibility Rules

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Enhancements for Eligibility Rules -> Business Add-In: Implement Data Supply

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Enhancements for Eligibility Rules -> Enhance Rule Attribute Structures

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->Enhancements -> Business Add-In: Authorization Check

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> ProductAssignments -> Assign Product Hierarchy

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargebacks and Sales Tracking-> Entitlement Document -> Maintain Relevancy for Claim Document Creation

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargebacks and Sales Tracking-> Reconciliation -> Assign Outbound EDI - NWDA Codes

New Textual Nodes (no activity, only reference to the actual activity):

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> TextManagement - Define Text Objects and Text Types

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs ->TextManagement -> Define Text Determination Procedure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Incentive Programs -> StatusProfile -> Change User Status Profile

o Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Notification Manager ->Maintain Condition Type for Notification

Renamed:

o Industry-Specific Solutions -> Pharmaceuticals -> Master Data is renamed to Customer

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 81

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals Industry->Field Sales

Moved:

o Activate Pharma-Specific Applications has been moved from under Industry-Specific Solutions ->Pharmaceuticals -> Master Data to Customer Relationship Management -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry->

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Channel Sales for Pharma Industry

All nodes under Channel Sales for Pharma Industry that are still being used have been moved toCustomer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales -> BasicFunctions -> Configure Business Rules has been moved to Customer Relationship Management ->Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for LifeSciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> Configure Business Rules

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> ConfigureBusiness Rules -> Configure Schema Access

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> ConfigureBusiness Rules -> Configure Prerequisites for Process Step

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> ConfigureBusiness Rules -> Validation Classes/-Bits

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> ConfigureBusiness Rules ->Configure Reconciliation-/Duplicate Check Rules -> Maintain Field Groups

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> ConfigureBusiness Rules ->Configure Reconciliation-/Duplicate Check Rules -> Assign Field Groups to SystemSteps

o Activities under the Customer Relationship Management->Channel Management-> Channel Sales- > Industry-Specific Channel Sales ->Chargeback have been moved to Customer RelationshipManagement -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals Industry -> ContractManagement for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Channel Sales for Pharma Industry -> Settings for Claim ContractClaim Contracts has been renamed and all activities under it, moved to

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 82

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts -> Maintain Relevancies for Contracts-> Maintain Transaction Type Mapping

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts -> Maintain Relevancies for Contracts-> Maintain Partner Function Mapping

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts -> Maintain Relevancies for Contracts-> Maintain Condition Type Mapping

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts -> Maintain Relevancies for Contracts-> Maintain Date Type Mapping

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts -> Maintain Relevancies for Contracts-> Maintain Status Mapping

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Contracts -> Enhancements -> BAdI: CMSExtract Preparation

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Chargebacks -> Business Logic Enhancements is moved to CustomerRelationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals Industry ->Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> Enhancements forBusiness Logic Flow

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Chargeback -> Map Additional Transaction Types is moved toCustomer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/ PharmaceuticalsIndustry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback and Sales Tracking -> MapAdditional Transaction Types

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Chargeback -> Claim Processing -> Unit of Measurement SelectionMethod is renamed and moved to Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions ->Life Sciences/ Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Chargeback andSales Tracking -> Selection Method -> Selection Method for Unit of Measure

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Chargeback -> Claim Processing -> Contract Selection Method ismoved to Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Life Sciences/Pharmaceuticals Industry -> Contract Management for Life Sciences -> Selection Method -> ContractSelection Method

Removed:

o Customer Relationship Management->Channel Management-> Industry-Specific Channel Sales->Contracts and Chargeback for the Pharmaceutical Industry has been removed.

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Chargebacks ->Duplicate Check -> Maintain Fieldgroups

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 83

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - > Industry-SpecificChannel Sales -> Chargebacks -> Duplicate Check -> Maintain Duplicate Check Rules

o Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - >Industry-Specific Channel Sales -> Chargebacks ->Enhancement -> User Interface Enhancements ->Configure Selection Screens for Chargeback

Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - > Industry-SpecificChannel Sales -> Chargebacks ->Enhancement -> User Interface Enhancements -> Maintain screen labelsfor Chargeback

Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - > Industry-SpecificChannel Sales -> Chargebacks ->Enhancement -> User Interface Enhancements -> Configure Headergrid display for Chargeback

Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - > Industry-SpecificChannel Sales -> Chargebacks ->Enhancement -> User Interface Enhancements -> Configure Claim GridDisplay for Chargeback

Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management -> Channel Sales - > Industry-SpecificChannel Sales -> Chargebacks ->Enhancement -> User Interface Enhancements -> ToolbarEnhancements

Renamed nodes and activities:

o The IMG node Customer Relationship Management -> E-Commerce is renamed to Web Channel

o The IMG node Customer Relationship Management -> E-Commerce -> E-Selling is renamed toCustomer Relationship Management -> Web Channel -> E-Commerce

o The IMG node Customer Relationship Management -> Channel Management is renamed toCustomer Relationship Management -> Partner Channel Management

CRM Web Channel

New IMG activities:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Web Channel -> Basic Settings -> Define Authorizations

o Customer Relationship Management -> Web Channel -> Basic Settings -> Business Add-Ins(BAdIs) for Web Channel -> BAdI: Additional Search Filter

Rebate Processing

New IMG Activities:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Configure Application

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Set Up Rebate Determination ->Assign Maintenance Group for Mass Processing

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> SettlementProfiles -> Define Filters for Cancellation Requirements

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 84

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> ConsumableRebate Profiles -> Define Filters for Consumable Value Calculation

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> ConsumableRebate Profiles -> Define Consumable Rebate Profile

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Reason Codes -> Define ReasonCodes

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Reason Codes -> Assign ReasonCodes to Process Types

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> System Enhancements -> BusinessAdd-Ins -> BAdI: Cancellation Requirements

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> System Enhancements -> BusinessAdd-Ins -> BAdI: Calculation of Consumable Rebate Value


o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Set Up Rebate Determination ->Create Condition Types

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> SettlementProfiles -> Define Settlement Document Type

o Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Rebate Profiles -> Define RebateProfile


o From: Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> DefineBase Calculation

To: Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> Define Filtersfor Base Calculation

o From: Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> DefineScale Base Calculation

To: Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> Define Filtersfor Scale Base Calculation

o From: Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> DefinePayment Value Calculation

To: Customer Relationship Management -> Rebate Processing -> Calculation Profiles -> Define Filtersfor Payment Value Calculation


New IMG Activities:

o Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions ->Entitlement Program Types -> Intercompany Related Customizing Setup

o Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions -> Inbound/Outbound Processing -> Inbound Number Range Object Maintenance

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 85

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

o Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions -> Inbound/Outbound Processing -> Outbound Number Range Object Maintenance

o Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> System Enhancements ->Assign Logical Events to Business Workflow Events


o From : Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions ->Entitlement Program Types -> Assign Pricing Procedure for Automatic Deposit Determination

To: Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions -> EntitlementProgram Types -> Setup Application Parameters

o From: Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions ->Entitlement Program Types -> Define Document Types

To: Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions -> EntitlementProgram Types -> Define Entitlement-Specific Transaction Categories


o Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> System Enhancements ->Maintain Appearance of Selection and Results Screens

o Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> System Enhancements ->Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: User Interface Toolbar Enhancements

1.9.4 Worklist (Enhanced for SP02)

Use


You can now simultaneously forward several items from the workflow inbox of your worklist.

In the workflow inbox, you select the workflow tasks in question and click Forward. In the dialog boxthat appears, you can search for the relevant employee or partner contact and click Forward again.

The forwarded tasks appear in the worklist of the recipient, for whom they are simultaneously reserved.The workflow tasks are therefore removed from your worklist.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 86

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


For more information, see Customizing for Customer Relationship Management under Worklist ->Define Alert Inbox and Workflow Inbox -> Define Forwarding and Substitution.

1.9.5 Worklist (Enhanced)

Use

This release note is only relevant if you are upgrading from SAP CRM 5.2.

The following functions are now available in the worklist:

- Business object inboxThe business object inbox provides a single point of entry for calling up the business objects thatyou have to process. The inbox offers a comprehensive search for business objects and acorresponding result list. You can access the business objects from the result list.In the standard system, the business object inbox is enabled for business transactions. However, youcan configure the inbox to support other types of business objects as well, such as cases or faxmessages.

- Maintenance of substitutes in workflow inboxYou can now define substitutes to process your workflow tasks in your absence.Depending on your business role, you can assign employees of your company, partner contactpersons or both.

- Triggering of workflow steps for multiple workflow tasksYou can simultaneously trigger workflow steps, such as confirm or reject, from the workflow taskresult list for multiple workflow tasks.


You have configured the buiness object inbox in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management,by choosing Basic Functions -> Worklist -> Define Business Object Inbox.

For the substitute function in the workflow inbox, you have defined the forwarding of tasks and alerts.You do this in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, by choosing Basic Functions ->Worklist -> Define Alert Inbox and Workflow Inbox -> Define Forwarding and Substitution.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 87

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.9.6 Worklist (New)

Use


You can now use the worklist as a central point of access for your alert, workflow and business objectinboxes. Each inbox offers various functions and navigation options:

- Alert inbox

- The result list offers an overview over the priorities and due dates of the various alerts.

- You can execute follow-up activities from the alert list or from the details page.

- You can personalize the delivery of alerts, define substitutes and cancel predefinedsubscriptions to alert categories.

- You can reserve, complete, forward, or reject an alert.

- Workflow inbox

- The result list offers an overview over the priorities and due dates of the various workflowtasks.

- You can execute, reserve, forward, or confirm a workflow task.

- You can trigger workflow steps, such as confirm or reject, from the workflow task result listfor multiple workflow tasks.

- You can add an attachment to a workflow task.

- For workflow tasks that require a decision from you, various decision options are available thatinfluence the rest of the business process.

- You can define substitutes to process your workflow tasks in your absence.

- Business object inboxThe business object inbox provides a single point of entry for calling up the business objects thatyou have to process. The inbox offers a comprehensive search for business objects and acorresponding result list. You can access the business objects from the result list.In the standard system, the business object inbox is enabled for business transactions. However, youcan configure the inbox to support other types of business objects as well, such as cases or faxmessages.


You have to configure the alert-, workflow-, and business object inboxes in Customizing for CustomerRelationship Management, by choosing Basic Functions -> Worklist.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 88

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.9.7 CRM-BF-PD Partner Processing

1.9.7.1 Partner Processing: Alternative Partner Proposal (New for SP02)

Use


The Propose Alternatives function is available in the Parties Involved assignment block and allowsyou to trigger partner determination within business transactions to redetermine and reassign the relevantparties. It enables you to do the following:

- Change previously automatically determined partners quickly and easily within the applicationitself. This means you no longer have to search manually for partners you want to replace.

- Redetermine partners in saved documents.

- Trigger partner determination for empty partner functions already saved in a document.

1.9.8 CRM-BF-COU Counter

1.9.8.1

Short text.

Customizing for Counters and Readings (Changed in SP02)

Use


All Customizing activities for counters and readings are grouped into the sub-section Counters andReadings, which you can find in the following sections of the Implementation Guide (IMG) forCustomer Relationship Management:

- Master Data (replacing the section Counters)

- Usage-Based Service Contract Processing

The settings for counters and readings are relevant both for general use and for usage-based billing ofservice contracts.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 89

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.9.8.2 Language-Dependent Counter Descriptions (New in SP02)

Use

This release note is relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0 or SAP CRM 5.2.

You can create language-dependent descriptions for counters in addition to the previously supportedlanguage-independent description for a counter.

You create the language-independent description in the Description field in the counter details.

You create language-dependent descriptions in the Descriptions assignment block, which is available onthe Counters page. If you create a language-dependent description in your current logon language, thisreplaces (for display purposes) the description in the Description field in the counter details.

The Counter Description search criterion searches for both language-dependent andlanguage-independent descriptions. If a language-dependent description exists in your logon language,this is displayed in the search results and in the Description field in the counter details. Otherwise, thelanguage-independent description is displayed.

1.9.9 CRM-BF-CFG Product Configuration

1.9.9.1 Display Options for Characteristics and Characteristic Values(Enhanced)

Use


You can decide if the long text (more than 30 characters) should be available on the user interface of theproduct configuration for characteristics and characteristic values. In some cases, the characteristic couldnot be described in a sufficiently meaningful manner with the previous character length of 30 characters

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 90

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

for the characteristic description (short text). In addition, it is difficult to formulate a question as user helpwith this character length. Until now the long texts, that is, the detailed descriptions of the characteristicsor characteristic values, could only be displayed on request and only one long text could be displayed atany one time. Therefore the previous display for long texts was not suitable for the interactive productconfiguration.

By setting appropriate parameters in Extended Configuration Management (XCM) you can configure theapplication in such a way that instead of the short text for characteristics and characteristic values, thelong text is displayed as the description. The long text is thereby displayed on the user interface in thesame way as short texts, that is, the long texts behave like the short texts in the way they are displayed onthe user interface. Various display options are offered, for example, you can either display ID and longtext or short text and long text. In addition, you can restrict the display length of the long text. The lengthis restricted to 80 characters by default. If the characteristic or characteristic value has no long text, thecorresponding short text is displayed.


You can make the settings for this function in XCM by using the parameterscharacteristics.descriptiontype and values.descriptiontype.

The following parameter values are available:

Value Description

ShortDescription The short text of the characteristic or characteristicvalue, at most 30 characters long, is displayed on the user interface. This is the standard display.

LongDescription The first line of the long text is displayed instead ofthe short text. If the characteristic values are displayed collapsed, that is, in a dropdown listbox, theshort text is displayed.

ShortAndLongDescription The short text and the long text of the characteristicare displayed in different lines. The short text and long text are displayed in two different columns forcharacteristic values.

IDAndShortDescription The ID and the short text are displayed in one line.

IDAndLongDescription The ID and the long text of the characteristic orcharacteristic value are displayed in different lines or columns.

IDAndShortAndLongDescription The ID and the short text are displayed in one line.The long text of the characteristic or characteristic value is displayed in another line or column.

ID The ID of the characteristic or characteristic value isdisplayed instead of the short text.

You can restrict the display of the long text by using the parameters values.maxdescriptionlength andcharacteristics.maxdescriptionlength. The standard value for these parameters is 80 characters.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 91

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.9.9.2 Display of Messages when Loading a New Knowledge Base (New)

Use


When loading a saved product configuration, various messages can arise if a new knowledge base is used.These messages give information on which parts of the saved configuration could not be loaded or haveerrors.

You can display these messages, which give information on changes in the knowledge base. Thesemessages are displayed on the user interface for the configuration comparison if problems arise from asaved product configuration being applied to a new knowledge base. The messages inform the user of thefollowing:

- Characteristics and instances that cannot be loaded

- Instances that have an unknown type

- Values that have the wrong format

You can adjust the way these messages are displayed on the user interface by setting appropriateparameters in Extended Configuration Management (XCM).


You can activate or deactivate this function by using the XCM parametermessagearea.loadingmessages.show. With the value T, the system searches for messages. This functionis deactivated if the value used is F, and the display of messages is completely switched off.

You can control the display type by using the XCM parameter behavior.fordwardtocomparison. Thefollowing options are offered for this:

Value Description

F If messages are created when a saved configuration isloaded with a new knowledge base, these messages do not automatically appear. You are, however,notified of them on the product configuration's user interface and you can display these messages bymeans of a corresponding pushbutton.

onmessages If messages are created when a saved configuration is

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 92

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

loaded with a new knowledge base, these messages are displayed directly on the user interface for theconfiguration comparison. This is the standard setting.

always The user interface for the configuration comparisonalways opens with this value, even when no messages exist.

1.9.9.3 Comparison of Product Configurations (New)

Use


You can compare the states of different product configurations with each other and thereby make thecharacteristic values of two product configuration states available for comparison. In this way you helpyour customers to decide which product configuration best fits their requirements and is therefore moresuitable.

The comparison of product configurations can be carried out by using various pushbuttons on the userinterface of the product configuration.

The following options are available:

- Comparison of the current product configuration with an initial product configurationWhen processing a new sales order during the product configuration, an initial productconfiguration is automatically stored as a snapshot when the user interface is called. You cancompare this snapshot with a current product configuration at a later point. This comparison ispossible as long as you have not yet stored a snapshot during the session. The product configurationis saved to the database only when you have created the new sales order.

- Comparison of the current product configuration with a product configuration already saved on thedatabaseWhen you want to re-process a sales order with which a product configuration was saved, becauseyour customer wants a different product configuration, you can compare the previously savedproduct configuration with that which the customer now wants. This comparison serves as decisionsupport for the choice of the new product configuration.

- Comparison of the current product configuration with a snapshot, that is, a product configurationthat you have stored in a session before the call for comparison. The snapshot is not saved on thedatabase, but its data is temporarily saved during the session. When you leave the session, thesnapshot is no longer available.

The result of the comparison is displayed on a dedicated page. A table compares the correspondingcharacteristic values for the saved or initial product configuration with the characteristic values for thecurrent product configuration. In addition, a table column is available for notes on the comparison of theproduct configurations. If the values differ, an explanation for the cause is specified. If a comparison isdisplayed with a snapshot then the user has the option to go back to this snapshot by use of a pushbutton.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 93

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You can activate or deactivate the function "Comparison of Product Configurations" by using the XCMparameter behavior.enablecomparison . If you have set the value "T" for this parameter, you can comparethe current product configuration with the snapshot as well as with a saved product configuration.

You can determine if a snapshot of a certain product configuration can be stored by the user during theproduct configuration with the XCM parameter behavior.enablesnapshot. The value "T" should also beset for the parameter behavior.enablecomparison so that the differences in comparison to the snapshotcan be displayed.

1.9.9.4 Performing Standard Configuration in the Background (New)

Use


You can set up the product configuration so that the default configuration is directly applied to the salesorder for a configurable product. In the case of multilevel product configuration, the correspondingsubitems are also immediately created in the sales order. In order to apply the default configuration, youno longer need to call the user interface of the product configuration, that is, the default configuration isperformed in the background. The default configuration is a product configuration with whichcharacteristic values are already set as default values for the respective characteristic. If you want todefine another product configuration for the corresponding configurable product, you can switch to theuser interface of the product configuration and re-perform a configuration for this product.

The previous system response was to display a message in the application log of the sales order to saythat you had to copy the default configuration to the sales order using the product configuration . Youalso had to switch to the user interface of the product configuration in the case of existing default values.Only there could you apply the default configuration to the sales order, by means of a pushbutton. Youcan avoid this additional navigation step with the new function, which makes the application easier tohandle and thus more user-friendly.


You can determine the desired system response in the definition of the item category in the fieldConfiguration Background. You perform the settings in SAP CRM Customizing by choosing CustomerRelationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Define Item Categories. If you performthe product configuration in the background and want to apply the default configuration, choose the value"Perform Standard Configuration in Background" in the Configuration in Background field.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 94

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.9.9.5 Product Config: Using Sales Order Fields as Object Characteristics(New)

Use


The Configuration Engine requires relevant information from the sales order to edit the productconfiguration. You can use object characteristics for this, in order to copy values from the sales order tothe product configuration or to transfer values from the configuration to the sales order. In contrast to theordinary characteristics of a configurable product, an object characteristic always relates to a table field.When the product configuration is called this information, that is, the values of context parameters (tablenames and field names), is sent from the sales order to the Configuration Engine, and correspondingvalues are returned from the Configuration Engine to the sales order. The context parameter values arethus transferred to the object characteristic defined for the respective field and then used as characteristicvalues in the product configuration. Fields in SAP CRM must be mapped to fields in SAP ECC for thisdata exchange.

Additional object characteristics - Enhancement of CRM context

Further sales order fields, which you can use as object characteristics, are available in the productconfiguration. The enhancement of the context parameter is, for example, necessary for the editing ofcomplex products in provider contracts. The Configuration Engine data, which is also essential for theproduct configuration of more complex products, is thus retrieved from the sales order for processing.You can, for example, transfer additional necessary input parameters to the Configuration Engine.

The following fields are available in the enhanced CRM context:

*) Field that can also be described:

CRM table Field name in SAP CRM Field name in SAP ECC

ORDERADM_H CHANGED_AT VBAK-AEDAT

ORDERADM_I CHANGED_AT VBAP-AEDAT

PRODUCT_I PROD_HIERARCHY VBAP-PRODH

PRICING CURRENCY VBAK-WAERK

REF_CURRENCY KOMK-HWAER

EXCHG_DATE VBKD-KURSK_DAT

EXCHG_RATE VBKD-KURSK

PRICE_GRP VBKD-KONDA

PRICE_LIST VBKD-PLTYP

CUST_GROUP VBKD-KDGRP

TAX_DEST_CITY VBAK-STCEG_L

SALES REGION VBKD-J_1AREGIO

INDUSTRY KNA1-BRSCH

CUST_GROUP1 VBAK-KVGR1



______________________________________________________________SAP AG 95

SAP-System______________________________________________________________



*) REQ_DLV_DATE VBAK-VDATU

PARTNER (Sold-to party) POSTL_COD1 KNA1-PSTLZ

POSTL_COD2 KNA1-PSTL2

SEX NVK-PARGE

PARTNER (Ship-to party) POSTL_COD1 KNA1-PSTLZ

POSTL_COD2 KNA1-PSTL2

SEX KNVK-PARGE

ORGMAN DIVISION VBAK-SPART

SALES_OFFICE VBAK-VKBUR

SALES_GROUP VBAK-VKGRP

SHIPPING *) INCOTERMS1 VBKD-INCO1

*) INCOTERMS2 VBKD-INCO2

*) SHIP_COND VBAK-VSBED

*) DLV_PRIO VBAP-LPRIO

APPOINTMENT *) CONTSTART VEDA-VBEGDAT

*) CONTEND VEDA-VENDDAT

Object characteristics with read and write access to database content

You have both read and write access to many sales order fields in the product configuration by means ofobject characteristics with SAP CRM 5.1. You can, for instance, edit the order quantity directly on theproduct configuration user interface. When you confirm the product configuration, the changed values aretransmitted to the sales order and it is then updated with these values. The object characteristics in theproduct configuration could previously only be displayed, not edited.

If you have changed an object characteristic value in the product configuration and it was applied to thesales order, you can only change this value again in the product configuration and you need to switch tothe product configuration user interface to do so. It is no longer possible to change values in the salesorder field. A mutual change of values is not permitted because the main system in this case is theConfiguration Engine.

The following fields are editable and can be changed in the product configuration:

CRM table Field name in SAP CRM Field name in SAP ECC

ORDERADM_I DESCRIPTION VBAP-ARKTX

PRODUCT_I GROSS_WEIGHT VBAP-BRGEW

NET_WEIGHT VBAP-NTGEW

WEIGHT_UNIT VBAP-GEWEI

VOLUME VBAP-VOLUM

VOLUME_UNIT VBAP-VOLEH

SALES REQ_DLV_DATE VBAK-VDATU

SCHEDLIN ORDER_QTY VBAP-KWMENG

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 96

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

SHIPPING INCOTERMS1 VBKD-INCO1

INCOTERMS2 VBKD-INCO2

SHIP_COND VBAK-VSBED

DLV_PRIO VBAK-LPRIO

APPOINTMENT CONTSTART VEDA-VBEGDAT

CONTEND VEDA-VENDDAT

You can also use this new function in the multilevel product configuration and set values for thecharacteristics of subitems. Multilevel product configurations are configurable products with subitemsthat can contain yet more subitems. The number of levels in such a hierarchy is unrestricted.

You can enhance the functions in the product configuration with the Business Add-In (BAdI)CRM_CONFIG_BADI. You can find this BAdI in SAP CRM Customizing by choosing CustomerRelationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Product Configuration -> BAdI: Enhancements forProduct Configuration.

You can set values for user-defined object characteristics that relate to table fields with the methodSET_CONTEXT in the BAdI CRM_CONFIG_BADI and add more object characteristics at runtime.However, you can only use object characteristics that relate to a table field. You can use the methodSET_VALUE for user-defined fields and set corresponding values. You can also transfer values fromproduct- and individual object attributes to the Configuration Engine with the new methodSET_Iobject_Context. In addition, you can update the sales order fields with data returned from theConfiguration Engine using the method CHANGE_FIELDS_AFTER_CONF.


You have determined an object characteristic for the field, the value of which you want to use in theconfiguration model.

To do so, you call the transaction CT04 in SAP ECC and enter the table and field names for the field thatyou want to assign to the object characteristic, on the tab page Additional Data. If you only want to allowread access to the context parameters you need to set the indicator Not Ready for Input on the tab pageAdditional Data .

1.9.9.6 Characteristics for Display of Messages (New)

Use


You can use characteristics with a certain naming convention in order to display messages on thecharacteristic value assignment screen. In this way, you can display additional information in the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 97

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Configuration Engine, depending on the current state of the configuration.

For example, you can use this function to make further information such as explanations of derivedvalues or technical recommendations, available to the user. The long text for the characteristic value thatrepresents the message is always displayed. The characteristic description (short text) is only displayedwhen there is no long text available.

The messages can be grouped into the following types:

- Information

- Warning messages

- Error messages

These message types are all shown differently on the user interface.

The text is displayed up to a maximum of 80 characters. If the text is longer than 80 characters, dots afterthe text indicate that more information is available. The complete text can be displayed by means of alink.

Note: The function is only supported if the characteristic name was created with a corresponding prefix.This prefix is "UIMESSAGE_" by default. You can change this prefix with the parametercharacteristics.messagecstics.prefix in Extended Configuration Management (XCM) and adjust it to yourrequirements.

If you deactivate the function using the parameter characteristics.messagecstics.enable, then thecharacteristic is shown on the user interface like the other characteristics, that is, using the regular displaytype. It is not hidden, however.


You need to have created the desired dependency in product modeling for the characteristic and you mustbe able to display the characteristic. In addition, call transaction CT04 in SAP ECC, define thecorresponding dependency and choose the value Blank Character for the indicator No Display on the tabpage Additional Data.

You can make the settings for this function in XCM by using the following parameters:

Parameter Default Value Description

characteristics.messagecstics.enable T You can activate or deactivate thefunction with this parameter. If you set the value "F", then the characteristic is shown using theregular display type.

characteristics.messagecstics.prefix "UIMESSAGE_" You can determine the prefix forthe characteristic with this parameter. If this function should be used for a characteristic, thecharacteristic description needs to have this prefix.

characteristcs.messagecstics.showid F You use this parameter todetermine whether the ID of the message, that is, the characteristic value, should also be shown in thedisplay.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 98

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.9.9.7 Product Modeling (Enhanced)

Use


The changed Product Modeling Environment (PME) is available. The following changes andenhancements are included:

- New interfaceA new, browser-based interface is available.

- Transport product models between different CRM systemsYou can use this to create a product model in a test system, for example, and later transport it to aproduction system.

- Active and inactive versionsTo avoid defect or incomplete product models, you can make changes to an inactive version. Whenyou are finished with your changes you replace the active version with the version you changed andthen release it. You cannot release an inactive version.

- Configurable componentsThe product structure contains all possible components. You can define rules that determine underwhich conditions a component can be chosen.

- Structure with multiple levelsA component can be reconfigured and have a customer-defined product structure.

- Relationships in the product structureA product with components can transfer characteristic value assignments to these, or vice versa.

- The data type Date is possible for characteristics.

- Static and dynamic characteristic attributesA characteristic can have a value that is read-only and is therefore only displayed.

- Characteristic groupsCharacteristics can be bundled into groups for better structuring. The characteristic groups areshown on the interface as tab pages.

- The use of custom functions in relationships is possible.

- There are multiple types of dependencies based on tables, such as default values, assigned valuesand value range restrictions.

- There is a hierarchy tree that displays products, classes, characteristics, values and productstructures as well as their relationships to each other.

- It is possible to start the configurator with one click, to test the current configuration rules.

- Integration with the maintenance of other master data around the product.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 99

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


The data model was not changed. However, manual adjustments to the new options and means ofexpression are necessary for the upgrade of CRM 4.0 or CRM 5.0.


Define the settings for product models under Define Settings for Product Models.

See also

For information about product modelling, see SAP Library under SAP Customer RelationshipManagement -> Components and Functions -> Master Data -> Products -> Functions -> ModelingConfigurable Products.

1.9.10 CRM-BF-PR Pricing

1.9.10.1 Terminology in Condition Maintenance (Changed)

Use



Use New Description






Use New Description


Pricing Price type



The previous terminology ('condition type' and 'condition maintenance group') will be kept in the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 100

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Customizing of the affected uses. Note that 'condition type' on the Web UI indicates something differentthan in Customizing.

1.9.10.2 Credit Analyst Workbench (New)

Use


You can use the Credit Analyst Workbench to check and further process sales transactions that wereblocked as the result of the credit- and credit rating check .

You can display blocked as well as released sales orders in an overview list. In addition, you can displaysales orders that have no valid letters of credit assigned to them.

The sales transactions are arranged together and displayed for each payer.

You can check the credit situation for each customer and then decide, based on your credit policy, howthe sales orders should be further processed.

You have the following options:

- Check transactions for credit rating and credit worthiness

- Release transactions after credit rating- and credit check

- Reject all items

- Navigate to documents and make changes there

You can also perform the following actions immediately:

- Release all of a payer's transactions

- Reject all of a payer's transactions

- Check all of a payer's transactions

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 101

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.9.10.3 Approval Process for Price Changes in Sales Orders (New

Use


You can prevent employees from manually changing prices that are automatically calculated usingpricing. You can allow certain employees to manually change prices in the sales order. If the employeedoes not have the authorization to change prices, the system triggers an approval process.

If an employee wants to manually change the price of an order item that was automatically assigned inthe sales order or complaint using pricing, the system checks if he or she is authorized to change prices. Ifthe employee has no authorization, this change must be approved by someone entitled to grant approval,such as the head of department. An approval process is triggered by the system.

The changes made by the employee are examined by the head of department, and then approved. If pricechanges are made by someone not entitled to make them, the follow-up transactions billing and shippingare not triggered. Depending on the customer type, a billing- and shipping block is set in the sales order.When the head of department approves the price change, the approval process is complete, and thestatuses Blocked for Billing and Blocked for Shipping are cleared. The follow-up transactions can then betriggered again. The person entitled to grant approval (head of department) can change prices withouttriggering the approval process, provided that the authorization object CNDAPPROVE is assigned to himor her.


- In SAP CRM Customizing, assign the action profiles STOP_SHIPPING and STOP_BILLING,delivered as standard by SAP, to the transaction type in which you want to use this function. Thesystem checks, with the help of these action profiles, if manual price changes have been performed.The system also checks if the user can change prices without triggering the approval process.

- You can make the settings in SAP CRM Customizing under Assign Action Profile to the BusinessTransaction Type.

- Create appropriate status profiles. Use the status profiles CRMSTSHP and CRMSTBILL, availableas standard, as templates. You can find further information in the SAP CRM Implementation Guide(IMG) under Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings -> StatusManagement -> Change Status Profile for User Status.

- Assign this status profile to the transaction type that you want to use.

- The user who clears the status must have authorization for the authorization object CNDAPPROV.The person entitled to grant approval must be assigned to the authorization object CNDAPPROV sothat they can change prices without triggering an approval process.

- Activate the workflow template CNDDAPPR, delivered as standard by SAP.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 102

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.9.10.4 Display Price List(s) for an Account (New)

Use


You can display the price list(s) for an account on the account overview page by choosing More -> PriceList Preview. Your sales employees can then search for the price list for an account and find out the priceof a specific product.

If multiple price lists are assigned to an account, a dialog box appears on the user interface in which youcan select the required list.

A PDF document then opens which displays the respective price list for the account with the products andtheir net prices.


You use the action profile NETPRICELIST in default Customizing for actions in the price list. You canfind more information in the SAP Implementation Guide (IMG) by choosing Customer RelationshipManagement -> Basic Functions -> Actions -> Actions in the Price List -> Change Actions andConditions -> Define Action Profiles and Actions.

1.9.11 CRM-BF-COM Content Management

1.9.11.1 Enhancements for Content Management (Changed)

Use

The following enhancement has been added to Content Management:

Template Designer

You can use Template designer to draw CRM data from a Web service and insert it in a document, eitherin Microsoft Word format, or in Adobe PDF format..

Adobe DPF documents are read-only.

You can add these documents as attachments to a business object in Content Management by:

- Selecting the attachment from Content Management or local hard disk

- Entering a corresponding URL

- Selecting a document template

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 103

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.9.12 CRM-BF-WST Web Services Tool

1.9.12.1 Web Services Tool (New)

Use


You can use this tool to create basic Web services based on the BOL design layer.

The design layer tool already available enables UI objects to be modeled. A new entity referred to as aservice object, similar to a UI object but with additional attributes, has been introduced to allow Webservice objects to be created.

The Web services tool transforms the finalized service objects into a function module, which is then usedby NetWeaver to generate the corresponding Web services.

The tool comprises a wizard that guides you through the service definition process, which consists of fourmain steps:

1. Select the service object and the operations required. The following are supported:

- Basic queries

- Read operations

- Create operations

- Change operations

2. Select the attributes required based on the BOL tree displayed for the object. By navigating throughthe tree, you can select the relevant attributes for the relationships you require.

3. Maintain the attributes for the relationships of the selected object and the attributes of the queryobject.

4. Enter certain technical information, save and activate the service object, and then set to Productive.

Note that to use your services in other systems you have to transport them manually. For moreinformation, see Transport Service Objects.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 104

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


To improve performance, you should apply the Basis corrections in Note 964749. This correction speedsup the deletion of Web services, which results in faster activation, as deletion is part of this process.

You might also need to apply Note 954604 (Timeout during creation of a service definition).

1.9.12.2 Web Service Consumption Tool (New for SP02)

Use


The Web service consumption tool enables you to create a new BOL object, that is, a BOL componentwith a root BOL object and search objects, in the business object layer. This means that if you need toretrieve data from locations other than SAP CRM using Web services, the BOL object enables you tomake this data available on the UI using the same tools provided for standard CRM functionality.

The Web service consumption tool reuses standard SAP NetWeaver tools. The CRM tool currentlysupports the consumption of read and query services.

The tool is available in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management under UI Framework-> UI Framework Definition -> Web Services -> Web Service Consumption Tool: Create BOLObjects.

1.9.12.3 Web Services Tool (Enhanced)

Use


The tool has been included in the Service Professional role (work center "Service Operations") andenhanced with the following features:

- Compound ServicesWhen you create a Web service, you are restricted to one root object of the specified component(business object). This means that when you select a root object such as BTOrder (BusinessTransaction), you are restricted to the dependent objects within that component, and you cannotcreate relationships to objects contained in other components, such as Business Partner.By selecting a component set, however, you can use data from different components contained

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 105

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

within the component set. To do this, you create relationships from the source component to theadditional components, that is between the relevant access objects, thus enabling more than one rootobject to be processed. This type of service is referred to as a compound service, and is available forread and change services. Note that when working with change compound services, you can makeany changes provided they do not involve creating a new root object. For example:

- You can create a new address for an existing business partner, or change an existing priority orcontact in a sales order.

- If you are working with the sales order, you cannot create a new contactWhen creating a service object, you select a business object and root object as before. However youalso decide whether the service object is to constitute a compound service and, if this is applicable,you select the relevant component set. The objects this set contains are shown in the IncludedObjects field.

- Error HandlingThe status of a service object was previously changed from Active to Draft if errors occurred duringthe generation process following an import into another system, while, confusingly, the Productivestatus remained as it was.Now the status is not changed, but the system indicates that an import generation error has occurred,enabling you to manually trigger regeneration directly from the UI.

- Authorization ObjectIn addition to the existing authorization checks (for activating Web services, for example), a newauthorization object CRM_WST is available specifically for the Web services tool. It is currentlyonly used to check the authorization for transporting service objects.

- Service-Enablement InformationThis indicates for which operations a selected BOL object has been enabled. The information isavailable on wizard screen 2 in expert mode only.

- Backend ClientsThe clients in which the Web service has been released are listed on wizard screen 4 in expert mode.

- Mandatory Information in Node AttributesAn indicator available in the node attributes on wizard screen 2, expert mode, shows that anattribute is mandatory for create operations.This means that even if it is not explicitly selected, itwill be generated in the input structure of the create operation.Knowing this, you have the option of selecting the attribute and specifying a default value for it onwizard screen 3.

- Export of Tree Structure to ExcelThis provides a documentation of the service object in an Excel-based form. The selected attributesare shown hierarchically with their position within the BOL structure, together with informationcontained on wizard screen 3, such as excluded information and defaults. This function is availableon wizard screens 2 and 3.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 106

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.10 CRM-BE Billing

1.10.1 Transfer of Accounting Indicator to Billing (New)

Use


The accounting indicator field in service transactions can be transferred to billing, where it is used forpricing and account determination.


To enable transfer of the accounting indicator, activate one of the following features in the IMG underCustomer Relationship Management -> Billing -> Configure Application:

- Integration with Contract Accounting

- Enhanced Attributes for Pricing

1.10.2 Intercompany Billing (Enhanced)

Use


The currency and exchange rate of an intercompany invoice is derived from settings in a newCustomizing activity. This is because the invoice currency is not necessarily the same as the currency ofthe sales order.

You assign a reference sales area (sales organization, distribution channel, and division) to each businessunit that issues intercompany invoices. The system then determines the relevant currency and exchangerate type for intercompany billing from the partner master data of the payer.

This setting also enables the system to determine the appropriate credit control area for intercompanyinvoices from the IMG activity Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data ->Cross-System Assignment of Organizational Units -> Assign Credit Control Areas to SalesOrganizational Units.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 107

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You specify the reference sales area in Customizing for CRM, by choosing Billing -> IntercompanyBilling -> Specify Sales Area Data for Determination of Invoice Currency.

1.10.3 Transfer of Billing Data to SAP GTS for Intrastat Declarations (New)

Use


You can transfer billing data from SAP CRM to SAP Global Trade Services (SAP GTS) in order to createIntrastat declarations.

You can find the data transfer report in the SAP Easy Access menu under Sales -> Billing -> TransferData for Intrastat to SAP GTS. According to the settings you make for data selection, the report filtersand transfers billing data that meets the following criteria:

- The billing document was created for an Intrastat-relevant business transactionRelevant transactions are those in which goods movement takes place and those in which billingamounts are adjusted (for example, complaints).

- The departure and destination countries are such that the transaction is relevant for Intrastatdeclarations

- The billing document has been transferred to accountingThe report only selects documents that can no longer be changed, since they have been transferredto accounting. This ensures that only final values are transferred to SAP GTS, and that values inSAP GTS are always consistent with values in accounting.


You determine which item categories correspond to which Intrastat codes for business transaction typesand statistical procedures. You do this in the IMG under Customer Relationship Management ->Billing -> Integration -> Transfer of Billing Documents to Foreign Trade -> Transfer to SAP GTS3.0 and Later Releases -> Transfer of Billing Data for Intrastat Declarations.

If required, you can use the Business Add-In in the above IMG section to modify how the data transferreport selects billing documents and maps data to SAP GTS.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 108

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.10.4 Claim Settlements (New)

Use


Claims related to trade promotion management (TPM) and market development funds (MDF) are settledin the SAP CRM billing component and transferred to the following integrated applications:

- SAP ERP Financials (accounts payable and receivable, controlling)

- SAP ERP Dispute Management (dispute cases for deduction claims, prepayments, and write-offs)

The following is an overview of the claim settlement functions in SAP CRM billing.

Claims and Prepayments

When a claim is approved or a prepayment triggered, items from the claim or prepayment transaction aretransferred to the billing due list. Settlement takes place either during a scheduled settlement run or istriggered manually.

During settlement, credit memos are created for the payable amount. In the case of deduction claims,which do not require a payout, the credit memo clears a dispute case in SAP ERP Dispute Management.

You can activate an availability check to determine whether the fund budget is sufficient to reimburseeach claim item. If the budget is insufficient, the billing due list item remains open.

You can also make partial payouts for claims if the fund budget is insufficient for a full payment.

Write-Offs

Amounts that are written off because they have been overpayed to a claiming account or are unresolvedare also processed in billing. These amounts are posted as expenses in accounting.

Cancellation and Correction

You can cancel and correct settlements. For more information, see the application help for settlements inclaims management.

Note: You cannot use the following functions for claim transactions:

- Intercompany billing

- Supplementary invoice

- Retroactive billing

- Condition-based invoice split


You need to make the following settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, underBilling:

- Activate the following features (activity Configure Application):

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 109

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Enhanced Account Determination

- Funds Management Integration

- Marketing Set

- Set the billing relevance of all claims-related item categories to Value-Based Billing AfterApproval (activity Define Billing Relevance of Item Categories)

- Define the billing types that you require for settling claims (activity Define Billing Types):

- Assign one of the predefined billing categories for prepayments or claims.

- Assign any cancellation copy requirements that you require. You can use a predefined copyrequirement, or create your own in the activity Define Copy Requirements and implement it inthe activity System Enhancements -> Business Add-Ins ->Copy Requirements for Cancellation.

- If required, assign an account determination type for the billing type.Note that account determination types assigned to billing types override the accountdetermination type assigned to the entire application (in the IMG section Integration ->Transfer of Billing Documents to Accounting).

- Define the billing item categories that you want to use for claim settlements (activity Define BillingItem Categories)

- Assign each transaction type and item category for claims to the corresponding billing itemcategories (activity Item Category Determination -> Assign Item Categories)

You need to make the following settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, underBilling -> Integration -> Transfer of Billing Documents to Accounting -> Transfer to AccountsReceivable (FI-AR) and Accounts Payable (FI-AP):

- Specify symbolic accounts for determining the following in SAP ERP Financials :

- Expense and accrual accounts for claims, depending on the sales organization and expensetype

- Balance sheet accounts for prepayments, depending on the sales organization and expensetype

You do this in the activity Enhanced Account Determination -> Assign Symbolic Account Key.

- Specify the document types that you want to use to post billing data in accounting (activity AssignDocument Types)

- Specify the dunning block and payment terms for prepayments (activity Define Parameters forPrepayment)

You also need to set up data exchange according to SAP Note 883162 to enable vendor-based integrationwith accounts payable in SAP ERP. In particular, you need to make settings for the following:

- The billing type that you use for integration with accounts payable

- The billing category Claim Settlement (Accts Payable)

See also

For an overview of claims management functions, see the release note Claims Management (New).

For detailed information on claims and claim settlement, see the application help for claims management.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 110

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.10.5 CRM-BE-DL Billing Due List

1.10.5.1 Reference to Letter of Credit in Billing Documents (New)

Use


Information relating to letters of credit is transferred from relevant sales orders to the billing due list, andsubsequently to billing documents. The following information is transferred:

- Letter of credit GUID (globally unique ID)

- Indicator showing whether a letter of credit is required for the sales order

If a letter of credit is issued for a sales transaction, the name and address of the business partners stored inthe letter of credit must be printed on an invoice, instead of the details of the sold-to party in the salesorder. The letter of credit information is, therefore, passed to the Smart Forms interface for printing.

Note

- The letter of credit ID is a split criterion for billing documents. For each billing due list item with aseparate letter of credit assigned, a separate billing document is created.

- You need to adjust your Smart Forms setup to enable the address of the letter of credit partner to beprinted on invoices.


To enable the letter of credit reference to be transferred to billing documents, you need to activate thefeature Integration with SAP GTS from 3.0. You do this in the IMG under Customer RelationshipManagement -> Billing -> Configure Application.

1.10.6 CRM-BE-FI Transfer to Accounting

1.10.6.1 Controlling Integration for Intercompany Billing (New)

Use


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 111

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Data from intercompany invoices is transferred to accounting and controlling in an integrated SAP ERPsystem. Data from the relevant order is used in SAP ERP to derive account assignments for both theseller and supplier.

Controlling objects are created in profit center accounting and profitability analysis when an order iscreated or changed. Revenue and cost of goods sold are posted in controlling.

Note:

- Controlling integration is supported as of ERP 2005, SAP_APPL, Support Package 08.

- Controlling integration for intercompany billing is only supported if you use service partsmanagement (see "Customizing" below).

- Controlling integration is not supported if you usemulti-level intercompany billing.


You have activated the system configuration for service parts management, by choosing CustomerRelationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Activate System Configuration forService Parts Management.

1.11 CRM-RB Rebate Processing

1.11.1 Terminology in Condition Maintenance (Changed)

Use



Use New Description






______________________________________________________________SAP AG 112

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Use New Description


Pricing Price type



The previous terminology ('condition type' and 'condition maintenance group') will be kept in theCustomizing of the affected uses. Note that 'condition type' on the Web UI indicates something differentthan in Customizing.

1.11.2 SAP CRM Rebate Processing WebClient UI (Enhanced)

Use

The following functions of SAP CRM rebate processing are now available in the WebClient UI:

- Rebate agreements

- Display of rebate activity detailsOn the agreement item detail page, you can navigate from the assignment block Rebate ActivitySummary to the new page Rebate Activity Details which contains the following information:

- Activity summary

- Period details

- Condition details

- Adjustment details

- Settlement details

- Rebate due listNote the following differences between the rebate due list in the WebClient UI and SAP GUI:

- WebClient UIRebate activity detail view availableBackground processing not availableSetting up of variants for batch processing not available

- SAP GUIRebate activity detail view not available

- Manual processing and adjustment support

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 113

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Mass processing

1.11.3

Use


The following functions are now available in rebate processing:

- Mass maintenance for rebate agreementsYou can use this function to carry out mass changes for rebate agreements at header, item orcondition level.For example, you can further edit rebate agreements that have been created using mass generation.Moreover, you can track your mass changes in the mass change logs.You can use a new administrative function, available via the SAP Easy Access screen, to massgenerate rebate agreements from either template rebate agreements or other productive rebateagreements. The agreements can be generated for one or more business partners.

- Rebate activity detailsThe new rebate activity details page offers information about a particular rebate activity. A rebateactivity, generally speaking, is a rebate due list item. The following information is available on therebate activity details page:

- Display of activity summary with information on total values to date

- Display of rebate activities by cumulation period

- Display of information on rebate conditions, adjustment details, settlement details, andinvoices from sales

- Free-goods rebatesYou can now realize free-goods rebate programs using rebate processing in CRM. The free-goodscapability provides the possibility to pay out earned rebates in the form of free products.The calculation methods for the quantity of free products to be shipped to the customer could eitherbe value-based or quantity-based:

- Value-based: For $X of product A purchased, Y units of product B are earned

- Quantity-based: For N units of product A purchased, M units of product B are earnedThis new capability is also delivered with the ability to automatically generate a sales order forfree-goods rebates at the time of settlement.

- SPM functions in rebate processing

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 114

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Consumable rebatesWhen you activate the system configuration for service parts management (SPM), you canadditionally integrate consumable rebate programs into rebate processing. Consumable rebateprocessing is only available within service parts management.Consumable rebate programs consist of sequences of earning-, waiting- and consumption periods,which you can define according to your business needs. The sales volume for a customer isaccumulated within a defined earning period and the resulting earned rebate balance is calculated.The customer can return products against this earned rebate balance within a defined consumptionperiod. If a waiting period has been defined, the customer may be required to wait before he isallowed to return products.When the customer requests to return products, the return value is validated against the earnedrebate account balance. The total value of the customer's returns is restricted to the amount of theearned rebate balance for a particular earning period.Rebates earned in one particular earning period can only be consumed in the correspondingconsumption period. Any remaining rebate balance at the end of a consumption (return) period canbe rolled-over for use in the next consumption period, settled in the form of a credit memo, orclosed.Rebate activity details page for consumable rebatesThe rebate activity details page offers the following additional information and functions forconsumable rebate programs:

- Display of current and future consumable balanceThese figures allow you to answer customer inquiries concerning their current accountbalance:The current consumable value includes rebates that have been earned to date, have not yet beenconsumed or closed, and can currently be consumed because the corresponding consumptionperiods are open.The future consumable value includes rebates that have been earned to date and can beconsumed in future consumption periods.The current and future consumable values amount to the earned rebates to date that have notyet been consumed or closed.

- Rebate activity values on period levelOn period level, you can carry out partial settlements, post base adjustments and balanceadjustments, close periods, or roll over the balance from one consumption period to the next.


To use the free-goods rebate program, you must make the following settings in Customizing for SAPCustomer Relationship Management (SAP CRM):

- Activate free-goods rebate processing under Rebate Processing -> Configure Application.

- Define the corresponding condition types as relevant for free-goods rebates under RebateProcessing -> Set Up Rebate Determination -> Create Condition Types.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 115

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Assign the condition type to a condition maintenance group under Rebate Processing -> Set UpRebate Determination -> Create Condition Maintenance Group.

- Assign the condition maintenance group to the corresponding item category under Transactions ->Basic Settings -> Define Item Categories.

- Ensure that the standard action settings for the creation of the sales order for free-goods rebates arein line with your business processes. You do this by choosing Basic Functions -> Actions -> Actionsin Rebate Processing:

- You have ensured that the correct transaction type and condition for discount are assigned forgenerating the sales order.

- You have ensured that the sales order is generated at the correct time in rebate processing.In the standard delivery, the sales order for free-goods rebates is created when the settlementdocument has been transferred to financial accounting and the corresponding action has beenexecuted via the WebClient UI or via the selection report in the Post Processing Framework.Note that you have to set up the report in the Post Processing Framework if you would like toexecute the action via the report, for example on a regular basis.

For more information on the Customizing settings for free-goods rebates, see the application help forSAP Customer Relationship Management in the SAP Library under Components and Functions -> Sales-> Rebate Processing -> Free-Goods Rebates.

To use the consumable rebate program, you must make the following settings in Customizing for SAPCRM:

- Configure service parts management.Specifically, ensure that the complaints and returns entitlement integration is configured to supportyour program returns.

- Mark the item categories that you want to use for the processing of consumable rebates asrebate-relevant in entitlement management under Entitlement Management -> Integration ->Integration to Complaints and Returns -> Assign Relevance of Returns Entitlements to Compl. andReturns.

- Mark the products that can be returned in the context of consumable rebate programs as relevant forthe rolling purchase history in entitlement management. You do this in the CRM WebClient UI onthe page Entitlement Profiles:

- In the dropdown box Entitlement Profile Category select Rolling Purch. Hist

- In the dropdown box Entitlement Profile Set select Product ID

- Create an entry for the product, and in the dropdown box Profile ID select Eligible

- Activate consumable rebate processing under Rebate Processing -> Configure Application.

- Define the sequences of earning, waiting and consumption under Rebate Processing -> RebateProfiles -> Define Consumable Rebate Profile.

- If applicable, use a BAdI implementation to influence the calculation of the consumable value.Define the BAdI implementation under Rebate Processing -> System Enhancements -> BAdI:Calculation of Consumable Rebate Value.

For more information on the Customizing settings for consumable rebates, see the aplication help forSAP Customer Relationship Management in the SAP Library under Components and Functions -> Sales

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 116

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

-> Rebate Processing -> SPM Functions in Rebate Processing.

1.12 CRM-EM CRM Entitlement Management

1.12.1 Entitlements Management (Enhanced )

Use

This release note is relevant only if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0

Entitlement management will now be available on the Web-based user interface. You can use entitlementmanagement to

- Maintain deposit entitlements to keep track of liabilities of customers, including deposit invoicing,deposit deferral, defer clearing and deposit credit

- Maintain return entitlements, to keep track of the products that the customer is allowed to return,

- Use automatic consumption to reduce entitlement quantities to the desired extent,

- Maintain inbound due-lists, which help you capture information from external documents that eitheraffect existing entitlements or determine how you create entitlements,

- Maintain settlement due-lists to initiate either CRM Billing or an FI posting, to settle the liabilitiestriggered by entitlements

- Set expiration dates and activation periods for entitlements and also determine if and whichpartners/products are eligible for schemes such as the rolling purchase history or deposit credit ordirect purchase program

all on the new Web interface.

Intercompany Entitlements Processing (New)

Entitlements management helps you track entitlements for internal companies or organizations also. Thisfunction allows you to track intercompany entitlements and lets you know of positive or negativebalances, so you can settle liabilities between companies and subsidiaries.

When inter-company liabilities are processed, intercompany entitlements are both created and consumedautomatically, depending on whether the entitlement involves a positive or negative balance.

Consumable Rebates (Enhanced)

Rebates are now integrated into Entitlement Management. Consumable rebates are what was previouslyknown as non-core volume-based entitlements. This function focuses on the value of sales and returns,rather than their quantity. It works around new or unused parts.

It operates like a returns entitlement, which works with values; but unlike rolling purchase history, whichworks with quantities. With consumable rebates, accumulated values can be used to return new or

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 117

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

unused parts to the manufacturer.


- The new UI role: Service Parts Management (SPL) This provides authorization for the use of entitlement management in user administration.

- The authorization profile: SAP_CRM_UIU_SPL_PROFESSIONAL, use transaction PFCG


To use entitlement management, you have activated the system configuration for service partsmanagement. To do this, see Prerequisite for Entitlement Management

You also have to make the corresponding settings in Customizing

- For business logic enhancements in Customizing, under Customer Relationship Management ->Entitlement Management -> System Enhancements -> Define Business Logic Enhancements and

- Customer Relationship Management -> Entitlement Management -> Basic Functions ->Entitlement Programs -> Define Number Range and Residence Time for Programs

For information about new activities and existing activities that have been changed, renamed or deleted,see New, Changed and Removed IMG Activities in SAP CRM 5.2

1.13 CRM-BTX Business Transactions

1.13.1 Use of the Maintenance Framework for Business Transactions (New)

Use


The maintenance framework for business transactions (BTMF) is a tool with which you can executechange processes in any sales transaction. For now, it is used only for the provider contract as standardand offers a number of actions that the user can select on the user interface by using pushbuttons. Thepossible change processes are executed with the corresponding methods, as follows:

Method Change process

EXECUTE Execute process

FINISH Finish process

CANCEL Cancel process

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 118

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

REJECT Reject process object

RELEASE Release process object

The navigation connected with the action is specified by the system.

In the standard system, these methods are implemented for the following change processes that you canchoose in the provider contract:

- Extend contract and undo extension

- Cancel contract and undo cancellation

- Change product configuration

- Change product

- Change technical data (SIM card, for example)

- Change bank address

- Change customer address

Corresponding classes of the interface IF_CRM_BTMF are implemented for these processes as standard.You can use these example implementations to define dedicated change processes and adjust them to therequirements of your business.

The Business Rule Framework (BRF) is used to check the change processes. The CHECK method of theBTMF is available for this and is always called by the BTMF first and, with the help of the BRF, checksif the change process may be executed.

1.13.2 Sale of External Products (New)

Use


In service parts management, you can sell products for which there is no product master available in yourSAP CRM. You may not manage them in your stock because, for example, the product does not fit inwith your product assortment. Such products are called external products.

Significantly, in a similar way to regular third-party order processing, the delivery of the externalproducts is taken on by an external supplier, who then delivers the products directly to the customer.External products can be service parts such as car tires, or other products, like promotional gifts. To sellthe external products, you need to determine the required conditions with the external supplier using apurchasing contract. Among other conditions, you determine the external products and their prices in thepurchasing contract.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 119

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The external supplier transfers the sales order data for external products to your SAP CRM using EDI,and the system then automatically creates the sales orders.

The sales order is linked with the purchasing contract, so you can use the condition types from the SAPECC purchasing contract in the SAP CRM sales order. The condition types are then incorporated into thesales order in the pricing. This is dependent on your customizing settings.

You can bill the external products as usual. In SAP ECC, the system automatically creates a credit memofor the external supplier and in SAP CRM, the system creates a debit memo for the customer. In addition,complaints about external products can also be handled using this process and are always based oncustomer invoices as follow-up transactions.

Note: Billing amounts cannot be recalculated for external products. If you want to change the unit ofmeasure in the sales order for which billing has already taken place, you have to cancel the billingdocument and create a new sales order.


General Effects

- The system configuration for service parts management is activated. You can find furtherinformation in the SAP Implementation Guide (IMG) for Customer Relationship Management underActivate System Configuration for Service Parts Management.

- You have set the indicator External Products Allowed in the definition of the transaction type.You can make these settings in SAP CRM Customizing under Define Transaction Types.

- In the sales order, the External Product indicator must be set at item level.

- The sales order is linked with a valid purchasing contract.

- You have determined the customizing settings for pricing.See Define Mapping for Condition Types from Application BBP to Application

Effects on Billing

To enable tax to be calculated correctly for external products during billing, you need to activate thefeature Product Tax Group (Third-Party Order). You do this in Customizing for CRM by choosingConfigure Application. Select the feature and save your settings.

You need to ensure that the correct revenue accounts are determined for external products . You do this inCustomizing for CRM by choosing Assign Revenue Accounts for Sales Transactions.

Make sure that you have at least one entry without an account assignment group assigned (in the fieldAccountGrp).

See also

Release note: Complaints for External Products (New)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 120

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.13.3 Sold-To Party Profiles in Sales Orders (New)

Use


You can indicate a sold-to order profile in a sales order. This profile depends on the sold-to party andcontains predefined values for fields in the sales order. If the system determines a sold-to party profile fora sold-to party, it copies these predefined values into the sales order.

Using the sold-to party profiles, you can predefine field values in the shipping and availability checkareas in the sales order. For example, if some customers often require prompt shipment of goods, you cancreate a sold-to party profile "Quick Delivery" that contains respective settings to ensure fast delivery.Similar to the sales area data, sold-to party profiles are a way of predefining values for fields in the salesorder.

This function is only available if the system configuration for service parts management is active.

1.13.4 Different Actions in Sales Orders Depending on Transaction Mode (New)

Use


You can set up the system to trigger different action profiles depending on the transaction mode(meaning, whether you are creating or editing a sales order). For example, you can print the order whenyou create it, but send an e-mail when you are changing it.

1.13.5 Displaying Customer-Specific Fields/Business Transaction Components

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 121

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

in the CRM WebClient UI (New for SP02)

Use


If you have enhanced the business transaction components Customer_H for customer-specific headerdata, or Customer_I for customer-specific item data, you can easily display the new fields in the CRMWebClient UI. You do this by using the UI Configuration Tool in the Customizing activity at CustomerRelationship Management -> UI Framework -> UI Framework Definition -> Configure User Interface.

By default, the corresponding BSP components BTCUSTOMER_H for customer-specific header data, orBTCUSTOMER_I for customer-specific item data, are available in the respective overview pages of theheader- or item components of the business transactions, as available assignment blocks.

For example, the view SOHOverView of BSP component BT115H_SLSO, which depicts the overviewpage for the sales order header, contains the BSP component BTCUSTOMER_H. The view SOIOverViewof BSP component BT131I_SLS, which depicts the overview page at item level, contains the BSPcomponent BTCUSTOMER_I.

So that the new fields in the CRM WebClient UI can be displayed in the Customer Fields assignmentblock, you must still transfer these BSP components to the list of displayed assignment blocks, in therespective overview pages.

You must also create at least one configuration, with which you define the layout, for the view CustomerIof BSP component BTCUSTOMER_I, or for the view CustomerH of BSP component BTCUSTOMER_H.You thereby define how the fields in the assignment block are displayed.

1.13.6 Subsequent assignment of transactions

Use


You can now assign subsequent transactions to transactions from header to item level and vice versa. Youdo this under the Transaction History assignment block, by choosing the Subsequent Assignmentpushbutton.

You can assign all transactions subsequently which have been defined in the object releationship profile

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 122

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

under Define Object Reference Profile.

You can also assign multiple transactions subsequently, and you can delete assignments.

Additionally, the Business Add-In (CRM_DOCFLOW_FILTER) is available if you want specifictransactions to appear for subsequent assignment in the Transaction History assignment block. You canaccess this Business Add-In via transaction SE18.

1.13.7 Business Object Layer and Web Services (Enhanced)

Use


The key structure CRMST_DOCFLOW_LOG_KEY of the business object layer (BOL) nodeBTDocFlow has been enhanced. This affects Web services that have been generated using the Webservices tool.


If the Web service has the status Active you can regenerate the structures. If the status is already set toProductive you need to copy the existing Web service to create a new version.

1.13.8 CRM-BTX-LEA Lead Management

1.13.8.1 Duplicate Check for Leads (New)

Use


You use the duplicate check for leads to identify lead duplicates when a new lead is created (but not yetsaved) or an existing lead is changed. Duplicate leads can then be merged either automatically ormanually to reduce the cost and effort of processing them.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 123

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Lead deduplication is channel-independent, and can be triggered manually or automatically when savingdata.

An optional workflow informs the lead owner about merges. This workflow is defined via the partnerfunction. Standard settings are Employee Responsible, Sales Representative, and Employee Responsibleat Partner.


To enable the duplicate check for leads, you have made the necessary settings in Customizing forCustomer Relationship Management, by choosing Transactions -> Settings for Leads -> Assign Classesfor Deduplication.

1.13.9 CRM-BTX-OPP Opportunities

1.13.9.1 Opportunity Assessment Determination Based on Expected Sales(New)

Use

This release note is only relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.2 .

You can now qualify an opportunity by timely completion of an assessment (questionnaire). The systemprompts the user with an assessment when either the expected sales volume, or the expected total value,crosses a threshold value. The threshold value is defined in Customizing.

The expected sales volume is maintained at the opportunity header level. The expected total value is thesum of the expected sales values maintained at the opportunity item level.


You define threshold value for either expected sales volume, or expected total value, and the assessmentdetermination criteria in the Customizing under:

1. Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Opportunities -> SalesMethodology -> Questionnaire for Opportinities -> Define Determination Criteria for Questionnaires

2. Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Opportunities -> SalesMethodology -> Questionnaire for Opportinities -> Define Determination for Questionnaires

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 124

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.13.9.2 Transfer Buying Center Between Opportunity and Account (New)

Use


You can transfer the buying center from the account (to which the opportunity pertains) to theopportunity. In this case, the account buying center replaces any buying center you may have defined forthe opportunity. When the related account has more than one buying center, the user can choose whichbuying center to transfer to the opportunity.

When the buying center has been defined in the opportunity, you can save the buying center to therelevant account. The feature allows a two-way transfer of buying center between opportunity andaccount. The options are provided under More in the Contacts area of the opportunity overview page.

Note:

This feature is applicable for opportunities of type sales methodology.

1.13.9.3 Competitor Information for an Opportunity (Enhanced)

Use


You can maintain competitor information for opportunities in one of the following modes:

o At the opportunity header level (for the opportunity as a whole)

o At the opportunity item level (for opportunity products)

For an opportunity, you can also maintain the following competitor information:

o Competitor products relevant to the opportunity

o The expected sales volume (with currency) for each competitor

o The probability of the competitor succeeding

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 125

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

o The strength and weakness of each competitor

o The successful competitor(s) when the opportunity is lost

Input help from master data is available for competitor and competitor product information. Thecompetitor product information, however, need not be a part of master data.

When applicale, input help and hyperlinks to access competitor and product master data are available.


In Customizing, you can define whether opportunity competitor information will be maintained at theopportunity header level, or at the opportunity item level. This setting is done in Customizing for CRMby choosing Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings -> DefineTransaction Types . You define this in the Competitor area of the Customizing header dialog box. for theselected transaction type.

1.13.9.4 Enhancements to Opportunities in CRM (Changed)

Use


The following functions have been enhanced:

Opportunity hierarchies

You can link a subopportunity directly to a product in the Master Opportunity, rather than to theopportunity itself.

You can also link a new subopportunity directly to a product, rather than directly to the MasterOpportunity itself.

Document flow on item level

The Transaction History assignment block has been incorporated into the subproduct overview page. Youcan create assignments of existing transactions, and the Transaction History is automatically updatedwhen the opportunity is a follow-up transaction.

CPro link

You can create a row in the Transaction History assignment block to search and create a link directly to aCProject project and launch the CProject application.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 126

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.13.10 CRM-BTX-SLO Sales Transaction

1.13.10.1 Use of Product Proposals (Enhanced)

Use


You can use additional product proposal types to boost sales of certain products in the sales order. Thesewill enhance your scope in sales negotiations, as these product proposals contain specific knowledgeabout the respective customers.

To begin with, you can determine product proposals based on previous sales orders, that is, the transaction history for the respective customers. You can then use a previous sales order as a template fora new sales order. You can also support follow-up actions by using information on which marketingprojects (campaigns or trade promotions) the customer is involved in and directly recommend appropriateproducts to them. Previously, with the exception of top n product lists, you could only display productproposals that were directly related to the respective product, such as accessories, cross-selling products,up-selling products, and down-selling products.

Further product proposals can be determined with this new function which more efficiently supports thesale of certain products to the respective customers.

The additional product proposals can be determined based on the following:

- Transaction history (Previous sales orders from the respective customers for a certain timeperiod)This type of product proposal has a header-data-based- and immediate display, depending on thesettings made in your company. In the header-data-based display, the individual header data fromthe sales order is displayed. You can view this data and select the corresponding sales orders. Theproducts are also determined from the selected data. In the immediate display, all products from theselected sales orders are directly suggested for selection. These settings can be made in SAP CRMCustomizing under Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for SalesTransactions -> Product Proposals in Quotation and Order -> General Settings for ProductProposals.

- Marketing projects (Campaigns and trade promotions) This type of product proposal also has a header-data-based display or an immediate display,depending on the settings made in your company. In the header-data-based display, the individualmarketing projects are displayed in detail. You can view the marketing projects such as campaignsand trade promotions and select those that suit you. In addition, all products from the selectedmarketing projects are proposed for selection. In the immediate display, all products from therelevant marketing projects are directly proposed for selection. You can make these settings in SAPCRM Customizing under Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for SalesTransactions -> Product Proposals in Quotation and Order ->General Settings for ProductProposals

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 127

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Note:

These new product proposal types are not supported in:

- Interaction Center WebClient

- Interaction Center WinClient

- CRM E-Commerce

Display of transaction history

You can also set the application so that the transaction history is displayed for every proposed productand so that order data is displayed for a certain period of time for the respective customers. In this way,you will get information on when and in which sales order the product was already ordered by thecustomer and be able to factor the customer's previous buying pattern into your sales strategy. You canmake these settings in SAP CRM Customizing under Customer Relationship Management ->Transactions -> Settings for Sales Transactions - > Product Proposals in Quotation and Order ->Transaction History

Pricing

The calculated product price is displayed for the product proposal in the simulation area. The followingoptions are available with SAP CRM 5.1 for pricing.

- You can turn off the pricing completely.

- The prices can be transmitted from net price lists. The system will execute a complete pricedetermination only at the point when the product is transferred to the sales order, so the pricedisplayed with the product proposal can differ from the final price.

- Calculation of the current price using the Internet Pricing and Configurator (IPC). Campaigndetermination is also included.

Availability Check

An availability check is carried out and a quantity is proposed for the product. The result of this check islikewise displayed with the product proposal. This is not a "real" availability check because, for instance,no product reservation takes place. You can only carry out a "real" availability check when the productsare applied to the sales order.

Note: Product proposals that are based on a partner/product range are not addressed in this function.


You have determined top n products and cross-/up-/down-selling rules in the SAP Easy Access Menuunder Marketing -> Product Proposals.

You have entered the product as an accessory in product maintenance under Relationships.

You have set the product proposals in sales transactions in SAP CRM Customizing under Customer

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 128

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Sales Transactions -> Product Proposals inQuotation and Order.

1.13.10.2 Use of Provider Orders (New)

Use


You can now create and edit provider orders (business transaction category BUS2000265). The providerorder is a special sales order with which you can sell products and services within the provider industry.It supports the sale of specific products and services, in particular the way they are combined and offeredin the telecommunications industry or by electricity suppliers. The provider order is closely connectedwith the provider contract, which is automatically created from the provider order. With every changeprocess , for example contract extension, that can only be carried out through the provider contract, aprovider order is created. When you release the provider order, the provider contract is updated with thechanges. The entry of the provider order can take place by using the dealer portal as well as theInteraction Center.

The following functions are available in the provider order:

- Search for customers and provider ordersYou can search for provider orders that have already been entered. You can then select these ordersfor further editing, as far as the order is modifiable. You can also create new customers from thesearch screen.

- Order entry and entry of additional technical dataAs well as customer and product data, you can enter additional information in the provider orderthat is necessary for the sale and consequent operation of the service. You can determine theadditional information with which the provider order should be entered yourself and adjust it to therequirements of your enterprise. In the telecommunications industry, technical connection data suchas telephone number or SIM card number is entered in the provider order. The entry of such data in,for example, the dealer portal, enables a simple search for provider orders by telephone number.

- Entry of product data - New product model using interlinkage typesIn a provider order in particular, you can use products and services that are modeled for the specificsales process of provider services. The following interlinkage types are available to you for thisproduct modeling:

- Sales components

- Dependent components

- Rate plan combinationsThe new interlinkage types supplement the previous options for product modeling, which is basedon, among other things, the relatively complex modeling of configurable products and thereby offersenhanced functions for product determination within order and contract management. Theinterlinkage types are defined in the processing of the respective products and you can assigncorresponding components. In this way, products such as activation charges, accessories, incentives,and so on can be combined in an enhanced product model into a service product and in every order

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 129

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

and contract process, automatically included in the corresponding documents.You can thereby combine flexible packages and yet devise well-defined product sets. The simplestform of this new product model is a package, which is sold as a service and can, for example,consist of a service contract (rate plan), for which required hardware and extras are added forstrategic marketing reasons. This product set is implemented by using the interlinkage type SalesComponents.The package is only relevant in the process of order entry. In a provider contract, which results froma provider order created with the package, only package components are applied. As a rule, this isonly the service contract (rate plan). You can influence the explosion of the package in the orderentry by means of appropriate interlinkage type attributes. The interlinkage type DependentComponents facilitates the defining of product relationships by using attributes in which you canformulate conditions that you can then use to control the explosion of the products in the providerorder. The product is created in the provider order only when all conditions are fulfilled. Thisinterlinkage type is used, for example, for charges that accrue with contract changes for products inthe provider order. You can also use the interlinkage type Rate Plan Combinations, in which caseyou are dealing with a fixed rate plan combination without further dependencies. You can offer aspecial price for rate plans when they are sold combined and you want to offer additional productsin a package as incentives. The individual rate plans result in the provider contract with individualdocument items. The solution configurator processes the relationships and dependencies that aredefined with these interlinkage types between the more loosely (in comparison to the productconfiguration) linked products in the background. It checks the conditions and releases the packagecomponents in the provider order only when the fixed conditions are fulfilled. The looseinterlinkage of products in a package is chiefly significant for the distribution and further processingof the data contained inside and the information in the provider contract, which would not bepossible in this way with product modeling using configurable products.

- Automatic creation of a provider contractWhen you sign and confirm a provider order, a provider contract is automatically created by thesystem based on the information from the provider order, into which all contract-relevant data fromthe provider order is copied. The provider order is closely connected with the provider contract.Changes to the provider contract can only be carried out by means of the provider orders.

Further functions that are supported through the provider order:

- Ensuring integration in all subsequent systems

- Automation and coordination of the order across different systems

- Update and control of contract changes

- Basic functions that you also use in the sales order. These include:

- Pricing

- Product configuration

- Campaign determination

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 130

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

Release Information:

- Provider Contracts (New)

- Status Management in Provider Order Maintenance (Enhanced)

- Automatic Creation of Provider Orders for Lock/Unlock Services (New)

- Settlement of Recurring and One-Time Charges (Enhanced)

1.13.10.3 Automatic Creation of Provider Orders for Lock/Unlock Services(New)

Use


When your customer requests a lock for a service if, for example, they lose their cell phone or want toprevent a potential misuse of the service at their cost whilst on vacation, you can set a lock for thisservice. In the same way, you unlock the phone again and activate the service when the customer wantsthis service to be available again. You can perform the locking and unlocking of contract items in theprovider contract as a change process. Particular services represent the locking and unlocking of contractitems and they can be differentiated by lock statuses, which are defined in Customizing.

Previously, you could only use this function in the Interaction Center WebClient. This function isindependent of the user interface and can therefore be integrated by all user interfaces.

In addition, you can charge your customers for the costs that are connected with locking and unlocking.These lock- and unlock prices can be calculated by using the lock reason and the contract item. Providerorders with corresponding order items and prices are automatically created for the individual lock- andunlock services.


You perform the settings for this function in SAP CRM Customizing by choosing Customer RelationshipManagement -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Telecommunications -> Lock Processing

See also

Release Information:Use of Provider Orders (New)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 131

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.13.10.4 Settlement of Recurring and One-Time Fees (Enhanced)

Use


As a rule, a provider order contains periodically recurring fees as well as one-time fees. A provider ordercan contain a sales package that consists of a cell phone contract, for which monthly fees occur, and a cellphone, that is paid for once. These fees are displayed separately, on the user interface of the providerorder at item level and in brief at header level, in different columns.

This function was adjusted by using CRM standard functions and thereby offers more flexibility whensettling periodically recurring fees. In this way you can, for instance, calculate the prices monthly butinvoice the corresponding items with a different settlement frequency, only every two months, forexample. The option to more flexibly execute settlements is realized by means of the billing plan and thebasic function, date management.


You can make the appropriate settings for the billing plan in SAP CRM Customizing under CustomerRelationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Billing Plan.

You can make the appropriate settings for the definition of duration types, date profiles and date rules inSAP CRM Customizing under Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> DateManagement.

The following description gives you an overview of SAP's standard and recommended Customizing forthe function:

- Use the condition type 0PMR

- Assign the calculation rule M (Quantity - Monthly Price) to the condition type 0PMR

- Add the condition type 0PMR to the pricing procedure 0IST01

- Use the item categories IST1 (recurring order items) and IST2 (recurring contract items).

- Use the item category group IST for item category determination

- Assign the item category group IST to the corresponding product in the product master data.

- Use the transaction types ISTO (provider order) and ISTC (provider contract) for providertransaction processing.

- Use the date profiles IST_HEADER, IST_CONTITEM and IST_ORDITEM to determine the dates.

- Assign the date profiles to the transaction types ISTO and ISTC.

- The date profiles contain the duration BILLFREQ with which you can decide on the frequency forbilling plan settlement and which is determined monthly in the delivered Customizing.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 132

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- The duration BILLFREQ is contained in the date rule BILL009 (dynamic billing plan frequency) asa variable and must be assigned to the date profile. This date rule must also be assigned to thebilling plan.

- Create a billing plan type and assign it to the transaction types ISTO and ISTC as well as to the itemcategories IST1 and IST2.

Note: When you use an external system for billing, you can stop the creation of billing request items forperformance reasons. You can make the settings in SAP CRM Customizing under Customer RelationshipManagement -> Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Billing Plan. In the corresponding billing plan type, forexample, IST-CI, Bill Cycle 01, in the group box Billing Plan-Explosion, set the indicator Do notgenerate billing request items.

See also

Release Note Use of Provider Orders (New)

1.13.10.5 Status Management in Provider Order Maintenance (Enhanced)

Use


Further system statuses are available for provider order maintenance. These statuses inform you of theprocessing status of the provider order items or provider contract items. You can control the subsequentprocesses in the maintenance of provider orders and contracts , that is, the distribution of data to externalsystems or change processes. Each status informs you at main- and subitem level that a certain status hasoccurred and determines which step may be executed next.

Previously, statuses were only displayed at main item level. These statuses are now also available forsubitems. At main item level, a higher-level status is displayed which is calculated depending on thestatus of the subitems. A higher-level status is always calculated for the different statuses of theindividual subitems and gives information on the general activation process. Only one status is active atany one time. When a succeeding status is set, the previous status is deleted. The higher-level status isused for the processes in the provider order and contract so that you can determine the follow-uptransactions allowed. Corresponding actions can only be executed when the provider sales transactionshave a certain status. For example, when one of the subitems in the provider order receives the status"Activated", it means that the subitem is distributed to external systems. If only one of the subitems hasthe status "Activated", the main item receives the status "Activation of Main Item Started". The providerorder can no longer be changed with this status.

Further functions that are provided in status management:

- Error messages can be transferred from the external systems to the provider contract and written inthe application log of the provider contract. This makes it possible for you to handle errors thatoccur and potentially re-execute the distribution of subitems independently of one another.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 133

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Contract items can be distributed until the confirmed activation date, that is, messages with contractdata can still be transferred for a certain time before the actual activation date. It is thereforepossible to make changes until the first distribution process actually starts.

- You can create additional customer-specific statuses for confirmations from external systems withthe Business Add-In CRMXIF_ISTSERVCONF_C.

See also

Release Note Use of Provider Orders (New)

1.13.10.6 Abnormal Demand in Sales Order Items (New)

Use


You can classify items in a sales order as abnormal demand. If you classify them as abnormal demand,they will not be taken into account in forecasting.

This function allows you to indicate that an unusually high or low demand in a sales order should beconsidered abnormal and needs to be ignored for future planning.

You can also classify campaigns and trade promotions as abnormal demand. If you classify them as such,all sales order items referenced to this marketing program will be classified as abnormal demand, too.


1.13.10.7 Assignment of Internal Orders to Sales Orders (New)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 134

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You can assign an internal order, which exists in SAP ERP, to a sales order. If you do so, the costs andrevenues resulting from a sales order are not booked into mass controlling but to this internal orderinstead.


1.13.10.8 Integration of Letters of Credit in the Sales Order (New)

Use


You can integrate a letter of credit (LoC) in the sales order and thereby restrict financial risks in globalretail. You manually enter the letter of credit directly in the sales order. You can display all permittedLoCs using input help and select them as appropriate.

You also have the option of displaying all the sales orders that have invalid letters of credit assigned tothem, in the Credit Analyst Workbench.

In the sales order, you can assign letters of credit at header level. When selecting the LoC, you should usethe input help, as the possible selections in the input help are based on a logic that only proposespermitted letters of credit. The system checks if the following is valid:

- Current sold-to party

- Payment terms

- Incoterms

- Sales organization

After selecting the letter of credit, the system also checks if it is permitted for the current order value.

- If the check is negative, an internal status is set that prevents further follow-up transactions such asbilling and delivery. The system also deletes all confirmations calculated by SAP APO.

- If the check is positive, SAP ECC creates an unchecked delivery. SAP ECC transfers the assignedletter of credit IDs to Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) in SAP SCM. You can then nolonger change the LoC for partially- and completely-delivered order items. In EWM it is possible toensure that orders with different LoCs are not packed together. This can be implemented by using aBAdI.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 135

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


- You use SAP Global Trade Services (SAP GTS).

- The system configuration for service parts management has been activated. For more informationabout this, see the SAP Implementation Guide (IMG) for Customer Relationship Management atActivate System Configuration for Service Parts Management

- The indicator GTS Relevance must be set for the transaction type. You can make these settings inSAP CRM Customizing under Define Transaction Types.

- The indicator GTS Relevance must be set for the delivery and billing relevant item category. Youcan make these settings in SAP CRM Customizing under Define Item Categories.

1.13.10.9 Mass Changes at Header Level (New)

Use


In addition to mass changes at item level, it is possible to make mass changes at header level .

You can choose whether you want to make a mass change at item level or at header level. Therefore, thisfunction reduces the amount of effort usually associated with making several data changes at headerlevel, for example changing the sold-to party.

Similarly to mass changes at item level, you can execute mass changes at header level online or in thebackground. In background mode, you start off in online mode and switch to background processing tomake the changes.


You have assigned the fields for mass changes according to your requirements in Customizing.

For more information, see the Implementation Guide (IMG) for SAP CRM under Assign Fields for MassChanges.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 136

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.13.10.10 Maximum Number of Locations in Availability Check (New)

Use


You can restrict the number of locations from which a sales order item is delivered. For example, if youenter '3', the availability check returns a maximum of three locations from which the item is beingdelivered.


1.13.10.11 Determine Maximum Partial Deliveries (New)

Use


You can determine the maximum number of partial deliveries for each order item and so limit thesubdivision of an order item to a defined number of deliveries. The system creates schedule lines for eachorder item with the respective quantity and delivery date and therefore creates the partial deliveries foryour customers. The number of schedule lines or deliveries created by the system will not exceed themaximum number you have determined.

You can either set the maximum number of partial deliveries manually in the sales order, or in thebusiness partner master data. When creating the order item, the system transfers the value determined inthe business partner master record to the sales order.

SAP APO calculates the value for the maximum number of confirmations. It does this by using themaximum number of partial deliveries and previously existing deliveries. When you trigger an ATPcheck in the sales order, the maximum number of deliveries and confirmations is transferred to SAPAPO. This ensures that when SAP APO returns confirmations to the order item from each of the locationsfrom which the product can be delivered, it does not exceed the maximum number of partial deliveriesthat you have defined.

When you save the sales order, the system creates an unchecked delivery for each individual confirmedschedule line.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 137

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


- The system configuration for service parts management is activated. You can find furtherinformation in the SAP Implementation Guide (IMG) under Activate System Configuration forService Parts Management.

- SAP SCM Extended Warehouse Management is activated.You use the availability check with SAP SCM Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO).

1.13.10.12 Use of Objects in Service Recall Orders (Enhanced)

Use


In regular service recall processing, you can use objects only once. This ensures that one fixed list ofservice parts and the maximum permitted quantity of these parts are made available to the customer foreach object. A special authorization now allows you to use objects in service recall orders multiple times.

If you try to re-use an object in the service recall order, you get an error message. If you have specialauthorization, you can override the error message by setting a special user status created for this function.The error message is then overridden and the service recall order can be saved without errors.

This function gives you the advantage of being able to re-use the same product service letter within arecall action. For example, if some service parts sent in exchange were again delivered to the customer ina damaged state, and these objects must be replaced once more.


You have made the following settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management :

- You have created a subject profile with category Y Individual Object (Sales Order) for the use ofreference objects and entry of objects' product IDs in the service recall order. You can find furtherinformation in the SAP CRM Implementation Guide (IMG) under Define Subject Profiles.

- You have created a custom transaction type for service recall processing, to which you haveassigned this subject profile under External Reference Object. You can find further information inthe SAP CRM Implementation Guide (IMG) under Define Transaction Types.

- You have defined an authorization key for the definition of a user status. You make this setting inSAP CRM Customizing under Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> BasicSettings -> Status Management -> Define Status Authorization Keys.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 138

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- You have created a status profile. Assign the defined authorization key to the user status. You canfind further information in the SAP CRM Implementation Guide (IMG) under CustomerRelationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Status Management -> ChangeStatus Profile for User Status.Note: When defining the status profile ensure, for the definition of the user status, that you assignthe value Duplicate VIN Check (technical name: DUVI) to the Business Transaction and set theindicator Prohibited. This prevents the execution of this business transaction.Use the status profile CRMRECOR (Text: CRM Recall Order), available in the standard system, asa template for this.

- Assign this status profile to the transaction type that you want to use.

- The user who sets this user status must have authorization for the authorization objectB_USERSTAT. This authorization object has the attribute BERSL = <authorization key>. If you usethe status profile CRMRECOR, delivered as standard by SAP, assign BERSL = ORIDEVIN.

1.13.10.13 Third-Party Order Processing with Consolidation (New)

Use


You can define, within the sales order, that the customer is supplied from a consolidation location.

Third-party order processing with consolidation is a variant of regular third-party processing. In the caseof processing with consolidation, the external supplier does not directly take over the delivery of thegoods to the customer, but instead delivers the goods to a consolidation location. The consolidationlocation is the place from which a consolidated delivery to the customer takes place. In the consolidationlocation, deliveries are merged from various locations. The customer is supplied only from theconsolidation location. In this way, all confirmed products are delivered from external suppliers to theconsolidation location and then from there to the customer. This means that in the case of third-partyorder processing with consolidation, the ship-to location does not receive the goods directly, but ratherthe goods are first consolidated in another location. Reasons for this can be that the ship-to location is inanother country, or that the goods must be consolidated for legal reasons. In SAP APO, the consolidationlocation is defined with the type Plant, and can therefore be viewed as an internal location.

Characteristics in Comparison with Regular Third-Party Order Processing:

- The order triggered by SAP CRM is an ordinary warehouse order and not, as in regular third-partyorder processing, a third-party purchase order. The stock segment is sales order stock, however.

- The process includes the delivery of products from the consolidation location to the customer.

- The order confirmations do not directly update the confirmed schedule lines in the sales order,because the confirmed dates relate to the delivery to the consolidation location but are transferred toSAP APO. SAP APO triggers a rescheduling and then updates the sales order with the newlycalculated dates.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 139

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- The delivered quantities and the delivery status in the sales order are not updated using the shippingnotification of the external supplier. They are updated by the delivery from the consolidationlocation instead. The goods receipt for the order updates the sales order stock in the consolidationlocation.



- SAP SCM Extended Warehouse Management is activated.

- You use the availability check with SAP APO.The consolidation location can be calculated using the rules-based availability check (rules-basedATP) in SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO). In this case, a rule must bedetermined for the calculation of a consolidation location.You can find further information in the documentation for these fields; in the SAP Easy AccessMenu for SAP Supply Chain Management, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> MasterData -> Rule Maintenance -> Integrated Rule Maintenance.

- You have created the consolidation location as a business partner in the business partner masterdata.

- You have also set up the customizing of the transaction types, item categories, and the requiredcopying control in SAP ECC. This is because unchecked deliveries are created in SAP ECC. Inregular third-party order processing, no unchecked deliveries are created in SAP ECC, so thiscustomizing is not necessary there.

1.13.10.14 Third-Party Order Processing with Supersession (New)

Use


In third-party order processing, you can, with certain prerequisites, allow external suppliers to replace oneproduct with another if it is not available in their stock.

It is essential, in service parts management, to be able to substitute products in order to react tocontinuous changes in product design, -form or -function. For example, it must be possible to substituteobsolete service parts with new versions of the same part.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 140

SAP-System______________________________________________________________



- SAP SCM Extended Warehouse Management is activated

- You use the availability check with SAP SCM Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO).You must have created an interchangeability group in SAP APO for the product that the externalsupplier can replace with another product. The product, substitute product, and the quantity are alldefined in the interchangeability group.Both SAP ECC and SAP APO use these definitions to check, when creating the sales order in SAPCRM, whether the external supplier is authorized to substitute the product with another.In the SAP Easy Access Menu for SAP SCM, select Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Master Data -> Application-Specific Master Data -> Product and Location Interchangeability ->Maintain Interchangeability Group (Transaction /INCMD/UI).You can find more information about interchangeability groups in the SAP Library for SAP SCMunder SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) -> Master Data ->Application-Specific Master Data -> Master Data for Product and Location Interchangeability.

1.13.10.15 Using Grid Products in the Sales Order (New for SP02)

Use


You can process grid products in the sales order.

When you enter a grid product in the sales order, the Grid assignment block is available for processinggrid products. This replaces the Configuration assignment block for conventional configurable products.In a grid, characteristics combinations such as size and color are displayed, into which you enter therequired order quantities. The system automatically finds the appropriate product variants, for which thesystem creates corresponding subitems.

This not only facilitates the processing of order items for easily configurable products, but also avoids thecomplex handling for configurable products, which would unnecessarily burden the system. This way,you can quickly and easily process the sales order and automatically create subitems for the many productvariants of a grid product.


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 141

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The product must be available in the SAP CRM product master data as a grid product, that is theconfiguration type of the product must be set to the value G in table COMM_PRODUCT.

1.13.11 CRM-BTX-ERP BSP for ERP Sales Order

1.13.11.1 Creating and Changing ERP Sales Transactions in SAP CRM (New)

Use


You can directly create or change ERP sales transactions such as ERP quotations, ERP sales orders, orERP quantity contracts, in SAP CRM. You can also create follow-up transactions, for example, directlycreating an ERP quotation from a CRM opportunity in SAP ERP.

This means that you can perform your pre-sales activities in SAP CRM and then process the follow-uptransactions, like quotation creation and sales order processing, in SAP ERP, without leaving SAP CRM.You can thereby execute your quotation- and order processing in SAP ERP and also use SAP CRM in anintegrated manner.

This function particularly supports sales employees who work mostly in SAP CRM and do not use SAPERP, thereby allowing the user to utilize a single user interface to work with both SAP CRM and SAPERP. For example, sales assistants can use this functionality to create lean orders directly in SAP ERP.


The direct creation and change of an SAP ERP sales order from SAP CRM is only supported if you havecarried out the following Customizing.

- You have assigned a profile for the ERP sales transaction. Using this profile, you define which ERPsales transactions are permitted for processing, that is, which ones you can create and change.You make the settings for this in SAP CRM Customizing by choosing Customer RelationshipManagement -> Transactions -> Settings for Sales Transactions -> Define Profile for ERP SalesTransactions.

The profile SALESPRO is available for this purpose as standard, but it is delivered without input ofthe RFC destination. Therefore, you must still assign the RFC destination for SAP ERP to thisprofile. Prerequisite: You have defined an RFC destination (by choosing Customer RelationshipManagement -> CRM Middleware and Related Components -> Communication Setup -> DefineRFC Destinations in the SAP Implementation Guide (IMG) or using transaction SM59).

- You have assigned this profile to the business role SALESPRO. You make this setting in SAP CRMCustomizing by choosing Customer Relationship Management -> Business Roles -> DefineBusiness Role.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 142

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

In the standard customizing the group links for calling up the ERP sales transactions are not visible.To make them visible in the work area of the CRM WebClient UI, you have made the necessarysettings.in SAP CRM Customizing by choosing Customer Relationship Management -> BusinessRoles ->Define Business Role.

- Select the SALESPRO role and choose the Visible Work Center Group Links folder.Set the Visible indicator for the following group IDs:

- SLS-ERC-CR

- SLS-ERC-SR

- SLS-ERP-CR

- SLS-ERP-CR

- SLS-ERP-SR

- SLS-ERP-SRSet the In Menu indicator for the following group IDs:

- SLS-ERP-SR

- SLS-ERP-SRSave your entries.

For follow-up sales transactions you must make additional settings. For example, creation of an ERPquotation from an opportunity is only supported if you have defined a cross-system copy control oftransaction types. You make the settings required for this in the SAP Implementation Guide (IMG) underCustomer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Opportunities -> Cross-system CopyControl for Opportunity and SAP-ECC Quotation (Cross-System Copying of Transaction TypesandCross-System Copying of Item Categories).

1.13.12 CRM-BTX-SVO Service Processes

1.13.12.1 CRM-BTX-SVO-QUT Service Inquiries / Quotations

1.13.12.1.1 Packages in Service Order Quotations (New)

Use


You can include packages in a service order quotation item. When you select a package, the packagecomponents are displayed in the items in a hierarchical structure (with the sub-components as subitems).You can deselect components that are not required.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 143

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


The standard transaction type SRVP (Package Quotation) is available.

To enable packages to be included in items and their subitems, you need to select the PackageExplosion indicator in both of the following activities in Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement: Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Define Transaction Types and Define ItemCategories.

See also

For more information about packages, see the SAP Library under SAP Customer RelationshipManagement -> Components and Functions -> Master Data -> Products -> Functions -> Packages andProducts with Dependent Components.

1.13.13 CRM-BTX-SCO Service Confirmation

1.13.13.1 Serial Number Entry in Confirmations (New)

Use

As of SAP CRM 5.0, you can create serial numbers for service parts in service confirmations. The serialnumbers that are entered can be validated.

It is possible to enter serial numbers in the following SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAPCRM) channels: SAP GUI for Windows, Interaction Center (IC) WinClient, mobile service, and thePeople-Centric UI (PC-UI).

You can define how the serial numbers that were entered should be checked. To do so, you can eitherdefine it in the product master in the field for serial number processing, or you can replicate thisinformation from SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC) to SAP Customer Relationship Management(SAP CRM).

In the standard system, the following checks take place after the serial numbers are entered:

- When entering a product, the system checks whether serial number entry is optional or mandatory.

- After the serial number is entered, the system ensures that the product is not changed any more.

- Quantity check: The system validates the number of entered serial numbers by comparing it to theitem quantity.

- Check for accuracy of the serial numbers: Depending on the field for serial number processing, thischeck is either run against the individual object in SAP CRM, against SAP ECC, or a combinationof both.

After the service confirmation is saved (status completed) the system transfers the service confirmation,along with the service parts, quantities, and corresponding serial numbers, to SAP ECC.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 144

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You can tailor the serial number checks to your needs by using BAdI: Check Reference Objects.

See also

For more information about serial number entry in confirmations, see the SAP Library (help.sap.com)under SAP Customer Relationship Management -> Components and Functions -> Service -> ServiceConfirmations -> Creation of Service Confirmations -> Serial Number Entry in Service Confirmations.

1.13.14 CRM-BTX-BRQ Billing Request

1.13.14.1 Transfer of Accounting Indicator to Billing (New)

Use


The accounting indicator field in service transactions can be transferred to billing, where it is used forpricing and account determination.


To enable transfer of the accounting indicator, activate one of the following features in the IMG underCustomer Relationship Management -> Billing -> Configure Application:

- Integration with Contract Accounting

- Enhanced Attributes for Pricing

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 145

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.13.15 CRM-BTX-COM Complaints / Returns / In-House Repair

1.13.15.1 Use of Complaints and Returns to Update Sales Contracts (New)

Use


If the customer (dealer) creates a complaint or return, depending on the Customizing settings, it ispossible for the system to find a sales contract and update the values for Released Quantity and ReleasedValue. This occurs as follows:

- If there is a return, the contract values are updated depending on the quantity of the returnsauthorization item. The sales contract is assigned to the main item and the returns request item.

- If there are no returns, such as in the case of an underdelivery or overdelivery without a returnsrequest, the contract values are updated after the invoice correction item is created. The salescontract is assigned to the main item.

This ensures that the customer gets the price that was agreed upon in the contract for the exact quantity orvalue in the contract.

In addition, if the price cannot be determined using a billing document as the preceding transaction, theprice is determined in this contract. This is the case for complaints and returns that were not created withreference to a billing document, such as surplus returns or rapid returns. The price is the basis for theinvoice correction.

If you create a complaint or return without reference to a billing document, the system cannot determine asales order or a sales contract. In this case, for each returns request item, the system searches for contractitems with the criteria customer (dealer), product, and sales organization. In this search, the fulfilment ofthe contract, the status, the contract duration, and the returns request item's creation date play thefollowing roles:

- The system searches for contract items that are not yet fulfilled, that do not have status Completed,and whose contract duration has not yet expired.

- The system searches for contract items whose contract duration expired before the creation date ofthe returns request item, but were valid at least one day within the time period that you defined inCustomizing.

- If you make the appropriate settings in Customizing, the system searches for contract items thathave status Completed.

Assignment block Release History is available in the sales contract, at both header and item level. In thisassignment block, you can see the release list with the corresponding sales orders as well as thecorresponding complaints and returns.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 146

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


- Use the IMG activity Define Copying Control for Item Categories to define the copying control forcopying conditions from sales contracts to complaints and returns.

- To update sales contracts, you must make the following settings in the IMG activity DefineTransaction Types:

- Define that when a complaint or return is created, the system runs contract determination.To do so, in the General section of the screen, in the Contract Determ. field, select anappropriate value for contract determination, such as Only at Item Level: Assign Immediately ifUnique.

- Specify that a sales contract should be found when a returns request item is created in a returntransaction or a complaint transaction without reference to an invoice.To do so, in the Customizing Header for business transaction category Complaints, select valueSales Contract in the Determination field. This selection makes two new fields appear on thescreen, in which you can make the following settings:Duration (Days): Define a time interval before the creation date of the returns request item.The system searches for contract items that were valid on at least one day in this time interval.Completed Sales Con.: Define whether contract items with status Completed should be found.

See also

For information about complaints and returns, see SAP Library under SAP Customer RelationshipManagement -> Components and Functions -> Service -> Complaints and Returns.

1.13.15.2 Complaint with reference to trade promotion (New)

Use


Within the context of complaints processing, you can now create the new transaction Complaint withreference to trade promotion. This scenario is called Complaint-Based Marketing Program.

You can create complaints with reference to a trade promotion in the CRM WebClient UI, in the dealerportal or by using EDI.

You create a complaint with reference to a trade promotion in the following case: You ordered a productand realize afterwards that the same product was sold at a lower price in connection with a tradepromotion. The complaint results in the system creating a credit memo for the original amount and adebit memo based on the product price that is valid for the trade promotion.


The trade promotion must be marked for this scenario. If you want to use an existing trade promotion, inthe Usage Type field, you must select value Complaint-Based Marketing Program.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 147

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

If you want to use an existing trade promotion type for this scenario, in the implementation guide (IMG)activity Define Types/Objectives/Tactics, you must assign the corresponding Usage Type to the tradepromotion type (Campaign Type).


In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, you must make the following settings:

- Use the IMG activity Define Transaction Types to define a transaction type for Complaints withreference to trade promotion.Use the transaction type CLRP - Complaint with billing reference in the standard delivery as atemplate to create a new transaction type. All required settings are available for this transaction type.Set the Creation with Ref. Possible indicator.

- Define the associated item category for complaints with reference to trade promotion.The standard system contains the item category CLBM - Complaint w/Ref. to Trade Promotion.If you want to create your own item category, use the IMG activity Define Item Categories.

- Assign business object types to the transaction types.The business object type is CBMP - Complaint-Based Marketing Programs.For assignment, use the IMG activity Assign Business Object Types to Transaction Types.In the standard system, business object type CBMP is for the transaction type for complaints withreference to a trade promotion. A trade promotion is defined as the preceding object for thecomplaint transaction and the data is copied from the trade promotion into the complaint transaction.If you want to change the preceding reference to the trade promotion, you must create your ownimplementation using Business Add-In: Create Complaint with Reference to External Transaction.

- Define an action profile for the item category with two action definitions: one for credit memo andone for debit memo.The standard delivery contains the following action profile and actions:

Technical Name of Action Profile Description of Action Profile Action DefinitionDescription

COMPL_MKT_PRG Complaint-Based Marketing Program COMPL_MKT_PRG_CREDITComplaint-Based Marketing Program - Credit

COMPL_MKT_PRG_DEBITComplaint-Based Marketing Program - Debit

If you want to define your own action profiles and actions, use the IMG activity Define ActionProfiles and Actions.

- Assign the action profile COMPL_MKT_PRG to the item category CLBM.Use the IMG activity Assign Action Profile to the Item Category.

- Define the usage type.Use the IMG activity Define Usage Type.

- Assign marketing usage types to transaction types.Use the IMG activity Assign Marketing Usage Types to Transaction Types.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 148

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Assign the usage type to the trade promotion type (campaign type).Use the IMG activity Define Types/Objectives/Tactics.

See also

For information about complaints, see SAP Library under SAP Customer Relationship Management ->Components and Functions -> Service -> Complaints and Returns .

1.13.15.3 Exchange Group for Used Part Returns (New)

Use


You can now use exchange groups when you create a used part returns request item in the followingcontext:

Customers (dealers) pay a deposit when they buy an exchange part. When they pay the deposit amount,customers receive an entitlement for deposit refund when they return the part to the manufacturer as aused part. The deposit amount is determined using entitlement management.

When you create a used part returns request, you can enter the following alternative IDs in the ProductID field:

- Product ID of the used part

- ID of the exchange group, for instance, if you do not know the product ID

- Product ID of the exchange group used part that is assigned to the exchange group

In entitlement management, the appropriate exchange group is determined using the product in therequest item. Then, the system uses the product and the exchange group to search for valid entitlementsfor deposit refund.

Technically, the exchange group is a product category with a 1:1 relation to an exchange group used part(product master record). The exchange group used part is necessary because a product is required for thelogistical subsequent process. At the same time, the relationship between the exchange group and theexchange group used part is an alternative ID of type EXGRP, which can be used for entering the requestitem in the Product ID field. The ID of the exchange group is displayed.

When an exchange group is assigned to different used parts in the product master record in theassignment block Category, these used parts are bundled into a logical group.


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 149

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

To use the new functions, you must do the following in the Implementation Guide (IMG) under CustomerRelationship Management:

- Use the IMG activity Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications to assign the Hierarchy ID,which you created for entitlement management and used part returns in the product master viaProduct Hierarchies, to the Application A2 (Entitlements).

- In the standard system, the ID Type EXGRP (Exchange Group) is defined as an alternative ID type.Check this assignment in the IMG activity Define ID Types.

- In the standard system, value EXGRP is assigned for Object Type BUS1178 as a Profile forAlternative IDs, and in the Sequence of ID Types view, value "1" is assigned to ID Type EXGRP.Check these assignments in the IMG activity Define Profiles.

- In the Product Determination section, value EXGRP is assigned to the transaction type for used partreturns (UPRR) as the Profile for Altern. Identif.. If you have created your own transaction type forused part returns, you must use the IMG activity Define Transaction Types to make this assignmentyourself.

See also

For more information about exchange groups, see SAP Library under SAP Customer RelationshipManagement -> Components and Functions -> Service -> Complaints and Returns -> Used Part Returns.

1.13.15.4 Complaints for External Products (New)

Use


In service parts management, you can now create complaints for external products. External products areparts that are not in your inventory and therefore have no product master data record in SAP CustomerRelationship Management (SAP CRM).

For more information about purchasing and billing external products, see release note Sale of ExternalProducts (New).

As you can see from this release note, you trigger billing for both the customer (debit memo) as well asfor the supplier (credit memo). In turn, complaints about these parts are also generated by you. Thefollowing types of complaints are supported:

- Complaint due to underdelivery

- Complaint due to overdelivery

- Complaint due to damage

- Complaint due to incorrect invoice

A complaint can only be created with reference to a billing item that in turn has a reference to a salesorder item.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 150

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The complaint triggers an invoice correction. Additionally, depending on the type of complaint, the partscan also be returned to the external supplier. Depending on the parameters that are defined, the parts mayalso be scrapped at the customer instead of returned.

The invoice correction is made up of two transactions:

- In SAP CRM, an invoice correction for the customer

- In SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC), a correction of the supplier invoice for the supplier

The invoice correction is not based on the actual returned quantity, since it is not known; it is insteadbased on the approved quantity.

The differences to third-party order processing (TPOP) with products that have a product master, are asfollows:

- After returns authorization, there is no inbound delivery created in SAP ECC.

- SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) is not called to determine the location towhich the part should be returned, because in this case, the products always go back to the externalsuppliers.


- The system configuration for service parts management is activated. Check this in the IMG activityActivate System Configuration for Service Parts Management.

- In IMG activity Define Transaction Types, for transaction type Complaint with Reference toInvoice, in section External Products, you have:

- Set the indicator External Products Allowed

- Selected an appropriate value for item category determination in field Item Category GroupFor External Products

See also

For information about complaints for external products, see SAP Library under SAP CustomerRelationship Management -> Components and Functions -> Service -> Complaints and Returns ->Additional Functions for SPM for Complaints and Returns.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 151

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.13.15.5 Complaint Creation with Reference to a SAP ECC Handling Unit (New)

Use


You can create a complaint with reference to a billing document by using the handling unit (HU) ID tofind the billing document via the SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC) delivery.

You use the HU ID (external HU ID) when creating a complaint if your customer complains that an HUis damaged or is missing some parts, for example. The customer finds the HU ID on the packaging unit(such as the box it came in) and passes the HU ID on to you.

When you use the HU ID to search for the billing document, all the items of the corresponding billingdocument appear in the result list. You select the appropriate billing document items and create thecomplaint.

The basis for determining the quantity involved in a complaint is the HU quantity rather than the quantityin the billing document.

After you create the complaint, in the Transaction History assignment block, you can use the HU ID togo to the SAP ECC packing transaction HUMO and view the HU data.

1.13.15.6 Inventory Adjustment for Complaints (New)

Use


To correct discrepancies between the invoice quantity and delivered quantity, you can use the PODMessage action to trigger an inventory adjustment from a CRM complaint item that has a uniquereference to a delivery item (determined via a sales order, billing document, or delivery). This inventoryadjustment is made in SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC) or in SAP Supply Chain Management(SAP SCM).

The proof of delivery (POD) message contains the reason for the shipping discrepancies, the outbounddelivery quantity and the quantity received by the customer.

For example, if 100 pieces were billed in the invoice, but only 80 were delivered, there is a difference ininventory that leads to a stock check in the issuing storage location in SAP ECC or SAP SCM. If thephysical check results in a difference, an inventory adjustment is made.

The POD Message action is available in the following cases:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 152

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Underdelivery

- Overdelivery

- Incorrect delivery


- To update data to match the adjustment, use Business Add-In (BAdI) BAdI: Definition for Mappingof Proof of Delivery Message. For example, you can change the RFC destination or check data suchas sold-to party or delivery quantity.

- In the standard system, you will find the action definition with action methodCOMPL_TRIGGER_POD in the action profile for Underdelivery, Overdelivery, and IncorrectDelivery.If you want to make changes, such as changing the schedule conditions, use activities Define ActionProfiles and Actions and Define Conditions.

See also

- For more information about customizing in SAP ECC, see release note Proof of delivery linked tothe Proof of Delivery node in SAP ECC under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide -> LogisticsExecution -> Shipping -> Deliveries -> Proof of Delivery.

- For information about complaints and returns, see SAP Library under SAP Customer RelationshipManagement -> Components and Functions -> Service -> Complaints and Returns.

1.13.16 CRM-BTX-CTR Contracts

1.13.16.1 CRM-BTX-CTR-CCO Sales Contract

1.13.16.1.1 Provider Contracts (New)

Use


You can use the contract type provider contract. In a provider contract, you can map long-termagreements for services and products from telecommunications. The contract contains the followinginformation:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 153

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Contract duration

- Contract object (cell phone, for example)

- Services and rate plans

- Regular fees

Creation of Provider Contracts

You can create provider contracts by creating a provider order that also contains contract-relevant items.The provider contract is automatically created as a follow-up document to a provider order. The contract-relevant items are thereby copied from the order to the contract.

You can create corresponding provider orders by using the dealer portal, the Interaction Center or a Webshop. You can make changes to existing contracts only by using the dealer portal or the InteractionCenter.

Changing Provider Contracts

You can make the following changes in the provider contract:

- Contract extensionYou can also undo a planned contract extension.

- Changes to product configuration

- Product changeThis can relate to an object change (for example, a newer model) or a rate plan change (for example,a change from a standard rate plan to a weekend rate plan).

- SIM card exchange

In addition, you can still make the following changes in the Interaction Center:

- Locking and unlocking of connectionsYour customers can use this function when they want to prevent an unauthorized person from usingtheir connection, for example, when they are on vacation.

- Number change

- CancellationYou can also undo cancellations that have already taken place.

- Master data changesAddress change (after moving, for example)

- Explosion of a rate plan combinationMany customers take advantage of competitive prices through combined rate plans (DSL and a cellphone rate plan, for example). If necessary, you can explode such rate plan combinations into theirindividual components, to end the validity period of one of these rate plans earlier, for instance.

In order to make changes to a provider contract you must create a change request (provider order). Whenyou save this change request you can release these changes or reject them. You can also temporarily storethe change request and release or reject the items later. All released changes are applied to the contract.The execution of the contract changes takes place through change processes, to which process types areassigned:

- ISTA - for business changes to the contract, for example extension, cancellation.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 154

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- ISTB - for changes to technical data such as SIM card or telephone number.

- ISTC - for the locking and unlocking of contracts.

A custom change request is created for every process type. You can find further information in the releasenote Use of the Maintenance Framework for Business Transactions.

The provider order contains the current products, rate plans and validity periods. You can reproduce thecontract history by using the contract's change requests.

When making changes to contracts, fees often occur (change fees) or existing rate plans change. You canfind more information on the settlement of these one-time or recurring fees in the release note Settlementof Recurring and One-Time Charges.


You can make the basic settings for provider contracts in transaction customizing under CRM ->Transactions -> Basic Settings.

The following transaction types are available here for provider orders and contracts in the standardsystem:

ISPR - Provider order using E-Commerce

PRVO - Provider order for call center

PRVR - Provider order for dealer

PRVC - Provider contract

In addition there are the item categories:

TAP Sales item for packages

PRCN Free provider contract item (for rate plan combinations)

PRCP Provider contract item (for rate plans)

PRON Free provider order item (for rate plan combinations)

PROP Provider order item (for rate plans)

The previously offered transaction type and item category ISTC - Telco Contract are also available.

You can use the following item category groups for item category determination:

LUMF- Structure below (for example, with packages)

NORM - Sales item

PRNP - Provider rate plan, not relevant for pricing

PRRP - Provider rate plan

PRSV - Provider fee

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 155

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can make specific settings for the provider contracts, for example, for the contract change processesand pricing for contract changes, in CRM Customizing under Transactions -> Settings for ProviderContracts.

See also

Provider Orders

Use of Maintenance Framework for Business Transactions

Settlement of Recurring and One-Time Charges

1.13.16.2 CRM-BTX-CTR-SCO Service Contract

1.13.16.2.1 Provider Contracts (New)

Use


You can use the contract type provider contract. In a provider contract, you can map long-termagreements for services and products from telecommunications. The contract contains the followinginformation:

- Contract duration

- Contract object (cell phone, for example)

- Services and rate plans

- Regular fees

Creation of Provider Contracts

You can create provider contracts by creating a provider order that also contains contract-relevant items.The provider contract is automatically created as a follow-up document to a provider order. The contract-relevant items are thereby copied from the order to the contract.

You can create corresponding provider orders by using the dealer portal, the Interaction Center or a Webshop. You can make changes to existing contracts only by using the dealer portal or the InteractionCenter.

Changing Provider Contracts

You can make the following changes in the provider contract:

- Contract extensionYou can also undo a planned contract extension.

- Changes to product configuration

- Product changeThis can relate to an object change (for example, a newer model) or a rate plan change (for example,

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 156

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

a change from a standard rate plan to a weekend rate plan).

- SIM card exchange

In addition, you can still make the following changes in the Interaction Center:

- Locking and unlocking of connectionsYour customers can use this function when they want to prevent an unauthorized person from usingtheir connection, for example, when they are on vacation.

- Number change

- CancellationYou can also undo cancellations that have already taken place.

- Master data changesAddress change (after moving, for example)

- Explosion of a rate plan combinationMany customers take advantage of competitive prices through combined rate plans (DSL and a cellphone rate plan, for example). If necessary, you can explode such rate plan combinations into theirindividual components, to end the validity period of one of these rate plans earlier, for instance.

In order to make changes to a provider contract you must create a change request (provider order). Whenyou save this change request you can release these changes or reject them. You can also temporarily storethe change request and release or reject the items later. All released changes are applied to the contract.The execution of the contract changes takes place through change processes, to which process types areassigned:

- ISTA - for business changes to the contract, for example extension, cancellation.

- ISTB - for changes to technical data such as SIM card or telephone number.

- ISTC - for the locking and unlocking of contracts.

A custom change request is created for every process type. You can find further information in the releasenote Use of the Maintenance Framework for Business Transactions.

The provider order contains the current products, rate plans and validity periods. You can reproduce thecontract history by using the contract's change requests.

When making changes to contracts, fees often occur (change fees) or existing rate plans change. You canfind more information on the settlement of these one-time or recurring fees in the release note Settlementof Recurring and One-Time Charges.


You can make the basic settings for provider contracts in transaction customizing under CRM ->Transactions -> Basic Settings.

The following transaction types are available here for provider orders and contracts in the standardsystem:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 157

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

ISPR - Provider order using E-Commerce

PRVO - Provider order for call center

PRVR - Provider order for dealer

PRVC - Provider contract

In addition there are the item categories:

TAP Sales item for packages

PRCN Free provider contract item (for rate plan combinations)

PRCP Provider contract item (for rate plans)

PRON Free provider order item (for rate plan combinations)

PROP Provider order item (for rate plans)

The previously offered transaction type and item category ISTC - Telco Contract are also available.

You can use the following item category groups for item category determination:

LUMF- Structure below (for example, with packages)

NORM - Sales item

PRNP - Provider rate plan, not relevant for pricing

PRRP - Provider rate plan

PRSV - Provider fee

You can make specific settings for the provider contracts, for example, for the contract change processesand pricing for contract changes, in CRM Customizing under Transactions -> Settings for ProviderContracts.

See also

Provider Orders

Use of Maintenance Framework for Business Transactions

Settlement of Recurring and One-Time Charges

1.13.16.3 CRM-BTX-CTR-UCO Usage-Based Service Contract

1.13.16.3.1

Use

This release note is only relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.2

You can process service contracts based on usage to bill your customers for services with a certain usagevolume (for example, number of copies) as defined in a service contract. This allows you as the service

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 158

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

provider to react more flexibly to customer demands while reducing costs for the end customer.

You can model the entire usage-based service contract process in SAP CRM, including creating a servicequotation and contract, entering and calculating the usage volume through counters and readings, andbilling.

For usage-based service contract processing, a quantity consumed is agreed upon in the service contract,and the services for the quantity consumed are defined under certain conditions.

You can link various contracts together in a pool contract for pricing and billing purposes. You can usepool contracts to periodically recalculate the usage of all assigned contracts (single pool contracts) orperform usage billing for all assigned contracts in the pool contract (aggregate contract).

Usage volume determination can occur in the following ways:

- Taking counter or meter readings

- Estimating

- Period-end closing

- Making entries manually

- Entering usage externally using an interface

Usage-based billing occurs on a periodic basis, using billing plans. You can bill the service contractseparately from usage-based billing. For example, if customers pay the contractual services monthly, butthe usage-based component quarterly, several different billing plans are available. There is also aschedule for pool redistribution. This schedule exists as long as a contract is assigned to a pool contract.


You make the necessary settings for usage-based service contract processing in Customizing forCustomer Relationship Management, in the section Usage-Based Service Contract Processing.

You make settings for counters, readings, and usage entry in Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement, in the section Master Data -> Counters.

See also

For more information about usage-based service contract processing, see the SAP Library(help.sap.com) under SAP Customer Relationship Management -> Components and Functions ->Service -> Usage-Based Service Contract Processing.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 159

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.13.17 CRM-BTX-PRV Provider Transactions

1.13.17.1 New Functions in the Provider Contract and Dispute Management(New)

Use

Editing Disputes (New)


You can create disputes in the Interaction Center to react to customer complaints such as missedpayments, credit memos, or incorrect invoices. For example, you can create a dispute with reference to aninvoice that a customer disputes. You can also enter notes for a dispute.

In addition, you can track a disputed invoice or you can create adjustment requests for completeddisputes.

Additional Change Processes in the Interaction Center (New)

This release note is relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0 or SAP CRM 5.2. Until now, you couldmake the following changes in the provider contract (Interaction Center):

- Contract extension

- Changes in product configuration

- Product switch

- Blocking and releasing connectionsYour customers can use these functions if they want to prevent unauthorized use of their telephoneconnection during their vacation, for example.

- Changing phone number

- Cancellation

- Master data changeExample: Address change after moving

As of this release, the following additional change processes are available in the Interaction Center:

- Change SIM Card

- Revoke cancellation

- Revoke extension

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 160

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.14 CRM-CMG Case Management

1.14.1 Automatic Case Notes in Case Management (New)

Use


As of Release SAP CRM 5.1, the automatic creation of case notes is supported. This makes it possible tohave T100 messages or manually created notes automatically created as case notes in the relevant case.

Additionally, you can use the Business Add-In CRM_CMG_NOTES_ADD to manipulate theautomatically created case notes before saving.

See also

For more information, see the funtion module CRM_CMG_ADDNOTES and the Business Add-InCRM_CMG_NOTES_ADD.

1.14.2 Case Management (Enhanced)

Use


Case Management contains an expanded set of functions listed below:

- Enhanced authorization control for case access: By connecting the CRM case to the Access ControlEngine (ACE) tool, flexible access control is available. By default, access is granted only to casesassigned to the same organizational unit. You can define additional authorization rules using theACE tool. For example, you may want to assign case access to a certain level of employee, suchmanagers, who are in different organizational units or territories.

- Automatic creation of case notes: A case note can now be created automatically to inform a caseworker about events that occurred and affect the case. You can define additional attributes for yourcase notes to store additional information, for example, a note status.

- Creating e-mails from cases: You can create an e-mail from a case and append any necessarydocumentation about the case to send to another case processor or person responsible. Thisstreamlines the case handling process.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 161

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customizing Case Note Attributes: You can customize note attributes by modifying the structuredelivered for Case Management notes. You do this by adding fields for data types in the ABAPDictionary in the delivered customer include CI_CMG_NOTE_ATTR.

- Reassignment of business partners in linked objects: If you transfer an ongoing case to another caseprocessor or department, all outstanding case business partners and their associated activities areautomatically transferred with the case. You can use the delivered BAdI Reassign Business Partnersin Linked Objects to influence this behavior.

- Repetitive tasks: You can flag tasks and activities contained in a case as 'repetitive' and maintainthe parameters for the repetition of this task. When you complete a repetitive task, the follow-uptask of the same type will be created automatically. A default repetitive task is part of the standarddelivery, however, you can configure your own repetitive task. To see how the default is configuredand use it as a reference for your own configuration, see the explanation of the process in the IMG.

- Linking related cases: In addition to the existing hierarchical case structures (sub-cases, superiorcases), you can link cases which are related, but do not form a hierarchy. This can give caseprocessors a different overview of how cases may be related.

- Case closing profiles: The case closing profile lets you define how open dependent transactionsshould be handled that are contained in a case that is to be closed. In addition, you can define caseclosing profiles for specific business transactions that may differ from standard businesstransactions. A BAdI is also provided so you define additional tasks for the case closing profile.

- Case archiving: After cases are closed, you can extract cases from the database and archive theinformation. You can also call up archived information for various case types if you want to analyzearchived case information.

- Enhanced case categorization: You can define attributes and link types to extend your casecategories. You do this in transaction EEWB when you want add attributes or linked objects thatwill be added to the category modeler. The EEW business object CATEGORY_ENHANCEMENTgives you the option of creating category attributes and/or object links to the category.

- Case APIs and data exchange: APIs and BAPIs are provided to search, read and modify cases, andto export and import cases via SAP XI in an XML format. This allows access to case informationfrom other applications, as well as importing cases and case information from one CRM system toanother via an XI server.

- Case Search Scenario: You can set the search scenario for searching cases by choosing betweenStandard and SAF/TREX. The SAF/TREX scenario is faster and allows the system to handle morecomplicated search requests.

- Application / Form Processing: The CRM WebRequest component supports the online form-basedprocessing of claims and applications. When an application (WebRequest) is created based on aninbound (XML) message, this message must be added as the original document to the createdWebRequest. Therefore, the external interface for the CRM WebRequest provides an additionalparameter to add this document.


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 162

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Define Case Closing Profile

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> BAdI: Define Additional Tasks for CaseClosing Profile

- Case Management -> Process Partners -> BAdI: Reassign Business Partners in LinkedObjects

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Archiving -> CRM Data ArchivingProcess - Here you find several BAdIs and an archiving activity and an explanation of thearchiving process.

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Special Settings -> BAdI: BAPIs for CaseParameters ->BAdI: Change BAPI Parameters - Here you find several BAdIs that influence theBAPI import parameters

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import and Export with XI - Here youfind activities for manually exporting cases to XI, monitoring cases exported to XI as well asmultiple BAdIs for customer enhancements with XI and mapping and import and export functions.

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Define Search Scenario

- Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Activities -> ConfigureRepetitive Tasks

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> ACE Implementation

1.14.3 Case Management (Enhanced)

Use


The following functions are available:

- Enhanced authorization control for case access: By connecting the CRM case to the AccessControl Engine (ACE) tool, flexible access control is available. By default, access is granted only tocases assigned to the same organizational unit. You can define additional authorization rules usingthe ACE tool. For example, you may want to assign case access to a certain level of employee, suchmanagers, who are in different organizational units or territories.

- Automatic creation of case notes: A case note can now be created automatically to inform a caseworker about events that occurred and affect the case. You can define additional attributes for yourcase notes to store additional information, for example, a note status.

- Creating e-mails from cases: You can create an e-mail from a case and append any necessarydocumentation about the case to send to another case processor or person responsible. Thisstreamlines the case handling process.

- Customizing Case Note Attributes: You can customize note attributes by modifying the structuredelivered for Case Management notes. You do this by adding fields for data types in the ABAPDictionary in the delivered customer include CI_CMG_NOTE_ATTR.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 163

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Reassignment of business partners in linked objects: If you transfer an ongoing case to anothercase processor or department, all outstanding case business partners and their associated activitiesare automatically transferred with the case. You can use the delivered BAdI Reassign BusinessPartners in Linked Objects to influence this behavior.

- Repetitive tasks: You can flag tasks and activities contained in a case as 'repetitive' and maintainthe parameters for the repetition of this task. When you complete a repetitive task, the follow-uptask of the same type will be created automatically. A default repetitive task is part of the standarddelivery, however, you can configure your own repetitive task. To see how the default is configuredand use it as a reference for your own configuration, see the explanation of the process in the IMG.

- Linking related cases: In addition to the existing hierarchical case structures (sub-cases, superiorcases), you can link cases which are related, but do not form a hierarchy. This can give caseprocessors a different overview of how cases may be related.

- Case closing profiles: The case closing profile lets you define how open dependent transactionsshould be handled that are contained in a case that is to be closed. In addition, you can define caseclosing profiles for specific business transactions that may differ from standard businesstransactions. A BAdI is also provided so you define additional tasks for the case closing profile.

- Case archiving: After cases are closed, you can extract cases from the database and archive theinformation. You can also call up archived information for various case types if you want to analyzearchived case information.

- Time-dependant data visualization: You can access and maintain information about the primaryperson of a case directly within the case without navigating to the business partner record for thisperson. This is used, for example, if the critical, case-dependent information about the primaryperson changes, thus affecting a case or claim. You can flexibly define the set of informationavailable in a specific case depending on the case type.

- Enhanced case categorization: You can define attributes and link types to extend your casecategories. You do this in transaction EEWB when you want add attributes or linked objects thatwill be added to the category modeler. The EEW business object CATEGORY_ENHANCEMENTgives you the option of creating category attributes and/or object links to the category.

- Case APIs and data exchange: APIs and BAPIs are provided to search, read and modify cases, andto export and import cases via SAP XI in an XML format. This allows access to case informationfrom other applications, as well as importing cases and case information from one CRM system toanother via an XI server.

- Case Search Scenario: You can set the search scenario for searching cases by choosing betweenStandard and SAF/TREX. The SAF/TREX scenario is faster and allows the system to handle morecomplicated search requests.

- Application / Form Processing: The CRM WebRequest component supports the online form-basedprocessing of claims and applications. When an application (WebRequest) is created based on aninbound (XML) message, this message must be added as the original document to the createdWebRequest. Therefore, the external interface for the CRM WebRequest provides an additionalparameter to add this document.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 164

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Define Case Closing Profile

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> BAdI: Define Additional Tasks for CaseClosing Profile

- Case Management -> Process Partners -> BAdI: Reassign Business Partners in LinkedObjects

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Archiving -> CRM Data ArchivingProcess - Here you find several BAdIs and an archiving activity and an explanation of thearchiving process.

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Special Settings -> BAdI: BAPIs for CaseParameters ->BAdI: Change BAPI Parameters - Here you find several BAdIs that influencethe BAPI import parameters

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Case Import and Export with XI - Here youfind activities for manually exporting cases to XI, monitoring cases exported to XI as well asmultiple BAdIs for customer enhancements with XI and mapping and import and exportfunctions.

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> Define Search Scenario

- Customer Realtionship Management -> Transactions -> Settings for Activities -> ConfigureRepetitive Tasks

- Case Management -> Extended Customizing -> ACE Implementation

1.15 CRM-ACP Account Planning

1.15.1 Account Planning (Enhanced)

Use


You can use the following features in Account Planning:

- Change historyYou can use standard change documents to track changes to account plans.

- Batch job to generate conditionsIn the previous release, the application generates conditions for an account plan when you releasethe account plan.You can generate conditions in a batch job. This can make it quicker to release account plans.

- Territory management enhancements for product and business partner input help

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 165

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

In the previous release, the input help for product, product category, and planning customer lists allexisting results for the master data. From here it is, for example, possible to select a non-assignedproduct in a territory. In this case, the application validates the selection and rejects the selectedproduct.You can filter the possible values in the input help by territory. This can significantly reduce thenumber of results in the input help, and accordingly the scrolling required for retrieving the desiredentry.

1.16 CRM-FM Funds Management

1.16.1 Funds Management (New)

Use

This release note is only relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0 or SAP CRM 5.2.

Funds management is an application that allows brand owners to manage the distribution, consumption,and administration of funds. It provides one of the basic building blocks for the market developmentfunds (MDF) and trade promotion management (TPM). Funds management enables brand owners totrack the status of the money in funds from the time it is budgeted to the time it is paid out to thecorresponding partners and customers. Funds management is fully integrated with sales planning,forecasting, SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI), SAP ERP, and financialsystems.

As of this release, the following functions are available with funds management:

- Funds plans and funds

- Fund usages

- Fund postings

- Budget postings

- Availability control

- Accruals

- Budget expiration

- Batch processing workbench

- Funds analytics

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 166

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.16.2 Funds Analytics (New)

Use


Funds analytics provide extractors to analyze funds and related objects for funds management (FM).Together with claims analytics, funds analytics provide the analytical basis for market development funds(MDF) and trade promotion management (TPM). BI extractors contain information about the fundsmanagement objects that are used in MDF and TPM.

You can use extractors for funds to transfer data from the source system to the SAP NetWeaver BusinessIntelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) system so that, if needed, you have a basis on which to build your BIContent.

The following extractors are available for funds:

- Funds Plan

- Fund

- Fund Posting

- Budget Posting

- Fund Usage

- Accrual Staging Area

- Expense Forecast Staging Area

Many corresponding text extractors are also available.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 167

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.16.3 CRM-FM-ACL Accruals

1.16.3.1 Accruals (new)

Use


You can calculate accruals in fund management (FM) for trade promotion management (TPM) andaccount planning fund usages to ensure that trade-related expenses are posted in the fiscal period in whichthey occur. An accrual is an amount that represents a liability or non-cash-based asset on an accountingstatement. These amounts include, among many others, accounts payable, accounts receivable, goodwill,future tax liability, and future interest expense.

There are five standard delivery processes:

- Accrual calculationThis process determines accrual amounts for fund usages that represent expected expenses on abalance sheet. Several accrual calculation methods are provided that calculate accrual amountsbased on a fixed date or spread over various periods of time.

- Accrual postingThis process retrieves the accrual amounts from the accrual calculation and determines if there is adifference from the previous period for a funds plan ID. The difference between the amounts isposted to FM.

- Accrual reversalSince accrual postings are financial documents, they cannot simply be deleted. This process collectsaccrual postings and submits additional postings with reversed posting keys (equal negativeamounts).

- Sales volume loadThis process retrieves the total amount of sales achieved during a specified period from SAP ECC.The sales volume load is required to perform accrual calculation.

- SAP ECC discount loadThis process imports off-invoice discounts from SAP ERP Central Component (ECC) into FM andposts them as external settlements. There are no accrual postings for discounts; they are expensed inSAP ECC as they occur.

The standard functions available for accruals in the batch processing framework are:

- Start accrual process

- Display results

- Edit results

- Provide external data for accrual process

- Display external data

- Display rebate agreement volumes

- Display distribution reference curve

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 168

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Edit distribution reference curve


You can define settings for accruals in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, bychoosing Funds Management-> Accruals.

See also

Batch Processing Framework

Direct Scan Based Accrual Rates

1.16.4 CRM-FM-AVC Availability Control

1.16.4.1 Availaibility Control (New)

Use


You can use availability control (AVC) in funds management and claims management to control fundconsumption.

You define an AVC profile that includes:

- Check rules that indicate the values which are included in the availability calculations.A check rule defines the value categories in a fund or fund usage that are added or subtracted toderive the available amount for a business transaction, for example, claim.

- Tolerance profiles that define details such as :

- Triggering usage rate, for example, consumption over 90% of fund budget or consumptionover 95% of fund budget

- Triggering absolute variance, for example, less than USD 50 left in the fund or fundover-consumed by USD100

- Currency of absolute variance

- Message issued to the user when budget is not available in the selected fund

- Authorization level, as different users may have different tolerance levels

You link an AVC profile to a transaction type in claims and funds to specify the control mechanisms forthis specific type of business transaction.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 169

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Define Availability Control (AVC) Check Rules

Define Availability Control (AVC) Tolerance Profiles

Define Availability Control (AVC) Authorization Levels

Define Availability Control (AVC) Profiles

Assign Funds Management AVC Profile

1.16.5 CRM-FM-BER Budget Expiration

1.16.5.1 Budget Expiration (new)

Use


You can use the budget expiration process to manage the expiration of budget postings based onexpiration dates in fund management (FM) for market development funds (MDF). You can view expired,or expiring, budget postings based on the expiration periods.

You can extend a budget after it has been posted if the expiry date has not yet passed. For example, thepartner is not able to consume the budget in the expected timeframe due to reasons beyond his control ordue to delays on the part of the brand owner.

You can also renew a budget that has expired but needs to be made available to the fund again. Forexample, the partner may not have been able to consume the budget in time due to valid businessconditions or because of delays on part of the brand owner. The renewed budget is available again untilthe next budget expiration process is run.

The expiration process does not expire a budget that is in the process of being consumed due toreservation or claim approval. However, if the reservation or claim that is preventing the budget postingfrom being expired is cancelled after the expiration run, the budget expires immediately.

The standard functions available for budget expiration in the batch processing workbench are:

- Schedule budget expiration process

- Manually perform budget expiration process

- Display budget expiration schedule for a fund

- Renew budget

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 170

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Extend budget

- Approve budgetBrand owner approval of partner initiated budget renewal or extension.


You can define settings for budget expiration in Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement, by choosing Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Define Transaction Types.

See also


Budget Postings

Funds Plans

1.16.6 CRM-FM-BFW Batch Framework

1.16.6.1 Batch Processing Framework (new)

Use


You can use batch processing framework in funds management (FM) to create, schedule, monitor andsearch jobs. Jobs can run unattended, and possibly simultaneously, in the background.


You can define settings for the batch processing framework in Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement, by choosing Basic Functions ->Batch Processing Framework.

See also

Accruals

Budget Expiration

Budget Postings

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 171

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.16.7 CRM-FM-BPO Budget Posting

1.16.7.1 Budget Postings (New)

Use


Trade promotion management (TPM) professionals and channel managers can use budget postings infunds management (FM) to manage budgets in funds.

You can create budget postings manually or by using an external planning application. You can useworkflow functionality, for example, for budget approval processes.

There are different types of budget postings. You can use:

- Budget updates to fill or remove budget from a fund, initially or at a later point in time

- Budget transfers to distribute budget between funds

- Budget expiration runs to automatically update the validity of the posted budget

- Budget renewals to make budget available after it has expired

- Budget extensions to extend the validity of budget, that have not yet expired

In the marketing development funds (MDF) scenario, budget postings may have an expiration date. Formore information on the budget expiration process, see Budget Expiration.

You can approve budget postings either without a threshold value or with a check against the thresholdvalue for the validated amount.


All budget postings are recorded in fund postings once the budget posting has been approved and theavailability of the posting amount has been verified.


In addition to the standard budget posting transaction types, you can define additional transaction types inCustomizing for Customer Relationship Management by choosing Transactions -> Basic Settings ->Define Transaction Types.

In the IMG activity Define Transaction Types, a new transaction category Budget Postings is available.You can use it to differentiate between the different posting types and to indicate whether:

- Expiration logic is used for this transaction type

- Multi-stage approval is activated for this transaction type

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 172

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

Budget Expiration

Accruals

Fund Postings

Funds Management

1.16.8 CRM-FM-FND Fund Plans and Funds

1.16.8.1 Fund Determination (Enhanced for SP02)

Use


Fund determination is used to automatically assign funds to different business objects, for example,budget transfers. You define fund determination profiles and assign them to transaction types to ensurethat budget from the appropriate fund is used in specific transactions. You can now use top-down funddetermination to distribute budget to subaccounts in the account hierarchy, for example, in budgettransfers.


You define fund determination profiles in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management underFunds Management -> Fund Determination -> Define Fund Determination Profiles.

1.16.8.2 Funds Plans and Funds (New)

Use


You can create and maintain funds plans, which are groupings of funds, for example, by fiscal year. Youcan have several independent funds plans. You may, for example, set up different funds plans fordifferent areas in your organization or for different functions. All the funds associated with a funds planshare the same currency.

A fund is a container for a budget. You give the fund a name, a description, a status, and a number of

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 173

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

attributes that describe its purpose. In trade promotion management (TPM), a fund is uniquely identifiedby the funds plan, the fund type, and the fund attributes. There cannot be two funds in a funds plan thathave exactly the same values for these fund attributes for the same fund type. In marketing developmentfunds (MDF), this is not the case. Two funds may have the same values as the funds plan, fund type, andfund attributes.

With funds plans and funds, you can use the following new functions to help you manage them:

- Mass creation and change of funds

- Budget postings

- Budget expiration

- Assignment of funds to funds plans

- Mass copy of funds from one funds plan to another

- Checkbook (funds)

- Managing statuses (funds plans and funds)

- Archiving


You can customize the following:

- Fund types

- Fund plan types

- Fund determination

- Expense types

- Key figures in the checkbook

1.16.9 CRM-FM-FPO Fund Posting

1.16.9.1 Fund Postings (New)

Use


You can use fund postings with funds management (FM). Fund postings automatically capture all valueflows that occur in FM as transactions are processed.

For example, fund postings capture changes to budgets, planned and reserved values, prepayment and

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 174

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

accrual balances, and expensed and paid amounts, and produce a line item-based audit trail as in afinancial system.

You can:

- Search for a fund posting and display its details, for example, the posting transaction, posting periodand funds plan ID

- You can verify the source details of the posting by clicking on the hyperlink to the specifictransaction that has triggered the posting. Note that it is not possible to link to fund postingscreated by accruals.

- View the line items related to the posting and link to the fund information

- Archive fund postings according to the SAP CRM standard data archiving process

See also

Funds Management

Budget Postings

Fund Usage

1.16.10 CRM-FM-FU Fund Usages

1.16.10.1 Fund Usage (New)

Use


Fund usages in funds management (FM) can be used to reserve parts of fund budgets for tradepromotions, account plans, or market development fund (MDF) initiatives. The funds can be reserved forclaims, settlements, prepayments, direct payments, and fund-based chargebacks and write-offs. Fundusages can then be claimed against, accrued and balanced after the last claim is made to returnunconsumed budget and accruals.

All fund consumptions are represented by fund usage objects. For example, for each trade spend plannedin trade promotions or account plans, a corresponding fund usage object is created by the system once thetrade promotion or account plan reaches a defined status, such as Released. A fund usage item is createdfor each product category or group. Each fund usage item lists the corresponding fund attributes, fund,and amount.

The following functions are available for fund usage:

- Search

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 175

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Display

- Balance


You can define settings for fund usage in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, bychoosing Funds Management -> Fund Usage.

1.17 CRM-CLA Claims Management

1.17.1 Claims Management for SP02 (Enhanced)

Use


Enhancements in Claim Submissions

Updates to amounts on the following business transactions are reflected in the amounts displayed on theclaim submission to which they belong:

- Deduction claims

- Fund-based chargebacks

- Project-based chargebacks

- Carried-over prepayments

To complete claims or claim submissions, you cannot now set the status manually, but you must usereport CRM_CLA_CLOSE, which checks the amounts for consistency. You can call the report usingtransaction CRMD_CLA_CLOSE.

Similarly, to write off claim submissions, you must use report CRM_CLA_WRITE_OFF, which you cancall using transaction CRMD_CLA_WRITE_OFF.

Search Enhancements

When adding trade promotions to an invoice claim, you can use trade promotion search.

Customer fields added via the Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEW) can be included both as searchfields and as columns in the search result list with searches for business transactions.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 176

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Optional Territory Check in Claim-Related Authorizations

Authorizations for the following kinds of business transaction can be customized to take territoryassignment into account so that you can easily grant users access to business transactions in theirterritory:

- Claims

- Claim Submissions

- Chargebacks

- Budget Reservations

- Prepayments

Moreover, where the territory check for a business transaction is enabled, partners and marketing projectsthat a user can assign to the business transactions are restricted to those in the user's territory.

You can use report CRM_TERR_REL_OBJ to increase the performance of the territory check. You canrun the report using transaction SE38 or as a scheduled job.

Enhancements to the Resolution Assignment Block in Claims

In claims that can be assigned to trade promotions (invoice claims), the Resolution assignment blockallows you to add target group members. In addition, it can be customized to use different indentationpatterns for the information under each assigned trade promotion depending on customizing settings forthe type and planning account of the trade promotion.

Collective Prepayments

For purposes such as end-of-year processing, you can consolidate several prepayments into a singlecollective prepayment and assign the collective prepayment to a fund that is different from the funds ofthe original prepayments. This allows you to close the funds of the original prepayments.

Partial Rejection for Correction of Partially Settled Claims (New)

Previously, rejection for correction of partially settled claims resulted in rejection of all correction lineitems in a chain of linked settlement documents. Partial rejection for correction of partially settled claimsallows you to cancel individual correction line items in a settlement document chain, with the aim ofreactivating the predecessor claim.

New data source for SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence

Information from both fund-based and project-based chargebacks can be extracted to SAP NetWeaverBusiness Intelligence with the data sources described in Claims Management: BI Extractors.


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 177

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Territory Check checkbox in Define Transaction Types

- Define Layout of Claims Resolution Tree

- Assign BI Info Objects to MDF Programs and MDF Special Programs

See also

- Corresponding Release Note for SP01

- Release Note for Scheduled Claims for SP01

- Claims Management: BI Extractors

- SAP Note 1122014 ("Currency in MDF claim")

- SAP Note 1132136 ("CSD Amount changes made in CRM 2007 SP02")

1.17.2 Claims Management (New)

Use


A claim is a request for reimbursement. A claim potentially includes information aboutproof-of-performance as a means of justifying the claim. A claim is submitted for audit andreimbursement (settlement).

You can manage claims related to trade promotion management (TPM) and market development funds(MDF).

For more information about the functional possibilities of claims management, see the application help.

Variety of Claim Types

You can use the following claim types:

Claim Type Recommended Area

MDF claim MDF

Direct payment TPM

Deduction claim TPM

Invoice claim TPM

Scheduled claim TPM

Chargeback TPM

- DeductionA deduction is any situation where the channel reseller or distributor has reduced the manufacturer'sinvoice amount because of a charge taken against advertising, marketing or any other activity.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 178

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Invoice claimInvoice claims are sent from the account (retailer, wholesaler, indirect) claiming an amount that hasbeen agreed on in a trade promotion/account plan. Invoices can be either very structured providingthe activities and performances as well as the claimed amount for each including proof ofperformance or there is the invoice amount with some explanatory note.

- Direct payment Direct payments are typically used to payout to various number of accounts/stores without a directbusiness relationship. Therefore there is no marketing project planned for these accounts/stores.

- Chargebacks A chargeback is a way of requesting money from the customer who has deducted from themanufacturer's invoice without performing.

Integration with Funds Management

The fund determination function controls which funds can be used for a claim. Fund budgets areconsumed when claims are validated. If a claim is canceled, the corresponding fund budget is also reset.

Approval, Validation and Settlement

You can use SAP Business Workflow tool to control the approval process. The process supports manualapproval and automatic approval, and notification.

Availability checks determine whether a claim or combination of claims can exceed the available budget.

You can use the validation worksheet function to determine, for example, how much is owed. Thesettlement process is triggered after finally approving the claims.

Integration with SAP ERP

Claims management is integrated with SAP ERP and can be integrated with SAP ERP DisputeManagement (ERP FSCM).

See also

Funds Management (New)

Market Development Funds (Changed)

Trade Promotion Management (Enhanced)

1.17.3 Claim Settlements (New)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 179

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Claims related to trade promotion management (TPM) and market development funds (MDF) are settledin the SAP CRM billing component and transferred to the following integrated applications:

- SAP ERP Financials (accounts payable and receivable, controlling)

- SAP ERP Dispute Management (dispute cases for deduction claims, prepayments, and write-offs)

The following is an overview of the claim settlement functions in SAP CRM billing.

Claims and Prepayments

When a claim is approved or a prepayment triggered, items from the claim or prepayment transaction aretransferred to the billing due list. Settlement takes place either during a scheduled settlement run or istriggered manually.

During settlement, credit memos are created for the payable amount. In the case of deduction claims,which do not require a payout, the credit memo clears a dispute case in SAP ERP Dispute Management.

You can activate an availability check to determine whether the fund budget is sufficient to reimburseeach claim item. If the budget is insufficient, the billing due list item remains open.

You can also make partial payouts for claims if the fund budget is insufficient for a full payment.

Write-Offs

Amounts that are written off because they have been overpayed to a claiming account or are unresolvedare also processed in billing. These amounts are posted as expenses in accounting.

Cancellation and Correction

You can cancel and correct settlements. For more information, see the application help for settlements inclaims management.

Note: You cannot use the following functions for claim transactions:

- Intercompany billing

- Supplementary invoice

- Retroactive billing

- Condition-based invoice split


You need to make the following settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, underBilling:

- Activate the following features (activity Configure Application):

- Enhanced Account Determination

- Funds Management Integration

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 180

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Marketing Set

- Set the billing relevance of all claims-related item categories to Value-Based Billing AfterApproval (activity Define Billing Relevance of Item Categories)

- Define the billing types that you require for settling claims (activity Define Billing Types):

- Assign one of the predefined billing categories for prepayments or claims.

- Assign any cancellation copy requirements that you require. You can use a predefined copyrequirement, or create your own in the activity Define Copy Requirements and implement it inthe activity System Enhancements -> Business Add-Ins ->Copy Requirements for Cancellation.

- If required, assign an account determination type for the billing type.Note that account determination types assigned to billing types override the accountdetermination type assigned to the entire application (in the IMG section Integration ->Transfer of Billing Documents to Accounting).

- Define the billing item categories that you want to use for claim settlements (activity Define BillingItem Categories)

- Assign each transaction type and item category for claims to the corresponding billing itemcategories (activity Item Category Determination -> Assign Item Categories)

You need to make the following settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, underBilling -> Integration -> Transfer of Billing Documents to Accounting -> Transfer to AccountsReceivable (FI-AR) and Accounts Payable (FI-AP):

- Specify symbolic accounts for determining the following in SAP ERP Financials :

- Expense and accrual accounts for claims, depending on the sales organization and expensetype

- Balance sheet accounts for prepayments, depending on the sales organization and expensetype

You do this in the activity Enhanced Account Determination -> Assign Symbolic Account Key.

- Specify the document types that you want to use to post billing data in accounting (activity AssignDocument Types)

- Specify the dunning block and payment terms for prepayments (activity Define Parameters forPrepayment)

You also need to set up data exchange according to SAP Note 883162 to enable vendor-based integrationwith accounts payable in SAP ERP. In particular, you need to make settings for the following:

- The billing type that you use for integration with accounts payable

- The billing category Claim Settlement (Accts Payable)

See also

For an overview of claims management functions, see the release note Claims Management (New).

For detailed information on claims and claim settlement, see the application help for claims management.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 181

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.17.4 Aggregation and Distribution of Amounts in Marketing Projects forClaims (New)

Use


As brand owner, you can add a marketing project to an invoice claim or deduction claim in the Resolutionassignment block. This marketing project is exploded in the respective levels. You can then enterclaimed, validated, or rejected amounts for the expense type or the entire marketing project. You do thisat the highest level of the marketing project or at expense type level.

You manually enter the amount claimed in the bill in the Claimed Amount column. You enter thecorresponding amounts in the Validated Amount and Rejected Amount columns. If you accept the claimedamount, the Rejected Amount column stays empty. If you accept only part of the amount due tocomplaints (for example, because the marketing promotion did not go as expected), you enter theremaining amount in the Rejected Amount column.

The amounts are then distributed to the respective subitems within a column, according to the predefineddistribution logic. The remaining amount of the fund is used as the distribution key, and the relationshipsin these remaining amounts are considered in the distribution logic. The relationships of the remainingamounts correspond to the relationships of the claimed-, validated-, and rejected amounts. As brandowner, you then have the opportunity to checkyour partner's claims and you can get an overview of thespending valuesfor certain marketing promotions and also analyze the promotions.

Note: The distribution- and summation logic of the amounts is used as an example and implemented as apricing user exit. You can therefore adjust this implementation to your requirements withoutmodification.


You use pricing procedure 26CSR0, which contains formula 2610. The cumulation- and distribution logicare implemented in this formula. You use the following condition types with the condition functions:

Description Condition Type Condition Function Condition Type for the Distribution KeyCondition Function for the Distribution Key

Claimed Costs 26C1 26C1 26D2 26D2

Approved Costs 26C4 26C4 26D1 26D1

Rejected Costs 26C7 26C7 26D3 26D3

Check whether the condition functions named above are assigned to the condition types. You canmaintain the condition functions in SAP CRM Customizing by choosing Customer RelationshipManagement -> Financial Services -> Basic Functions -> Pricing -> Define Condition Functions.

Note: If you want to create your own condition types, you must assign the condition functionsto thecondition types in accordance with default Customizing. When you create your own pricing procedure,you must include the three condition types for the distribution key 26D1, 26D2, and 26D3, in addition tothe condition types for validated amounts (26C4), claimed amounts (26C1), and rejected amounts (26C7).

You can find more information in SAP CRM Customizing by choosing Customer RelationshipManagement -> Basic Functions -> Pricing -> Define Settings for Pricing -> Create Pricing Procedureand Create Condition Types.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 182

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You have assigned the respective condition types to the pricing procedure 26CSR0 in the correctsequence, in easy condition entry. The condition type in the first field is connected to the ClaimedAmount column, the condition type in the second field to the Validated Amount column, and the conditiontype in the third field to the Rejected Amount column. You can find more information in SAP CRMCustomizing by choosing Customer Relationship Management -> Basic Functions -> Pricing -> Pricingin the Business Transaction -> Set Up Easy Condition Entry.

1.17.5 CRM-CLA-BI BI Integration

1.17.5.1 Claims Management: BI Extractors

Use


Extractors for Claims Management (New)

This document provides information about BI extractors for the following business transactions in claimsmanagement:

- Claims

- Claim Submissions

- Reservations

- Prepayments

- Chargebacks

You can use BI extractors to transfer data from the source system to the SAP NetWeaver BusinessIntelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) system so you have a basis on which to build your BI content.

The following are the attribute extractors:

- 0CRM_CLAIM: Attributes for claims (invoice claims, deduction claims, reimbursementclaims, and direct payments)

Reimbursement claims were previously known as MDF claims.

- 0CRM_CSD: Attributes for claim submissions

- 0CRM_RESERV: Attributes for MDF reservations

- 0CRM_PREPAYMENT: Attributes for prepayments

- 0CRM_CHARGEBACK: Attributes for chargebacks (fund-based chargebacks and project-basedchargebacks)

The following are the text extractors:

- 0STAONESYSB_TEXT: Extraction of texts for status group ONE

- 0CRM_CLAIM_PRIO_TEXT: Extraction of priority texts for reimbursement claims

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 183

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- 0CRM_CLAIM_REASON_TEXT: Extraction of reason texts for reimbursement claims


These extractors fill the extraction structure of a DataSource with data from business objects.

You can extract data from CRM claims management by performing a full extraction or by performing adelta extraction. These requests may be made with specific data filtering criteria.


For the 0STAONESYSB_TEXT text extractor, you need to have status object group ONE and BW statusobject SYSB defined in Customizing for Integration with Other mySAP Components under DataTransfer to the SAP Business Information Warehouse -> Settings for Application-SpecificDataSources (PI Basis) -> Status Concept for BP/Product/CRM Objects -> Display systemstatus.

1.18 CRM-ISA Internet Sales

1.18.1 Shopping Basket (Enhanced)

Use


The Requested Delivery Date field has been removed from the shopping basket in the provider shop.The Requested Contract Start Date is still available.

1.18.2 Enabling Links to Web Channel Applications from CRM WebClient UI(New)

Use


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 184

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can now access CRM Web Channel applications direct from the Partner Channel Management andWeb Channel roles in the CRM WebClient user interface (UI):

- E-Commerce Manager

- Partner Manager

- Channel Manager

The following Web applications will be opened in a new browser window, when you select theappropriate links on the UI:

E-Commerce Manager

- Shop Management application

- User Management application

- B2B and B2C Extended Configuration Management (XCM) applications

- Web Crawler application

Channel Manager



Partner Manager



- Collaborative Views application

- ICSS application

- Customer Shop

- Partner Shop


To enable links to the CRM E-Commerce Web applications from the SAP CRM UI, based on thestandard customizing delivery, you need to carry out the following activity in Customizing Define theProtocol, Host Name, Port, and XCM Application Configuration:

- For the E-Commerce Manager role:In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, choose E-Commerce -> BasicSettings for E-Commerce -> Enable Links from the SAP CRM UI to E-Commerce WebApplications -> Define the Protocol, Host name, Port, and XCM ApplicationConfiguration.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 185

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- For the Partner Manager and Channel Manger roles:In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, choose Channel Management ->Basic Settings -> Enable Links from the SAP CRM UI to E-Commerce WebApplications -> Define the Protocol, Host name, Port, and XCM ApplicationConfiguration.

If you wish to modify the standard delivered customizing and define additional URL links forE-Commerce Web applications, you need to carry out the following additional steps in Customizing:

1. Define URLs and Parameters.

- For the E-Commerce Manager role:In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, choose E-Commerce -> BasicSettings for E-Commerce -> Enable Links from the SAP CRM UI to E-Commerce WebApplications -> Define URLs and Parameters.

- For the Partner Manager and Channel Manger roles:In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, choose Channel Management ->Basic Settings -> Enable Links from the SAP CRM UI to E-Commerce WebApplications -> Define URLs and Parameters.

2. Create a transaction of type URL using the Transaction Launcher wizard. In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, choose UI Framework -> Technical RoleDefinition -> Configure Transaction Launcher.

3. Define logical links in transaction CRMC_UI_WEBAPPL.The descriptions entered here will be displayed as links on the SAP CRM UI. When creating thelinks you enter in the Parameter field the transaction parameter you defined in the LaunchTransaction wizard. For the Parameter Class select the entryCL_CRM_UI_LTX_NAVBAR_PARAM from the field entry help.

4. Define URLs.SAP delivers standard links to the various E-Commerce applications. If you need more than one linkto an application, for example, you wish to create one link for a search, and one link for create, enteran additional URL parameter for the transaction ID.

- For the E-Commerce Manager role:In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, choose E-Commerce -> BasicSettings for E-Commerce -> Enable Links from the SAP CRM UI to E-Commerce WebApplications -> Define URLs.

- For the Partner Manager and Channel Manger roles:In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, choose Channel Management ->Basic Settings -> Enable Links from the SAP CRM UI to E-Commerce WebApplications -> Define URLs.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 186

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.18.3 Improved Usability (Enhanced)

Use


Usability of SAP CRM Web Channel has been improved. There are two major improvements:

- The usability of the transaction flow: The appearance of links between orders, quotations, ordertemplates, invoices, and deliveries has been harmonized. On header and item level, the links topreceding and follow-up transactions now look the same in all transaction types.

- The usability of the result list: Additionally, you can now search for items of orders, quotations,order templates, and complaints and returns. Because items are usually displayed with more fieldsthan headers, you can now expand the result list, which is displayed in the navigation bar, to thework area.For more information about how the search has been enhanced with additional search criteria, seerelease note Generic Filter Solution (Enhanced).

1.18.4 Multiple Campaign Assignment (New)

Use


Campaign assignment to orders has been improved in SAP CRM Web Channel:

- When you create or change an order, you can now enter multiple campaigns manually on header - aswell as on item level of orders.If you click on the icon next to the Campaign field under Additional Order Data, five additionalfields appear, in which you can enter additional campaigns on header level. On item level, this iconcan be found next to the Campaign field in the item details. If you click on the hyperlink underthese additional fields, more fields are available to assign even more campaigns.

- If multiple campaigns are found by campaign determination, all determined campaigns are nowadded to the list of campaigns of an item.Prior to this release, you could only select one campaign, even if several campaigns were found bycampaign determination. The selected campaign was then assigned to the item. As of this release, ifmore than one campaign is found by campaign determination, all determined campaigns are addedto the list of campaigns that can be changed manually.On item level, a quick info text informs you that the system has automatically assigned campaignsto an item. This quick info appears, when you scroll over the flag icon next to the product in the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 187

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Description field. If you now expand the item, you can see in the item details which campaigns thesystem automatically assigned to this item.


You can enable the assignment of multiple campaigns and the manual entry of campaigns with thefollowing two parameters in the Shop Management:

- Parameter Allow Multiple Campaigns in the Marketing tab pageIf you enable this parameter, multiple campaigns can be assigned to an order on header and itemlevel.

- Parameter Allow Manual Entry of Campaigns in the Marketing tab page

- If you enable this parameter, all assigned campaigns are displayed and can be changedmanually.

- If you disable this parameter, the manual entry of campaigns is not allowed and campaignfields cannot be changed in the order. In this case, you can only see campaigns that wereassigned in the CRM backend system or found in campaign determination. The icon next to theCampaign field is only displayed if more than one campaign is assigned to an item.

1.18.5 Campaign Enrollment (New)

Use


You can now enroll yourself and business partners below your hierarchy level to a campaign in SAPCRM Web Channel. Additionally, you can see your enrollment status and the enrollment status ofbusiness partners below your hierarchy level of a campaign to which you have already enrolled.

For some campaigns enrollment is required before you can place orders with reference to campaigns.

You start the campaign enrollment on the Welcome page of the Web shop. Here you need to enter theID of the campaign to which you are assigned. Then you select the business partners who are to beenrolled for this campaign. Here you can choose between the following options:

- Option Myself: You can only enter a campaign that is assigned to you if you are a business partner.

- Option Specific Business Partners: An additional dropdown box - with all business partners inthe business partner hierarchy is displayed. If the number exceeds a certain threshold value, an inputhelp opens instead.

- Option All Business Partners: The list of business partners is generated from all business partnersin the business partner hierarchy and from the business partners who are in the target group of theselected campaign.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 188

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The campaign is displayed on a separate page with the following details: Campaign Type, CampaignStart Date and Campaign End Date, Enrollment Start Date, and Enrollment End Date and adescription of the campaign. The list of business partners is displayed below. Now you can activate theEnroll indicator of those business partners who are to be enrolled.

You can only change the enrollment data during the enrollment period. After that period, the enrollmentdata is only displayed and cannot be changed anymore. If the enrollment period has not yet started, youcannot change the enrollment data either.


- You need to restrict or select business partners in the business partner hierarchy in Customizingunder Customer Relationship Managment -> Web Channel -> Basic Settings -> Define BusinessPartner Hierarchy.

- To enable the enrollment of business partners, you can activate the parameter Allow transactionmanagement for other business partners in hierarchy in the General section of theTransactions tab page in the Web Shop Management.

- If you enable this parameter, you can also enroll other business partners in the business partnerhierarchy.

- If you disable this parameter, you can only enroll yourself as a business partner.

- To enable campaign enrollment, you need to activate the parameter Enrollment for CampaignsAllowed in the Marketing tab page in the Shop Management.

See also

For more information about campaign enrollment in the CRM Marketing application, see release noteEnrolling for Marketing Projects.

1.18.6 Dynamic Field Control for Orders (New)

Use


Dynamic field control for orders is now available in SAP CRM Web Channel. This function controls thevisibility and changeability of order fields in the Web shop depending on a user's authorizations and onthe field control of the CRM order.

The dynamic field control for orders is based on:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 189

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- The UI control in the Web shopThe UI control depends on the definition of order fields, that is, if order fields are visible andchangeable in the Web shop. On order pages in the Web shop, the field control adopts the settings ofthe UI control in the Web shop. Fields that are not to be displayed can be hidden or disabled inExtended Configuration Management (XCM) of the Web shop. With the authority check, thevisibility or changeability of order fields can be restricted even more.

- The authority check of the orderThe underlying authorization customizing depends on transaction type, item category and deliverystatus. To become independent from item category and delivery status, you can enter ' * ' in thecustomizing of both fields. As a consequence, certain order fields are not visible for a certaintransaction type. In this case, these fields are not displayed on the order entry pages of the Webshop.

The dynamic field control for orders offers the following functions:

- Hide, disable or generate fields dynamicallyYou can now hide, disable, or generate fields dynamically on header and item level on the orderentry and status pages in the Web shop.

- Highlight additional fieldsIf new fields are available when you change an order item, the corresponding items are highlightedso that you are aware of these new fields.ExampleWhen you enter an order in the Web shop and change the item data of this order, for example, theitem type or the product number, an additional field, which was hidden earlier, is now displayed.You are then informed by a system message that this additional field is now displayed.

- Support field control for empty line itemsPrior to this release, all fields were available in empty lines, regardless of a user's authorizations. Asof this release, only those fields that are visible according to field control and authority check aredisplayed.


For more information about how to hide or disable fields, see SAP Service Marketplace atservice.sap.com/crm-inst -> CRM Catford Project -> CRM Server and Standalone Components ->Development and Extension Guide for SAP CRM Web Channel -> Web Channel Framework -> DynamicField Control.


- Select the UI elements for the fields in the header or items of an order that you want to hide ordisable. To do so, use the file uicontrol-config.xml in Extended Configuration Management(XCM).

- Define the authorizations for display and modification of order fields. For more information, see theIMG activity under Customer Relationship Management -> Web Channel -> Basic Settings ->Define Authorizations.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 190

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.18.7 Generic Filter Solution (Enhanced)

Use


The generic search framework in SAP CRM Web Channel now supports additional search criteria. Inaddition to the search for headers, you can now search for items of orders, quotations, order templates,and complaints and returns.

Because items are usually displayed with more fields than headers, usability of the result list has beenimproved. You can now expand the result list, which is displayed in the navigation bar, to the work area.

- You can now search for CRM orders with campaign ID or delivery ID

- For one order transactions, the generic search framework is based on the reporting framework.Because the reporting framework does not support the search with reference transactions, thegeneric search framework has been enhanced.For more information about the usability improvements, see the release information ImprovedUsability (Enhanced).

- With BAdI implementations, you can now implement additional search criteria, for example,other reference transaction types for orders or other one order types.

- You can now search for CRM invoices with reference transaction IDSince the prior release, the search for invoices with order numbers in SAP CRM Web Channel onlyworks if the order is saved as the directly preceding transaction in CRM Billing. This does not workin delivery-based invoicing, where the delivery note is the directly preceding transaction. Therefore,the search for invoices has been enhanced and now also takes into account orders that are indirectlypreceding transactions.



- For more information about how to implement additional search criteria via BAdI, see SAP ServiceMarketplace at service.sap.com/crm-inst -> CRM Catford Project -> CRM Server andStandalone Components -> Development and Extension Guide for SAP CRM Web Channel -> WebChannel Framework -> Further Services -> Generic Search Framework.

- For more information about how to enable the expansion of the result list, see SAP ServiceMarketplace at service.sap.com/crm-inst -> CRM Catford Project -> CRM Server andStandalone Components -> Development and Extension Guide for SAP CRM Web Channel -> WebChannel Framework -> Further Services -> Generic Search Framework.


- The BAdIs to search for orders with campaign ID or delivery ID have already been implementedand activated.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 191

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- To define additional search criteria via BAdI, see BAdI: Additional Search Filter in Customizingunder Customer Relationship Management -> Web Channel -> Basic Settings -> Business Add-Insfor Web Channel.

- The BAdIs to search for items of orders, order templates, and quotations have already beenimplemented and activated.

1.18.8 Customer Role (New)

Use


The Customer portal role contains different iViews from CRM Web Channel, SAP NetWeaver BusinessIntelligence (BI), and SAP NetWeaver Knowledge Management (KM).

The navigation structure of this portal role has not been changed since SAP CRM 5.0; with the exceptionof the iViews for Internet Telephony (IT) and Callback, two methods of Live Support, that are no longeravailable. The Password Change iView has been removed from the setup page; this function is nowavailable on the central Personalization page.

All iViews, for example, for Ordering or Payment, are shown in the same browser window. That meansthat no separate browser window opens when an iView is started.


You have installed SAP NetWeaver 7.0 (2004s).

1.18.9 Collaborative Views: Search and Create (New)

Use


The collaborative views application is now available in the CRM WebCient UI. The collaborative viewsapplication is linked in the Partner Manager business role and now provides two different entry points:search and create.

If the user selects Collaborative Views under Search on the Administration work center, the Javaapplication opens in a new window directly on the search page for collaborative views. If the user selectsCollaborative View under Create on the Administration work center, the Java application is started in anew window directly on the page in which the user can create collaborative views.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 192

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, bychoosing Web Channel -> Basic Settings -> Activate Links from CRM WebClient UI to Web ChannelApplications -> Define Protocol, Host Name, Port, and XCM Application Configuration.

1.18.10 CRM-ISA-CAT Internet Sales Catalog

1.18.10.1 Basic Eye-Catcher Text in Web Shop (New)

Use


You can now display basic eye-catcher text for products in the Web shop. The basic eye-catcher textenables you to highlight important information about a product or package, for the user to see and read ata quick glance.

You can display the basic eye-catcher text in the following views, if you are using the block view formatin your Web shop:

- Home page special offers and personalized product recommendations views

- Product details page for package components and associated products

- Cross-selling, up-selling, and accessory lists

You can maintain the basic eye-catcher texts in the product master and display them in the catalog in theWeb shop. In the product detail page for packages, the basic eye-catcher text is only displayed forpackage components.


To enable the basic eye-catcher texts for products in your Web shop you need to carry out the followingactivities:

1. Maintain basic eye-catcher texts for the products as a basic text in the Notes area of the productmaster, or in the Text area for the product in the product catalog.Note, you should maintain the basic eye-catcher texts for packages in the product catalog. Youshould maintain the basic eye-catcher text for package components in the product master.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 193

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

2. Maintain Text Objects for the basic eye-catcher texts in Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement under Basic Functions -> Text Management -> Define Text Objects and TextTypes.Note, SAP delivers four standard text objects for your use:

- Text ID: EYEC - for the PRODUCT object

- Text ID: 0004 - for the PCAT_ITM object for the main product

- Text ID: 0005 - for the PCAT_ITM object for the package components and associatedproducts

- Text ID: ECSA - for the PROD_SALES object

3. Create a text determination procedure in Customizing for Customer Relationship Managementunder Basic Functions -> Text Management -> Define Text Determination Procedure. Note, SAP delivers the following standard text determination procedures for your use:

- For text object PCAT_ITEM:S2 - for manual product assignment in the catalogS3 - for automatic product assignment in the catalogS4 - for automatic and manual product assignment in the catalog

- For text object PROD_SALES:PR_0004 - for products with the type material

- For text object PRODUCT:PR_0001 - or products with the type material

4. Assign an access sequence to the text determination procedure in Customizing for CustomerRelationship Management under Basic Functions -> Text Management -> Define TextDetermination Procedure.Note, SAP delivers the standard access sequence A3 for your use.

See also

For more information about the block view format, see Block View Format in Web Shop.

1.18.11 CRM-ISA-CFG Product Configuration Internet Sales

1.18.11.1 Configurable Products Attribute Display (Enhanced)

Use


You can now determine how many characteristics should be displayed for configurable products in theWeb shop. This function is already available in the shopping basket, but has now been extended to thecatalog in the Web shop. You can enable this function now for the home page, product details, andproduct comparison pages. This means you can control how many of the maintained characteristics aredisplayed for the product. This means you have more control over what customers sees and enables you

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 194

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

to display important information for customers at a glance.


You can only use this function if you have created a configurable product in the product master and setup configuration.


To determine how many characteristics should be shown in the view for the configurable product youmust carry out the following Customizing steps in Extended Configuration Management (XCM) for yourWeb shop.

1. Log on to XCM at http://<server:port>/b2c/admin/xcm/init.do.

2. Choose Start -> General Settings -> Customer -> ui .

3. Enter a value for the parameter configinfo.catalog.view to determine how many characteristics canbe displayed in this view. For example, choose * to display all characteristics, or enter the value 2to display only two characteristics.

1.18.11.2 Comparing Products (New)

Use


Your Web shop customers can now see a side-by-side comparison of a group of products in a package. Inthis way you can support customers by giving them a summarized overview of the product features, andso help them to make a purchase that best meets their needs. The compare function is available in theproduct details page for the package, in the comparison window for products selected for comparison,and in the product overview page if you are using the list view format. When comparing packagecomponents the compare function is only available for comparison of products within one group.

For example, a customer selects a package in the Web shop. Ten mobile phones are available in thepackage, but the customer does not know which mobile phone best suits his needs. To compare thedetails of these mobile phones, the customer selects the phones and chooses Compare Selection. Thesystem displays those mobile phones selected with their various attributes and characteristics in aseparate window. The customer uses the simplified overview and detailed product information tocompare the phones. The customer then decides that only five of the ten phones are of interest to him.He selects these five phones and chooses New Comparison. The system then removes the other fivephones, so the customer has a better overview of those products he is really interested in.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 195

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.18.12 CRM-ISA-BCS Business-to-Consumer Sales

1.18.12.1 Provider Shop and Interaction Center Mode (New)

Use


You can now enable Interaction Center agents to log on to the provider shop to help customers who havea problem. The agent logs on using his own credentials, for example this could be an email address andpassword, selects the business partner he wishes to help, and enters the shop in the same mode as thecustomer. The agent can then determine what error has occurred during the customer session, and eitherhelp the customer to resolve the problem himself, or act on behalf of the customer to rectify the problem.

If the customer has saved a shopping basket and is in change mode, he must log off from the shop for theagent to log on. If the customer is simply viewing a document, for example an order, then he just needsto close the document, but can remain logged on whilst the agent checks what has happened and makesthe necessary changes to the order.

This is not a co-browsing function, the customer cannot observe what the agent is doing in the Web shop.


The Interaction Center agent must have the necessary authorizations assigned to his user, to enable thelogon to the provider shop and customer selection.


You enable the use of Interaction Center mode in Extended Configuration Management (XCM) for theprovider shop:

1. Log on to http://<server:port>/b2c/admin/xcm/init.do.

2. Choose Start -> Components -> Customer -> user -> callcentermode.

3. Set the parameter CallCenterMode to True.

See also

The customer must have maintained a verification word to identify himself to the Interaction Centeragent. For more information, see Verification Word for Web Shop Assistance.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 196

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.18.12.2 Price Eye-Catcher Text (New)

Use


You can now display a price eye-catcher text for products in the Web shop, in addition to the basiceye-catcher text. The price eye-catcher text enables you to highlight important price information about aproduct or package, for the user to see and read at a quick glance. For example, if you have a packagewith various prices, depending on contract length, you can display the cheapest price for the package inthe price eye-catcher text, to get the customer's attention. For example, From Euro 1 per month only!

You can display the price eye-catcher text if you are using the block view and list view formats in yourWeb shop. The price eye-catcher text is always displayed above the normal price information in the blockview, list view, and in the cross-selling, up-selling, and accessories list. If a price eye-catcher text is notmaintained, the text will not be displayed.


To enable the price eye-catcher texts for products in your Web shop you need to carry out the followingactivities:

1. Maintain Text Objects for the eye-catcher texts in Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement under Basic Functions -> Text Management -> Define Text Objects and TextTypes.Note, SAP delivers four standard text objects for your use:Text ID: PREY - basic price eye-catcher text for the PRODUCT objectText ID: 0006 - price eye-catcher text for the PCAT_ITM object for the main productText ID: EPSA - price eye-catcher text for the PROD_SALES object

2. Create a text determination procedure in Customizing for Customer Relationship Managementunder Basic Functions -> Text Management -> Define Text Determination Procedure.Note, SAP delivers the following standard text determination procedures for your use:

- For text object PCAT_ITEM:S2 - for manual product assignment in the catalogS3 - for automatic product assignment in the catalogS4 - for automatic and manual product assignment in the catalog

- For text object PROD_SALES:PR_0006

- For text object PRODUCT:PR_0005

3. Assign an access sequence to the text determination procedures in Customizing for CustomerRelationship Management under Basic Functions -> Text Management -> Define TextDetermination Procedure.Note, SAP delivers the standard access sequence A4 for your use.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 197

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.18.12.3 Recurring Prices in the Provider Web Shop (New)

Use


You can now maintain recurring prices for package components in your Web shop. The advantage to thisis that packages often consist of a cell phone, that is paid for once, and a contract, for which monthlycharges occur. With the new flexible recurring prices option you can now maintain this different type ofprice for your products and display the two price types separately in your Web shop. For example, forthe cell phone you maintain a one-time price and for the contract you maintain a recurring price. In theWeb shop the two price types will be displayed independent of each other on the user interface.

Products can only have one price type, either recurring or one-time.


With this new pricing option, the basic pricing functionality offered in the Web shop is not changed. Theinformation contained in SAP Note 824085 is still valid.


You need to carry out the following Customizing settings to enable the use of recurring prices in yourWeb shop:

1. Create a condition type and assign a calculation type.In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management choose Basic Functions -> Pricing ->Create Condition Types.SAP delivers a standard condition type, 0PMR, for your use. This condition type is defined for amonthly payment. However, the following calculation types are also available for your use:M - Quantity - Monthly PriceN - Quantity - Yearly PriceO - Quantity - Daily PriceP - Quantity - Weekly Price

2. Depending on whether you have chosen List Price or IPC price determination for your Web shopyou need to carry out the following Customizing settings:

IPC PricingAssign the condition type to a pricing procedure.In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management choose Basic Functions -> Pricing ->Create Pricing Procedures.SAP delivers a standard pricing procedure, 15lSAP, for your use. Condition type 0PMR is alreadyassigned to pricing procedure 15ISAP.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 198

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

List PricingAssign the recurring condition type, for example OPMR, to your product catalog variant.You do this in product catalog variant maintenance. You can assign more than one condition type toyour catalog variant. This means that if the catalog variant contains products of different price types,for example one-time, monthly recurring, and yearly recurring, all these pricing types will be shownin the Web shop.

1.18.12.4 Special Price Display in the Web Shop (New)

Use


You can now maintain special prices for products in your Web shop. The advantage to this is that youmay wish to have two prices for a product; the normal sale price, and a special offer price. You want topromote this special price by showing customers the amount they can save in comparison to the specialoffer price. When this function is maintained the two prices for the product will be displayed alongsideeach other in the Web shop, with the normal price striked-through. Although both prices are displayed inthe Web shop, only the special price will be sent by the system into the follow-on processes in the orderand invoice. The normal price has no further relevance in the follow-on processes, the system simplydisregards it.


The special price function replaces the previous two-price functionality in the Web shop. In ShopManagement you can only select either IPC or List prices for use in the Web shop, and not both at thesame time.

Other than this, there have been no changes made to the basic pricing functionality offered in the Webshop. The information contained in SAP Note 824085 is still valid.


Depending on whether you have chosen List Price or IPC price determination for your Web shop youneed to carry out the following Customizing settings:

IPC Pricing

Assign a calculation formula to a pricing procedure.

In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management choose Basic Functions -> Pricing -> CreatePricing Procedures.

SAP delivers a standard calculation formula, 1001, and a standard pricing procedure, 15lSAP, for youruse. Assign the calculation formula, 1001, to an appropriate calculation level, in this pricing procedure.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 199

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

This pricing procedure is assigned to the product catalog variant to determining pricing in the Web shopcatalog. By assigning this calculation formula, the value will be displayed in the Web shop as astriked-through price.

List Pricing

Assign the attribute Special Price to a condition type you have already maintained for your productcatalog variant.

You do this in product catalog variant maintenance. You can now assign maintain two condition typewith the catalog price type List Price for a catalog variant. One must, however, have the attributeSpecial Price assigned to it.

1.18.13 CRM-ISA-CNT Contracts

1.18.13.1 Contract Duration in Web Shop (New)

Use


You can now display a contract duration field for customers to select the appropriate contract duration fortheir rate plans.

The customer selects the length of the contract in the product detail page. The product prices are updatedautomatically by the system according to the contract duration selected by the customer.

The contract duration is also displayed in the order status, print version, and order confirmation screens.


You maintain the contract duration options, for example one year, two years, and so on, in the productmaster data for the rate plan.

1.18.13.2 Contract Negotiation: User Status Profiles (New)

Use


The button Change Status to Quotation and the according function has been added to the assignmentblock of sales contract items in the CRM WebClient UI. This button now allows the user to change the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 200

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

user status of all selected items in the item list of a sales contract from 'Inquiry' to 'Quotation'.

In the contract negotiation process, the vendor needs to verify and change the status of sales contractitems and sales contract header. The status handling has been enhanced by two user status profiles forsales contract header and contract items in the CRM WebClient UI. Therefore, the status of contract itemscan now be displayed and changed in the contract item list and in the item details in the CRM WebClientUI. The following statuses are now available: 'Inquiry', 'Quotation', 'Accepted by Customer' and'Rejected'.


The following user status profiles are delivered with the standard system:

- CRMECOCN for sales contract header

- CRMECN_I for sales contract items


You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, bychoosing Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Define Transaction Type and Define Item Categories.

See also

For more information about the user status profiles, see Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement at Web Channel -> E-Commerce -> Contracts -> Contract Negotiation.

1.18.13.3 Contract Negotiation: Status Display (New)

Use


The rejection status, quotation status, and inquiry status of a sales contract can now be displayed in theCRM WebClient UI. They can be displayed under any header on the header block of the sales contractoverview page.

The employee can now see if any items of the sales contract have been rejected, or if any items have beenor are still in the quotation status or inquiry status.


To make the fields Rejection Status, Quotation Status, and Inquiry Status visible in the header blockon the sales contract overview page, you need to configure the application component BT121H_SLSC inthe UI Configuration Tool.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 201

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

For more information about new user status profiles in the CRM WebClient UI, see release note ContractNegotiation: User Status Profiles (New).

1.18.14 CRM-ISA-BAS Shopping Basket and Order Entry

1.18.14.1 Block View Format in Web Shop (New)

Use


You can adapt the display of products in your Web shop to create a block view of the products on sale,instead of the standard list view. The block view can be used for products displayed in the special offers,personalized recommendations, and product catalog area views.

The block view is especially useful for the display of packages in the provider shop. The followingfunctions are available:

- Display of package and package components in one view

- Separate hyperlink to package details pages

- Paging functionality for easy user navigation

- Field customizing by stylesheet definitionsEach field in the block view has been defined as a separate area, allow you to customize the layoutmuch more easily. You can, for example, hide and show these individual fields to meet you ownspecific requirements.

- Package details page groupingIn the details page you can group package components in specific blocks to give the customer abetter overview of the products involved in the package. You can label the group areas accordingly,for example you can create separate blocks for mobile phones and associated products.

- Eye Catcher textThis text is displayed in the block view so that you can give your customers useful information to beread at a glance. For example, if the product is on special offer you can highlight this to thecustomer using the eye-catcher text.

- Use of Trex ServerIn this case the package components are read from the TREX server and not from the solutionconfigurator. This speeds up performance in your Web shop.

- Display of one-time and recurring payments, and special pricesYou can display the various prices for products in the block view. For example, you can display theoriginal and special offer price for a product.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 202

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You should be using the stylesheet b2c.css for your shop. The stylesheet b2c.css has been especiallyadapted to enable the use of the blockview and the customizing layout.


The following customizing settings are avaialble for the block view in Extended ConfigurationManagement (XCM):

1. Log on to XCM http://<server:port>/b2c/admin/xcm/init.do.

2. Choose Start -> Components -> Customer -> ui.

3. Adjust the following parameters to suit your requirements:

- CatalogArea.ShowAsBlockViewControls whether the products of a catalog area are displayed in a block view, or in a list view

- CatalogArea.BlockView.MaxRowsMaximal number of rows used to display products in the catalog area

- CatalogSearch.ShowAsBlockViewControls whether the products of a catalog search are displayed in a block view, or in a listview

- CatalogSearch.BlockView.MaxRowsMaximal number of rows used to display products in the catalog search

- PersonalRecommendations.ShowAsBlockViewControls whether the personal recommendations are displayed in a block view, or in a list view

- PersonalRecommendations.BlockView.MaxRowsMaximal number of rows used to display the personal recommendations in the block view

- GlobalRecommendations.ShowAsBlockViewControls whether the global recommendations are displayed in a block view, or in a list view

- GlobalRecommendations.BlockView.MaxRowsMaximal number of rows used to display the global recommendations in theblock view

- Catalog.BlockView.MaxColumnsMaximal number of columns used to display the products in the block view

- Catalog.ListView.MaxItemsMaximal number of items rows to be displayed in the list oriented view of the catalog

- Catalog.Page.MaxPageLinksMaximal number of page links displayed in the page link area

See also

Basic Eye-catcher Text in Web Shop

Recurring Prices in Provider Web Shop

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 203

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Special Prices in the Web Shop

Packages and Products with Dependent Components

1.18.14.2 Direct Debit Payment Method in Web Shop (New)

Use


You can now enable a direct debit payment method in the provider shop. The new payment method isdisplayed alongside other payment methods in the Web shop checkout area.

This function is enabled using business agreements. When the customer selects the direct debit paymentmethod in the Web shop the system automatically creates a business agreement in the backend system,and enters the payment information into the business agreement. When the customer saves the order thesystem stores the payment information in the business partner master data and in the business agreementattached to the order in the backend system. At order header and item level, the system provides areference to the business agreement where the payment data is stored.


You must be using the standard SAP delivered provider order BUS2000265.


To enable the use of direct debit in the provider Web shop you need to carry out the followingCustomizing steps:

1. Enable the FICA flag in the business partner master data.

2. Enable the storage of payment data in the business partner record and the use of businessagreements.In the Web Channel Shop Management application for the provider shop, on the Transactions tabpage, enable the flag Store payment information in business partner master data record.This flag enables the system to store the direct debit payment data in a business agreement, and thenin the business partner master data.

3. Enable the direct debit confirmation function in the Web shop bank transfer page. In certaincountries, for legal reasons, the customer must confirm that he authorizes the direct debit .In the Web Channel Shop Management application for the provider shop, on the Transactions tabpage, enable the flag User has to confirm collection authorization for debit memo payment.This flag enables the direct debit confirmation flag in the provider shop.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 204

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.18.14.3 Save and Upload Shopping Baskets (Enhanced)

Use


The save shopping basket has been enhanced to include a new option for saving shopping baskets in theprovider shop only.

Previously, when you saved a shopping basket the system would create an order template and copy thebasket items to the template. The customer could then reopen a saved basket, in the form of an ordertemplate. The system then transferred the products to a new basket for the customer to continue shopping.

Now you can choose, instead, to enable the saving of the shopping basket itself, without the creation ofan order template. The basket is saved in the CRM system and when the customer uploads the savedbasket, the system reopens the saved basket for the customer to continue shopping.

This function is particularly useful if a customer has selected and configured a package before saving thebasket. If this is the case, the system automatically checks the items for configurability and pricing andupdates the items accordingly. For example, if the customer selected an item on special offer whencreating the basket, and the special offer is no longer available, the item will be updated accordingly.

The following enhancements have been made in the user interface to support this enhanced function:

- The Save Shopping Basket As button has been renamed to Save Shopping Basket to underlinethe fact that the basket itself is being saved, and not a copy of the basket.

- Customers can maintain a description for the saved basket in the basket header to find saved basketsmore easily.

- Saved baskets are displayed in the mini basket when a customer is logged on. Before the customerlogs on, a link to the logon screen is displayed in the mini basket under the Saved ShoppingBasket area. The customer simply clicks on the link to the appropriate basket to upload and open it.

- A trash icon is displayed next to each saved basket link in the mini basket, so that customers candelete the entire saved basket if necessary.

- If the save and upload basket function is enabled, there is no display of the My Shopping Basketlink in the My Account page in the provider shop.


You enable the use of the new save and upload function for the shopping basket in the Shop Managementapplication for your provider shop:

1. Log on to the Shop Management application and navigate to the Transactions tab page.

2. Select the flag Storing and loading of baskets allowed.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 205

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.18.14.4 Separate Payment Methods for Web Shop Purchases

Use


Your Web shop customers have the choice of using more than one payment method for goods in theirshopping basket. You can assign a category to products, and based on this the system determines whetherone or two payment methods should be enabled for the purchase. You can assign one of the followingtwo categories to your products:

- GoodsThese products are supplier-relevant.

- Rate PlanThese products are contract-relevant.

This function is useful if you are using packages in your provider shop, for example in thetelecommunication area, where purchases often contain various items. For example, a customer selects apackage, containing a mobile phone and a rate plan. The customer may wish to pay for the mobile phoneby credit card, and for the rate plan, which is a recurring payment each month, by direct debit. In yourproduct master you have maintained the mobile phone as an item which is supplier-relevant, and the rateplan as an item which is contract-relevant. In this case the system will offer the customer the choice ofpaying for the goods with two separate payment methods.

The item categories of the chosen products are displayed in the Web shop in the checkout area. If onlyone category is available, only one payment method will be displayed. If both categories are available, achoice of two payment methods is offered for the items.


This function is only available for provider shops. When you create and maintain your Web shops inShop Management, make sure you select the provider shop scenario.


1. Assign item categories to usage types.In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management choose Industry-Specific Solutions ->Telecommunications -> Settings for Telecommunications Transactions -> Define Settingsfor Item Categories.Assign a usage type to each item category. You can choose between Item relevant to Supplier andItem Relevant to Contract. These categories are displayed as Goods and Rate Plan, respectively,in the Web shop checkout, check order, and print order pages.Note, if a product has the business type BUS 2000155 maintained in the product master, the systemwill automatically override any settings you make in this table. In this case, all items with this

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 206

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

business type will be regarded by the system to be contract-relevant.

2. Assign item categories to products in the product master data.

1.18.14.5 Shopping Basket (Enhanced)

Use


The shopping basket in the provider shop has been enhanced in the following ways:

- Save and upload of shopping basket function. For more information, see Save and Upload ShoppingBaskets.

- A New Shopping basket button. Enables the customer to close the current basket and open a newone. Note, any unsaved items in the current open basket will be deleted.

- A Delete All button in shopping basket header. Enables customers to delete all items in the basketin one go, and continue shopping in the same basket.

- Saved Shopping Basket link in mini basket. Saved baskets are displayed in the mini basket whena customer is logged on. Before the customer logs on, a link to the logon screen is displayed in themini basket under the Saved Shopping Basket area. The customer simply clicks on the link to theappropriate basket to upload and open it.

- The Your Description field has been moved to shopping basket header.

- The field Requested Delivery Date items has been added to the shopping basket header.

- Two price columns, one for basic fees and one for one-time payments, are displayed in the shoppingbasket according to the goods the customer selects. For example if a customer selects a packagewhich contains a mobile phone, which is paid in a one-off payment, and a rate plan, which is paid ona recurring monthly basis, the prices will displayed in separate columns in the shopping basket.

- A Change link for packages products, package components, products with dependent components,and dependent components is available in the shopping basket.

- In the shopping basket there is no Delete buttons or Add to Favorites button for sub items.

- If you are in a package or package component and select the link to Product Options, the systemwill open an extended product details page. For more information, see Extended Product DetailPage.

- You cannot delete package components in the mini basket. You can only delete entire packages orindividual products.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 207

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.18.14.6 Technical Data in Provider Web Shop Order

Use


You can now use additional technical data in the order in the provider Web shop to store further usefultechnical information. This technical data is necessary for the sale and follow-up service processes.

You determine which additional technical data is stored in the order, according to your companyrequirements. For example, in the telecommunication industry connection data, telephone number or SIMcard number, would be useful additonal information to have. The technical data is displayed in theshopping basket during order creation and in the check order, print order, and order status pages.


Enable the use of the standard delivered provider order (BUS2000265).


To enable the use of additional technical data in the provider Web shop you need to carry out thefollowing Customizing steps:

1. Assign set types and service types. The service type defines which set types and attributes are usedfor technical data maintenance.In customizing for Customer Relationship Management choose Web Channel -> E-Commerce ->Settings for Technical Data -> Assign Set Types to Service Types.

2. Enter the service type in the product master data for each product which should contain additionaltechnical data.

3. Enable technical data for the provider Web shop in Extended Configuration Management (XCM):

a) Log on to http://<server:port>/b2c/admin/xcm/init.do.

b) Choose Start -> General Settings -> Customer -> ui -> uidata.

c) Set the parameter technicalDataSupport to True.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 208

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.18.15 CRM-ISA-AUC Web Auction

1.18.15.1 B2C Checkout in Selling Via eBay (Enhanced)

Use


The checkout via B2C Web shop in Selling via eBay allows vendors to use their existing B2C Web shopinfrastructure to provide their customers with a secure checkout environment.

The checkout process of won auctions in the B2C Web shop has been enhanced. The B2C checkout nowallows the vendor to use the B2C Web shop marketing features like displaying cross-selling items andaccessories together with the won auction items to be checked out. This means that that customer cannow add additional products from the product catalog to the shopping basket and define the quantity andunit of quantity of these products.


You have made the necessary settings for the pricing procedure in Customizing for CustomerRelationship Management, by choosing Basic Functions -> Pricing -> Define Settings for Pricing ->Create Pricing Procedure and Create Condition Types.

1.18.16 CRM-ISA-UM User Management

1.18.16.1 Internet User in Account (new)

Use


You can now create and maintain Internet users in the Account. Previously, you assigned the roleInternet User to a user in the business partner transaction, in your backend SAP CRM system. Thisfunction has been moved ito the Account data maintenance in the new user interface.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 209

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.18.17 CRM-ISA-TEC Technical Infrastructure

1.18.17.1 Extended Product Detail Page (New)

Use


The product detail page has been extended to enable different user interface (UI) displays according tothe types of products being displayed or changed. This function is necessary for the new package andproducts with dependent componentsmodeling, which is used, above all, in the telecommunicationsindustry. These newly modeled products require a special configuration, which needs to be displayed onthe UI.

The UI displays for the product details have been enhanced as follows to meet the configurationrequirements:

- Display of sales packagesand combined rate plans

- Display of package components and groupings.All package components are displayed for the package product. However, only thecross-selling products, up-selling products, and accessories, for the main package product aredisplayed, and not those for the package components.

- Display of hierarchical dependent components

- Radio buttons for component selection

- Update Selection button and automatic update selection function for the recall of the SolutionConfigurator when component selection is changed.You can determine automatic or manual package explosion using the update selection andautomatic update selection function in Customizing. For more information, see Customizingkey block below.

- Current Total display for selected products

- Display of prices for all alternative products in the component list.For example, three mobile phones are available in a package. The price for each phone isdisplayed in the product details page, not only the price for the current selected mobile phone.

- Display of package components

- No display of cross-selling, up-selling, down-selling products, and accessories

- No Add to Basket function

- No Add to Favorites function

- Display of Back button

- Display of information as to which main product the displayed component is assigned

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 210

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Change mode for sales packages and combined rate plans from the basketA special UI is displayed when a customer selects the Change button for these products whilst inthe shopping basket.

- No Add to Basket function

- No Add to Favorites function

- Display of Back to Shopping Basket button


You can determine whether a package explosion is automatically carried out by the system, when thesolution configurator is called, or manually carried out using the Update Selection button. You set thisin Extended Configuration Management (XCM) as follows:

1. Log on to http://<server:port>/b2c/admin/xcm/init.do.

2. Choose Start -> Components -> webcatalog -> webcatdefault.

3. Set the parameter Catalog.Package.AutomaticExplosion to True for automatic explosion, and toFalse for manual explosion of a package.

See also

For more information about the new product modeling, see Packages and Products with DependentComponents.

1.18.18 CRM-ISA-SHA Shop Management

1.18.18.1 Verification Word for Web Shop Assistance

Use


Your customers can maintain a verification word in their personal data in the Web shop. This verificationword enables them to identify themselves to an Interaction Center agent when they call for advice orinformation when using the Web shop. The customer maintains the verification word when registering, orat a later time when updating their personal data.


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 211

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

To enable the use of a verification word for Web shop customers, you need to make the followingcustomizing settings:

1. Define the identification type to be used to identify customers when calling the Interaction Center.In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management choose Web Channel -> Basic Settingsfor E-Commerce -> Define Identification Type for Verification Word.

2. Enable the verification word field in the Web shop using the Extended Configuration Management(XCM) application for your provider shop:

a) Log on to XCM at http://<server:port>/b2c/admin/xcm/init.do.

b) Choose Start -> General Settings -> Customer -> ui.

c) Set the parameter ShowVerificationWord to True.

1.19 CRM-ISE Internet Service

1.19.1 CRM-ISE-COM Complaints and Returns

1.19.1.1 E-Service: Extended Complaints and Returns (Enhanced)

Use


The following enhancements to the Extended Complaints and Returns application of E-Service are nowavailable:

- Attachments in complaints and returnsFor example, the manufacturer requests justification of a complaint to speed up the approvalprocess, and the customer wants to submit a digital image of the damaged part or other evidence tosupport his or her case.The customer can now attach files on item level when creating a complaint or a return. If acomplaint item or return item was rejected, no matter whether it was rejected manually orautomatically, the customer can add further attachments before resubmitting it.

- Reference to handling unit in complaintsFor example, a customer receives a handling unit (HU) that is damaged or incomplete, and he or shewants to create a complaint with reference to that HU.When creating a complaint, the customer can now reference an HU. He or she can either enter theHU items directly into the complaint or display the complete HU list and copy all or some of the HUitems from that list into the complaint. In both cases, the system checks whether the HU belongs tothe customer or to the business partner hierarchy of the customer. It then determines the item anditem quantity from the invoice that corresponds to the HU. When copying from a list, the customercan select a complaint type, complaint item type, and reason code as defaults for all complaint

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 212

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

items.

- Display of inspection results in complaints and returnsIf the customer returns new or used parts to the manufacturer, the manufacturer inspects the partsand enters the inspection results in an inspection confirmation. Depending on the inspection results,the customer is refunded in full or in part, which is why he or she is interested in viewing theinspection results, especially those that are pricing-relevant.When displaying a return, the customer can now view the inspection results for each returnauthorization item and check decision codes, defect codes, and effort codes.

- Entry of exchange group in used part returnsFor example, a customer wants to create a used part return for an engine and is not sure of thecorrect product ID, so he or she wants to enter a collective term rather than a specific ID.The manufacturer can now group several products into an exchange group, thus allowing thecustomer to enter the name of the exchange group only. From the name of the exchange group, thesystem then determines the corresponding product.

- Entry of handling unit and packaging material in used part returnsWhen creating a used part return, the customer can now enter, on item level, the handling unit thathe or she intends to use for returning the parts, as well as the packaging material.

- Scrapping confirmationsTo reduce costs or to avoid shipping of hazardous parts, a manufacturer may prefer scrapping ofitems to take place at the customer's site rather than at the manufacturer's site. In that case, themanufacturer issues a scrapping authorization rather than a return authorization. Not until thecustomer confirms the scrapping is he or she credited.From the Welcome page, the customer can now call up a list that may contain scrapping items fromdifferent transactions. In this list, he or she can select the items that were scrapped and submit thisinformation to the manufacturer.

- SPL-requested returnsDue to a delivery bottleneck for a certain part, the service parts logistics (SPL) owner, that is, themanufacturer, searches for this part among the customers using a campaign. Each customer who hasthis part in stock can create a return request with reference to this campaign and get a refund for thereturned parts.To find such a campaign, the customer can now search the reference transactions for the SPL returnrequest and create a return with reference to the desired request, using the Copy function. He or shecan also create a return of type SPL-Requested Return from the Welcome page and enter the IDof the SPL return request directly in the new return.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 213

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.19.2 CRM-ISE-WBF Web Forms

1.19.2.1 New Link Type for Web Requests (Changed)

Use


As of SAP CRM 5.1, the link type for the associated CRM transaction is changed in the Web Requestscomponent. The migration program CRM_WEBREQ_LINKS_MIGRATE is provided to migrate alreadyproductive Web requests to Release CRM 5.1.


This change affects Web requests that you created in the releases prior to Release 5.1 (for example, CRM4.0, CRM 5.0). Once you upgrade to CRM 5.1, the call of the Web request data linked with a CRMtransaction is no longer supported. After migration to the new link type, this error situation is corrected.

See also

SAP Note 983481

1.19.2.2 External Interface for Web Requests with Attachments (New)

Use


As of Release SAP CRM 5.1, you can include files as attachments for Web requests that are createdusing the external interface, in other words offline. The attachments are linked with the generated CRMbusiness transaction and can be called from there.

The sample program CRM_WEBREQ_EXTERN_WITH_UPLOADA is provided for test purposes.

For more information, see the function module CRM_WEBREQ_EXTERN_CREATE_DOC.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 214

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.19.2.3

Short textSAP Interactive Forms by Adobe for Web Requests (New)UseAs ofthis Release with SP02, the use ofSAP Interactive Forms by Adobe is supported in theWeb Requests component. This means thatyou can use request forms that are based onAdobe Software as analternative to BSP-based request forms (that are still available)forrequest category views.SAP Interactive Forms by Adobe is completely integratedin SAP NetWeaver.You perform layout processing usingthe Adobe LifeCycle Designerthat isintegrated in the SAP System. Processing is user-friendly and doesnotrequire any specialist programming knowledge. The Adobe-based requestformis displayed in a Web Dynpro framework program.EXISTING_DATAEffects on DataTransferSYSTEMADMINISTRATIONEffects onCustomizing#11;&SEE_ALSO&For more information about SAP Interactive Forms byAdobe for WebRequests, see SAP Library under Web Requests.

1.20 CRM-RPL Resource Planning for PersonnelResources

1.20.1 Resource Planning (Enhanced for SP02)

Use


The following Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) are now available in resource planning:

- The connection of resource planning to the scheduling engine is now influenced by BAdIConnecting RPA to Scheduling Engine (CRM_WFD_RPA), in addition to the existing BAdIInterface to Scheduling Engine (CRM_SRV_SDL):

- BAdI Connecting RPA to Scheduling Engine connects the resource planning application(RPA) to the scheduling engine WFM Add-On or, optionally, to an external scheduling engine.

- BAdI Interface to Scheduling Engine connects other SAP CRM applications to the WFMAdd-On or to an external scheduling engine. For example, service order information that isrelevant for resource planning is transferred to the scheduling engine via this BAdI.

- You can use BAdI Service Arrangements (CRM_WFD_ARR) to publish service arrangementinformation for service providers and employees for other components and external systems atsaving.

- You can use BAdI Context Menus for Resource Views (CRM_WFD_CTXT) to integrate thefollowing context menus in the weekly resource view and the Gantt chart of the resource planningapplication:

- Weekly viewContext menu for resources

- Gantt chart

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 215

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Context menu for resources and for assignments


Resource planning requires elements from the workforce deployment server that is part of the WFMAdd-On 2.0.

Note that as of SAP CRM 2007 SP02 service-order-based and project-based resource planning requiresthe WFM Add-On 2.0 SP12. For more information, see the SAP note 1115278.


For more information, see Customizing for Customer Relationship Management under WorkforceDeployment -> General Settings for Service Resource Planning -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs).

1.20.2 Project-Based Resource Planning (New for SP02)

Use


You can now use resource planning to schedule resources for cProject role demands.

This means, you can use resource planning to carry out either service-order-based scheduling orproject-based scheduling with a number of resources. You can do the following:

- Maintain the availability, skills, job function, and service area of the internal and external resourcesthat you can schedule for a job

- Locate the resources that best meet the demands

You can use resource planning to comply with promised service level agreement (SLA) dates, meetemergencies, and maximize resource use. Once you have assigned the resource to a demand, you cannotify the resource through:

- GroupwareThe groupware notification is only available for internal employees.

- Any available channel; telephone, text message, or e-mail

- SAP CRM Mobile Service

Note that you can use resource planning either for project- or for service-order-based scheduling, but notfor both.

The following features are additionally available to fullfill project-based scheduling:

- You can create capacitive and concrete assignments for cProject roles.

- When creating concrete assignments for cProject roles, you can either create assignments for asingle instance or define a recurring appointment.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 216

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Before you create an assignment, you can define possible candidates in candidate management. Thisis especially useful for long-term projects.

- You can create concrete assignments from your groupware calendar.This function is only available for internal employees.

- You can use multilevel staffing.

- You can navigate from the SAP CRM WebClient UI to the cProjects application, by choosingResource Planning -> cProjects in the navigation bar.

- You can navigate from the resource planning application to the role details in cProjects by clickingthe project number in the demand search result list and in the project demand details in the proposallist for resources.


The service resource planning solution requires elements from the workforce deployment server that is apart of the WFM Add-On 2.0.

Note that as of SAP CRM 2007 SP02 service-order-based and project-based resource planning requiresthe WFM Add-On 2.0 SP12. For more information, see the SAP note 1115278.


To use service resource planning, you have to make the settings in Customizing for CustomerRelationship Management under Workforce Deployment -> WFD Server, Service ResourcePlanning and General Settings for Service Resource Planning.

1.20.3 Service Resource Planning (New)

Use


You can use the resource planning solution to carry out service order-based scheduling with a limitedpool of resources by:

- Maintaining the availability, skills, job function, and service area of the internal and externalresources that you can schedule for a job

- Locating the resources that best meet the demands of your service order

You can use resource planning to comply with promised service level agreement (SLA) dates, meetemergencies, and maximize resource use. Once you have assigned the resource to a demand, you cannotify the resource through:

- Groupware

- Any available channel; telephone, text message, or e-mail

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 217

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- SAP CRM Mobile Service


The service resource planning solution requires elements from the workforce deployment server that is apart of the WFM Add-On 2.0.


To use service resource planning, you have to make the settings in Customizing for CustomerRelationship Management under Workforce Deployment -> WFD Server, Service Resource Planning andGeneral Settings for Service Resource Planning.

1.21 CRM-MKT Marketing

1.21.1 Pertinent Master Data Changes (New)

Use


You can use the function for pertinent master data changes (PMDC) to evaluate changes to certain masterdata, and apply these changes to certain marketing objects.

The system monitors changes to master data in SAP CRM and to master data in SAP ERP that isreplicated to SAP CRM. You evaluate whether you want to apply the changes to the affected marketingobjects, or not. You can also exclude marketing objects from being updated in this manner by the system.

The PMDC function allows you to do a test run, so that you can simulate the updates to the marketingobjects. The system generates a log that records the updates that it makes, and also an error log.

You can use the PMDC function to reflect changes to the following:

- Product master data

- Product hierarchies

- List prices

- Price lists

- Partner/product ranges (PPRs)

- Listings

You can use the PMDC function for the following object types:

- Trade promotions (object types TPM, TPT)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 218

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.21.2 Personalized Mail (Changed)

Use


You can create personalized mail for use with internet mail, fax, and short message service (SMS).

1.21.3 Trade Promotion Upload Using SAP Exchange Interface (New)

Use


There is a new function available to upload trade promotion management (TPM) data from a non-SAPsystem to SAP CRM using SAP Exchange Infrastructure (SAP XI) technology.

You require the following software components for this new function:

- SAP_BW 700

- BBPCRM 5.1

- SAP_XI

To create new trade promotions, new TPM data is transferred from the non-SAP system using SAP XI toSAP CRM. Planning services in SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and RemoteFunction Call (RFC) destinations enable the transfer of both planning data and master data from SAPCRM to SAP NetWeaver BI.

The data flow is a one way pull scenario from the non-SAP system to SAP CRM. Should the upload fail,an error message is available in the application log (transaction SLG1), and the file has to be correctedand reprocessed. Following the successful upload of new trade promotions, the system status is set toCreated.

SAP XI uses a file adapter to collect the data in flat files in a specific folder using File Transfer Protocol

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 219

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

(FTP).

The source documents are converted into XML format.

You can upload the following TPM data that has been created or deleted in a non-SAP system to SAPCRM:

- Basic data

- Products

- Product categories

- Business partners

- System status (is set to Created)

- Trade spends

- Planning data

- Notes

- Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEW) customer fields that you can add to existing field structures

If the data contains errors or is missing information (for example, if the product is not valid), SAP CRMrejects the entire marketing object and returns an error message to SAP XI, which you can handle in SAPCRM. You can also check for errors in the upload logs in SAP CRM.

We recommend you schedule an upload once a week or once a month, for example.


- To enable the data flow between SAP XI and SAP CRM, you complete the following activities:

- Define the master data in SAP CRM

- Define the master data in SAP BI

- Complete the relevant Customizing activities for trade promotions in the SAP ImplementationGuide (SAP IMG) for SAP CRM

- Define the BI Content in SAP BI for layouts and profiles.

There are no new or modified IMG activities with this new function.

An HTTP connection has to be established from SAP XI to SAP CRM. The creator of the tradepromotion is the user assigned to the HTTP connection.

1.21.4 Deals

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 220

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

This release note is relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0 or from SAP CRM 5.2.You can now assign product categories and product groups to a deal.

1.21.5 TPM and Account Planning: BI 7.x Templates (Enhanced for SP02)

Use


The integration of BI reports into the CRM WebClient UI, and therefore into trade promotionmanagement (TPM) and account planning, is no longer restricted to BI 3.x templates, but now alsoincludes BI 7.x templates.

BI 7.x templates are executed by the Java runtime environment and were introduced with NetWeaver2004s. Reports that have been migrated to BI 7.x templates are stored in the same namespace aspreviously.

To use BI 7.x templates in TPM, you need to enter a BI report ID in Customizing for CustomerRelationship Management under Trade Promotion Management -> Key Figure Planning ->Define Parameters for SAP NetWeaver BI Analysis.

You can find this ID in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management under TradePromotion Management -> Key Figure Planning -> Display SAP NetWeaver BI Reports inCRM.

To use BI 7.x templates in account planning, you need to enter a BI report ID in Customizing forCustomer Relationship Management under Account Planning -> Key Figure Planning -> DefineParameters for SAP NetWeaver BI Analysis.

You can find this ID in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management under UIFramework -> UI Framework Definition -> Display SAP NetWeaver BI Reports in CRM.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 221

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.21.6 Purchasing Products and Services in Marketing Projects (New for SP02)

Use


In marketing projects, you can purchase products and services. By default, a purchase requisition iscreated directly in SAP ERP, when you set the status of the marketing project to Released.

When purchasing products and services, the following options are available to you:

- You can enter the supplier and the delivery address, for example.

- You can enter both internal and external products.

- You are informed about the current status of the purchase requisition.

- The actual costs are displayed at header level in the assignment block.

- You can use the purchase requisition ID in SAP CRM to go to the purchase requisition.

- You can use the purchase order ID in SAP CRM to go to the purchase order.

Budget Check

Depending on your Customizing settings, you can compare the costs when purchasing products andservices in a trade promotion or a campaign, with the respective planning costs. You can thereby performa budget check. If the order costs are higher than the planning costs, you receive a warning.

1.21.7 Trade Promotion Agreements (New)

Use


You can use trade promotion agreements with trade promotion management (TPM). A trade promotionagreement is a non-binding document that outlines proposed events and activities for a specific account,product, and date range.

For example, you could create a trade promotion agreement for 2008 for a key account at the regionalaccount level. The agreement would reflect an individual product, product group, or product hierarchy.Growth rebates and everyday low pricing, for example, could be explained in the agreement.

Once you have created the trade promotion agreement, you can:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 222

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Use the agreement as the basis for creating a new trade promotion

- Create a trade promotion and assign it to an existing agreement

- Copy and paste the agreement to Microsoft Word® or Microsoft Excel®

When you save the trade promotion agreement or change the agreement status, the system performs anoverlap check to ensure that there are no overlapping trade promotion agreements.

1.21.8 Mass Copy, Mass Change, Mass Approval (New)

Use


You can perform mass copy, mass change, and mass approval in marketing for trade promotions.Advanced copy and mass change are available for campaigns and marketing plans.

For campaigns and marketing plans, you can use mass change and advanced copy to modify attributessuch as product, status, date, and employee responsible. For trade promotions, you can use mass changeand mass copy to change or copy selected trade promotions based on trade promotion date, status,product, employee responsible, planning account, spend value, and causal.

For example, a key account manager (KAM) wants to copy last year's trade promotions for a givenaccount as the basis for the coming year's activities. The KAM would conduct a search for all relevanttrade promotions. From the search results list, the KAM would select the desired trade promotions,perform a mass copy, and then shift the dates. The KAM could also schedule mass copy and mass changebatch jobs, which run in the background. The KAM could monitor the batch jobs using monitoring tools.

The one-click integration of trade promotions in the Marketing Calendar allows you to view them fromwithin the Marketing Calendar. You can mass change dates by selecting bars in the Gantt chart anddragging. The relative time displacement between bars does not change.

For increased efficiency, you can view the search results in the editable list, allowing you to make editsfrom within the results list.

Mass approvals are achieved in a separate screen. This screen allows you to drill down into an object formore information, as well as view key figures. The system runs a promotion guideline check to ensurethat trade promotions stay within established guidelines, and also checks for fund availability. You canapprove trade promotions by selecting several and then clicking a single pushbutton.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 223

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

Trade Promotion Guidelines

1.21.9 Enhancements in CRM Marketing (New and changed)

Use


The following enhancements are available for CRM Marketing in this release:

- You can now add an existing campaign to an existing marketing plan both from the hierarchy tree aswell as from the assignment block. The top-level field in a hierarchy tree can also now be edited andyou can assign marketing projects at this level as well.

- It is possible to link directly from a marketing project to cFolders.

- Campaign response recording is available as an improved and more streamlined application. It ispossible to do response recording, for example, based on entering a personalized response code. Inthis case, the business partners contacted are assigned automatically. It is also possible to assign'unknown' business partners based, for example, on response inlays from magazines.

- You can search for coupons using a clearing house as a search criteria for your coupon code.

- You can make mass changes and mass copies of campaign or marketing plans using the MassChange and Advanced Copy buttons and choosing the criteria by which you want to make thechanges.

The following enhancements have also been made in Leads:

- You can now search Leads by Partner Function, Partner Name, and Partner ID

- You can assign partners to products within the lead object, and can search by products and in leadsin the search screen

- You can now make subsequent assignments in the Transaction History assignment block of Leads

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 224

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.21.10 Overlap Checks (New)

Use


You can use overlap checks with trade promotion management (TPM). Overlap functionality compares aselected trade promotion against other trade promotions in the system to check for overlaps. The checksare triggered when you save a trade promotion and when you change the trade promotion status. Checksare made against a customizable set of attributes, such as account, product, or dates.

There are two kinds of overlap check:

- DirectA comparison of a selected trade promotion and other trade promotions in the systemThe system checks only direct matches in the account and product attributes.

- HierarchicalA comparison of a selected trade promotion with other trade promotions in the system that considershierarchical dependencies within account and product attributes, in addition to direct matchesThis kind of overlap check can be run as a batch job, due to the potentially considerable amount ofdata to be processed.

1.21.11 Scheduled Claims (New)

Use


You can use scheduled claims with trade promotion management (TPM). A scheduled claim is a regularpayment where the payment schedule is determined by the business user. This is useful for automatingthe claims process in cases where the brand owner expects to perform regular payments. It is also usefulfor controlling when claims balances appear in financial accounting figures. A scheduled claim is alwaysan invoice claim.

The scheduled claims assignment block lists all scheduled claims created for a trade promotion. Each linein the assignment block represents one scheduled claim, which itself is composed of one or more tradespends.

You can do the following with scheduled claims:

- Define the payment scheduleSet the time period and the interval (in units of days, weeks, or months) for scheduled claim

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 225

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

processing.

- Create the scheduled claim either immediately or in the background as part of a batch processA batch process is useful when there are a number of scheduled claims to create for the specifiedperiod.

- Delete or cancel scheduled claims


To create scheduled claims in trade promotion management, you must make the following setting inCustomizing for Customer Relationship Management:

Define the process type you want to use for scheduled claims by choosingMaintain Process Types forInvoice Claims.

1.21.12 Trade Promotion Templates (New)

Use


You can use trade promotion templates with Trade Promotion Management (TPM). You use templates toaccelerate the creation of trade promotions. Rather than simply creating a new trade promotion from anexisting one, you can create a template as separate object for the sole purpose of expediting the creationof trade promotions.

For example, if you create a significant number of trade promotions every year for a given account, youcould create a trade promotion template that contains the account information.

You can use the template maintenance application in the following ways:

- Create a template in the template creation application.

- Create a new template from an existing template.

- Generate a new template from a trade promotion.

- Create a trade promotion from a template.

- Create a trade promotion from a template using the Marketing Calendar.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 226

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.21.13 Tiered Growth Rebates (New)

Use


You can use tiered growth rebates with trade promotion management. A tiered growth rebate is anincentive scheme offered to retailers based on performance levels. For example if sales revenue increasesby 10% over last year, the retailer receives a rebate of 1,000 USD; if sale revenue increases by 8% overlast year, the retailer receives a rebate of 2,000 USD.

Each tiered growth rebate uses a calculation method and consists of a set of tiers. The calculation methoddefines how the rebate amount is obtained, and each tier associates a range of performance values with aspecific rebate amount.


Tiered growth rebates require the following customizing settings in the Implementation Guide (IMG) ofSAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM):

- Add a tiered growth rebate type to the list currently defined for tiered growth rebates, or modify thecombination of variables associated with a tiered growth rebate type. A tiered growth rebate type isa unique identifier for a specific combination of base dimension, comparison dimension, tier type,rate type, and calculation method. Add a tiered growth rebate type by choosing Define TieredGrowth Rebate Types.

- Associate a trade spend combination (spend type, spend category, spend method) with a tieredgrowth rebate type, or modify the trade spend combination associated with a tiered growth rebatetype. Do this by choosing Define Trade Spend Combinations for Tiered Growth Rebates.

- Associate the names of the key figures retrieved from SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAPNetWeaver BI) for tiered growth rebates with the corresponding names used in SAP CRM. Do thisby choosingDefine BI Content.

1.21.14 Enhancements in Trade Promotion Management (New)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 227

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Roles

There are three preconfigured business user roles that are available for trade promotion management.These enable you to clearly identify the different tasks that are involved in the trade promotionmanagement processes in a large consumer goods organization. The three roles are:

1. Trade Claims Professional (New)Models the claims and deductions analyst role

2. Trade Finance Professional (New)Models the trade finance/sales finance role

3. TPM Professional (Enhanced)Models a key account manager role

Functions and Features

The following are the enhancements to trade promotion management:

- Funds Management and Funds Integration

- Claims Management and Claims Integration

- Pricing Simulation

- Indirect Relationships

- Marketing Calendar Enhancements

- Planning ServicesYou can now view planning information not only in the CRM WebClient User Interface (UI) butalso in the new planning UI based on Flex technology.There are two planning components available on the same page. This functionality is used by thevalidation sheet, for example.

- Target Groups and Product SegmentsYou can specify a target group for a trade promotion and view the hierarchy node associated withthat target group. After you release a trade promotion, you can track any changes to target groupsand product segments during the validity dates of the trade promotion through new change logassignment blocks.

- Attribute Filters

- Listings in Product Proposals

- Significant Uplifts and Transfer to Advanced Planning and Optimization

- Effective Dates in Trade Promotions and Deals

- Agreements

- Causals

- Trade Promotion Critical Changes

- Promotion Guidelines

- Trade Promotion Versions

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 228

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Cross-Order Caps for Off-Invoice Trade Spends

- Date Ranges and Trade SpendsYou can define additional search date ranges and extract date ranges to use with trade promotionsand deals.You can relate a date range to a trade spend so that they can be pre-populated in the trade promotionplanning page when you create a trade promotion.

- Planning for Display PalletsYou can include display pallets in trade promotion planning.

- Direct Scan-Based Accrual Rates

- Trade Promotion Editable ListYou can use the Trade Promotion Editable List search to edit individual trade promotions from thelist of search results.

- Working Context

- Long-Term Trade Promotions

- Mass Change, Copy, and Approval of Marketing Objects

- Overlap Checks

- Templates for Trade Promotions

- Tiered Growth Rebates

- Scheduled Claims

- Editable Overview Pages for:

- Account Defaults

- Deals

- Trade Promotion Elements

- Trade Promotions

- TPM BI Extractors


For more information on IMG changes to Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, seeNew, Changed and Removed IMG Activities in SAP CRM 2007.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 229

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.21.15 Take Rates (new)

Use


Take rates enable you to plan and accrue variable billback trade spends based on an expected volumerather than a shipped volume.

See also

Accruals


1.21.16 Attribute Filters (New)

Use


When you plan a trade promotion, the values you select in specific fields affect which values you canselect in the other fields of the object. The value selections in one field filter the values that are availablein other fields. This is dependent on the settings you make in Customizing.

The fields whose values you can filter through your Customizing settings are:

- Planning profile groupsThe selection of planning profile groups that is available for end users is based on the selection theymake for the account type and the product planning basis. The Indirect checkbox also filters theplanning profile groups that are relevant for indirect trade promotions.

- Trade spends (spend type, spend method, and spend category combination)The selection of trade spends that is available for end users is based on the selection they make forthe trade promotion type. It is only possible to select trade spends that have been configured forcondition generation. For example, if an everyday low price discount has been configured only fora trade promotion type of #Long-Term#, it will only be visible for trade promotions of this type.

- Which status values the user can see in marketing planning and account planning

- Search resultsThe search results lists in marketing planning and account planning show statuses that arerelevant to the user such as statuses that describe the lifecycle of the trade promotion.

- Trade promotion and account plan detailsThe details pages of the trade promotion and the account plan show statuses that are relevant to

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 230

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

the user such as statuses that describe the lifecycle of the trade promotion.

- Statuses in generalYou can customize which statuses are shown to the user in general so that whereever the statusof the marketing object is shown, the user sees only those statuses that are relevant.


The following IMG activities are enhanced to filter selection options:

- Define Planning Profile Groups

- Define Condition Generation

- Assign Condition Generation Type

1.21.17 Causals (New)

Use


Causals are used in trade promotion management (TPM) or market development fund (MDF) initiativesto capture how products are promoted to customers. Therefore, causals capture consumer-facing datasuch as promotional price (for example, two for $3.99), feature ad, store display (type and location),media, and so on.

Causals are grouped into a set of data and appear in a new assignment block on the user interface. Thisset of data is created for the product(s) that are assigned to a trade promotion and can be maintained at theindividual product, category, group, or segment level.

A causal can have many types, and each causal type captures a different way of promoting a product. Thecausal type is mapped to an expense type.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 231

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.21.18 Trade Promotion Critical Changes (new)

Use


A trade promotion critical change is assessed when changes are made to an approved version of apromotion's attributes or key figures to an extent that the basis upon which the approval status wasgranted no longer applies.

Critical changes are assessed based on defined business rules to ascertain if changes made to a tradepromotion's attributes since the last time it was approved, are critical or not. The new trade promotionattribute values are compared to the values in the last approved version of the trade promotion. If thevalues have changed and are deemed critical according to the established rules, the trade promotion willbe subject to re-approval.


You can define settings for trade promotion critical changes in Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement, by choosing Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data-> Rules Setup.

See also


Trade Promotion Versions

1.21.19 Editable Overview Pages (Enhancement)

Use


There are editable overview pages for the following Marketing objects:

- Account Defaults

- Deals

- Trade Promotion Elements

- Trade Promotions

- Lead

- Lead Templates

There is an editable overview page for the following Sales object:

- Opportunity

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 232

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

There are editable overview pages for the following Partner Channel Management objects:

- Activity (Appointment)

- Activity (Sales Call)

- Activity (Task)

- Lead

- Opportunity

Display and Edit

When you display any of the above objects, the Save and Cancel pushbuttons are inactive.

You switch to edit mode by clicking Edit in the assignment blocks.

If you enter data and do not save it, or if you switch from display to edit, the Save and Cancelpushbuttons are active.

Hierarchy View

You can view the hierarchies for deals, trade promotion elements, and trade promotions under GeneralData on the Details page by clicking Show Hierarchy.

1.21.20 TPM Funds Integration (New)

Use


Funds integration provides extensions to the SAP CRM trade promotion management (TPM) solution toincorporate CRM trade claims and funds management functions into the TPM solution.

You can associate funds to a trade promotion for planning purposes. You have the option of automated ormanual funds association. In automated funds association, the system uses rules set up in the fundsdetermination and availability check profiles to pick the relevant funds for the promotion. You can alsoassociate the funds manually at the root, product, trade spend, or trade spend product level. When youassociate the funds manually, the system enforces the same rules used for automated association torestrict the set of funds that can be associated to a promotion.

Additionally, you can:

- Associate a funds plan to the trade promotionThe funds plan association applies a filter to the fund determination profile to determine the setof funds available when planning the trade promotion. It also ensures that the currencies of the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 233

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

trade promotion and the funds plan match.

- Reserve fund budget for a trade promotionWhen the trade promotion reaches a certain pre-defined status, the system begins to reservebudget for the promotion from the funds.

- Maintain mapping between the funds type, expense type, and trade spends


You can maintain settings for funds integration in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management,by choosing Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions -> Funds Integration.

1.21.21 Long-Term Trade Promotion Planning (New)

Use


SAP recommends you perform long-term trade promotion planning using a trade promotion as opposedto an account plan.

- You generate conditions for a trade promotion in the same manner as for account plans.

- Trade spends are filtered depending on the type of trade promotion you select in the General Dataassignment block.

- In the Discounts assignment block only conditions that were created using the trade promotion areshown.

There are many new features that are only available for trade promotions, such as mass copy, masschange, mass approval, causals, editable lists, enhancements to the calendar. SAP strongly recommendsyou plan long-term trade promotions using trade promotions.


The standard delivery Customizing in the IMG activity Define Condition Generation has been enhancedto include a condition generation type for long-term trade promotion planning.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 234

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.21.22 Price Simulation Within a Trade Promotion (New)

Use


You can simulate prices for the products in a trade promotion before they are released for the field salesemployees. This supports manufacturer's work scheduling and enables the account manager to determinethe effect of promotional discounts on the final price of products quickly and in a step-by-step manner.


You have made the necessary settings in SAP CRM Customizing by choosingDefine ConditionGeneration.

First select the required condition generation type. Then navigate to folder Pricing Simulation and openthe Customizing view for processing.

1.21.23 Trade Promotion Guidelines (new)

Use


Promotion guidelines provide trade spend programming guidance to key account managers (KAM) basedon rules and thresholds that are determined at a sales organization level within the manufacturer.

Promotion guidelines can:

1. Issue non-compliance alert messages if a promotion guideline is violated during the trade promotioncreation process

2. Trigger a status based approval workflow. For example, change the trade promotion status toAwaiting Approval.

3. Prevent further changes that could impact the status of the trade promotion


You can define settings for trade promotion guidelines in Customizing for Customer Relationship

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 235

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Management, by choosing Trade Promotion Management -> Trade Promotions -> PromotionGuidelines.

See also

Trade Promotion Versions

Trade Promotion Critical Changes

1.21.24 Trade Promotion Versions (new)

Use


Versions in Trade Promotion Management (TPM) enable you to keep a historical record of changes totrade promotion attributes and numerical figures (key figures). Versions can be generated over a tradepromotion's lifecycle by a status change.


You can define settings for trade promotion versions in Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement, by choosing Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Versions.

See also


Trade Promotion Critical Changes


1.21.25 CRM-MKT-MPL Marketing Planner

1.21.25.1 Enrolling for Marketing Projects (New)

Use


To control and manage the participation in marketing projects, you can now indicate that for a particularmarketing project enrollment is required. The enrollment function is mainly designed for use in SAPCRM Web Channel. Web shop users can enroll themselves and accounts below their hierarchy level formarketing projects and can display their enrollment status.

If you set the indicator Enrollment Required for a marketing project, a new assignment block containing

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 236

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

the enrollment list is displayed. This list shows all accounts who enrolled for the marketing project viathe Web shop or were enrolled by an internal user. You can edit the list to enroll accounts or withdrawthe enrollment of certain accounts.

Only accounts belonging to the target group or planning account of the marketing project can enroll or beenrolled for the marketing project.

You can set a start date and an end date for the enrollment period. After this period, enrollment via theWeb shop is no longer possible. Internal users can still edit the enrollment list after the end date.


To provide entry fields for the enrollment start and end date, you have to maintain an additional daterange in Customizing (Define Additional Date Ranges).

See also

For more information about enrollment in SAP CRM Web Channel, seeCampaign Enrollment.

1.21.25.2 Enhancements to Campaigns and Trade Promotions

Use


Campaigns and trade promotions have been enhanced by the following functions:

- Abnormal Demand IndicatorFor materials management you need to be able to anticipate peaks in demand. You have to analyzewhether peaks are "normal" sales patterns and should be considered as a basis for future planning, orif the demand is considered "abnormal" and should not be considered for future planning.With a new indicator in the campaign and trade promotion you can define whether the sales ordersreferencing these campaigns or trade promotions are reported as abnormal demand.

- Complaint-Based Trade PromotionsTrade promotions can be set up to be applied to complaints. Within these complaints your dealerscan retroactively claim a discount with reference to a trade promotion. The field Usage Type showsthat complaints can be created with reference to this trade promotion.

- Plausibility CheckTo provide a flexible framework for plausibility checks within campaigns and trade promotions, anew BAdI is provided. With this BAdI it is possible to develop plausibility checks based on any datain SAP CRM, in particular based on attributes of the marketing program.If the BAdI is implemented, the user is able to trigger the plausibility check by clicking the Checkbutton in the menu bar of the marketing project.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 237

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Complaint-Based Trade Promotions

To define a usage type for complaints, chooseDefine Usage Types.

To define which transaction types can reference a trade promotion based on their usage type, you need toassign the usage type to the transaction type. You do this in the IMG activity Assign Marketing UsageTypes to Transaction Types.

If you want to default a usage type for complaint-based trade promotions, you need to assign this usagetype to the relevant campaign type in Define Types/Objectives/Tactics

Plausibility Check

The new BAdI can be found underDefine Plausibility Checks.

See also

For more information about the abnormal demand indicator seeClassifying Sales Order Items asAbnormalDemand.

For more information about complaint-based trade promotions see Complaint with reference to a tradepromotion.

1.21.25.3 Mass Generation of Sales Orders via Campaigns or Trade Promotions(New)

Use


You can now mass generate sales orders for a predefined group of accounts. This function is particularlyuseful if you have mandatory stocking requirements, for example if you want all your dealers to have aparticular new product in stock.

To generate sales orders via a campaign or trade promotion, you assign a target group, one or moreproducts and a quantity for each product. You then select a communication medium that generates salesorders and, if required assign a sales order template.

When you execute the campaign or trade promotion, a sales order is created for each member of thetarget group. The sales order contains a reference to the campaign.

Additionally, you can to set up your communication medium so that when sales orders are generatede-mails are sent to the target group members informing them about the sales orders.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 238

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


To generate sales orders you need to customize a communication medium,that triggers the generation ofsales orders. This communication medium must have the new communication method Generate SalesOrders assigned.You do this by choosing Define Communication Medium.

1.21.25.4 CRM-MKT-MPL-CAL Marketing Calendar

1.21.25.4.1 Marketing Calendar (Enhanced in SP02)

Use


As of CRM 2007 SP02, the marketing calendar is enhanced to display key performance indicators (KPI)of marketing objects. So you can view and compare say, trade promotions against factors that measurethe progress or degree of fulfillment for important objectives.

You can customize the calendar to include KPI-related columns in the calendar, while also definingwhich of the business key figures feature as KPIs for your organization.


To view KPI columns or group marketing objects by KPI values, you have to complete the followingCustomizing steps:

Define Views for Marketing Calendar

Add KPI to Views in the Marketing Calendar

Map Input Variable for SAP NetWeaver BI Query

Define KPI for KPI Grouping in a View

Define Ranges for KPI Grouping

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 239

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.21.25.4.2 Marketing Calendar (Enhanced)

Use


The marketing calendar can handle many marketing objects and plays a central role in Trade PromotionManagement (TPM). It is now enhanced with the following features, to complement the whole processof trade planning which includes creation and maintenance of agreements, activities and events:

- View agreement structures Provide a reference from the trade promotion to the agreement to view the structure of theagreement in the marketing calendar. This helps you see how activities, promotions and agreementsare related. You can also use this reference when searching, copying and printing.

- Specify calendar attributes Use various calendar attributes to specify how you want to group or view or narrow down on themarketing projects that you work with. They will be especially useful when you have to set defaultvalues or set available attributes with values directly in the marketing calendar.

- Prefill attributesUse the new working context feature to prefill the calendar with suitable attributes.

- Compare projects and valuesSplit the marketing calendar into a main and a second calendar, which will appear just below themain calendar. Enable the Split Calendar Option to do this.You can for example split the calendar and show all related campaigns in the second half of thescreen, or show the same trade promotions from this time last year.

- View fiscal year variantsView the fiscal year variant as well as calendars of potential customers in the form of time ribbonsin the calendar.

- Display holidaysDistinguish between working and non-working days in your calendar at a quick glance, and displayholidays in a different color. This helps you keep public holidays and special holidays in mind,when you schedule events.

- Synchronize calendarsMatch your calendar with say, that of a planning customer. This is the Smart Day Mode at the barlevel of the marketing calendar. You can have your calendar start on the start day of a planningcustomer. For this you have to maintain the default day for that customer, as part of the AccountDefaults application.

- Change and save trade promotion detailsMake changes to trade promotion details and save them in the marketing calendar itself.

- Create trade promotions using templatesUse trade promotion templates, which help you quickly create predefined trade promotions.You canfilter the list of templates in a calendar so that only relevant templates appear on your screen.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 240

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Export to Excel Export the marketing calendar to a Microsoft ® Excel Worksheet. This offline excel sheet keepsyour account managers and sales managers informed so they can present and discuss theirpromotional and marketing plans with their customers.


To export data from the marketing calendar to a worksheet, we recommend you use Microsoft ® OfficeExcel 2007 ®.


- To enable the split calendar option in the marketing calendar, complete the Define Split CalendarOptions step

- To view holidays, complete the Maintain Calendar step by choosing Factory Calendar (definesworking and non working days and is referring to a holiday calendar)

- To view calendar attributes, complete steps:Define Field Catalog Attributes for Marketing Project DisplayDefine Selection of Calendar AttributesDefine Permitted Row Context Attributes

1.21.25.5 CRM-MKT-MPL-ST Basic Functions

1.21.25.5.1 CRM-MKT-MPL-ST-KFP Key Figure Planning

1.21.25.5.1.1 Free Goods in Trade Promotions (Enhanced)

Use


Trade promotions can now be set up to provide free goods based on accumulated volumes. This functionis based on the SAP CRM rebate application. The rules can be defined based on monetary values orquantities. The free goods are calculated periodically at defined settlement dates and at the end of thesettlement period. A sales order free of charge with the free good as a line item will be generated for eachdealer who reached the volumes within the last period.

You have two options to define your free goods:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 241

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Product-dependent free goodsYou can define one free good for each product in the trade promotion.

- Product-independent free goodsYou can define free products that are valid for all products in a trade promotion. This way you donot have to assign the free products for every single product.


To work with product-independent free products you need a planning profile group with a planningprofile of the type Product-Independent Free Goods. You define this planning profile group inCustomizing for Customer Relationship Management , by choosing Marketing -> Marketing Planningand Campaign Management -> Key Figure Planning -> Define Planning Profile Groups.

To calculate free goods based on accumulated volumes you need to define a condition type that has theindicator Cond Type FrGds set. You do this in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management , bychoosing Rebate Processing -> Set Up Rebate Determination -> Create Condition Types.

1.21.25.6 CRM-MKT-MPL-DEF Customer Defaults

1.21.25.6.1 Trade Promotion Management - Product Hierachy Promotions(Enhanced)

Use


You can map trade promotions at product category and product group level and no longer have to assignpromotions to individual products.

There are a lot of trade promotion management (TPM) customers who generally run promotions forproduct categories or product groups as oppose to single products. An example would be that theytypically run promotions involving a percentage discount on all 330 ml bottles of sodas. So rather thandifferentiating in a promotion between cola, lemonade and juice, the customer simply promotes an entireproduct category or product group.

Up until SAP CRM 5.0, the marketing planner was based on individual products. You could enter theproduct category or group to search for a specific product, but the system always exploded the productcategory or group into its individual products and then stored the products of that product category orgroup as assignments to the marketing element. You can now plan and execute promotions, deals, andcampaigns at product category and group level. This brings a significant improvement to the performance

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 242

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

and usability for consumer products customers.

This functionality improves the overall performance of TPM by reducing the number of productsassigned, reducing significantly the volumes/trade spends planning layout and the generation of campaigndetermination records.

Overview of New and Enhanced TPM Features

- Assigning a Product/Product Category/Product Group to a Trade PromotionYou can assign individual products in combination with product categories or groups to tradepromotions. However, you cannot assign both product categories and product groups in the samepromotion. If the individual product is a structure product, you cannot explode to the product items.If you want to explode the structure product, you can either implement a Business Add-In (BAdI) orassign the structure's product items individually.You can assign a product category or group without exploding to the individual products. You canenter any level of the product hierarchy as long as there is no overlap between the productscategories that are assigned. After you assign products, product categories or product groups, thesystem checks the assigned product category or group against the territory, the partner/productrange, and the listing for the SAP CRM product hierarchy. It also checks for any overlaps betweenindividual products and product categories. If there are any overlaps, the system produces an errormessage and you cannot complete the assignment to the trade promotion. Finally the system checksfor any overlapping product category assignments, which would also produce an error message.You can define in Customizing to what level you want to be able to explode the product categoryassignments. If there are no settings in Customizing, then the system explodes by default to thelowest level of the product hierarchy.In addition, the system retrieves a list price or price list for a product category or group.

- Generating Conditions at Product Category or Group LevelYou can generate condition records for variable and fixed trade spends as well as campaigndetermination at product category or group level. You can determine and assign a rebate product.The rebate product is selected arbitrarily from the list of products that belong to the productcategory or group. You can implement a BAdI if you want to use your own product determination.

- Volumes/Trade SpendsYou can plan volumes and trade spends without any specific product dimension. However, if youwant to plan for product categories or groups, then you must specify a product category or group.The system must also be able to retrieve the list price and/or the price list for any new productassignments.

- Managing Trade PromotionsEnhancements to managing trade promotions include the following:

- Print FunctionalityThe print functionality of the marketing planner lists the product category or group that isassigned.

- Advanced SearchThe marketing planner advanced search enables you to search for trade promotions by productcategory or group. You can also save your own queries with the relevant product category orgroup in the selection criteria and use these in the marketing calendar.It is still possible to search for trade promotions by product. The system determines the productcategory or group and retrieves the relevant trade promotions. However, searching by productcan be performance-intensive due to the distribution chain dependency.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 243

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Change DocumentChange documents are enhanced to include the new product category or group assignment topromotions.

- ArchivingArchiving is enhanced to include the new product category or group assignment.

- CRM Mobile Sales IntegrationThe product category or group assignment is added to the messaging BDoc type and then transferredto the marketing element.

- Trade Promotion Execution and Order EntryThe campaign determination process in SAP ERP and SAP CRM has been modified to enable theproduct category or group to be referenced in the campaign determination condition records.


There is a standard master role available for TPM.


Note the following prerequisites, which must be fulfilled to enable you to plan and execute tradepromotions at product category and group level:

- The price list must contain the product category or group to enable the system to retrieve a price listfor a promotion that has been planned at product category or group level.

- All the products that belong to a product category or group must have the same base and sales unitas well as the same list price or price list.

- Only the sales-dependent product hierarchy is supported. In a SAP CRM and SAP EnterpriseResource Planning (SAP ERP) integration scenario, the only hierarchy SAP supports isR3PRODHIER. This is due to consistency and reporting reasons.

- Condition records do not have the unit as a key field. Therefore,there is only one row for eachproduct category or group in the planning layout. SAP does not support several rows for severalunits for each product category or group.

- SAP does not support condition records of usage free goods (FG) for product categories or groups.

- In SAP ERP, listings are maintained at product level only. In SAP CRM, there is no listing check atproduct level as products are not assigned to the promotion. The listing check is executed at productcategory level.

- You can no longer report on individual products for promotions that are planned at product categoryor group level unless the planned data is disaggregated to products.

- New customizing to define the explosion level for mass assignment of product categories. If nolevel is maintained, then the system explodes to the lowest level of the product hierarchy.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 244

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- New planning profile groups are available for trade promotion analyses in SAP NetWeaver BusinessIntelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI). You no longer define these analyses in the IMG for Marketingbut in transaction CRMC_UI_BI.

- New planning layouts are available in BI-BPS to plan at product category and/or group without anyproduct dimension.

1.21.25.7 CRM-MKT-MPL-MDF Marketing Development Funds

1.21.25.7.1 MDF BI Extractors (Enhanced in SP02)

Use


This document provides information about additional functions of the existing Market Development Fund(MDF) BI extractors for the following objects in the Marketing Planner:

- 0CRM_MKTMDF_CP_ATTR - provides channel partner enrollment information for an MDFprogram and MDF special program.This allows you to extract information about the relationship between channel partners and MDFprograms and special programs.

- 0CRM_MKTPGM_ATTR - provides funds plan information for an MDF program.This existing MDF Program extractor is now enhanced to allow extraction of funds plan informationassigned to an MDF program.


Extractors fill the extraction structure of a DataSource with data from business objects.

You can extract data from CRM MDF applications, by performing a full extraction or by performing adelta extraction. These requests may be made with specific data filtering criteria.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 245

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.21.25.7.2 Market Development Funds (Changed)

Use


Market development funds (MDF) are resources that you make available to channel partners forcooperative marketing. A variety of features enable you to more efficiently manage the MDF process,from planning, through enrollment of channel partners, through settlement of claims in SAP ERP.

MDF uses functions from funds management and claims management.

For more information about the functional possibilities of MDF, see the application help.

MDF Programs

You use an MDF program as the basis for managing cooperative marketing with a set of channel partners.An MDF program has one or more marketing goals, for example, higher awareness of a particular rangeof products and increased market share in a particular market sector.

You define which channel partners are eligible to participate in the particular MDF program, what moneyis available for them, and which products are involved. You also define the rate at which the channelpartners are reimbursed when they execute as agreed.

MDF Special Programs

An MDF special program is a part of an MDF program with more specific marketing goals, for example,promoting a subset of products or targeting a subset of accounts.

An MDF special program allows you to assign a specific subset of channel partners, granting themspecific terms and conditions.

Mass Creation of Funds

A fund generation function enables you to mass create funds for many channel partners at the same timewithout having to create each fund individually. This could be a one-time process or a repetitive processthat needs to be executed often for new channel partners.

MDF Initiatives

An MDF initiative is a plan for marketing activities proposed by one of your channel partners. It specifiescertain marketing activities that your partner undertakes to promote your products. It thus provides thebasis for you, as a brand owner, to contribute funding to them. You make your contribution byreimbursing channel partners for their expenses in this collaborative project. MDF initiatives provide ameans for you to manage your contributions ahead of claims in a number of ways:

- MDF initiatives come with an approval workflow that enables you to negotiate the project plan,including estimated costs and causals.You can also allow for partial approval and partial rejection by structuring the MDF initiative intoMDF initiative elements, for instance, to deal with different phases of the project.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 246

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- MDF initiatives enable you to reserve certain amounts of money in funds for upcomingreimbursement claims by channel partners. If a claim is created from the same MDF initiative as thereservation, it must consume the reservation.

An MDF initiative is created under a specific MDF program or MDF special program. This determinesthe funds available for reservations and claims based on the initiative as well as the terms and conditionsfor them.

MDF Initiative Templates

An MDF initiative template is assigned to an MDF program or MDF special program to control andspeed up the creation of MDF initiatives under that MDF program or MDF special program.

MDF initiative templates are more than a copy-and-modify mechanism. They enable you, as a brandowner, to constrain the choices available in MDF initiatives and to provide default values for specificfields. Thus they implement your policy of what kinds of marketing activities you want to encourage.

MDF initiative templates have the same structure (fields and assignment blocks) as MDF initiatives, butyou cannot create reservations or claims from them. Reservations and claims can only be created from anMDF initiative.

Reservations

A reservation ensures that the funds for an MDF initiative still contain enough money when an expectedreimbursement claim arrives.

The reservation prevents the required amount from being spent for purposes other than those stated in theMDF initiative.

If the required amount is not available in a single fund, but your MDF initiative is in an MDF program orMDF special program that has multiple funds, you can break the amount down into smaller amounts inthe reservation and reserve each of them in a different fund.

Channel Partner Hierarchies

A channel partner hierarchy is the hierarchical grouping of family members of a channel partnercorporate family. Technically speaking, it is a type of account hierarchy.

Your channel partners map their organizational structures in relationship to you, the brand owner, inchannel partner hierarchies and use these to assign and manage funds, and to pass them on to lowerlevels. The modeling used here is freely definable. Both geographic modeling (for example, according tointernational subsidiaries) as well as segmentation into divisions or subsidiaries is possible. The type ofmodeling used is dependent on the way in which your channel partners wish to distribute and manage themarket development funds granted to them by your organization within their corporate family.

Authorizations and User Management


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 247

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Not compatible with previous releases of MDF.

See also

Market Development Funds: Extractors (New)

Claims Management (New)

Funds Management (New)

1.21.25.7.3 Authorization and User Management (Enhanced)

Use


The brand owner offers MDF as a resource to partners funding marketing related activities. A channelpartner is an external company and not part of the organizational model of the brand owner.

But since the channel partner still uses the brand owner's CRM system to carry out marketdevelopment-related activities, you as a brand owner can use special rights to control or determine thekind of information your channel partners will be allowed to see and create.

Working at the brand owner is the channel manager. He or she manages partner relationships,collaborates with partners, and optimizes channel operations. A channel manager would need access tooperational and analytical data to manage and optimize the indirect sales channel, from partner recruitingand planning to monitoring transactions within the channel. This includes modeling and maintaining thecorporate family and the channel partner hierarchy.

The channel manager works with the partner manager on the channel partner side.

As part of authorization and user management, you can use the following features that have beenenhanced and delivered as standard, for MDF:

Roles (Enhanced)

Business Roles

In order to restrict access to documents and applications to authorized personnel, you can define andassign appropriate roles. The standard partner channel management roles have been enhanced for usewith MDF applications. So part of the standard delivery is

- CHM-CM for the channel manager

- CHM-PM for the partner manager

Business roles, that is the channel manager and partner manager roles, define applications, objects,workcenter pages that the user can see.

PFCG Roles (Enhanced)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 248

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Each business role has at least one PFCG role, which specifies its authorization profile. You use this roleto grant specific rights to a user, for example, a super-user function.

The standard delivery for partner channel management provides the following PFCG roles

- For the brand owner: SAP_CRM_UIU_CHM_CHANNELMANAGER

- For the channel partner : SAP_CRM_UIU_CHM_PARTNERMANAGERSAP_CRM_CHM_CORPORATEPARTNER

SAP_CRM_CHM_CORPORATEPARTNER is a new authorization profile for the corporate channelpartner. For this there is no direct 1:1 relationship to a business role.

Access Control Engine (Enhanced)

This controls access to and use of business objects. Access control is based on rules and rights that can bemodified individually to match internal organizational structures. The ACE allows you to restrict apartner user's access to MDF objects and business partners.

ACE Rules and Rights

Rules serve as the principle on which to base your rights. Rights in turn are composed of rules, groups ofusers they apply to and the kind of control you want to implement. It is practical to use ACE when youwant to control, on object level, which users are to have read-, write-, and/or delete access.

- For a detailed list of the rules that are delivered specifically for MDF objects, refer to thecustomizing document ACE Rules for MDF.

- In addition to the standard ACE rights, you can use the SAP CRM delivered rights for MDF. For adetailed list of the ACE rights delivered for MDF, refer to the customizing document ACE Rightsfor MDF

Notes and Attachments (Enhanced)

You can use notes and add attachments to your MDF business documents. If your channel partner hasaccess to a particular MDF object, such as a program or initiative, he or she will be able to access allnotes and attachments under that object.

Attachments

Channel partners have display access to all attachments uploaded by the brand owner.

Channel partners can change attachments, if they have change access to the associated MDF object.However, they cannot change attachments created by the brand owner.

Notes

Channel partners having display or change access to an MDF object, will also have display or changeaccess to all the notes associated with that object - respectively.

User Management

User Assignment Block on Company Contact Overview Page (Enhanced)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 249

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can now use the user assignment block on the company contact overview page in the partnermanager business role to create, change and delete users for company contacts.

E-Mail Notifications (Enhanced)

You can now automatically send e-mails to business partners to inform them about a user that has beencreated or changed for them via a user assignment block on the partner contact or company contactoverview page. The e-mail can contain information about the user ID, password, and status of the user.The e-mail can automatically be sent if a user gets created, the password of the user gets changed, or ifthe user gets locked, unlocked or deleted.

When sending notifications, you can either use the standard template as it gets predelivered, or copy andadapt the standard template to meet your requirements.


- Maintain roles for the partner manager. For this, complete step Set Up Business Partner Roles forWeb-Based User Management

- Maintain reference users. For this, complete step Enter Reference Users for Web-Based UserManagement.

- Enable ACE rights,. For this, complete stepActivate/Deactivate Work Packages and Rights.

- To automatically send e-mail notifications, complete step Define Settings for E-Mail Notifications.

- To define actions and action profiles, which are required for action processing in user management,with respect to the business partner complete the corresponding steps, Create Actions With Wizard,Define Action Profiles and Actions, and Define Start and Schedule Conditions.

1.21.25.7.4 Market Development Funds: Extractors

Use


Extractors for MDF Objects (New)

This document provides information about BI extractors for the following Market Development Fund(MDF) objects in the Marketing Planner: MDF Programs, MDF Special Programs and MDF Initiativesand MDF Initiative Elements.


The following are the attribute extractors:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 250

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- 0CRM_MKTPGM_ATTR: Attributes for MDF Program

- 0CRM_MKTSPG_ATTR: Attributes for MDF Special Program

- 0CRM_MKTINI_ATTR: Attributes for MDF Initiative

- 0CRM_MKTINT_ATTR: Attributes for MDF Initiative Elements

The following are the text extractors:

- 0CRM_MKTPGM_TEXT: Extraction of Texts for MDF Program

- 0CRM_MKTSPG_TEXT: Extraction of Texts for MDF Special Program

- 0CRM_MKTINI_TEXT: Extraction of Texts for MDF Initiative

- 0CRM_MKTINT_TEXT: Extraction of Texts for MDF Initiative element

BI Extractors for Channel Partner Hierarchy in MDF (New)

The partner hierarchy in SAP CRM contains funds, purchase locations and additional business partnerinformation. You can use the BI extractor function and extract data from partner hierarchy to the SAPNetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) system so you have a basis on which to buildyour BI content.

We provide the following extractors for the channel partner hierachy:

- 0CRM_MDF_BPGH_HIER (not time dependant)

- 0CRM_MDF_BPGH_NAME_HIER (time dependant hierarchy name)

- 0CRM_MDF_BPGH_STRUCT_HIER (time dependant hierarchy structure)


These extractors fill the extraction structure of a DataSource with data from business objects.

You can extract data from CRM MDF applications, by performing a full extraction or by performing adelta extraction. These requests may be made with specific data filtering criteria


For the channel partner hierarchy, you have to specify which partner functions have to be extracted withthe data source. To define the partner functions for MDF objects, complete step Define Extraction ofPartner Functions.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 251

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.21.25.7.5 Determination of Reimbursement Rates in the MDF Process (New)

Use


Cost sharing for marketing activities, brand owners, and channel partners is entered and distributed in themarket development funds (MDF) process. This happens when the partner first defines the marketingactivities that he or she wants to use to advertise for the product or service of the brand owner. Thepartner wants to bill the brand owner for the costs of these marketing actions in advance. In addition, thepartner wants to be able to create transactions even if claims for marketing activities cannot bereimbursed in full by the brand owner.

In the MDF process, the brand owner can confirm the claims that were submitted by the partner. Forexample, if the brand owner has an objection about marketing activities, he or she can react immediatelyby manually not confirming the full amounts that were requested. Alternatively, the brand owner coulddefine in advance the expense types that are automatically reimbursed at a reduced rate. This isaccomplished by using the automatic determination of reimbursement rates, which are used to calculatecertain expense types. The result is normally a reduced reimbursement amount.

You edit the reimbursement rates either in the MDF Program or in the MDF Special Program inassignment block Reimbursement Rate Conditions and create condition records for the price types that areavailable in this process.

Usually, the partner creates an initiative that describes the marketing activity and forwards the estimatedcosts to the brand owner for confirmation. Then, the partner creates a reservation to ensure that sufficientfunds from the brand owner are available to execute the initiative. This reservation means that the partnerreserves a certain amount of money in his or her fund for this initiative.

When an MDF claim or MDF reservation is created, reimbursement rates for certain expense types aredetermined automatically in assignment block Resolution. These reimbursement rates are used tocalculate claim amounts such as actual costs.

In the MDF reservation, the reimbursement rate is used to specify the amount that should be reserved forthe marketing project in the fund. The partner specifies the expected costs, which are used by thereimbursement rate to determine the amount that should be reserved. When the brand owner confirms thereservation, the brand owner must also be able to change the amounts, which in turn influences amountdetermination.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 252

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.21.25.8 CRM-MKT-MPL-TPM Trade Promotion Management

1.21.25.8.1 Product Planning Basis for Trade Promotions and Deals (Enhancedfor SP02)

Use


You can assign product groups or product categories to a trade promotion. You can also assign one ormore products from these product groups or product categories to the trade promotion. You can now also:

- Exclude one or more products, so that the trade spend of the trade promotion is applied to all theproducts in the product groups or product categories except to the excluded products

- Define one or more products as exceptions, so that the trade spend of the trade promotion is thesame for all the products in the product groups or product categories except for the exceptionproducts for which you can define different trade spends and volumes


To transfer uplift volumes to SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO):

- If your product planning basis includes product categories, you must implement the BusinessAdd-In (BAdI)SCM Integration. The example implementation of the BAdI takes into accountexception products and excluded products for a promoted product category.

- If your product planning basis includes product groups, you must change and implement this BAdI


You can find the example implementation of the SCM Integration BAdI in Customizing for CustomerRelationship Management under Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management ->System Landscape -> Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: SCM Integration.

1.21.25.8.2 Key Figure Planning Enhancements (New for SP02)

Use


You can view and enter key figure totals for a trade promotion, such as total volume and trade spend data,on the Trade Promotion Overview page, in the new Totals assignment block, as well as on the TradePromotion Editable List Overview page.

The distribution of the data from the aggregated level to the lower levels is done either on navigating tothe Planning grid or on saving the trade promotion.

You define which key figures you want to display on the Trade Promotion Overview page and the TradePromotion Editable List Overview page in Customizing activity Map BI Key Figures to List Fields. You

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 253

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

maintain the descriptions for the key figures in the Customizing activity Maintain Design Layers. Usingthe UI Configuration Tool, you define the field labels and the position of these fields on the TradePromotion Overview page.


You define which key figures you want to display in Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement under Trade Promotion Management -> Key Figure Planning -> Settings for Display of BIKey Figures -> Map BI Key Figures to List Fields. You maintain the descriptions for the key figures inCustomizing for Customer Relationship Management under Trade Promotion Management -> KeyFigure Planning -> Settings for Display of BI Key Figures -> Maintain Design Layers.

1.21.25.8.3 Effective Dates in Trade Promotions and Deals (New)

Use


You can:

- Add a product/product category/product group/ product segment to a trade promotion and specifyeffective start and end dates that could be different from the trade promotion buying start and enddates

- Logically delete a product/product category/product group/product segment from a trade promotionby specifying an end date that is different from the trade promotion end date

- Modify the discount rate (any trade spend) as of any date for all or for a subset of products that areassociated to the trade promotion

1.21.25.8.4 TPM BI Extractors

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 254

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You can use BI extractors to transfer data from the source system to the SAP NetWeaver BusinessIntelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) system so you have a basis on which to build your BI content. You canextract data from CRM TPM applications, by performing a full extraction or by performing a deltaextraction. These requests may be made with specific data filtering criteria.

This document provides information about BI extractors for the following Trade Promotion Managementobjects:

- Indirect Relationships

- Causals

Extractors for Indirect Relationships

The purpose of the BI extractor for Indirect Relationships is to get data from the indirect relationshipapplications to use it for aggregation and further reporting. Indirect relationship data contains the detailsabout the indirect consumption from different wholesalers, for a particular product dimension and period.

Extractor 0CRM_MKTINDREL_ATTR

- Type of DataSource: ATTR

- Application Component: 0CRM_MKT-IO

- Extract Structure: SCRMMKT_INDR_BW

Extractors for Causals

Causals capture information about how retailers advertise trade promotions for consumers. They haveattributes like feature ad, display location, display type, media, retail price and so on.

The following are the attribute extractors: (Type of DataSource: ATTR; Application Component:0CRM_MKT-IO)

0CRM_MKTPL_CAU_ATTR, to extract the main causal table

- Extract Structure: SCRMMKT_CAU_BW

0CRM_MKTPL_CAU_TYPE_ATTR, to extract causal types from TPM types

- Extract Structure: ROXA9G0113

0CRM_MKTPL_CAU_CFLDL_ATTR, to extract mapping links of related fields

- Extract Structure: CRMC_MKTPL_CFLDL

The following are the text extractors: (Type of DataSource: ATTR; Application Component:0CRM_MKT-IO)

0CRM_MKTPL_CAU_CFLD_TEXT, to extract fields related to causal types

- Extract Structure: RSTEXTTRSF

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 255

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

0CRM_MKTPL_CAU_DISLO_TEXT, to extract the causal field display location

- Extract structure: CRMC_MKTPL_DSLOT

0CRM_MKTPL_CAU_DISTY_TEXT, to extract the causal field display type

- Extract Structure: CRMC_MKTPL_DSTYT

0CRM_MKTPL_CAU_FEAD_TEXT, to extract the causal field feature ad

- Extract Structure: CRMC_MKTPL_FEADT

0CRM_MKTPL_CAU_MEDIA_TEXT, to extract causal field media

- Extract Structure: CRMC_MKTPL_MEDIT

0CRM_MKTPL_CAU_SLOSK_TEXT, to extract causal field slotted Skus

- Extraction structure: CRMC_MKTPL_SLSKT

0CRM_MKTPL_CAU_SPCLO_TEXT, to extract the causal field space location table

- Extraction Structure: CRMC_MKTPL_SPCLT

1.21.25.8.5 Indirect Relationships (New)

Use

This release note is relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0 or from SAP CRM 5.2

Indirect relationships help you manage your indirect lines of business, by allowing you to

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 256

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Link an indirect account to the respective wholesaler(s), as well as specify a percentage split incase of multiple wholesalers and track indirect accountsIndirect accounts might buy different product categories from different wholesalers. Here, theproduct dimensions of relationships help you work with different product categories of the sameindirect account. For example, a customer might buy chilled products from a wholesaler, while theother product categories are sourced directly from the manufacturer.

- Develop a total trade spending and sales volume plan for a wholesaler Establishing indirect relationships allows you to trace incremental sales volumes originating frompromotions with indirect accounts, back to the corresponding wholesaler. This helps you delineatethe effectiveness of your trade spending.

- Manage different funding levels for indirect promotions Indirect promotions draw their funding either from a specific fund for the indirect customer or fromthe fund of the corresponding wholesaler.

- Validate claims of indirect promotionsClaims might be raised either by the indirect account or the corresponding wholesaler(claims-on-behalf). Indirect relationships help you associate claims raised by wholesaler with theappropriate indirect promotion.


Indirect relationships are formed with respect to product dimensions, which are specified at sales arealevels. To do this, complete step Define Business Line Levels.

1.21.25.8.6 Listings in Product Proposals (New)

Use


You can now generate a product proposal that is based on the list of products that you can sell to anaccount as specified in listings. You can then select a subset of products for a specific account andgenerate a sales order in SAP ECC for those items. There is a new selection option in the ProductProposal field called Listings.

In addition, master data and listings administrators can search for listings using the value of theDescription field of the listings.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 257

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You require:

- At least one listing that is valid for the account and product validity dates when the sales order isbeing made

- Appropriate cross-selling and up-selling or down-selling rules (optional)

1.21.25.8.7 Cross-Order Caps for Discounts in TPM (New)

Use


You can define a currency- or quantity unit-based upper limit, or a cap, that cannot be exceeded for thediscounts in a trade promotion. This ensures that the price reductions defined in this trade promotion arelimited to a certain amount or quantity and cannot be used past this limit. All affected invoices areincluded and cumulated in the upper limit.

Note: You can only use the function if you have created condition types in SAP ERP and if you enter thesales documents in SAP ERP.


You have made the necessary settings in Customizing:

- You have set the CondUpdate (Condition Update) indicator for the condition type in SAP ERP.This marks the condition type as cap-relevant. You can find more information in Customizing forSAP ERP under Sales and Distribution -> Basic Functions -> Pricing -> Pricing Control -> DefineCondition Types.

- The condition record must be maintained in SAP CRM. Therefore you have to shift the maintenanceright for this condition type to SAP CRM. This shift is done in Customizing for SAP ERP underIntegration with Other mySAP.com Components -> Customer Relationship Management -> BasicFuncitons -> Data Exchange Conditions.This customizing and the condition type must be downloaded to SAP CRM using transaction R3ASin SAP CRM.

- You have defined the cap type. You can find more information in Customizing for SAP CRM bychoosingDefine Condition Generation. Select the Pricing Condition Types step, and then in theCross-Order Cap Type column, choose the required cap type. There are two types: currency-basedor quantity unit-based.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 258

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- You can assign appropriate currency units to your sales organizations. This customizing activity isoptional. You can find more information in Customizing for SAP CRM by choosing DefineCurrency Units for Cross-Order Caps.

1.21.25.8.8 Significant Uplifts and Transfer to APO (New)

Use


This feature bridges the gap between demand planners and sales persons regarding the uplift that isgenerated for a specific trade event.

Demand planners typically incorporate regular trade events into their demand plan and these events areplanned by sales teams as creating uplifts. The feature supports enforcing a business process across theenterprise that would enable sales persons to identify only trade events that cause a significant uplift. Theassumption is that the volume impact of other trade events has already been incorporated into the demandplanner's plan.

1.21.26 CRM-MKT-SEG Segmentation

1.21.26.1 Product Segments (New)

Use


The existing segmentation functionality has been enhanced to enable the segmentation of products.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 259

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Analogous to the creation of target groups, you can combine product-related selection criteria in a profileand can then build a product segment based on this profile.

Product segments can be used in trade promotions. They considerably reduce the maintenance effort forconditions because you can assign a whole product segment to a condition record. This means you do nothave to link each individual product with the condition.

In campaigns, product segments can be used to streamline your planning: By assigning a productsegment to a campaign, you can do the planning for all products in this segment.

Before creating a segment, you now have to indicate whether you will be segmenting products orbusiness partners. You can also create product segments manually, to which you can add productsindividually. Product segments can be intersected with, added to, and removed from other productssegments. On the edit page, you can see the product segment details and can display a preview of thetarget group member list, if required.


To work with the Graphical Modeler and to create product segments, you must create a data source thatsupports the segmentation of product data (Maintain Data Sources and Attribute Lists). This data sourcehas to be based on an InfoSet. SAP delivers several InfoSets as examples.

1.22 CRM-ANA CRM Analytics

1.22.1 Integration of PPM into SAP CRM (New)

Use


Pipeline performance management (PPM) is a new and highly interactive analytic application designed tohelp sales managers and sales representatives plan quotas and manage pipeline activity to achieve targets.Presenting opportunity data in context with pipeline analytics allows easy identification of gaps andcritical opportunities, resolving issues before it is too late. Sales managers can prioritize, reassign ormodify opportunities to drive immediate action and help sales representatives maintain focus on the rightdeals. Simulation capabilities provide the ability to run what-if scenarios and visualize the outcomewithout affecting the underlying data.

Sales managers and sales representatives can monitor and analyze opportunities in the following pages:

- Target to Date

- Closing Date

- Sales Pipeline

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 260

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Sales Pipeline Change

Sales managers with the appropriate authorizations can manage quotas and opportunity churn rates in theOptions page.

1.22.2 CRM-ANA-OR Operative Reporting

1.22.2.1 CRM Interactive Reports (New)

Use


You can create, edit and view reports in SAP CRM. These CRM-based reports retrieve data in real-timeand are called "CRM interactive reports". You create these reports in the CRM WebClient using a guidedwizard. You can then publish these reports to a selection of users.

You can display reports in tables and charts. The following chart types are available:

- Column

- Line

- Pie

- Bar

- Stacked Column

Using the reports, you can analyze data in ample ways, including drilldown to individual documents. Thereport data is retrieved in real-time. You can export report data to Microsoft Excel and print reports.

To use CRM interactive reports, you do not need a separate BI system. You do need an additional SAPNetWeaver Business Intelligence client to be installed on the CRM server.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 261

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.23 CRM-IC Interaction Center WebClient

1.23.1 Interaction Center WebClient in CRM WebClient UI Framework (New)

Use


The Interaction Center (IC) WebClient uses the new, unified CRM WebClient user interface (UI)framework.


For the IC WebClient, choose Customizing for Customer Relationship Management -> InteractionCenter WebClient.

1.23.2 Intent-Driven Interaction Guidance (New)

Use


Intent-driven interaction guidance is available to intelligently guide agents through interactions in ahighly automated manner based on rules and events you define. Intent-driven interaction ensuresinteractions are processed according to corporate standards.

Intent-driven interaction consists of:

- RulesYou use the rule modeler to define business rules that determine how agents are intelligently guided.Rules react to events and other relevant information.

- AlertsYou can provide alerts to agents with customized text and optional navigational hyperlinks. Thereare new actions in the repository for the IC Rules context for raising, triggering, and terminatingalerts.For more information, see Alert Editor (New).

- EventsEvents can be used to raise alerts and for logging purposes. You can define events based upon userinterface events, such as clicking a button or confirming a business partner.

- Automatic navigation and navigating to other CRM screensThe system can automatically navigate agents to different page areas in the IC WebClient, and an

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 262

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

agent can now navigate to any CRM screen, not just to screens within the IC WebClient. There arenew actions in the repository for the IC Rules context for determining this automatic navigation.

- Automatic data populationThe system can automatically pre-populate data based upon configuration. There are new actions inthe repository for the IC Rules context for automatically populating fields.

- Event logging and reportingAggregated event reporting, analysis, and process optimization is available. You can log how manytimes events occurred within interactions, and use Business Intelligence (BI) to analyze the data. Forexample, you can analyze how many events occurred for specific agents, groups, profiles, and so on.


A new folder, Intent-Driven Interaction, is created with the following new Customizing activities:

- Define Business Data Context (BDC) Attributes

- Define Events in Repository

- Define Business Data Context (BDC) Objects for Event Logging

- Define Event Logging Profiles

- Define Intent-Driven Interaction Profiles

The following existing Customizing activities are reused and included in the new folder:

- Define Services

- Define Service Manager Profiles

- Define Repository

- Define Wrap-Up Types

1.23.3 Client Switch (New for SP02)

Use


You can now use client switch in the interaction center (IC) to optimize resources in business processoutsourcing and shared service center scenarios.

The client switch function uses the SAP client concept to segregate data of different outsourcing accountsof the business process outsourcing provider or the shared service center in the CRM system. Forexample, separate SAP CRM system clients can be set up to store data for different business processoutsourcing accounts. These clients are called work clients.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 263

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

IC agents can access this environment by logging on to a single IC in a main client. From this main client,IC agents can be guided automatically to the appropriate work client. When an agent receives anincoming call, for example, the system proposes a work client based on data from the incoming call, suchas the number dialed.

1.23.4 Selection Dialog Boxes (New)

Use


You can now enable dialog boxes in the Interaction Center (IC) for organizational units, businesspartners, service contracts, or transaction types. The dialog box gives the user selection options when thesystem identifies more than one organizational unit, business partner, service contract, or transactiontype.

You can set up the dialog boxes to appear automatically, or you can choose to make them accessiblewhen the user clicks on an informational message.


You can now make settings for automatic dialog boxes in the previously existing IMG activity inCustomizing for Customer Relationship Management, by choosing Interaction Center WebClient ->Business Transaction -> Define Business Transaction Profiles.

1.23.5 Listing Based Product Proposals (New)

Use


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 264

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

In the Interaction Center (IC), you can now generate product proposals for the confirmed account thatcontain only products and product categories that are listed for the account. You can then generate anEnterprise Resource Planning (ERP) sales order for any items the customer selects from the listed productproposals.

1.23.6 Multi Chat (New for SP02)

Use


You can now use multi chat in the interaction center (IC) to optimize resources. IC agents can now chatwith more than one business partner at a time. They can therefore maximize efficiency by replying to achat with one business partner while waiting for a response in another open chat session.

1.23.7 Cancel Button in Business Transactions (New)

Use


The Cancel button is available in the Interaction Center (IC) WebClient, in all business transactionsexcept for the interaction record.

When you chosse this button, all entries that were made since the last saved version are reset.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 265

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.23.8 CRM-IC-MDB Manager Dashboard

1.23.8.1 Monitoring of Statistics from Multiple Telephony Systems (New)

Use


The Interaction Center (IC) Manager Dashboard can support multiple computer telephony integration(CTI) servers. This means that:

- All CTI related information (such as channels, queues, and key figures for channels and queues) cancome from different CTI serversTo distinguish the information, the IC manager dashboard automatically prefixes the CTI servername to the channel, queue, and key figures. For example, CTI1 Hotline and CTI2 Hotline.

- You can monitor statistics generated via multiple telephony systems within a location and/or acrossseveral locations

You can group together queues into one or more queue groups, containing queues from the same ordifferent CTI servers. For each queue group, you can select the following key figures when personalizingthe IC manager dashboard:

- SumTotal volume of all selected queues in the queue group. For example, if CTI1 has four customerswaiting in the queue, and CTI2 has six customers waiting in the queue, the sum is ten.

- AverageAverage volume of all selected queues in the queue group. For example, if CTI1 has four customerswaiting in the queue, and CTI2 has six customers waiting in the queue, the average is five.

When you access the IC manager dashboard, the agent group is displayed that you were monitoring whenyou last used the IC manager dashboard. Because you are likely to be focused on a specific queue, youcan filter the display by individual queues or queue groups, or show all queues for the agent group.


You can restrict the agent groups and queues that each manager can monitor in the IC managerdashboard. As a result, when the manager accesses the IC manager dashboard, only these agent groupsand queues are displayed. You do this as follows, depending on whether you are using the IC WebClient

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 266

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

or the IC WebClient 2005:

IC WebClientAssign the function profile CONTACTCENTER to the relevant business role in Customizing forCustomer Relationship Management -> Business Roles -> Define Business Role.

IC WebClient 2005

1. Assign the function profile CONTACTCENTER to the relevant IC WebClient profile inCustomizing for the Interaction Center WebClient -> Define IC WebClient Profiles.

2. Assign the IC WebClient profile to the IC manager organizational unit at position level. In the SAPMenu, choose Interaction Center -> Supporting Processes -> IC Structure -> ChangeOrganization and Staffing (or Create Organization and Staffing).

1.23.9 CRM-IC-SEA Account Identification

1.23.9.1 Account Identification (Enhanced)

Use


The Identify Account page in the Interaction Center (IC) WebClient contains the followingenhancements:

Address ValidationA search help is available for the following fields:

- Street

- City

- Postal code

This enables agents to search for and validate addresses against a database of valid addresses. You canimport data in Customizing for SAP Web Application Server -> Application Server -> BasisServices -> Address Management -> Regional Structure/City File -> Import Reference Data. Forexample, in some countries, you can buy a CD from your postal service containing all addresses.

Duplicate CheckingYou can configure the system so that, when an agent creates an account or contact person and choosesSave, the system checks for duplicates and displays them.

1. In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, choose Interaction CenterWebClient -> Master Data -> Accounts -> Define Account Identification Profiles and select theCheck Account for Duplicates indicator or Check Contact Person for Duplicates indicator asrequired.

2. Implement the following Business Add-Ins:

- ADDRESS_SEARCH

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 267

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- ADDRESS_UPDATE

Do Not Contact IndicatorA Do Not Contact indicator is available via the More Fields link. Agents can set this indicator if acustomer does not wish to be contacted at a given telephone number, fax number, or e-mail address.

1.23.9.2 Index Table for Simple Business Partner Searches (New)

Use


You can define a simple index table containing a set of fields, which can be used instead of the standardbusiness partner search. Searching for business partners against a simple index table provides a very fastsearch, and is useful if your interaction center agents do not need to carry out complex searches.

This new index table search differs from the TREX high-speed business partner search in cases where theagent always searches on the same one or two fields. The performance is better than using the TREXsearch, however for more complex searches using wildcards and multiple, varying criteria the TREXhigh-speed business partner search is faster.


You can define an index table in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management -> InteractionCenter WebClient -> Customer-Specific System Modifications -> Define Search Index for BusinessPartner Search.

1.23.9.3 Mixed Business-to-Business and Business-to-Consumer Scenario(New)

Use


You can search for consumers and related business partners (for example, contact person of organization,

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 268

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

legal representative, tax adviser). If the Interaction Center (IC) WebClient determines that the businesspartner is a related business partner, it displays the organization and the related business partner. Bydefault, the organization is flagged as the main business partner. If you flag the related business partner asthe main business partner, Customizing determines whether:

- The IC WebClient uses the related business partner and, as additional information, the organization(for example, in the sales order), or

- The IC WebClient uses only the related business partner, and hides the organization because it isconsidered not relevant.

If the account does not yet exist in the system, you can create it as:

- Individual person (that is, a consumer), or

- Individual person, organization, or groupWith this option, you can create one or more related business partners for each individual person,organization, or group.


In Customizing for the Interaction Center WebClient -> Master Data -> Accounts -> Define AccountIdentification Profiles:

- Set the Scenario field to Mixed B2B and B2C

- Set or cancel the Hide Corporate Account indicator as requiredBy default, this indicator is not set.

See also

Release note Related Business Partners

1.23.9.4 Related Business Partners (New)

Use


You can:

- Search for and identify persons in their business partner relationship (for example, contact person oforganization, legal representative, tax adviser)

- Display all or specific business partner relationships in a hierarchy after identifying the customer

- Create new business partners in their business partner relationship

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 269

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


In Customizing for the Interaction Center WebClient -> Master Data -> Accounts -> Define AccountIdentification Profiles:

- Set the Scenario field to Business-to-Business (B2B) or Mixed B2B and B2C

- Define which business partner relationships you want agents to be able to search for and use whencreating business partners

See also

Release note Mixed Business-to-Business and Business-to-Consumer Scenario

1.23.9.5 CRM WebClient UI for IS-M Processes in Interaction Center

Use


As of release 7.0, certain IS-M-specific processes now offer a UI based on the CRM WebClient in theCRM Interaction Center. The following IS-M-specific processes have been affected, with the changeslisted below:

Business Partner Maintenance

You maintain the media-specific roles Sales Customer, Retailer and Media Customer in the Roles table atthe bottom of the edit page of the Sales Area Data assignment block. This table is visible only ifmedia-specific roles are defined in Customizing.

(These roles are not to be maintained in the Roles assignment block on the overview page, as they dependon the sales area).

Note: You can maintain roles in this table only after you have specified attributes (for example, Billing ->Customer Pricing Procedure) for a sales area. A sales area assignment without attributes cannot becreated.


In the Account Identification screen, media -specific enhancements have been made to search for businesspartners. On the right hand side of the search screen, media -specific selection criteria have been created.

The following search criteria have been added for advertising management:

- Advertising Order

- Advertising Billing Document

- Advertising Box Number

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 270

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Publication (this is visible only if BAdI CRM_ICWC_ISM_FILTER_BPSEARCH is implemented)

The following search criteria have been added for sales and distribution:

- Subscription Order

- Subscription Billing Document

- Subscription Reference Document

- Publication

The search result is displayed as usual in the lower part of the search screen.

Order Lists from the IS-M Back End

You use the Transaction Launcher, a new tool in this UI, to access ERP-based advertising or subscriptiondata. Methods of BOR object types as well as BSP applications can be called this way.

You can use the following methods of the BOR object type BUSISMCIC to access Media data in ERP:

- ShowMSDOrderList: interactive list of subscription orders

- ShowMAMOrderList: interactive list of advertising orders

- ShowBPOverview: access to BP-related data as used in the ERP Interaction Center in theapplication and/or navigation area.

You can perform address changes with method AddressChangeWithDialog of object type BUSISM007.

Order Creation with Reference to an IS-M Campaign

The BSP applications ISMCAMPAIGNPICK and ISMSD_SOCREATE for creating advertising orsubscription orders have been enhanced so that they can be used in the Interaction Center WebClient.

Maintenance of IS-M-Specific Data for CRM Campaigns

The BSP application ISMCAMPAIGNMGNT for maintaining the media-specific data for CRMmarketing campaigns has been enhanced so that it can be used in the Interaction Center WebClient.


You can use the activity Define BP Roles to define media-specific roles with the role categories ISM000(Sales Customer), ISM001 (Retailer) or ISM020 (Media Customer).

If an additional filtering of accounts (for example, by publication) is required, you can implement BAdICRM_ICWC_ISM_FILTER_BPSEARCH (in enhancement spotCRM_ICWC_ISM_FILTER_BPSEARCH).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 271

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.23.9.6 Registered Products (Enhanced)

Use


You can search for installed bases and objects for a certain business partner in the Interaction Center (IC)WebClient on the Account Identifcation page.


For more information, see Customizing for Customer Relationship Management and choose InteractionCenter WebClient --> Master Data --> Define Object Profiles.

1.23.9.7 Account Identification (Enhanced)

Use


The Account Identification page of the Interaction Center WebClient has been enhanced. You can nowreplace the upper right page area with your own views that enable you to search for businesspartner-related business objects.

You can define your own object components so that the agent can search for:

- Objects based on the confirmed business partner

- Business partners based on the confirmed object


You can define object components to embed in the upper right page area of the Account Identificationpage in Customizing by choosing Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction CenterWebClient -> Customer-Specific System Modifications -> Define Object Components.

You can then assign these components to the relevant Account Identification Profile in Customizing bychoosing Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction Center WebClient -> Master Data

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 272

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

-> Define Account Identification Profile.

1.23.10 CRM-IC-PRO Products

1.23.10.1 Product Search in the Interaction Center (New)

Use


You can search for products in the Interaction Center using one of two methods:

- Search based on product master data

- Search based on product catalog data

Product Master Data Search

When an agent starts a search for a product in the Interaction Center, the system runs the search based onall products maintained in the product master data. All products maintained in your system will be foundusing this search method. This method has its advantages in that you do not have to maintain productcatalogs and you do not need to worry that product catalogs are incorrectly maintained. The search willfind any product maintained in your system.

Product Catalog Search

When an agent starts a search for a product in the Interaction Center, the system runs the search based onthe products maintained in a particular product catalog. This method has several advantages:

- The system only runs the search within a particular group of products enhancing the runtime of thesearch.

- You can limit the search to the catalogs that are relevant for the Interaction Center, and the searchcan be narrowed further using list of characteristic attributes and catalog variants and areas.

- An agent can browse the product hierarchy to locate a product. For example, if the customer is onthe web shop looking at a particular product and the customer has a question about the product, or ishaving difficulty placing an order, the agent can locate the product that the customer is looking atand provide the customer with information or help



You have maintained products in your product master.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 273

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


- You have created a product catalog and catalog variant.

- You have replicated your product catalog variants.


To determine the search method used in the Interaction Center you need to carry out Customizingactivities.


In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management choose Interaction Center WebClient ->Master Data -> Products -> Activate Product Search In Product Master Data


In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management choose Interaction Center WebClient ->Master Data -> Products -> Define Catalog Profiles for Product Search

1.23.10.2 Product Catalog Search (New)

Use


The product catalog search is available in the Interaction Center (IC) WebClient.

The search in product catalogs allows your agents to search specifically for certain products during salesnegotiations, for example, and then call up product information directly.

In addition to being in the product search, the product catalog search is also available in the master data.


For more information about the necessary settings for the product search in the IC WebClient, inCustomizing for Customer Relationship Management, choose Interaction Center WebClient --> MasterData --> Products.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 274

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.23.11 CRM-IC-FCA Financial Contract Accounting

1.23.11.1 Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management (Enhanced)

Use

This release note is only relevant if you are upgrading your system from SAP CRM 5.0.

The business scenario includes the following new or enhanced processes:

New with SAP CRM 5.2 or SAP CRM 2007:

Note:

All the functions listed here require SAP FI-CA based on SAP ERP 6.0 Enhancement Package 2 at thelowest as the back-end system. However, SAP ERP 6.0 ist still supported as the back-end system.

For further information on release dependency, see SAP notes 1075410 and 746475.

Payments in the Interaction Center for Financial Customer Care

- Maintain payment methodsIf you use SAP ERP 6.0 Enhancement Package 2, the payment methods are no longer defined in theFI-CA profile for the user role but in SAP FI-CA. You can define the payment methods for eachcountry for the following payment types:

- Payment

- Installment plan

- Promise to pay

- Payment specification or payment request

- Payment requestsGrouping of items for which payment orders are to be made to form one payment request in the ERPsystem

- Payment specificationGrouping of items in a payment specification in the ERP system

Installment Plan

You can define payment data for installment items.

Payment Search

As of SAP ERP 6.0 Enhancement Package 2, you can restrict a payment search to a certain number ofpayments. You can also limit the maximum number of payments on which the search is to be run. Thisallows you to avoid long waits when executing the search. You can define standard values for thisfunction in Customizing for the FI-CA profile. The agent can adjust these parameters on the interface forthe payment search.

Account Balance

- Display new flexible FI-CA balances

- Display configurable additional data

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 275

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Enhanced support for contract data in the account balance

- Display processing locks for contracts

- Dunning history

- Display collection strategy and collection step

Payment Data

You can define bank details for a specific period in a business partner's payment data.

Miscellaneous

- Display enhanced user dataYou can display details on a user for the user IDs (for example Created By) in the user interface inthe Interaction Center for Financial Customer Care even if the user is not known in the CRMsystem. You can define which data is to be displayed in FI-CA event 2836.

- Fact sheetsDisplay FI-CA data in an account or business agreement overview

- AlertsConvert FCC alerts to the new CRM Alert Framework

- User interfaceConvert FCC interfaces to the new CRM WebClient user interfaceFor further information on converting the user interface, see the release note Uniform User Interfacein CRM (New).

Financial Customer Care As Frontend for FI-CA Collections Management

- Display and edit worklists and work items

- Display, create, and change promises to pay

- Display collection fact sheet, display collection-relevant data

- Display a customer's collection history and details of the objects it contains

For further information on Collections Management in SAP FI-CA, see the SAP ERP 6.0 EnhancementPackage 2 release note Collections Management in the ERP system.

Financial Customer Care Integration with Adjustment Request and Dispute Management

You can integrate Dispute Management with Financial Customer Care. For further information onDispute Management in SAP CRM 2007, see the release note New Functions in the Provider Contractand Dispute Management.

Credit Management Integration

You can integrate the Financial Customer Care Interaction Center with various credit managementsystems. The following functions are available in each case:

- SAP Credit Management (FIN-FSCM-CR) in SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC); the twosystems are connected using SAP NetWeaver - Exchange Infrastructure (XI)

- Credit Management (FI-AR-CR, SD-BF-CM) in SAP ECC

- External credit management system connected using XI

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 276

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- External credit management system not connected using XI

If you use SAP Credit Management (FIN-FSCM-CR) or another external credit management system thatis connected using XI, the following functions are available:

- Display and use a business partner's credit risk rating

- Automatic credit check and commitment notification

- Process transactions with credit locks

If you use Credit Management (FI-AR-CR, SD-BF-CM) in SAP ECC, the following checks are available:

- Business partner valuation and credit rating check in SAP CRM



If you use an external credit management system that is not connected to SAP CRM using XI, theautomatic credit limit check and commitment notification functions are available.

For further information on Credit Management integration, see the SAP Library documentation on SAPCRM 2007 on the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com -> Documentation -> SAP Business Suite ->SAP Customer Relationship Mgmt. -> SAP CRM 2007 -> Components and Functions -> Basic Functions-> Credit Management.


For further information on Customizing and on how to configure this business scenario, see SAP SolutionManager.

See also

For further information on the functions in the individual business processes in the business scenarioFinancial Customer Care & Dispute Management, see the SAP Library documentation on SAP CRM2007 on the SAP Help-Portal at http://help.sap.com -> Documentation -> SAP Business Suite -> SAPCustomer Relationship Mgmt. -> SAP CRM 2007 -> Components and Functions -> SAP CRM forIndustries -> Telecommunications Industry -> Functions in the Interaction Center for FinancialCustomer Care.

1.23.11.2 Financial Customer Care for Insurance (Enhanced)

Use

This release note is only relevant if you are upgrading from CRM 5.0.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 277

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Refer also to the release note for Financial Customer Care, which also applies to this industry variant.

As of SAP CRM 2007, the business scenario contains the following process:


If you are implementing SAP ERP 6.0 with Enhancement Package 3 in the back-end system, you can callthe transaction for editing the insurance object after the insurance object has been confirmed.


For more information about Customizing and configuration of this business scenario, refer to SAPSolution Manager.

1.23.12 CRM-IC-ALT Alert

1.23.12.1 Alert Editor (New)

Use


You can create and maintain alerts in a new alert editor. Alerts are considered part of the newintent-driven interaction guidance. The triggering and termination of alerts is configured in the existingrule modeler by using rules. There is a new action available to trigger alerts in the intent-driveninteraction guidance context. The rule modeler provides business users with more flexibility in triggeringalerts because rule modeler attributes can be used to trigger alerts based not only on events, but also onbusiness information such as business partner, product, and business transactions.

Previously, alerts were maintained in the alert modeler or in Customizing activity Define Alerts andAlert Profiles.

See also

Intent-Driven Interaction Guidance (New)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 278

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.23.13 CRM-IC-CHA Communication Channels

1.23.13.1 Display and Maintenance of Contact Attached Data (New)

Use


You can view contact attached data (CAD) in the Interaction Center (IC) WebClient. If the interactionwith the customer is via phone, agents can view the CAD on the Identify Account screen or on theContact Attached Data screen, which they can access from the navigation bar. If the interaction is viae-mail or chat, agents can view the CAD on the Contact Attached Data screen.

The CAD comprises:

- CAD group

- Attributes

- ValuesFor example, if the attribute is City, the value might be San Francisco. In Customizing (seebelow), you can specify whether agents can edit the values of individual attributes in the ICWebClient.

The CAD is provided by the communication management software (CMS) as an XML string. In the ICWebClient, the XML data is transformed into an internal table containing attribute and value pairs.


In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management:

1. Define a CAD profile.Choose Interaction Center WebClient -> Basic Functions -> Communication Channels ->Define Profiles for Contact Attached Data.

2. Assign your CAD profile to a business role.Choose Business Roles -> Define Business Role.

1.23.13.2 Presence - Availability of Agents When Transferring Contacts (New)

Use


When an interaction center agent transfers a contact (for example, a telephone call), a tab page in theTransfer dialog box shows which agent groups are available to take the contact. This can significantly

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 279

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

reduce the number of unsuccessful transfers, and ensure more timely customer service.

This tab page is populated only if:

- Your communication management software (CMS) supports the exposure of this information toyour SAP systemIn your CMS, you can model a hierarchical structure of the transfer targets, which is shown as a treestructure in the Transfer dialog box.

- Agents are available in the agent group to take the contact

The tree structure is channel-specific, that is, it displays only agent groups assigned to the currentchannel.

1.23.13.3 CRM-IC-CHA-TEL Telephony Integration

1.23.13.3.1 Dual Tone Multi Frequency Tones (New)

Use


You can send dual tone multi frequency (DTMF) tones through a standard communication managementsoftware (CMS) interface, thereby flexibly supporting:

- Private branch exchange (PBX) specific commands

- Automatic call distribution (ACD) specific commands

- Computer telephony integration (CTI) specific commands

For example, you might want to send a DTMF tone for *8 to trigger the switch to put a call back in thequeue.

You define the DTMF tone in Customizing (see Effects on Customizing below). You then assign theDTMF tone to a toolbar button in a toolbar profile. A button can either be dedicated to sending tones or itcan have this function in addition to another function (for example, Hold).


You define DTMF tones in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management -> Interaction

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 280

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Center WebClient -> Customer-Specific System Modifications -> Define Dual Tone MultiFrequency (DTMF) Tones.

1.23.13.3.2 Simple Computer Telephony Integration (New)

Use


You can restrict computer telephony integration (CTI) in the Interaction Center (IC) WebClient to thefollowing features:

- Soft phone

- Screen pop (ANI, DNIS)

- Screen transfer (handling of contact attached data)

This is useful if you want to use the IC WebClient in an environment where simple telephony support andan inbox for asynchronous communication channels are sufficient.

The communication management software (CMS) connects the IC WebClient directly to a switch. Thismeans that an IC WebClient session is associated only with an extension or device. The logon processuses a lean version of the free seating logon. A cookie stores the extension information for the user so thatit can be defaulted the next time the user logs on. This requires the CMS to check if the user is authorizedto use this extension or device number. If the user is not authorized to use it, the CMS returns an errorcode. When the user is logged on, the ready/not ready states are not transferred to the CMS.

1.23.13.4 CRM-IC-CHA-EMA E-Mail Integration

1.23.13.4.1 Inserting Agent Signatures and Standard Responses in E-MailEditor (New)

Use


The name of the current agent (or employee responsible) is available as an attribute in the mail form toolso that agents can create generic signatures with agent name and department name, which they can insertat the end of an e-mail in the e-mail editor.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 281

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Agents can insert standard responses at the cursor position in the e-mail editor.

1.23.14 CRM-IC-EMS E-Mail Response Management System

1.23.14.1 Pushing E-Mails to Agents (New)

Use


You can use communication management software and the ERMS to push and screen pop e-mails toagents. E-mails can be aligned in a universal queue and routed, similar to telephone calls. E-mails arereceived by SAPconnect, processed by ERMS, and then routed by the communication managementsoftware. After e-mails are routed, agents receive a request to process e-mails in the context area. Agentsuse the toolbar to accept or reject the request. After accepting the request, the e-mail is displayed.

A new action, PUSH_EMAIL (Push E-Mail to IC WebClient Agent), is available in the repository. Itallows e-mail routing through the communication management software instead of directly going to aninbox. E-mails that are pushed to agents by the ERMS Push action will also be routed to the Agent Inboxby the ERMS default routing, unless another routing destination is specifically maintained. Therefore werecommend directly specifying a Route E-Mail action after the PUSH_EMAIL action, allowing allpushed e-mails to be monitored by a supervisor or special organizational unit, and avoiding misrouting ofpush e-mails to the default routing that are already completed.

See also

Release note Inserting Agent Signatures and Standard Responses in E-Mail Editor

Release note Transport of Rule Policies and Rules

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 282

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.23.14.2 Rules Policies (Enhanced)

Use


The following enhancements have been made for editing rule policies.

- You can now use two new operators for rule processing:

- IsLike

- IsNotLikeThese operators can be used to evaluate wildcard expressions.

- You can now hide actions while editing rule policies by deselecting the checkbox in a new columncalled Show Actions. You can use this to hide activities that are not relevant to your businessneeds. By default all actions are shown, so you do not need to perform any additional upgradeactivities.

1.23.14.3 CRM-IC-EMS-RUL Rule Maintenance

1.23.14.3.1 Transport of Rule Policies and Rules (New)

Use


A new program, Transport Rule Policies (CRM_RULE_TRANS), is available for initiating transportsof rule policies and rules to other clients or systems. All associated rule modeler data, such as actions andconditions, is also included in the transport. You can transport rule policies and rules from any rulemodeler context, such as ERMS, Order Routing, and so on. This program saves you from manuallyrecreating rule policies and rules in each target system.

A new entry is available in the SAP Easy Access Menu under Interaction Center -> E-Mail ResponseManagement System -> Utilities.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 283

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

Program documentation

1.23.14.4 CRM-IC-EMS-CAT Categories

1.23.14.4.1 Merge and Import of Categorization Schemas (New)

Use


Themultilevel categorization component now supports the import and merge of schemas.

When you merge two schemas, the object assignments and category assignments are updated in a leadingschema based on a lower-level schema. The specific categories or objects that exist in the leading schemaare also not lost.

Use example: This function enables you to maintain general enhancements centrally in a leading schemaas a template schema in order to make them available for a number of productive schemas. The mergemechanism supports the update of categories and object links.

In addition, an RFC-enabled function is provided for importing schemas, categories, and object linksfrom other clients or other CRM systems.

Note that the functions for merging and importing for CRM systems are supported only as of CRMRelease 5.10 or higher. Furthermore, it is necessary to ensure the import of the related objects using otherfunctions (for example, SAP Transport Organizer).

The following objects support the import and merge of schemas and categories:

- Interface method IF_CRM_ERMS_CATEGO_MANAGER~ADD_ASPECT_IMPORT

- Interface method IF_CRM_ERMS_CATEGO_ASPECT~MERGE

- Interface method IF_CRM_ERMS_CATEGO_CATEGORY~MERGE

- Business Add-In (BAdI) CRM_ERMS_CATEGO_OBJECT_BADI

- IMG activity Maintain RFC Destinations for Schema Import

- Program CRM_ERMS_CAT_AS_IMPORT


The standard system contains BAdI implementations for importing and merging the following objects:

Object Merge Import

Search Query x x

Standard Responses x -

Problems and Solutions x -

Service Order Templates x x

Products x x

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 284

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Accounts x x

Enhanced Attributes x x

Document Template Profile x x

Activity Template x x

Subject Code x x

Note that for technical reasons 'Search Queries' cannot be imported or merged using the BAdI. Acustomer-specific enhancement is not supported.

See also

For more information see Import Categorization Schemas and Merge Categorization Schemas inSAP Library.

1.24 CRM-MSA Mobile Sales

1.24.1 CSDT and Infocenter (Deleted)

Use


The following mobile client features/functions are not supported:

o Central Software Deployment Tool

o Infocenter

1.24.2 Security Enhancements for CRM Mobile Applications (Enhanced in

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 285

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

SP02)

Use


Security features for CRM mobile applications have been enhanced. This enables the systemadministrator to secure access to mobile applications and to view a log of events related to security.These security features are:

- In Mobile System Maintenance (MSY), the system administrator can select the security relatedevents that are required to be logged.

- In MSY, details of the logged security related events can be viewed.

- In the CRM Server, the system administrator can lock or unlock a user's access to mobileapplications.

- Passwords are now case-sensitive and enforced by the system.

- Single-sign-on information for integration of Mobile Sales with Mobile Time and Travel isencrypted to protect such information.


The following replication objects must be downloaded from the CRM Server to the consolidated database(CDB):

- EVNT_LOG_WRITE

- EVNT_STG_WRITE

In addition, the mobile clients must be subscribed to the publication "Customizing Objects 2007".


This function helps system administrators control and manage security related to mobile applications.

1.24.3 Trade Promotion Management Enhancements (Enhanced)

Use


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 286

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Date range enhancements in TPM

You can now set the pre-populate flag in Customizing for CRM Server so that when a trade promotion issaved, the trade spend validity dates are automatically defaulted from the corresponding additional daterange of the trade promotion.

Note:

- It is now a possibility to define more than five additional date ranges for TPM in CRM Server. As inSAP CRM 5.0, only the first five additional date ranges defined in Customizing for CRM Serverwill be supported in CRM Mobile Sales.

- Date ranges are determined for specific combinations of 'Spend Type', 'Spend Category' and'Spend Method'

- If the determined date range is not supported in CRM Mobile Sales, the corresponding start and enddates cannot be edited and are display only

- Changes to the date range (start and end dates) in the trade promotion are automatically reflected inthe corresponding trade spend, provided you have not already manually modified the correspondingtrade spend validity dates.

- When you have manually modified the defaulted validity dates for a trade spend, a modified flag isdisplayed for that trade spend. A warning message will be issued in case the manually maintaineddates are outside the corresponding date range.

Default list price of reference products

So far, the list price of a particular product was getting automatically defaulted. Now, if a particularproduct does not have a list price and is linked to a reference product, the list price of the referenceproduct is used as the default value.

Trade Promotions causing Significant Uplift

A new Customizing setting allows you to choose from two integration scenarios between trade promotionplanning in CRM and demand planning in SCM. This setting is done on sales organization level. Thetwo integration scenarios are:

- All promotional uplifts are transferred to demand planning. You can choose this scenario in caseyou want all promotions created in CRM to be replicated to demand planning in SCM, and theincremental sales volume originating from these promotions to be added to the total demand plan. Inthis case, the Signif. Uplift flag for trade promotions created within the corresponding salesorganization is selected by default. It cannot be manually edited. This scenario was supported inearlier releases as well.

- You can decide to transfer only trade promotions, which have Signif. Uplift flag selected, to demandplanning in SCM. These trade promotions could be one-off promotions with a substantial impact onthe total sales volume with the corresponding account. You can choose this scenario in case allregular business, including the sales volume connected to promotions which are repeated every year,would already be included into the demand plan in SCM. In this case, account managers would usethe Signif. Uplift flag on promotions to denote the system of exceptional promotions which need tobe added to the total demand plan.

Note:

Through Customizing, you can define the All Uplift settings for sales organizations.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 287

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


The following objects must be downloaded from CRM Server to the consolidated database (CDB):

- CRMC_MKTPL_TSDT

- CRMC_MKTPL_COS3

- CRMC_MKTPL_DATE

- CRMC_MKTPL_UPLIF

This enhancement does not effect the publications to which the mobile clients must be subscribed to. Thefollowing existing publications can be reused:

- "Customizing Objects 40" - for trade promotions

- "Customizing Objects 2007" - for significant uplift


Date Range:

- Define date ranges in Customizing for CRM by choosing Marketing -> Marketing Planning andCampaign Management -> Basic Data -> Define Additional Date Ranges

- Define spend types in Customizing for CRM by choosing Marketing -> Marketing Planning andCampaign Management -> Key Figure Planning -> Define Marketing Spend Types

Significant Uplifts

To check the All Uplift flag for a sales organization, you make the settings in Customizing for CRM bychoosing Trade Promotion Management -> Basic Data -> Define Uplifts

1.24.4 CRM-MSA-BP Business Partner

1.24.4.1 Life Cycle Stage for Business Partners (New)

Use


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 288

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can maintain information about the current stage of a business partner's relationship (potential,qualified prospect, and so on) with the organization.

To allow users to maintain this information, a new field, Life Cycle Stage, is included in the followingareas of Mobile Sales:

- Business Partners/Details and Business Partners/Search tile sets

- Business Partner Search dialog box, which appears when users search for business partners inthe Contacts/Details tile set

Users can also search for business partners based on the life cycle stage.


See SAP Note 1050311.


The values for the Life Cycle Stage field and the permitted sequence of life cycle stages are defined inCustomizing for Cross-Application Components by choosing SAP Business Partner -> Business Partner-> Basic Settings -> Business Partner Roles -> Define BP Role Exclusion Groups.

1.24.4.2 Account Classification for Business Partners (New)

Use


You can now assign certain predefined attributes (such as role and rating) to a business partner based onpredefined criteria (such as sales organization, distribution channel, division, and country). A businesspartner can, for example, have the role 'customer' in one sales organization and the role 'competitor' inanother. Similarly, a business partner can have the ranking 'gold customer' in one country and theranking 'silver customer' in another.


The following objects must be downloaded from CRM Server to the consolidated database (CDB):

- Customizing objects:

- CRM_DNLBPCLASS

- CRM_DNLRATING

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 289

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Replication objects:

- CRM_DNLBPCLASS

- CRM_DNLRATING

In addition, the mobile clients must be subscribed to the publications, "Customizing Objects 2007" and"Customizing Publications for General Objects".


The classification categories, attributes, and criteria are defined in Customizing for CRM by choosingMaster Data -> Business Partner -> Define Classification.

- One category 'Account Classification' is delivered in the standard. Customers can define newcategories.

- In the standard, four classification criteria are delivered and they are assigned to the AccountClassification category. Customers can assign one more criterion to this category. Customers candefine new criteria.

- In the standard, two classification attributes are delivered and they are assigned to the AccountClassification category. Customers can assign additional attributes to this category. Customers candefine new attributes.

1.24.5 CRM-MSA-PAS Products & Services

1.24.5.1 Using Configurable Products Created in the CRM Server (Enhanced)

Use


You can now create configurable products in the CRM Server and use them when creating salestransactions in CRM Mobile Sales.

For example, when you choose a configurable product in the sales order, the possible characteristics forthe product are displayed automatically at item level. You can choose the characteristic values you wantand so determine a specific attribute for the configurable product. In case of a personal computer (PC),for example, the characteristics monitor, memory space, or keyboard can vary.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 290

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You can download the product configuration information (Knowledge Base), created in the CRM Server,to CRM Mobile Sales by subscribing to the publication:

"Configuration Model (by Name + Version)"

Note: Only configured products with status released and activated are transferred from CRM Server toCDB. You activate a Knowledge Base in the CRM Server by using Apply Changes button. Only the latestKnowledge Base is considered when you create a new item.

1.24.6 CRM-MSA-ACT Activity

1.24.6.1 Activity Scheduling Functions (Enhanced)

Use


Scheduling activities as follow-up transactions for open tasks

Until now, users could schedule activities based on open tasks, but there was no link between the task andthe activity. Users can now schedule activities as follow-up transactions for open tasks.

- While scheduling an activity based on an open task in the Activity Scheduling tile set, the user canchoose to either close the preceding task or leave it in its current state.

- The follow-up activity has, by default, the same goal, campaign, opportunity, and priority as thepreceding task; users can, however, change these attributes.

- The follow-up activity has a hyperlink, which users can use to navigate from the activity to thepreceding task.

- The preceding task has a note containing information about the follow-up activity.

Scheduling activities for contacts

In the Activity Scheduling tile set, in addition to scheduling activities based on open tasks, pendingactivities, and so on, users can now schedule activities for contacts. The behavior of this function is thesame as the behavior while scheduling activities for business partners.

Checking for business hours while scheduling activities

When users schedule activities for business partners and contacts, the application proposes time slots for

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 291

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

the activities after checking the visiting hours that are defined in Mobile Sales for the selected businesspartners and contacts.

- If the selected business partner has a contact and,

- If visiting hours are maintained for the contact, the application generates activity proposalsbased on the visiting hours of the contact.

- If visiting hours are not maintained for the contact, the application generates activity proposalsbased on the visiting hours of the business partner.

- If visiting hours are maintained neither for the contact nor for the business partner, theapplication generates activity proposals based on the working hours of the logged-in salesrepresentative.

- If the selected business partner does not have a contact and,

- If visiting hours are maintained for the business partner, the application generates activityproposals based on the visiting hours of the business partner.

- If visiting hours are not maintained for the business partner, the application generates activityproposals based on the working hours of the logged-in sales representative.

Status-based coloring of activities in the calendar

Activities in the calendar appear in different colors based on their status.


- Business hours check: By default, this function is disabled because it affects performance. If thischeck is required, the administrator must enable it in Mobile System Maintenance (MSY) by settingthe ACTBUSHOURCHECK application parameter to ON.

- Status-based coloring of activities in the calendar: The color that appears in the calendar dependson the following settings that the system administrator defines in Mobile System Maintenance(MSY):

- Values for the STATUSCOL (activity status) choice field

- Values for the COLORCOL (status color) choice field

- Mapping (hierarchy) between the STATUSCOL and COLORCOL choice fields

1.24.6.2 Synchronization of Attachments in Activities with MS Outlook (New)

Use


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 292

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can synchronize attachments to activities from the mobile client to the MS Outlook calendar andvice versa.

To enable synchronization of attachments, users must select the Include Attachments indicator in the SAPCRM Calendar Synchronization Properties dialog box.

Note: The SAP CRM Calendar Synchronization Properties dialog box appears when users choose:

- Tools -> Options -> SAP CRM Calendar Properties tab page -> Options# pushbutton in MSOutlook

- Tools -> Options for Synchronization in the mobile application


When users synchronize activities between mobile clients and MS Outlook, files that are attached toactivities are also copied from the mobile application to MS Outlook and vice versa.

1.24.6.3 Attachment of Account Fact Sheet to Activities (New)

Use


When you as a user create or maintain an activity for a business partner, you can attach the PDF file ofthe related account fact sheet to the activity. This is possible if the related fact sheet is available offline.

If the fact sheet is not available offline, you can create a request in Mobile Sales for the fact sheet to begenerated in the CRM Server.

Note: At the next synchronization, the request is processed and the fact sheet is downloaded to the mobileclients. These functions (requesting for and downloading fact sheets) are the same as in previous releasesand have not changed in SAP CRM Mobile Sales 2007.


When the activity is uploaded to the CRM Server, it is saved in the CRM database. In the CRM Server, ifa user attaches a new fact sheet to the same activity, then this fact sheet is stored as a separate attachmentdistinct from the fact sheet that the mobile user attached. A different naming convention differentiatesthese fact sheets.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 293

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.24.7 CRM-MSA-OPP Opportunities

1.24.7.1 Assessments in Opportunities Based on Expected Sales Volume (New)

Use


You can configure the application to automatically prompt users to fill an assessment for an opportunitywhen the expected sales volume or expected total value exceeds a predefined threshold. Further, you canspecify whether the assessment is mandatory or optional.


The settings for this new function are defined in Customizing for CRM by choosing Transactions ->Settings for Opportunities -> Sales Methodology -> Questionnaire for Opportunities.

1.24.7.2 Maintenance of Competitor Product Information in Opportunities (New)

Use


You can maintain the following information about competitor products in opportunities:

- Competitor product ID and description

- Expected sales volume of the competitor product

- Currency for expected sales volume of the competitor product

Note: The currency that the user enters for the opportunity as a whole (header) appears, by default, as the currency for the individual competitor products. Users can change the currency for the competitor

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 294

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

products.

- Indicator showing whether the competitor won the deal for the product

- Probability of the competitor winning the deal

- Notes about the strengths and weaknesses of the competitor


The competitor product information can be maintained either for the opportunity at the header level, orfor individual products in the opportunity depending on the competitor mode that you define inCustomizing for CRM by choosing Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Define Transaction Types.

1.24.8 CRM-MSA-AMT Authorization Management Tool

1.24.8.1 Mass Assignment and Unassignment of Roles to Users in AMT (New)

Use


As a system administrator, you can assign multiple roles to multiple mobile users, and vice versa, in asingle action. You can also unassign multiple roles from users in a single action. Before this release,system administrators could only assign one role-user combination at a time.


This function helps improve the efficiency of system administrators.

1.24.8.2 Authorization in AMT for Pricing Details (New)

Use


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 295

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can impose access restrictions on the following additional tile sets of Mobile Sales:

- Sales Transactions -> Item: Price Details

- Sales Transactions -> Price Details


The system administrator can control access to the Sales Transactions -> Item: Price Details and SalesTransactions -> Price Details tile sets, by assigning access rights for these tile sets to only the requiredroles.

1.24.9 CRM-MSA-SAD Sales Document

1.24.9.1 Comparing Product Configurations (New)

Use


You can now compare the characteristic values of two product configuration states. This is useful when asales item is a configured product. This makes it easier for you to decide which product configuration ismore suited to your requirements.

In the change mode, you have the following options for configuration comparison:

- Take Snapshot

You can store a chosen product configuration at a certain point as a snapshot. The snapshot is not savedto the database.

- Compare Snapshot

You can compare the currently selected product configuration with a snapshot.

- Compare to Stored Version

If you want to reprocess a sales order with which a product configuration was saved, you can compare thenew configuration with the previously saved product configuration.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 296

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.24.10 CRM-MSA-PAC Campaigns & Promotions

1.24.10.1 Product Planning Basis for Trade Promotions and Deals (New)

Use


You can, while planning a trade promotion/deal for an entire product category or product group, assignthe product category or product group to the trade promotion/deal, instead of assigning individualproducts one at a time. This improves operational efficiency.

To allow users to assign product groups or product categories to trade promotions/deals, a new field,Prod. Plng Basis, is available in the Marketing/Details tile set of Mobile Sales. It appears in the headerfor deals and trade promotions. In this field, users can choose the basis for planning volumes and tradespends when they create trade promotions and deals. The possible values for this field are:

- Product

- Product group

- Product category

- Product group and product

- Product category and product

Depending on the planning basis that the users choose, the Products, Product Categories, and ProductGroups tile sets are then available for selection.


See SAP Note 1050311.


The values that users must be able to select (based on the business needs) and the default value for thePlanning Basis field are defined in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management (CRM) bychoosing Marketing -> Marketing Planning and Campaign Management -> Product Assignments ->Define Product Planning Basis.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 297

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.25 CRM-MSE Mobile Service

1.25.1 Mobile Service Functions (Changed)

Use


- The following mobile service functions are disabled because they are not in scope:

- Usage-based billing

- Assignments for service orders

- Object structure

- In product service letters (PSLs), the subject data is made read-only.

1.25.2 Security Enhancements for CRM Mobile Applications (Enhanced inSP02)

Use


Security features for CRM mobile applications have been enhanced. This enables the systemadministrator to secure access to mobile applications and to view a log of events related to security.These security features are:

- In Mobile System Maintenance (MSY), the system administrator can select the security relatedevents that are required to be logged.

- In MSY, details of the logged security related events can be viewed.

- In the CRM Server, the system administrator can lock or unlock a user's access to mobileapplications.

- Passwords are now case-sensitive and enforced by the system.

- Single-sign-on information for integration of Mobile Sales with Mobile Time and Travel isencrypted to protect such information.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 298

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


The following replication objects must be downloaded from the CRM Server to the consolidated database(CDB):

- EVNT_LOG_WRITE

- EVNT_STG_WRITE

In addition, the mobile clients must be subscribed to the publication "Customizing Objects 2007".


This function helps system administrators control and manage security related to mobile applications.

1.25.3 Local Stock Information Update (New in SP02)

Use


Stock information for service parts is updated on the mobile client when service technicians processgoods movements or service confirmations in an offline mode. This enables service technicians to uselatest stock information when fulfilling service requests.

When a service technician creates a service confirmation with a serial number relevant service part, stockinformation on the mobile client is updated depending on the serialization option for that service part asmaintained in the CRM product master. In this case, for the local stock to get updated, the only relevantserialization options are:

- 3 - Check in CRM Against Individual Object and Serial Number

- 4 - Check in ERP Against Serial Number

Note: When a service technician creates a service confirmation with a batch relevant service part, stockinformation on the mobile client is not updated.


This section is only relevant if you are upgrading from any previous release of SAP CRM Mobile Service2007.

1. In SAP NetWeaver Mobile, choose the path Data Orchestration Engine -> Data OrchestrationAdmin and Monitoring Portal

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 299

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

2. Choose Recover Device option on the Device Administration screen for:

- Device Name with value CRM

- Data Objects as MSV_STOCK and MSV_GM


The system administrator can enable or disable the local stock update function by making appropriatesettings in the CRM Mobile System Maintenance (MSY) application. To enable this feature,

- Choose Cross-Component Settings

- Select the Choice Field ENABLELOCALSTOCK and set the Choice Field Value to True

1.25.4 Goods Movement (New)

Use


As a service representative, you can maintain goods movement (movement of stock) transactions so thatstock information is accurate. You can enter the following details on the mobile client:

- Goods receipt

- Leads to an increase in stock

- Goods issue

- Leads to a reduction in stock

- Transfer posting

- Leads to stock transfers and changes in stock type or stock category of a material

In addition, you can cancel goods movement documents created in CRM Mobile Service.


You have installed SAP ECC 2005 (ERP Central Component - Enhancement pack 3) and SAPNetWeaver Mobile 7.1 SP03 as these systems exchange data with SAP CRM Mobile Service.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 300

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

As a prerequisite to data exchange, the system administrator should have:

- Mapped the SAP CRM Mobile Service user to an existing CRM Server user

- Created a user in SAP ECC with the same username as in CRM Server

- Ensured that mobile clients are subscribed to the following publications:

- Goods Movement (by Issuing Plant and Storage location)

- Goods Movement (by Receiving Plant and Storage location)

- Customizing_Vanstock

- Downloaded the following Customizing objects to consolidated database (CDB):

System Customizing object

From SAP ECC CUST_STLOC : Storage location

From SAP ECC using SAP NetWeaver Mobile 7.1 SP03 MSV_PLANT: Plant data

MSV_FLDCUST: Field customization

MSV_MVT_TYPES : Goods movement types

MSV_MVT_REASONS : Goods movement reasons


The system administrator must make the following settings in CRM Mobile System Maintenanceapplication:

- Stock Management

- Assign plant and storage location with employees

- Cross-Component Settings

- Select the Choice Field ENABLEVANSTOCK and set the Choice Field Value to True

- Use Choice Fields to change the description of movement types, if required

Note: CRM Mobile Service 2007 supports the following goods movement types:

Movement Type Goods Movement Description

(choice field value) (choice field description)

101 GR goods receipt Goods receipt for purchase orderinto warehouse or stores

102 Reversal of GR Goods receipt for purchase orderinto warehouse - reversal

301 TF tfr.plnt.to plnt. Transfer posting plant to plant(one-step)

302 TR tfr.plnt.to plnt. Transfer posting plant to plant(one-step) - reversal

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 301

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

303 TF rem.fm.stor.to pl Transfer posting plant to plant -remove from storage (two - step)

304 TR rem.fm.stor.to pl Transfer posting plant to plant -remove fm storage - reversal (two - step)

305 TF pl.in stor.in pl. Transfer posting plant to plant -place in storage (two - step)

306 TR pl.in stor.in pl. Transfer posting plant to plant -place in storage - reversal (two - step)

311 TF tfr. within plant Transfer posting storage location(one-step)

312 TR transfer in plant Transfer posting storage location(one-step) - reversal

313 TF rem.fm.str.toSLoc Transfer posting storage locationto storage location - remove from storage

314 TR rem.fm.str.toSLoc Transfer posting storage locationto storage location - remove from storage -reversal

315 TF pl.in str.in Sloc Transfer posting storage locationto storage location - place in storage

316 TR pl.in stor.inSLoc Transfer posting storage locationto storage location - place in storage -reversal

561 GI entry of st. bals Receipt per initial entry of stockbalances into unrestricted - use

562 RE entry of st.bals. Receipt per initial entry of stockbalances to unrestricted. - reversal


You should have made all relevant Customizing settings related to this feature in SAP ECC.

1.25.5 Reservations and Purchase Requisitions (New)

Use


This feature enables you to replenish depleted stock items, or order for new stock items. The followingoptions are available to you:

- Create reservation against existing stock

- Create purchase requisitions to request for stock items you want

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 302

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Reservations

You can replenish stock by creating a reservation to reserve another service representative's stock or thatof another storage location. The reservation is then processed in one of the following ways:

- The second service representative (or another storage location) creates the transfer posting, withreference to the reservation, to move the reserved stock item to unrestricted stock.

- You can create (on behalf of the second service representative or another storage location) thetransfer posting, with reference to the reservation, to move the reserved stock item to unrestrictedstock.

You can also:

- Select the Deletion Indicator to cancel reservations

Purchase Requisitions

You can create purchase requisitions and then synchronize with SAP ECC where follow-up purchaseorders and delivery transactions are created. These reference documents are then synchronized to theCRM Mobile Service client.

Note: When the purchase requisition goods are received, you create (in the Goods Movementcomponent) a goods receipt with reference to the delivery or purchase order. On synchronization,stock gets updated.

In addition, you can do the following:

- View reference (follow-up) purchase orders or deliveries

- Search for purchase orders or deliveries, including those associated with purchase requisitions,using flexible search

- View purchase order or delivery details using search and appropriate links

- Set the deletion indicator flag when you wish to cancel the requisition





- Created a user in SAP ECC with the same username as in the CRM Server

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 303

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


- Requisitions / Reservations (by Doc Type & Created By)

- Requisitions / Reservations (by Req.Plant & SL, Doc Type)

- Requisitions / Reservations (by Sup.Plant & SL, Doc Type)

- Purchase Order (by Requesting plant and Storage location)

- Deliveries (by Requesting Plant, Requesting Storage Location)

- Goods Movement (by Issuing Plant and Storage location)

- Goods Movement (by Receiving Plant and Storage location)




From SAP ECC CUST_STLOC: Storage location

CUST_POPLANT - purchase org. and plantcombination

CUST_PURGRP - purchase groups

CUST_PURORG - purchase organizations



MSV_PD_TYPES - purchase document types

MSV_MVT_TYPES: Goods movement types

MSV_MVT_REASONS: Goods movement reasons



- Stock Management

- Assign plant and storage location with employees



- Maintain the list of applicable purchase document types in the Choice FieldMSVPURDOCTYPE

- Maintain the list of applicable requisition document types and categories in the Choice FieldsMSVREQDOCUMENTTYPE and MSVREQDOCUMENTCAT


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 304

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You should have made all relevant Customizing settings related to this feature in SAP ECC. You havemade settings for purchasing document types in Customizing for SAP ECC by choosing SAPCustomizing Implementation Guide -> Materials Management -> Purchasing -> Purchasing Documents

1.25.6 Stock Overview (New)

Use


As a part of the service organization, you can view stock information. This helps, for example, servicerepresentatives have the right service parts at the customer site, or know where the right service parts canbe found.

With CRM Mobile Service, you can view stock overview information including:

- Quantity of own stock items

- Quantity of stock items with other service representatives

- Quantity of stock items with the team

- Quantity of stock items with another storage location

Using flexible search facilities, you can selectively view stock information.





- Created a user in SAP ECC with the same username as in the CRM Server



- Stock By Material

- Stock By Plant

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 305

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Stock By Plant range

- Stock By Plant-SL

- Stock By Plant-SL range



From SAP ECC CUST_STLOC: Storage location



MSV_MVT_TYPES : Goods movementtypes

MSV_MVT_REASONS : Goodsmovement reasons



- Stock Management

- Assign plants and storage locations with employees




You should have made all relevant Customizing settings related to this feature in SAP ECC.

1.26 CRM-FRW Framework

1.26.1 Portal Integration (Enhanced)

Use


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 306

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can use the transaction launcher to call applications that are to be executed outside of the CRMWebClient. When you are working in the CRM WebClient integrated in SAP NetWeaver Portal, and youwant to navigate from a CRM application to native portal pages that contain applications or content, thetransaction launcher supports direct navigation to those pages that are loaded to the portal content area.The navigation is carried out as an object-based navigation (OBN) in the portal.

You can use the Universal Worklist (UWL), which is a SAP NetWeaver application, instead of the CRMworklist to manage your open workflow tasks and alerts. The cross-navigation from the UWL to CRMtarget applications is supported. To enable this navigation, you need to configure your workflow tasksand alerts.


To enable the portal integration, you have made the necessary settings in Customizing for CustomerRelationship Management, by choosing UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> TransactionLauncher -> Define URLs and Parameters.

1.26.2 Portal Integration (New)

Use


The CRM WebClient UI has been integrated in SAP NetWeaver Portal. You can now run the CRMWebClient UI in a full page iView in the portal. On every portal page only one iView with CRM contentis displayed.

The portal integration offers the following features:

- Aligned session managementWhen the first navigation to SAP CRM is executed in the portal, a logon to SAP CRM is started;when a portal session is finished, all open CRM sessions are closed; a data loss popup informs theusers that they first need to save their changes.

- Portal navigation with navigation highlightingThe portal highlights the navigation target, if you navigate from the portal navigation frame to SAPCRM, from SAP CRM to portal content, or from one CRM iView to another (cross-componentnavigation).

- A tool to export role definitions to XMLYou can use the upload tool to generate an XML file of your business role. This XML file can beimported into SAP NetWeaver Portal to generate a portal role.

- Central searchYou can search for CRM applications in the central search that is located in the header area of theportal desktop. For more information, see release note Central Search (New).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 307

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Mapping of a portal theme to a CRM skinTo align the look and feel of SAP NetWeaver Portal and SAP CRM, you can map a portal theme toits most similar CRM skin. You can select the additional CRM skin Follow Portal Theme todisplay the CRM skin mapped to the portal theme in the mapping table.

Note

The portal roles supported in SAP CRM 5.0 are replaced by portal roles that you can generate by usingthe role upload tool.


You have made the necessary settings. For more information, see Portal Integration Overview.

See also

For more information about the upgrade from SAP CRM 5.0 to the current release, see the introductionand the section 'Portal Integration' in the Migration Guide for SAP CRM 2007.

1.26.3 Working Context (New)

Use


You can use the working context with trade promotion management (TPM). The working context isassigned to the business role, and it allows users to preset values for certain attributes. These values arethen used as defaults when the user performs an advanced search or creates a new object.

For example, if a key account manager (KAM) works primarily with a particular account and productcategory, the KAM could create a working context for these values. This would make the values appearby default on search pages and when creating, for example, a new trade promotion.

You can determine whether the working context for a business role is strict or flexible. Strict means thatthe user can disable the working context, but cannot use values outside it. This prevents the user fromaccidentally leaving the working context. Flexible control allows the user to disable the working context,as well as enter values other than those of the working context.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 308

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.26.4 CRM-FRW-AFP Application Frame

1.26.4.1 Central Search (New)

Use


Central Search in CRM WebClient Standalone

The central search is now available in the header area of the CRM WebClient. When you open the searchmenu you see Saved Searches in first position and below, a hierarchical list of object types. If youselect an object type in the list with mouseover, a cascading menu with the search attributes assigned tothat object type opens. After you have selected a search attribute, you can enter the search value in theinput field. The field label changes accordingly, for example, to Search for Accounts by Category.

When you select Saved Searches, the search menu contains all your saved searches and the field labelchanges to Saved Searches.

You can use the Advanced link to navigate to the advanced search for a selected object type, forexample, to the Account search page or to a saved search.

Central Search in the Portal-Integrated CRM WebClient

The central search in the portal-integrated CRM WebClient has been changed. The look and feel of thecentral search is similar to that in the CRM WebClient standalone application. The search menu onlyconsists of the hierarchical list of object types. You can additionally search for Documents, whichmeans that a KM search is started instead of a search in the CRM application. Saved searches areavailable at the top of the work area.


To make the central search visible, you need to make the necessary configuration settings in the UIConfiguration Tool. For more information, see documentation about the header area configuration atbusiness role level in the SAP Help Portal.


To define the central search in the CRM WebClient standalone and in the portal-integrated CRMWebClient, you have made the necessary settings in Customizing for Customer RelationshipManagement, by choosing UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> Define Central Search.

To make business objects invisible at business role level in the central search in the CRM WebClientstandalone and in the portal-integrated CRM WebClient, you have made the necessary settings inCustomizing for Customer Relationship Management, by choosing Business Roles -> DefineBusiness Role.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 309

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.26.4.2 Central Search (New)

Use


You can use the central search to search for CRM business objects and documents in the CRMWebClient integrated in SAP NetWeaver Portal. It is located in the header area of the portal desktop andhence visible and accessible at all times.

Via Customizing, you can define what the central search looks like for every business role and what it isfor:

- If the central search is customized with two dropdown boxes and an entry field, the user can searchfor a business object type, such as 'Employee' in the first dropdown box and an attribute, such as'Last Name' in the second dropdown box. In the entry field, the user can enter a search value, suchas 'Smith'.

- If the central search is customized with a single dropdown box and an entry field, the user can selecta combination of business object type and attribute from this dropdown box and enter a search valuein the entry field.

- If you search for documents, a document search with the Search and Classification tool (TREX) isstarted instead of a search in the CRM application.

After the user has executed the search, the system navigates to the search page of the correspondingbusiness object where the search result is displayed in the result list.


- You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, bychoosing UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> Define Central Search.

- You have made the necessary settings in the UI configuration of the UI components and views viathe UI Configuration Tool. For more information how to start the UI Configuration Tool, see releaseUI Configuration Tool.

- You have activated the search for documents in the SAP NetWeaver Portal. For more infomation,see Adapting the Header Area of the CRM Portal Desktop -> CRM Tools in Portal IntegrationOverview.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 310

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.26.5 CRM-FRW-CON UI Configuration Tool

1.26.5.1 UI Configuration (Enhanced)

Use


Direct Access from the CRM WebClient UI

You can directly access the UI configuration of pages from the CRM WebClient. You can configurehome pages, work center pages, and overview pages, by choosing the corresponding icon at the top of thepage. To show the configurable areas on a page, you can choose the corresponding icon. If you click theicon, all configurable views on this page are displayed and you can start the configuration of everydisplayed configurable view.

You can directly access the UI configuration from the F2 help. To find out the name of an applicationcomponent or view, you can click F2. The Technical Details dialog with the technical information isstarted. By clicking the 'Configure' icon at the bottom of the dialog, you can directly access the UIconfiguration of this component.

You can directly access the fact sheet configuration from the CRM WebClient.

All configuration changes that you have made in an application are automatically visible in theapplication.

You can create a new transport request or select an existing transport request in the CRM WebClient.

Configuration Based on Enhancement Sets

If you select an application component and view in the CRM WebClient for which an enhancement sethas been previously created in the SAP GUI, you can perform configuration based on the enhancedcomponent.

Configuration Access Sequence

You can change the standard access sequence that is used to determine configurations. The actualconfiguration that is used for a certain configurable view is determined on the basis of a search key andthe available configurations that exist for a specific view. The configuration can either be a standard SAPconfiguration or a customer-specific configuration.


To use your own access sequence, you need to implement the Business Add-In (BAdI)BSP_DLC_ACCESS_ENHANCEMENT in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, bychoosing UI Framework -> UI Framework Definition -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> DefineConfiguration Access -> BAdI: Configuration Access Determination.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 311

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.26.5.2 UI Configuration Tool (Enhanced)

Use


You can now access the UI Configuration Tool directly in the CRM WebClient UI via hyperlinks in thenavigation bar. However, you can still use the BSP Component Workbench (transactionBSP_WD_CMPWB) to access the UI Configuration Tool.

The UI Configuration Tool offers the following features in the CRM WebClient UI:

- View ConfigurationThe system administrator can configure form views, overview pages, search pages, tables, and workcenters.

- Fact Sheet ConfigurationThe system administrator can configure fact sheets.

If you want to configure views and fact sheets in the CRM WebClient UI and need to create a transportrequest, you can use report BSP_DLC_TRANSPORT_CONFIG_TEXT.


To make the UI Configuration Tool accessible in a system administrator role in the CRM WebClient UI,you have made the necessary settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, bychoosing UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> Define Navigation Bar Profile.

See also

For more information about the UI Configuration Tool, see SAP Library at Customer RelationshipManagement -> Components and Functions -> Basic Functions -> UI Configuration.

1.26.6 CRM-FRW-ROL Roles Management

1.26.6.1 User roles (changed, new)

Use

As of Release SAP CRM 5.1, the following user roles are available:

- Marketing

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 312

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Service

- Sales

- IC Manager

- IC Agent

- E-Commerce Manager

- Channel Manager

- Partner Manager

- Leasing Manager

- Grantor Program Manager

- Life Sciences: Contract Manager

- Provider-IC Agent

- Provider-Dealer

The contents of all user roles named above were adjusted to the new user interface, that is, they offer auniform page layout, simple and intuitive navigation, and ease of personalization.


To set up new user roles, make the following settings in the Implementation Guide (IMG):

- Define logical links as jump destinations to CRM components Use IMG activity UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> Define Navigation Profile.

- Define link groups for work centers and assign to them all logical linksthat contextually belongtogether from the process viewpoint. Use IMG activity UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition-> Define Navigation Profile.

- Define work centers and assign to them the work center link groups you want. Use IMG activity UIFramework -> Technical Role Definition -> Define Navigation Profile.

- Define groups for direct links and assign to them all logical links that are to appear in the shortcutsin the navigation bar. Use IMG activity UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> DefineNavigation Profile.

- Define a navigation profile and assign work centers and groups of direct links to it. Use IMGactivity UI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> Define Navigation Profile.

- Define an authorization profile for your business role. Use IMG activity Technical Role Definition-> Define Authorization Profile.

- Assign the navigation profile you created and the authorization profile to your business role. UseIMG activity Business Roles -> Define Business Role.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 313

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Determine the links to be displayed in the work center and in the navigation bar for your businessrole. Use IMG activity Business Roles -> Define Business Role.

- Assign your business role to an organizational unit. Use IMG activity Business Roles -> DefineOrganizational Assignment.

1.26.6.2 Business Role Customizing (Enhanced)

Use


Business role Customizing is now available in the CRM WebClient UI. You can start the Customizingdirectly in the navigation bar of your business role. You can search for an existing business role, copy anexisting business role, or create a new one. All necessary information assigned to your business role isdisplayed in an editable overview page. The Business Role Details block contains general data and theassigned profiles. In the following assignment blocks, you can perform the same Customizing activitiesas in business role Customizing in the SAP GUI:

- Navigation Bar

- Direct Link Groups

- Keyboard Shortcuts

- Central Search

- Function Profiles

If you save your business role data, you can create a new transport request or select an existing one. Youcan directly access the translation of your business role and select the languages into which your businessrole is to be translated. You can directly access the PFCG transaction launcher to define the authorizationrole (PFCG role) for your business role.

Additionally, the Customizing activities for business roles in SAP GUI have been enhanced. Thesefunctions are also available in the CRM Web Client UI. You can do the following:

- Rename work centers and change the sorting of work centers in the navigation bar of a businessrole.

- Rename logical links and change the sorting of logical links within a work center of a business role.

- Rename direct link groups and change the position of a direct link group in the navigation bar of abusiness role.

- Assign icons to work centers and to some links in a direct link group of a business role.

- Make objects that are used in the central search visible or not visible.

Additionally, you can define in Customizing via a parameter in the IMG customizing, whether the sortingof logical links on work center pages and home pages should be alphabetical or not.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 314

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.26.6.3 User Role IPM Rights Manager (New)

Use

The following user role is now available:

- IPM Rights Manager

The contents of the user role were adapted for the CRM WebClient user interface. The user interface nowoffers a uniform page layout, simple and intuitive navigation, and ease of personalization.


To set up new user roles, make the following settings in the Implementation Guide (IMG):

- Define logical links as jump destinations to CRM components. Use IMG activity Define NavigationBar Profile.

- Define link groups for work centers and assign to them all logical links that contextually belongtogether from the process viewpoint. Use IMG activity Define Navigation Bar Profile.

- Define work centers and assign to them the work center link groups you want. Use IMGactivityDefine Navigation Bar Profile.

- Define groups for direct links and assign to them all logical links that are to appear in the shortcutsin the navigation bar. Use IMG activityDefine Navigation Bar Profile.

- Define a navigation profile and assign work centers and groups of direct links to it. Use IMGactivityDefine Navigation Bar Profile.

- Define an authorization profile for your business role. Use IMG activityDefine Authorization Role.

- Assign the navigation profile you created and the authorization profile to your business role. UseIMG activityDefine Business Role.

- Determine the links to be displayed in the work center and in the navigation bar for your businessrole. Use IMG activityDefine Business Role.

- Assign your business role to an organizational unit. Use IMG activityDefine OrganizationalAssignment.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 315

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.26.7 CRM-FRW-UI User Interface

1.26.7.1 User Interface Personalization (Enhanced)


The personalization of the overview page in the CRM WebClient has been enhanced. In thepersonalization dialog on the overview page of an application you can select if you want to displayassignment blocks directly in an open state, by choosing the indicator Display Directly.

The load options Direct, Lazy, and Hidden of assignment blocks are initially configured in the UIconfiguration tool. You can now adapt these attributes to your personal needs and override the initialconfiguration in the personalization dialog. You can return to the initial configuration, by clicking Resetto Default in the personalization dialog.

1.26.7.2 UI Configuration: Usability (Enhanced)

Use


The following usability enhancements are now available in the UI configuration in the CRM WebClient:

- The configuration block in the UI configuration in the CRM WebClient UI now contains a table. Allconfigurations that are available for a selected view are displayed in this table.

- A Search button is provided to start the search for application components and fact sheets.

- In the table configuration the number of visible rows and the number of visible rows before pagingcan be defined.

- You can directly start the configuration of dependent views from the fact sheet configuration.

- The different fact sheet page types and layouts are shown in the fact sheet configuration.

- The colors of the tiles shown in the fact sheet configuration now depend on the skin.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 316

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.26.7.3 CRM WebClient User Interface (Enhanced)

Use


The CRM WebClient UI has been enhanced with the following features:

- Editable Overview PageThe editable overview page has been introduced for all CRM business objects with overview pages.This includes most of the assignment blocks in which information is displayed in form views andtables.Here the user can now directly change the information on the overview page without navigating to aseparate edit page. The overview page contains the most important information about a businessobject.NoteThe existing overview pages and concept are still fully supported within this release. However,because the new concept (editable overview pages) is seen as 'go-to-concept', support for theprevious overview page concept could be ended in a future release.

- Central SearchThe central search has been introduced in the CRM WebClient integrated in SAP NetWeaver Portal.The user can now search for CRM applications and documents with a centrally located and easilyaccessible search function. For more information, see release note Central Search (New).

- Drag and DropThe drag and drop function supports easy and intuitive personalization of the CRM WebClient UI.You can now rearrange information blocks on the home page, on work center pages, and on reportpages in your business role. You can define the sequence of assignment blocks on overview pagesand the sequence of columns in tables. You can define the column width in tables.

- Filter in TablesYou can adapt the display of information in tables to your personal needs. If you click on thecolumn header, you can now filter and sort the table records in ascending and descending order. Youcan reset the filter and also set manual filters. An icon indicates which columns the user has sortedor filtered.

- Portal IntegrationThe CRM WebClient has been integrated in SAP NetWeaver Portal. The user can carry out portalnavigation and other portal functions. For more information, see release note Portal Integration.

- PersonalizationThe personalization of the CRM WebClient UI has been enhanced by a central personalization pagethat offers several features for users to adapt their working environment to their personal

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 317

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

requirements. For more information, see release note Personalization (Enhanced).

- Miscellaneous

- You can activate or deactivate the central personalization page and the personalization in thework area.

- You can select the logon language in the logon screen.

- You can highlight mandatory fields with a background color directly in the field via style sheetCustomizing.

- You can collapse and expand the navigation bar.

- A new skin named NOVA is delivered.

1.26.7.4 Personalization (Enhanced)

Use


You can use the personalization functions to personalize your working environment easily regardingsettings, layout, and content provided in the CRM WebClient UI. The personalization page is accessiblevia a hyperlink that is centrally located in the header area of the CRM WebClient UI. It consists ofinformation blocks with hyperlinks; every hyperlink leads to a separate dialogue in which the user canmake his or her settings.

The personalization page consists of the following information blocks:

- My DataYou can change your personal data, such as address data, communication data, and organizationalinformation. You can also change your password.

- SettingsYou can personalize general settings, such as time zone, time format, and screen reader mode.

- Groupware IntegrationYou can synchronize the groupware integration, such as setting up your e-mail transfer withMicrosoft Outlook, synchronizing the settings for your personal calendar, tasks, and contacts withSAP CRM, and installing a new version of groupware synchronization settings on your localcomputer.

- LayoutYou can personalize the layout, such as skin and text size, and enable fast performance mode withfewer UI features and visual effects. You can personalize the links in the navigation bar, which

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 318

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

means you can select which links that are available for your business role are to be displayed in thenavigation bar, such as 'Appointment', 'E-Mail', or 'Task'.

- ShortcutsYou can personalize the keyboard shortcuts for your business role. With the focus shortcuts you canset focus to specific areas, such as header area or navigation bar. You can use the navigationshortcuts to navigate to other views or components.


- You can activate or deactivate the personalization page and the work area personalizationindependently in your business role. You can use the function profile 'Personalization' and itspredefined profile values in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, by choosingBusiness Roles -> Define Business Role.

- You can define the keyboard shortcuts for the central personalization page in your business role inCustomizing for Customer Relationship Management, by choosing Business Roles -> DefineBusiness Role.

- You can deactivate the Groupware Integration via the parameter GWS_DISABLED in a functionprofile in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, by choosing UI Framework ->Technical Role Definition -> Define Parameters.

1.27 CRM-CHM Channel Management

1.27.1 Partner Channel Management (Changed)

Use


The key capability "channel management" is now called "partner channel management".

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 319

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.27.2 Partner Channel Management (Enhanced)

Use


Market Development Funds

For more information about market development funds (MDF), see the separate release note MarketDevelopment Funds.

Roles

- Channel Manager (CHM-CM)We now deliver the following additional features for this business role:

- Market development funds

- Use of marketing attributes to maintain values for product recommendations. This functionsupersedes the My Marketing Profile function.

- Indexed catalog variants

- Partner Manager (CHM-PM)We now deliver the following additional features for this business role:

- Market development funds

- Enhanced contact maintenance, including maintenance of marketing attributes

- Overview of presales activities

- Display of products and employees responsible at brand owner

- (Relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.2) Request to brand owner

- Partner Manager - Channel Commerce and Partner EmployeeThese two portal roles are no longer available. Their content has been integrated into the PartnerManager business role. All BI reports formerly contained in the portal roles of Partner Manager -Channel Commerce and Partner Employee are still available.

Lead Processing with SAP Interactive Forms Software by Adobe

(Relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.2) You can distribute leads by e-mail to channel partners.

See also

Partner Channel Management: SAP NetWeaver Portal (New)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 320

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.27.3 Partner Channel Management: SAP NetWeaver Portal (New)

Use


The features for partner channel management (PCM) are available on the SAP NetWeaver Portal.

In addition, the SAP NetWeaver Portal offers the following extra features for PCM:

- Facts and reminders (note: you can display presales activities directly in the CRM WebClient)Provides an overview and access to presales activities done in the Portal, such as activities,leads, and opportunities, where the channel partner is the contact person and the partnermanager is responsible.

- Knowledge management and document managementEnables access to information, such as marketing collateral or product data, that you havecategorized as being relevant for your channel partners.

- Live supportAssists channel partners who cannot find solutions to their problems in the information thatyou have provided them. Enables channel partners to request support by, for example, e-mailor telephone call back.

1.28 CRM-LAM CRM Leasing

1.28.1 Functions No Longer Available in Leasing

Use


The user interface has been simplified to improve usability. It now displays only the most frequently usedfunctions. You use the Leasing Manager role to access the new user interface.

The following leasing-specific functions were not adapted on the new user interface but can be calledfrom the Leasing Manager role:

- Simulate Financing Products (transaction: FIMANTEST)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 321

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Adjust Interest Rates (transaction: CRM_FS_INTADJ)

- Evaluate Interest Rate Adjustment Runs (transaction: CRM_FS_INTADJ_DISP)

- Edit Depreciations (transaction: CRMD_ORDER_LEAS_WOFF)

- Change Status of Individual Objects (transaction: CRMC_IOBJ_FIN_STATE)

The following leasing-specific functions are no longer available on the new user interface:

- Simulation tool in the lease quotation

- Fast entry for lease quotations with one financing item only

- Upgrade in leases

- Object list (IBase) in the object item for the lease quotation and lease

- Business agreement

- Survey: Not available in lease quotation at item level

1.28.2 Mass Change Processes (New)

Use

This release note is only relevant if you are upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0 and want to use the associatedtechnology with the new item object type BUS2000301.

You can execute contract changes involving a large number of contracts in a mass run. To do this, SAPprovides a defined interface for calling the mass change and the mass change processing workbench thathas the following features:

- Processing of Mass ChangesTo start a mass change run, call the interface module CRM_FS_CHANGE_MASS_UI. The systemuses the data transferred from the module to construct the mass change user interface. With eachmass change run, the system generates a mass processing ID, which you need for the cancellation ofchange processes.You can schedule the processing of mass changes in the background and also start the processonline.

- Process ControlThe system logs the changes made to each contract in a message log that you can call via the masschange workbench (transaction: CRMC_FS_MASS_CHANGE). Each contract is assigned a statusthat indicates whether processing was successful or not. If processing was not successful, the systemdetails the cause of the error in a message. To display the log, you need to enter the mass run ID;this has already been assigned by the system for the change run. In the log display, you can performreprocessing or cancellation.

- Reprocessing and Cancellation

- Reprocessing: You can reprocess contracts that were not processed correctly in a mass changeprocess (after you have eliminated the cause of the error)

- Cancellation: You can undo change processes that have already been successfully executed

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 322

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can execute mass change processes for the following change processes:

- Bankruptcy without return (BANC)

- Bankruptcy with return (BANK)

- Base lease extension (BLEX)

- Purchase at end-of-lease (BUYO)

- Termination without return (CONC)

- Continuation (CONT)

- Early buyout (EBUY)

- Early termination without return (ECON)

- Early termination with return (ETER)

- Insolvency (INSO)

- Change of location (LCOL)

- Change of ownership (LCOO)

- Change of other partners (LCOP)

- Repossession (REPO)

- Restructuring with display of full payment schedule (RESC)

- Renewal (RNEW)

- Stop accounting (STAH, STAI)

- Reset stop accounting (USAH, USAI)

- Stop billing (STBH, STBI), reset stop billing (USBH, USBI)

- Termination with return (TERM)

- Undo insolvency (UNIN)

1.28.3 Integration of Contractual Services (New)

Use


You can integrate service contract items in leases and this means you can offer leasing customers thefollowing services:

- Vehicle maintenance and repair

- Tire service (tire replacement and storage)

- Service card (for fuel, tolls, car wash, and so on)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 323

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Furthermore, the Unique Item Identifier (UIID) in SAP Leasing provides you with a new identificationnumber that enables the unique identification of contracts across the entire contract cycle. For moreinformation, see the release note Unique Item Identifier (UIID) (New).

The following areas of SAP Leasing have been adapted for full service business processes and enhancedwith the corresponding functions.

Lease: Integration of Contractual Services

Services and financing products always refer to an object (for example, a vehicle). You can offerservices with or without a financing product.You create services as service contract products in the master data in the CRM system. You can alsogroup services in product bundles that you have defined to match your product range. You can select theservice products in a lease quotation or lease. This enables you to create a service contract item in thequotation/lease. A payment schedule is assigned to the service contract item. This schedule is used to billthe customer regularly for the agreed amounts. There are processes available that enable you to offsetpayments/fees paid by the customer in advance against the actual operational service costs (open billing).

Individual Services and Determination of Product Lists

You can use individual services to manage service contract items in a lease, from both a business and atechnical perspective.

To enable you to structure your service offering flexibly and offer your customers individualizedcontracts, in the master data you can subdivide a service contract product into different sales-relevantattributes. You compile the relevant individual services for a service contract product in a product list inthe master data. Depending on your business requirements, you can link the sales-relevant attributes withthe individual services. In the master data, these two parameters (attribute and individual service) areassigned to each other. Within your product range you specify the level of detail to which you want tosubdivide a service into attributes or individual services.

You can offer some of the individual services to the lessee as an option, while others are a fixed part of aproduct list or service. You can use the condition technique to define specific individual services asdefault, mandatory or optional parts of a service contract item.When you structure the contract together with a customer, you can add or remove one or more individualservices by adding or removing an attribute.All the individual services in the product list are contractually agreed and allowed. Individual services notincluded in the product list, receive the status Manual Postprocessing in the service confirmation. Priceagreements that mirror the degree of coverage are generated for all individual services in the product list:

Coverage: 100%Coverage: 0%

Example:In the contract, the lessee selects the service Tire Service. This contains the attributes Summer Tires,Winter Tires, and Tire Replacement. These attributes are linked to the individual services SummerTires, Winter Tires, and Tire Replacement. When the lessee chooses these attributes in the contract,the system automatically selects the corresponding product list in which these individual services arecompiled. The service Tire Service also contains the optional attribute Tire Storage. If the customerselects this attribute as well, then the corresponding individual service is also included in the product list.

Change Processes for Financing and Service Contract Items

You can also execute change processes for service contract items. It is also possible to synchronize

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 324

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

service contract items and financing product items in Customizing with regard to date, status, and changeprocesses.

The following change processes are provided as default:At header level:

- Change of ownership (LCOO)

At item level:

- Early termination with return (ETER)

- Termination with return (TERM)

- Base lease extension (BLEX)

- Change of attributes (CHOA)It is only possible to enter sales-relevant attributes on the user interface for the change processwithout additional effort in the SAP GUI.

- Change of other partners (LCOP)

- As well as executing individual change processes, you can make changes in a mass run. You can usethe Change Process Engine (CPE) to do this. For more information, see the release note MassChange Processes (New).

Synchronization of Object Lists

When you create a quotation/contract and assign a service contract item to the reference object item, thesystem copies the reference object (reference product or object) or the object list for the reference objectitem to the object list for the service contract item. The system performs this synchronizationautomatically and ensures that the service covers all items contained in the object list.

Summarized JIT Call

The summarized JIT call function in CRM Service is available with the full service business processes inSAP Leasing. This enables you to use releasable items to control fixed quantities (in the case of tires, forexample).

Pricing for Service Contract Items

The pricing of service contract items is determined by the following criteria:

- The object/reference product (for example, a vehicle) and the related attributes and conditions.

- The quantity of objects/reference products.

- The quantity of selected services and their related attributes.

- In Customizing you define which of the above criteria affect and control automatic pricing. In doingso, you specify the pricing procedure to be used by the system when determining the sales price of aservice from the underlying list price. Using the list price you can include any values in costing asdiscounts or surcharges.

In the following cases the system can determine the relevant sales price as a cumulative value (providedyou have entered the corresponding conditions in pricing):

- The quantity of object items is greater than one: The system calculates a cumulative price thatcorresponds to this quantity.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 325

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- The quantity of service contract items and object items is greater than one: The system calculates acumulative price that corresponds to the product for both quantities.

- The system displays the list price and the sales price for a service at item level.

Service Billing Through Agency Business

You can check individual and collective invoices from dealers and service providers (for example,service stations/petroleum companies, workshops) before billing. This enables you to differentiatebetween those invoice items that are agreed as individual services in the lease and those that are notcovered by the lease. If individual services are not contractually agreed, you can reject the invoicedamounts or forward these to the lessee.

SAP Leasing supports two scenarios for invoice verification:

- Planned servicesThe lessee or the service company informs the lessor that it wishes to use a service. The lessorcreates a service order. This is used as the reference document for checking the subsequent invoicefor the service company.

- Unplanned servicesThe lessee or the service company does not inform the lessor that they have used a service. In thiscase, the incoming invoice is checked according to the contractual agreements.

- SAP Leasing supports the creation and checking of invoices for services as follows:

- Maintenance and repairYou can enter individual invoices manually in the system. This enables you to enterservice-specific data. When you save the invoice, the data is sent to the CRM system in whichthe service contract data is stored. The CRM system checks the invoice data in the form of aservice confirmation and returns the result. The system checks whether the invoiced servicesare covered by the contract and the degree to which these are covered.

- Tire and rim serviceYou can enter individual invoices manually. You can also automatically transfer collectiveinvoices to the CRM system via an IDoc interface. The CRM system checks (in the form of aservice confirmation) whether the quantity specified in the invoice is covered by the contract.Quantities that are not covered in the contract can be invoiced to the lessee.

- Fuel and service cardsYou can transfer the invoice data electronically via an IDoc interface. To enable you to checkand process the large number of invoice items efficiently, the checks are performedautomatically by the system. During these checks, the system checks the validity of the fuelcard. If the system cannot define a fuel card as an identification object (for example, the cardnumber is wrong), it assigns the item to a dummy customer. You can then process the item at alater date. If fuel cards or contracts are invalid, the system sets a blocked status.

- You can use agency business to post both operational services and contract elements to besettled periodically (fees and annuities) in FI-CA (Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable).

Controlling

To analyze the profitability of your contracts and/or your products you can choose between a mass-objectand a single-object controlling scenario. The single-object controlling scenario takes place at item leveland is represented by internal orders.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 326

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Business Partner Distribution

CRM Middleware is used to distribute the general business partner between the CRM and ERP system. Inthe case of general business partners, roles are part of the business partner master data; business partnersare distributed to each role in the ERP system.The specific roles for the general business partner in the ERP system determine whether a businesspartner in the ERP system is synchronized with customer or vendor master data.The general business partner is synchronized and assigned with the customer and vendor master data inthe ERP system through Customer Vendor Integration (CVI).The distribution between the CRM system and ERP system as well as the synchronization of the generalbusiness partner with customer or vendor master data occurs in both directions.

Distribution of Identification Objects (Fuel Card, Vehicle License Plate)

You can include a fuel card in the object list for a service contract item (for example, fuel cardmanagement) in a lease. To do this, you create the card as an object in the CRM system. As soon as thefuel card is included in the lease and this lease is incepted, the card is distributed to the ERP system as anidentification object for the business partner. When it checks the invoice, the system checks the existenceand validity of the identification object and verifies the invoice item.When you incept the lease, the system also distributes the vehicle license plate of an object for the objectitem to the ERP system where it can be used for legitimization and invoice verification.


The introduction of these functions does not affect existing data. Data is not converted. Note: If youimplement the SAP CRM Service function at a later date in an existing leasing scenario, all contractsmust contain the service organization.


The introduction of these functions does not affect data transfer. You can transfer leases to the systemusing standard SAP CRM functions.

No system adjustments are required.


Before you use the SAP CRM Service function, you must make the necessary settings in Customizing forthe leasing scenario. This includes setting the service processes, adjusting the organizational data (theservice organization is a required entry), and determining the product lists.

SAP Implementation Guide: Settings in the CRM System

- Set service processesMake the standard settings for CRM Service.

- Adjust organizational dataMake the CRM standard settings.

- Determine product listsSAP Implementation Guide -> Customer Relationship Management -> Financial Services -> Leasing -> Settings for Service Processes -> Determination of Product Lists:

- Create Field Catalog

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 327

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Create Condition Tables

- Create Access Sequences

- Create Condition Types

- Define Determination Procedure

- Assign Determination Procedure

SAP Implementation Guide: Settings in the ERP System (Agency Business)

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide -> Logistics - General -> Agency Business:

- Standard settings for agency business

Agency Business -> Enhancements for Full Service Leasing:

- Define Payment Types

- Assign Identification Objects

- Define User Status for Document Items

1.28.4 Unique Item Identifier (UIID) (New)

Use


You can use a new identification number that enables the unique identification of contracts across theentire contract cycle.

When you create a new contract in the CRM system, the system generates an identification number foreach contract item and allocates this number to the respective item. Every contract item is then uniquelyidentifiable. This number remains the same across the entire contract cycle and is replicated with everyaction in the Lease Accounting Engine (LAE).

You use the UIID to assign invoice items and contract items to each other. You create the number rangeused by the system to generate the UIID in Customizing.

You can use the UIID in the LAE explorer as a search parameter for all types of contract items. Thesystem then displays all the contracts that contain an item with the UIID that you used.


During migration, the system does not assign a UIID to the existing dataset. You do not need to performthis conversion to ensure the continued operation of the solution in line with the features of CRM 5.0 inthe new system.If you want to assign a UIID to existing contracts, you need to use a user-defined conversion program.You can, for example, use a special number range for legacy data that you have already configured inCustomizing.


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 328

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The data transfer processes delivered by SAP have not been adjusted. Provided the number ranges havebeen configured accordingly, it makes sense to transfer contract numbers from the legacy system to thenew system for each customer, for example. However, this data should not be too heavily fragmented.

For system administration purposes, as with each number range, it makes sense to monitor the numberrange volume.


You must first create one or more number range intervals for the UIID by choosing transaction snro,number range object CRM_UIID. You can assign the number range interval to the combination oftransaction type and item category in the IMG activity Transaction-Dependent Settings for ChangeProcesses.

1.28.5 Management of Third-Party Relationships (New)

Use


When you create a leasing transaction, in addition to the business partners Lessor, Lessee, and Vendor,you can also integrate other business partners, such as Dealer or Insurer. You can use third-partyprograms to include in your business processes those third parties that contribute as multipliers in the saleof your financings.

Third-party programs support the financing of specific products over a fixed time period. You can createdifferent programs in the system to suit your sales strategy. These programs assist the sale of one or moreproducts and support business partners, or a combination of business partner and product.

The third-party program contains the outline agreements for third parties concerning additional payments(for example, subsidies or commission payments).

When you create a lease contract, you enter the required business partner, the product to be financed, andthe financing product. If you have entered any third-party programs in the system for a specificcombination of business partner, product, and financing product, the system displays these programs forselection.

If you select one of these programs for contract creation, the system incorporates the default paymentconditions for the third party into the contract calculation (pricing).

When you create a contract, you can include additional payments to or from third parties in the contractitem.

When you incept the contract, the system transfers all accounting-relevant data to Lease Accounting inSAP ERP. Lease Accounting forwards the items that are relevant for the third-party account to theLeasing Payment Engine. This engine regularly posts the payables and receivables due to and from thirdparties to the relevant contract accounts in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA).


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 329

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

In SAP CRM you make the settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, bychoosing Financial Services -> Leasing -> Settings for Third-Party Business Relationships.

1.28.6 Grouping Leasing Documents und FS Documents (New)

Use

This release note is only relevant if you are upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0 and you want to use thetechnology connected with the new item object type BUS2000301.

The item object type BUS2000301 is now available to you for SAP Leasing. This item object typecombines account origination functions with leasing management functions: based on the same concept,you can link account origination- and leasing tools and use them with each other.

The changeover to item object type BUS2000301 offers you:

- More flexibility in the areas of pricing and financial mathematics

- Subsequent costing of leases

- Different bill-to parties and payers for each billing request item

- A new item object type for billing request items

- New product data segments, also partly used in the contract

- The CRM WebClient UI as a new user interfaceNote that the SAP GUI is not available in connection with item object type BUS2000301.

1.28.7 Functions for Lease Payment Structures (New)

Use


Item object type BUS2000301 gives you greater flexibility, especially for pricing and financialmathematics (FIMA). You can use the following functions:

- Payment structures with annuities

- Installment repayment structures

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 330

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Deferral of repayments and interest in payment structures

- Broken periods with settings for pro-rated calculations

- Different payment frequencies for interest payments and repayments

- Weekly payments in the payment schedule

- Up to three concurrent fees in the payment schedule

- Working day shift based on financial mathematics

- Extendable framework for mapping views on financing, such as the processing of subsidies andparticipations

- Simplified and enhanced functions for alternative financial mathematics calculations

- Enhancement concept for the calculation of results key figures

- Open concept for pricing during change processes

- This has been done by adding new segments and set types to the following FIMA functions:

Payment structure variant: The financing product (product master) can contain any number of paymentsteps. You define the variant in Customizing. You can then access the variant in the product master forfinancing products. You assign the variant to a pricing process, which the system then uses to call thecorrect payment structure variant.

FIMA conditions and one-time flows: The system now contains a separate segment that you use to storeFIMA conditions and one-time flows. This segment contains the settings for annuities, repayments, feeconditions, and one-time payments. You define the data in the master data for the product, and the systemcopies the data to the lease quotation.

Splitting of interest: If a FIMA condition is linked to a floating rate adjustment, a new segment containsthe history of all the interest rates that are to be used.

Calculation procedure: The new FIMA Customizing settings focus on the calculation procedure. Youuse the procedure to define the sequence in which the various financing views and calculation types (suchas the calculation of the payment or the interest rate) are calculated. In the master data for products, youcan define any number of calculation procedures for each pricing process, and assign them. You can thenchoose the calculation procedure required from those that you created. You can also use calculationprocedures to configure alternative financial mathematics calculations, which you can then choose onlinein the CRM transaction.

Cash flow: This new segment is used with the FIMA conditions and billing request items. This segmentcan be used in particular when transferring legacy data, which simplifies the data transfer processconsiderably.

FIMA results: The key figures from FIMA results are stored in an extended segment of the businesstransaction. SAP provides the following fields:

- First Payment

- Normal Payment

- Final Payment

- Special Payment

- Internal Interest Calculation

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 331

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Rate per Thousand

- Profit Key Figures

Financing Views: In Customizing (customer namespace) you can configure the financing views to meetyour requirements.

In the master data for the financing product, you specify the number of financing views that you want touse. You can activate the views you want either manually or using an Application Programming Interface(API).

In Customizing, you have to assign subsidy and participation processes to the financing views.

In the master data you assign interest calculation methods and attributes to the financing views. Inprevious releases you had to define them in Customizing.


Customizing for Financial Mathematics Settings has been restructured to incorporate the newfunctions. In Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, make settings for the followingIMG activities under Financial Services -> Leasing -> Financial Mathematics Settings:

- Define Flow Categories

- Define Pricing Conditions for Cash Flow Values

- Variants and Additional Flows

- Settings for FIMA Conditions

- Financing Views

- Configure FIMA Calculation Schema

- Floating Rate Adjustment

You execute all the IMG activities under Financial Mathematics Settings.

1.28.8 Change Processes (New)

Use


Item object type BUS2000301 combines certain change processes for the leasing scenario in SAP CRM.This reduces the number of business transactions and change processes in the CRM application withoutrestricting the range of functions. The function for certain change processes is covered by changeprocesses that are similar. For example, the ETER process is handled by the TERM process by means ofa specific assignment rule. In the Lease Accounting Engine (LAE, SAP ERP), none of the changeprocesses have been changed. A Business Add-In (BAdI) (enhancement spotCRM_FS_ACC_CHANGE_PROC) is used to assign the extended business transactions and changeprocesses from SAP CRM to the processes in the Lease Accounting Engine. The rules used to assign theprocesses correctly are defined in the BAdI. When a change process is executed, the BAdI is called. InCRM, the BAdI writes the result to data segment CHNGPROC_I, from where it is read by the CRM

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 332

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

middleware, and transferred to SAP ERP.

You can use your own custom BAdI implementations to change the way in which the LAE processes areassigned.

Definition of the Initial Change Process

The initial change process used to be defined for the financing item in the financing profile. This settingwas made in Customizing for item categories. You now define the initial change process in the productmaster data. When you create a financing product, you define an initial change process. When you createa financing option, you define which change process is triggered by the option.

Using Change Processes During the Period

You can now use some change processes during the period. Previously, you could execute theseprocesses at the end of the period only.

Changes to and Extension of the User Interface

The following fields have been added to the user interface for change processes:

- Payment Structure Variant: You use variants to use different payment structures (VTBKOND).You define payment structure variants in Customizing. You then assign them in the product master.

- Calculation Procedure: You use calculation procedures to define which steps are to be carried outin the financial mathematics calculation.

- Contract End Date: You can now enter either the term or the new contract end date. However,you cannot enter a value in both fields. In previous releases you could specify the term only.

Object list: You can no longer edit the object list.

Overview of the Business Transactions

The following enhanced business transactions and change processes are available in the CRM system inthe application LEAS for the item object type BUS2000301:

Business Transaction Change Process

BANK: Bankruptcy with return BANK

BUYO: Purchase at end-of-lease BUYO

CHOP: Change of partner CHOP

CONT: Continuation CONT

INSO: Insolvency INSO

NEWL: New leasing document NEWL

RESC: Restructuring with display of full payment schedule RESC

RNEW: Renewal RENW

ROLF: Insurance rollover financing ROLF

STBH: Stop billing STBH

STAH: Stop accounting STAH

TERM: Termination with return TERM

TERM: Termination quotation TERQ

UNIN: Undo insolvency UNIN

USBH: Reset stop billing (header level) USBH

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 333

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

USAH: Reset stop accounting USAH

SPLT: Contract split SPLT

Overview of the Business Transactions Assigned to Change Processes in the CRM System

The following table provides an overview of the assignments between the business transactions andchange processes. You can map the processes marked with an asterix (*) from SAP CRM to SAP ERP.These processes no longer exist in SAP CRM because they are covered by the generic processes.

You map these processes as follows: Create a change process that is derived from the required processand assign it to the corresponding generic process. You then assign the required ERP process.

Example: REPO Process

- Create the derived change process ZREP (Repossession) and assign it to the business processTERM

- To assign the ERP process: Assign the ZREP change process in the delivered BAdI assignment tothe REPO ERP process

Business Transaction in SAP CRM Assigned Change Processes

BANK: Bankruptcy with return BANK

BANC*

BUYO: Purchase of leased object BUYO

EBUY

INBY*

CHOP: Change of partner CHOP

LCOL

LCOO

LCOP

SWAC*

SWAO*

CONT: Continuation CONT

INSO: Insolvency INSO

NEWL: New leasing document NEWL

RESC: Restructuring with display of full payment schedule RESC

BLEX

EXFC*

REST

ROFF*

RNEW: Renewal RNEW

ROLF: Rollover financing ROLF

INRL*

STBH: Stop billing STBH

STBI

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 334

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

STAH: Stop accounting STAH

STAI

SPLT: Contract split SPLT

TERM: Termination with return TERM

TERQ

CONC*

ECON*

ETER

EXFT*

INTE*

REPO*

ROLT*

UNIN: Undo insolvency UNIN

USBH: Reset stop billing (header level) USBH

USBI

USTH

USTI

USAH: Reset stop accounting USAH

USAI


In SAP CRM, the IMG activity Make Settings for Change Processes contains a new Customizingtable in which you define item-specific Customizing for items of the category BUS2000301.

For more information, see the Implementation Guide (IMG) for Customer Relationship Management-> Financial Services -> Leasing -> Change Processes -> Basic Settings for Change Processes-> Make Settings for Change Processes.

See also

For more information, see the release note Termination Quotation.

1.28.9 Classification (New)

Use


In SAP CRM, you can now assign accounting principles to the sales organization, and define the valuesfor the classification process in product processing and in transaction processing. This is done using thenew set type CRM_FS_CLASSIF, which has the attributes External Default, Accounting Principle,and Classification Value. You can define the values in the product master data and in the financingcontract.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 335

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

By defining the classification directly in SAP CRM, in many cases you can prevent the system fromraising the query Classification in SAP ERP.

In previous releases you had to search for the classification in SAP ERP. If you have defined theclassification in the product master or when processing the transaction, the system has to prompt the userto specify the classification during pricing outside of ERP, for instance.

The prompt for the classification has been created as action FS_CLASSIF_CALL in action profileLEASING_HEADER_QUOTATION.


Settings in SAP CRM

To use the classification in SAP CRM, you have to make the following settings in Customizing forCustomer Relationship Management, by choosing Financial Services -> Leasing -> FinancingProduct -> Classification:

- Classifications from the ERP System: In CRM you create the classifications that you created inthe ERP system.Note that the accounting principles in ERP and CRM must be synchronous.

- Assign Accounting Principles to Sales Organizations: You assign the accounting principles tosales organizations.Note that the accounting principles in ERP and CRM must be synchronous.

- Assign Classification to Sales Organization and Accounting Principle: You assign theclassification to the sales organization and accounting principles.

- Define Classifications for Each Business Process: You define for which processes theclassification in the document can be changed, and for which processes you want to use theclassification from the ERP system.

Settings in SAP ERP

To transfer the classification values from the CRM system to the ERP system, you have to make thesettings in Customizing for Financial Accounting (New), by choosing Lease Accounting -> ValueDetermination -> Settings for Value Transfer -> Adopt Values from Contract Classification.

1.28.10 Management of Billing Request Items (New)

Use


You use the new item object type BUS 2000171 to create billing request items (BRIs). You can also usethe following additional functions:

Assign Different Payment Methods and Payers and/or Bill-To Parties

You can use the new functions to bill all types of cash flows (such as down payments, repayments, andinterest) separately, using different payment methods and business partners. The system creates a separatebilling request item for each cash flow. The system creates the billing request items by using the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 336

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

payment method and business partners that are assigned in the FIMA conditions.

Processing of Payment Methods and Business Partners When Creating Billing Request Items

In the FIMA conditions, you can assign different business partners (bill-to party and payer) and differentpayment methods. All the cash flows are assigned to business partners.

If you do not assign any payment methods in the FIMA conditions, the old function is used: All billingrequest items are created with the same payment method.

If you do not assign any business partners in the FIMA conditions, the old function is used: The samepayer and bill-to party is used for each billing request item.

This means that the cash flow cannot be split across multiple business partners.

Effects on the User Interface (CRM WebClient UI)

The user interface for FIMA condition items contains the following fields:

- Payment Method

- Payer

- Bill-To Party

In the detailed view of billing request items, the system displays the payment method under SalesAccounting Data. In the Billing Request Item - Partner assignment block, the system displays all thebusiness partners that are assigned.

Creation of Billing Request Items from the Condition Types of Financing Items

If the new Customizing contains an entry for the financing item, then a billing request item is created foreach condition type in the financing item. The system reads the attributes stored in Customizing to createthe billing request item. If the parameters of the lease are changed (for example, the term, or the businesspartner), the billing request item is also adjusted.

If the classification of the financing item changes, you can add a condition type to the financing item, ordelete a condition type from it. The system either creates or deletes a billing request item accordingly.

Generation of Billing Request Items for Time Horizons

Billing request items used to be generated up until the end of the lease. Now they are generated only up toa given key date, which is calculated using a date rule (Customizing). The key date is recalculatedperiodically for the remaining term.


Make settings for the following activities in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management:

Use of Different Payment Methods and Payers/Bill-To Parties

- Payment methods: Customer Relationship Management -> Master Data -> Business Partner-> Business Agreement -> Define Parameters for Business Agreement -> Define PaymentMethods.Note that you must configure the payment methods in both SAP CRM and SAP ERP at the sametime.

- Item category FS45 (BUSS2000171): Partner schema FINSRV31 has been added to itemcategory FS45 (Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings ->Define Item Categories).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 337

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Generation of Billing Request Items

- There are two ways of generating billing request items:

- You can generate billing request items from the condition type: Customer RelationshipManagement -> Financial Services -> Leasing -> Billing Request Items:

- BRI: Define Item Categories That Are Relevant for Generating BRIs

- Generation of BRIs from Conditions: Define Attributes

- You can generate billing request items from the cash flow: The system generates a billing requestitem for each cash flow that is to be billed. This depends on the external cash flow type and the cashflow grouping (Customer Relationship Management -> Financial Services -> Leasing ->Financial Mathematics Settings -> Define Flow Categories -> step: Define External FlowCategories).Note that the item category for billing request items generated from cash flows must be useddifferently to the item category for billing request items generated from conditions.

Time horizon

To use the time horizon function, in Customizing for the billing plan type you define a date rule for thetime horizon:

Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings -> Billing Plan -> DefineBilling Plan Types.

The date rule must contain a baseline date and a timeframe.

1.28.11 Asset Handling and Depreciation (New)

Use


Object Management (SAP CRM) and Asset Handling (FI-AA, SAP ERP) contain the following newfunctions for SAP Leasing.

Depreciation Using CRM Objects, and for All Leasing Scenarios

As the lessor, you can create a leased object as an object in the CRM application, and depreciate it beforea lease has been created for it. The standard Asset Accounting (FI-AA) component is used to post thedepreciation.

When you create the fixed asset in FI-AA, the system takes the data for the object from the CRM system.To post the depreciation of the asset, you have to enter the following data in SAP CRM:

- Organizational unit

- Acquisition and production costs

- Scrap value (residual value) of the asset

- Delivery date

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 338

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Depreciation in the Lease

When a lease is concluded, the current depreciation of the object can be considered.

Depreciation History/Object Life Cycle

You can display the life cycle of a given object.

On the user interface, you can enter various search parameters (such as the object ID, product, serialnumber, or delivery date) in a search screen to find objects. The system displays a list of all the objectsthat match your search parameters. You can double click an object to select it, and display all thedepreciation phases assigned to this object. You can display the following information for each objectdepreciation phase:

- Lease number

- Asset number

- Leasing status (is the object assigned to a lease? (yes/no))

- Start date for depreciation

- End date for depreciation

- Duration of depreciation

- Depreciation start value

- Residual value

- Start date of the depreciation postings for each accounting principle

1.28.12 Collections Function (New)

Use


In SAP Leasing, you can use enhanced functions to track overdue open items. The system also provideseasy-to-use functions for processing lease contracts for which payments are overdue. These functions areintegrated in SAP CRM and SAP ERP Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA).

The open items that clear incoming payments are a central part of Contract Accounts Receivable andPayable. If a customer suspends payment, the open items are not cleared.

You can use the new collections function to group open items on specified dates and according to yourcriteria, and to assign these open items automatically to the worklist of an employee (collector) in aninternal or external collection center. The Interaction Center contains a suitable role for the collector thatcomprises all the necessary functions. The worklist is generated by the system and provides the collectorwith an overview of the most important data for those customers whose payments are overdue and whothe collector must therefore contact. The collector enters the results of all contact with the customer ascomments for the entries in the worklist.

If payment for the open items is not received despite a reminder from the collector, the system canautomatically assign the status Non-Accrual. The system uses this status to execute the Stop

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 339

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Accounting change process for the corresponding financing contract in SAP CRM. The system inceptsthe contract and triggers in the Lease Accounting Engine the functions for asset accounting anddepreciation.

If the defaulting customer restarts payment, the system can reset the Non-Accrual status in ContractAccounts Receivable and Payable and restart accounting for the contract in SAP CRM. This means thatthe system re-executes a change process in SAP CRM, incepts the contract, and transfers the data to theLease Accounting Engine again.

Note that to be able to use the collections function, you must assign a business agreement to each contractitem in the financing contract in SAP CRM.


Settings in SAP ERP

You find the settings for the collection function in the Implementation Guide (IMG) for ERP underFinancial Accounting (New) -> Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable -> Enhancementsfor Leasing:

- Arrears

- Non-Accrual Status

- Worklist

In Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable, you must activate the following Business TransactionEvents (BTEs):

- 0020: Document/Clearing Completed (No Number)

- 0350: Dunning: Dunning Activities - Print Dunning Form

- 1205: Account Balance: Supplement Data

- 1799: Mass Activity: Event After Very Last Interval

For more information, see the IMG for ERP under Financial Accounting (New) -> Contract AccountsReceivable and Payable -> Program Enhancements -> Define Customer-Specific FunctionModules.

Settings in SAP CRM

You find the settings for the collector's role ( IFS_FCC_AG, Leasing Interaction Center Agent) in theIMG for SAP Customer Relationship Management under Business Roles -> Define BusinessRole.

1.28.13 Calculation of Late Fees (New)

Use

You can now use the Dunning component in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA, SAPERP) to calculate late fees, and the Billing component (SAP CRM) to bill for the fees. For a leasecontaining several different contract items, you can define different late fees for each item, and configurethe late fees matrix to define how the system calculates the fees.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 340

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

How you configure the late fees matrix in FI-CA depends on the type of item (for instance, annuity, orgeneral fee) and the jurisdiction in question. The matrix comprises four possible calculation parametersand two calculation methods.

Calculation parameters:

- Minimum amount:

- Defined as the threshold: If the fees calculated are below the minimum amount defined, no latefees are charged.

- Defined as the base amount: If the fees calculated are below the minimum amount defined, theminimum amount is charged as the late fee.

- Maximum amount: If the fees calculated are above the maximum amount defined, the maximumamount is charged as the late fee.

- Fixed amount: A fixed amount is charged as the late fee.

- Percentage of the amount outstanding: A fixed percentage of the amount that is outstanding ischarged as the late fee.

Calculation methods:

- One-time late fee: The late fee for an overdue receivable is charged only once, even if the paymenthas not been made for more than one period.

- Recurring late fee: The late fee for an overdue receivable is charged for each period in which nopayment was made.

The system can also include any grace periods that have been agreed in the calculation of late fees.

When you configure the function, you also define which of these parameters and calculation methods areused to calculate late fees. Once the system has determined from the key date check that a payment islate, it checks which parameters from the late fees matrix are to be used in this case to calculate the latefees.

The late fees are calculated in FI-CA, and appropriate statistical receivables are created.

By means of a user exit you can connect a suitable application to calculate tax for late fees.

The late fees that were calculated can then be processed as follows:

- BillingThe Billing component is used to bill the fees to the lessee. In FI-CA you can also create an accountstatement that shows the late fees.

- Waiver of feesYou can reverse fees before you bill them, or after the lessee has received the bill.


In SAP ERP you activate Business Transaction Event (BTE) 360.

Execute the following IMG activities in Customizing for SAP ERP:

Financial Accounting (New) -> Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable -> Enhancements for Leasing

Arrears:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 341

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Define Delinquency Statuses

- Define Delinquency Processes

- Assign Delinquency Statuses to Company Codes

- Define Tax Jurisdiction-Dependent Parameters for Late Fees

Non-Accrual Status:

- Exclude Main Transactions and Subtransactions As Triggers

- Define Revocation Criteria for "Non-Accrual" Status

- Assign Revocation Criteria to Company Codes

Worklist:

- Define Standard Tasks

1.28.14 Changing the Status of Objects (New)

Use


You can now use item object type BUS2000301 to start leasing transactions for the financing item. Theobject that is to be financed (item object type BUS200017) is now assigned to this item object type. Thisleads to the following change for the internal statuses of leased objects: the status of the leased objectchanges from Available to On-Lease only after you have activated the lease by choosing ContractInception.

The object assignment (item object type BUS2000170) is unchanged for leasing transactions that youcontinue to process using item object type BUS2000138 for the financing item. As was previously thecase, when you release the certificate of acceptance, the status of the object changes from Available toOn-Lease.

1.28.15 Pricing (New)

Use


The system can now generate all prices for leasing processing using the pricing function in the InternetPricing and Configurator (IPC) tool. You can no longer use the contract added pricing implement (CAI).

In previous releases, the system could not use IPC to calculate fees, for instance, as the financialmathematics cash flow or information about previous documents was required. This meant that CAI hadto be used to calculate the prices for financing.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 342

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

By using item object type BUS2000301, you use condition types to map the calculations that previouslyhad to be done using CAI. These condition types can then be processed by IPC. Examples of prices thatwere previously mapped using CAI and that are now available as condition types include outstandingpayments and discounting rates.

Calculation formula 4102 is assigned to the condition types so that IPC can be used to calculate theprices.

The calculation procedure for financing also contains the new condition types, which are those that aretypical for financing.

In financing, certain prices and calculations are interdependent. In previous releases, you mapped theserelationships by assigning the item business object.

By using item object type BUS2000301, you create the links between the conditions by using searchstrategies that are based on item relationships.


- To use search strategies to calculate prices, you have to define the strategies in Customizing forCustomer Relationship Management, by choosing Financial Services -> Basic Functions ->Cross-Item Functions -> Search Strategies.

- You make the Customizing settings for pricing for item object type BUS2000301 in Customizingfor Customer Relationship Management, by choosing Financial Services -> Basic Functions-> Pricing:

- Assign ABAP Functions to Condition Types: You make settings for the functionspreviously executed by CAI. You define conditions, whose values are then calculated byABAP functions. Note that you have to assign calculation formula 4102 to these conditiontypes in the calculation schema.

- Define Condition Mapping Using Search Strategies: You assign target condition types andsource condition types to each other.

1.28.16 One-Time Taxes and Fees (New)

Use


You can now use a standard concept for mapping and calculating one-time taxes and fees in financingcontracts. One-time taxes and fees comprise one-time payments required for legal or tax purposes, andthat cannot be mapped using the financing product or financial mathematics. SAP provides the followingcategories for one-time taxes and fees:

- OTAX One-Time Tax Payment

- OFEE Legal Transaction Fee

The classification of the contract governs whether a financing is subject to one-time taxes and fees. Forexample, in a capital lease, a one-time, up-front tax payment at the start of the lease is the rule.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 343

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

In the business transaction, one-time taxes and fees are stored as conditions in the financing item. Tocalculate their base amounts, you use the Internet Pricing and Configurator (IPC) tool. For the conditionsfor the one-time taxes and fees, IPC calls ABAP functions that then calculate the base amounts.

If base conditions have been stored, the system generates the relevant billing request item, for which itthen calculates the relevant amounts for the one-time taxes and fees.


- You can find the settings for processing one-time taxes and fees in Customizing for CustomerRelationship Management, by choosing Financial Services -> Leasing -> Pricing -> TaxCalculation.

- You can find the settings for defining the pricing process for one-time taxes and fees in Customizingfor Customer Relationship Management, by choosing Financial Services -> Basic Functions-> Pricing -> Assign ABAP Functions to Condition Types.

- You can find the settings for defining the relevant attributes for the generation of billing requestitems in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, by choosing Financial Services-> Leasing -> Billing Request Items -> Generation of BRIs from Conditions: DefineAttributes.

1.28.17 Termination Quotation (New)

Use


You can now create a termination quotation that contains all open items (such as outstanding fees andreceivables). To do this, you use the business transaction TERM: Termination Quotation and thechange process TERQ (Termination Quotation).

Termination Quotation for Termination of Contract Items

You execute a change process for a given activated lease. The system displays all the items for the lease.You then choose the items in question, including all the quantities specified. You execute the changeprocess TERQ for this item.

At the same time, the application in FI-CA uses the following values to calculate the termination total:

- Overdue receivables

- Fees

- Penalty surcharge

The application uses the values calculated in FI-CA and the information from the contract to create thetermination quotation. The standard calculation methods for operating and capital leases are used. Thequotation contains all the receivables, fees, and so on, from FI-CA as open items. You send thetermination quotation containing all the data for the termination to your customer. If the customer acceptsthe quotation and pays the outstanding total, the application compares the amounts. If the amounts match,the contract is posted in FI-CA and the contract items in question are terminated. The terminationquotation is set to the status Accepted. If the amount of the incoming payment does not match the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 344

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

amount that cancels the contract, the payment is posted to an interim account until the matter is clarified.

If no payment is received by the expiry date of the termination quotation, the quotation can be set toinactive. In this case the contract items are not terminated.

Termination Quotation for Termination of a Contract

You execute a change process for an active lease at header level to terminate the contract completely (forexample, ETER, EBUY, ECON). The system calculates and creates a termination quotation in the sameway as described under Termination Quotation for Termination of Contract Items.

Creating Mass Termination Quotations

You can also create termination quotations in mass processing. You can do so online, or schedule a job inbackground processing.


- In SAP ERP you activate the relevant Business Transaction Events (BTE).

- In SAP ERP you execute the IMG activities in Customizing for Financial Accounting (New) ->Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable -> Enhancements for Leasing -> TerminationQuotation -> Assign CRM Condition Types to Main Transactions and Subtransactions.

- In SAP CRM, the IMG activity Make Settings for Change Processes contains a newCustomizing table in which you define item-specific Customizing for items of the categoryBUS2000301. Here you find the new business transaction TERM: Termination Quotation and thechange process TERQ (Termination Quotation) for the application LEAS.For more information, see the Implementation Guide (IMG) for Customer RelationshipManagement -> Financial Services -> Leasing -> Change Processes -> Basic Settings forChange Processes -> Make Settings for Change Processes.

See also

For more information, see the release note Change Processes (New).

1.28.18 Modification of the CRM WebClient UI for Leasing Manager (New)

Use


In SAP Leasing, you can now map financing items in quotations and contracts by using item object typeBUS2000301. You can also use a new technology and architecture. However, to do so you have to entersettings for the CRM WebClient user interface (UI).


Use of Item Object Type BUS2000301

If you use item object type BUS2000301 to map your financing products for leasing, and therefore useproduct type 07 Financial Services, do the following:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 345

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Deactivate product type 03 Financing, and make sure product type 07 Financial Services isactive.

- For more information, see the Implementation Guide (IMG) for Customer RelationshipManagement under Cross-Application Components -> SAP Product -> Settings for ProductType.

- To display only product type 07 Financial Services on the user interface, and to hide product type03 Financing, you have to modify the user role LEASING (Leasing Manager), which is deliveredwith the system. You make the settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management,by choosing Business Roles -> Define Business Role. Select the LEASING (LeasingManager) role and choose Visible Work Center Group Links. Deselect the indicators In Menuand Visible for the following logical link IDs:

- LAM-BTC-CR (Create Financing Contract)

- LAM-BTC-SR (Find Financing Contract)

- LAM-BTO-CR (Create Financing Quotation)

- LAM-BTO-SR (Find Financing Quotation)

Make sure that at least the Visible indicator is set for the following logical link IDs:

- IFS-FSQ-CR (Create FS Quotation)

- IFS-FSQ-SR (Find FS Quotation)

- IFS-FSC-CR (Create FS Contract)

- IFS-FSC-SR (Find FS Contract)

Use of the FS Business Partner

If you use Contract Accounts Payable and Receivable (FI-CA) to handle leasing, and use item object typeBUS2000301, make sure your business partner data contains the following information:

- Business agreements

- Factory calendar

This data is stored in the Business Partner for Financial Services (FS Business Partner).

If you want the user interfaces to display only the FS Business Partner, you must change the LeasingManager role delivered by SAP and hide the CRM Business Partner.

You make the settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, by choosingBusiness Roles -> Define Business Role. Select the LEASING (Leasing Manager) role and chooseVisible Work Center Group Links.

Deselect the indicators In Menu and Visible for the following logical link IDs:

- LAM-SBC-CR (Create Corporate Business Partner)

- LAM-SBP-CR (Create Individual Business Partner)

- LAM-SBP-SR (Find Business Partners)

Make sure that at least the Visible indicator is set for the following logical link IDs:

- LAM-BP-SR (Find FS Business Partners)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 346

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- LAM-BPP-CR (Create FS Business Partner: Person)

- LAM-BPO-CR (Create FS Business Partner: Organization)

- LAM-BPG-CR (Create FS Business Partner: Group)

Note the following regarding the distribution of business partner data to back-end systems: You candistribute the data for business agreements to connected back-end system only by means of CRMMiddleware. You cannot use SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure. This means that you have to useCRM Middleware to distribute FS business partner data for leasing if you use item object typeBUS2000301.

See also

For more information, see the following release notes for CRM WebClient User Interface:

- Functions No Longer Available in Leasing

- CRM WebClient User Interface (Enhanced)

- Central Search (New)

- UI Configuration Tool (Enhanced)

- Personalization (Enhanced)

- Portal Integration (New)

1.28.19 Selection for Floating Rate Adjustment (Changed)

Use

This release note is relevant only if:

- You have implemented SAP CRM 2007

- You are upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0 and want to use the associated technology with the new itemobject type BUS2000301

As of SAP CRM 2007 SP02, you can use the new index table CRMD_FS_FRA when you execute afloating rate adjustment to select the documents that are relevant for adjustment. You can addcustomer-specific fields to this table.

Previously, the system had to read several database tables to select the documents relevant foradjustment. Now all the relevant documents are contained in the new index table. This increases thespeed and flexibility of the selection process.

On the Execute Floating Rate Adjustment selection screen (transaction CRM_FS_FRA), a logicaldatabase, which links to the index table, provides both freely definable standard fields (such as ObjectID, Reference Interest Profile) and freely definable customer-specific fields (such as Status).

If you want to use customer-specific selection criteria, you have to implement these using thecustomer-specific fields of the index table CRMD_FS_FRA and the Business Add-In FillCustomer-Specific Fields in Index Table (BADI_CRM_FS_FRA_INDEX).

The selection function does not entail any additional development work.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 347

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


If you want to use customer-specific fields in the index table CRMD_FS_FRA, you have to use theBusiness Add-In Fill Customer-Specific Fields in Index Table:

Customer Relationship Management -> Financial Services -> Leasing -> Financial MathematicsSettings -> Floating Rate Adjustment -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> Fill Customer-SpecificFields in Index Table.

1.28.20 Partial Processing of Leases (New)

Use

This release note is relevant only if:

- You have implemented SAP CRM 2007

- You are upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0 and want to use the associated technology with the new itemobject type BUS2000301

As of CRM 2007 SP02, you can open and edit leases in partial processing mode. The partial processing ofleasing documents is useful if leases contain multiple items (such as 10 and more) with substantialtransaction histories. In partial processing mode you can select and edit individual items and theapplication does not have to open the entire document with all the items contained therein plus thetransaction history. This improves system performance because the system has to store temporarily in thebuffer only the data actually required.

In Customizing you first specify whether partial processing is permitted for the business transaction FSContract. You then enter a limit in Customizing that stipulates how many main items must be containedin a lease before you can open this document in partial processing mode.

If you have permitted partial processing and the number of active main items in a document exceed thelimit, you proceed as follows:

Select the required lease. Before it processes the document, the system opens a dialog box. This containsall the active main items and you can select individual items. The following display variants areavailable:

- All active items without transaction history

- All active items with transaction history

- Individual items without transaction history

- Individual items with transaction history

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 348

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The system then opens the document only with the previously selected items, in other words in partialprocessing mode. You cannot view and edit all the document items in partial processing mode. It alsorestricts the actions and change processes that you can execute at document header level. For example, inpartial processing mode you cannot execute the actions Contract Inception and Cancellation, as well asend-of-lease processes and change processes.

However, you can execute change processes at item level. You can also use the function MassProcessing of Change Processes in partial processing mode.


If you want to use partial processing for leasing documents, you have to make the following settings inCustomizing:

Allow Partial Processing for Transaction Type under Customer Relationship Management ->Transactions ->Define Transaction Types

Customer Relationship Management -> Financial Services -> Leasing -> Partial Processing ofLeasing Documents ->Define Limit for Partial Processing of Leasing Documents

1.28.21 Floating Rate Adjustment (New)

Use


With the conversion to item object type BUS2000301, you can adjust nominal interest rates moreflexibly to the changes made to the reference interest rate.

You can change the reference interest rate on any date in a settlement period, and therefore several timesin a settlement period. The nominal interest rate is adjusted on the date on which the reference interestrate is changed.

The various nominal interest rates that can occur in a settlement period as a result are settled to the day.You can adjust documents ad hoc (to any date) or periodically.

You do not have to individually process the contracts that need to be adjusted; instead you can executemass document processing.

In addition to these functions, you can adjust the nominal interest rate periodically. You can use thereference interest profile to make specific settings for the adjustment type, and so on.

The error log is improved as a result of the connection of the Postprocessing Office. You can continueto use the analysis report to analyze successfully adjusted documents.


- Make the following settings in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, bychoosing Financial Services -> Leasing -> Financial Mathematics Settings -> Floating RateAdjustment -> Edit Reference Interest Rate:

- Define Reference Interest Rates

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 349

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Enter Reference Interest Rates

- Define Reference Interest Profile

- In the financing product you define the reference interest profile to which the adjustment is linked.In the set of financing views you assign the reference interest profile to the base financing view. Thesystem checks these conditions before adjustment. It selects only documents with this referenceinterest profile.

- You can use the Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) to influence the adjustment of floating rates for aspecific customer.

See also

For more information, see SAP Note 1079199.

1.28.22 New Functions for SAP Leasing (New)

Use


As of CRM 2007, SAP Leasing provides the item object type BUS2000301 containing a new contractcategory with enhanced features.

Note:

There is no function for upgrading the data of the old item object type (BUS2000138) to the technologyused by the new item object type (BUS2000301).

Furthermore, you cannot use documents based on the old technology in processes that use the newtechnology. Note that at header level in a document you must not combine any items based on the oldtechnology with items that use the new technology.

If you use item object type BUS2000301, you have to use Contract Accounts Receivable andPayable (FI-CA).

For more information about the new functions, see

- Integration of Contractual Services (New)

- Grouping Leasing Documents and FS Documents (New)

- Modification of the CRM WebClient UI forLeasing Manager (New)

- Functions for Lease Payment Structures (New)

- Management of Billing Request Items (New)

- Change Processes (New)

- Termination Quotation (New)

- Changing the Status of Objects (New)

- One-Time Taxes and Fees (New)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 350

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Pricing (New)

- Classification (New)

- Management of Third-Party Relationships (New)

- Asset Handling and Depreciation (New)

- Collections Function (New)

- Calculation of Late Fees (New)


Existing data is not affected.


You have to reconfigure the process for transferring legacy data.

System administration is not affected.


Since the change is a major one, you have to check all IMG activities described in Solution Manager forthe Lease Operations scenario and, if appropriate, change the existing settings or enter new settings forthe new functions.

See also

For more information, see the following release notes for CRM WebClient User Interface:

- Functions No Longer Available in Leasing

- WebClient User Interface (Enhanced)

- Central Search (New)

- UI Configuration Tool (Enhanced)

- Personalization (Enhanced)

- Portal Integration (New)

1.29 CRM-IFS Financial Services

1.29.1 Installment Loans (Changed)

Use

This release note is only relevant if upgrading from SAP CRM 5.0 or from SAP CRM 5.2.

You can now create installment loans in the Account Origination scenario. For this purpose, we haveadded to the XI interfaces LoanCalculationQuery and LoanContractCreateRequest some attributes

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 351

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

that are required by the system to calculate or create an installment loan. These include One-TimeBalloon Amount or Interest Calculation Method.

The Interest Calculation Method field is available in the FS product. It is copied to the interface forloans management.

The following fields are available on the interface for loan origination:

- Field for an increased balloon amount

- Two fields for entering the maximum change in interest rates in the case of variable interestcalculation

Note that these XI interfaces use the latest versions of the global data types (SAPGLOBAL20). When youconnect a loans system that is based on the older interface versions, you have to use the interfacemapping defined in XI.


You have to make the following settings for the installment loans product in Customizing for CustomerRelationship Management:

CRM Standard Customizing

- Define action profiles and actions

- Define conditions

- Define item category groups

- Define item categories

- Define item category determination

- Copying control for item categories

- Prices and conditions

Customizing for Financial Services

Customer Relationship Management -> Financial Services -> Basic Functions:

- Cross-Item Functions: Execute all the IMG activities under this node

- Connection of External Systems: Execute all the IMG activities under this node

Customer Relationship Management -> Financial Services -> Account Origination -> FinancialService Product (FS Product):

- Define Flow Categories

- Edit Reference Interest Rate

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 352

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.30 CRM-IPS Public Sector

1.30.1 Case Management for Grantor (Enhanced)

Use


Case Management for Grantor has been enhanced to allow you to link claim objects and change request(agreement) objects to a case.

Automatically linking a grantor claim and related 'Account' documents to a case.Once a claim has been saved and submitted, PPF is configured in such a way that the claim is thenautomatically added to a case, if it is not already linked. It also looks to see if an account document hasbeen created in PSCD and if so, this is also added to the case. In addition, the FI-CA billing document islinked, containing data from ERP.

The relevant case is determined automatically by the system, which searches for all cases that have aspecific grantor agreement (The grantor agreement is assigned to the grantor claim) already linked to thatcase.

If only one case is found, the unique case GUID is used to link the grantor claim.

If there are no results, then it is assumed that the agreement has not been linked to a case and thattherefore also the grantor claim should not be linked to a case.

If more than one case is linked to an agreement, only the first case on the list is processed and the claim islinked to this case.

Once the object is linked, the following information is displayed on the Linked Objects tab page.

Grantor Claim Transaction ID Description Status Due Date Approved Amount Currency

Automatically linking a grantor change request and related 'Account' documents to a case

Once a change request with reference to an agreement has been saved and submitted, PPF is configuredin such a way that the claim is then automatically added to a case, if it is not already linked. It also looksto see if an account document has been created in PSCD and if so, this is also added to the case. Inaddition, the FI-CA billing document is linked, containing data from ERP.

The relevant case is determined automatically by the system, which searches for all cases that have aspecific grantor agreement already linked to that case.

If only one case is found, the unique case GUID is used to link the grantor change request.

If more than one case is linked to an agreement, only the first case on the list is processed and the changerequest is linked to this case.

Once the object is linked, the following information is displayed on the Linked Objects tab page.

Object Attribute 1 Attribute 2 Attribute 3 Attribute 4Attribute 5

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 353

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Grantor Change Request Transaction No. Description Valid FromValid To Requested Amount

1.30.2 Business Rule Framework in CRM (Enhanced)

Use


As of Release SAP CRM 5.1, the following additional functions are provided for the Business RuleFramework (BRF) supported in Customer Relationship Management:

- Generation of tags for business partner-, product-, and customer fieldsThe program CRM_BRF_TAG_CUST_GENERATE supports user-friendly tag generation forstandard fields of the business partner and product, as well as for customer fields of yourenhancements to the business partner and product.

- Multi-instance logic: Event filtering of tag expressions using formula editorAs standard, you can filter the results of a tag with multi-instance logic using criteria. Alternatively,you can now also use the formula editor for filtering the results of certain tag expressions. Theformula editor enables you to define considerably more complex conditions for event filtering, forexample, if you wish to process time-dependent data records with the formula editor'stime-dependent functions.

- Search expressionsThe BRF now supports the definition of search expressions for the search objects case, transaction,and transaction item. The search result can be restricted using search attributes. The fields fromcustomer enhancements in Case Management and those of the CRM transaction can be incorporatedas search attributes. You can enhance search expressions using the Business Add-InCRM_BRF_SEARCH.


You generate customer field tags in the IMG activity Generate Tags for Business Partner-, Product- andCustomer Fields.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 354

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You enhance search expressions using the BAdI CRM_BRF_SEARCH (see IMG activity Enhancementof Search in Search Expression).

1.30.3 Business Rule Framework in CRM (Enhanced)

Use


You can now activate a check for tags that provide no result for CRM-based BRF rules. This means thatrules whose tag expressions do not provide a result can still be executed and the system can react bytaking appropriate action. Without this check, rules are not executed when the related tag does notproduce a result.

You activate this check logic in two steps:

1. In the respective BRF rule, set the Check no Tag Result indicator.

2. For the respective tag, select ' 1 Existence Check' in the Purpose field.

1.30.4 Event-Driven CRM Activities (New)

Use


Event-driven CRM activities are supported in the Social Services component. This enables you tosupport automated notifications or tasks in the Social Services environment when a particular eventoccurs in the course of processing.

The CRM activity call is BRF -based. You can define the necessary events and the BRF expressions to beprocessed in the BRF. The CRM activities are created using the function moduleCRM_PS_ACTIVITY_CREATE.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 355

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

For more information, see the specified function module and the topic entitled Event-Driven CRMActivities in the SAP Library.

1.30.5 BRF Action Types for Social Services (New)

Use


The following BRF action types are provided in the Social Services component for defining actions inthe Business Rule Framework:

BRF Action Type Use

0EVT_A001 Generate Social Services Eventing events

0EVT_A002 Create CRM case notes

0EVT_A003 Data changes in customer enhancements (EEW) tobusiness partner

0EVT_A004 Create CRM activities

For the definition of your own BRF action types, the following maintenance classes and runtime classesare provided for theitem proposal, the eligibility check, and for change processes:

Item proposal

Runtime class CL_CRM_PS_IPS_BRF

Maintenance class CL_CRM_PS_IPS_MNT_BRF

Eligibility check

Runtime class CL_CRM_PS_ECC_MSG_BRF

Maintenance class CL_CRM_PS_ECC_MSG_MNT_BRF

Change processes

Runtime class CL_CRM_BRF_CONIN_AC

Maintenance class CL_CRM_BRF_CONIN_AC_MNT2

See also

- Release Notes for SAP CRM 5.10: Business Rule Framework in CRM (Enhanced)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 356

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Business Rule Framework for Social Services in the SAP Library

1.30.6 Case Assignment for Social Applications and Social Service Plans (New)

Use


The organization of your business transactions in cases of Case Management is supported in the SocialServices component.

In Customizing, you can define case determination strategies and case creation strategies based on a caseassignment profile. The system then uses these strategies to automatically organize new socialapplications or social service plans in cases. Either the assignment is made to matching existing cases, orthe system creates new cases of the relevant case type.

In connection with the case assignment, you can use the business partner function mapping to mappartner functions in the business transaction to the partner functions in the case. Customizing also enablesyou to flexibly tailor this function to satisfy your requirements.

Customer-definable BAdI implementations enable you to make customer-specific enhancements to theSAP standard settings for case assignment.


You make the case assignment settings for the social application and the social service plan respectivelyin Customizing for CRM by choosing: Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-SpecificSolutions -> Public Sector -> Social Services -> Social Application or Social Service Plan ->

- Define Settings for Case Assignment

- Define Case Assignment Profile

See also

For more information, see the relevant IMG documentation and the topic entitled Assign SocialApplications and Social Service Plans to Cases in the SAP Library.

1.30.7 Change Processes in Social Service Plans (New)

Use


Social service plans can be updated by means of change processes in the Social Services component.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 357

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Change processes ensure the predefined, integrated processing of an existing social service planwhenever a change in the requester's circumstances (for example, change in salary, new key date)necessitates the recalculation of benefits.

Change processes can be started automatically as part of successor processing, or can be started manuallyby the caseworker in the Social Service Plan application.


You define change processes (or you can use the standard SAP change processes) in Customizing forCRM by choosing Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> PublicSector -> Social Services -> Social Services Plan -> Change Processes.

(See, among others, IMG activity Make Settings for Change Processes).

See also

For more information, see the IMG and the topic Change Processes in Social Service Plans in theSAP Library.

1.30.8 Item Proposal for Social Applications (New)

Use


You can use an item proposal strategy for social applications in the Social Services component. In thiskind of strategy you stipulate according to which criteria a social application-specific automatic selectionof benefits applied for in the request form are transferred associal application items.

You define item proposal strategies as Business Rule Framework events or as Business Add-Inimplementations. You assign a strategy to the relevant transaction type of your social application using anitem proposal profile.


You define item proposal strategies and profiles in Customizing for CRM by choosing CustomerRelationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> Social Services ->Social Application -> Item Proposal ->

- Define Item Proposal Profile

- BAdI: Define Item Proposal Strategy

See also

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 358

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

For more information about using this function, see Item Proposal for Social Applications in the SAPLibrary.

1.30.9 Business Object Social Application (New)

Use


The new business object Social Application is provided in the Social Services component. It enablesyou to process the business transactions of submitted social applications in Customer RelationshipManagement.

The following functions are supported for the social application:

- Social Applications applicationYou process social applications in the Social Applications application. This application is part ofthe user role CASEWORKER provided for Social Services.

- Case assignment and categorizationTo ensure that Social Services business transactions are managed comprehensively and efficiently,social applications can be organized in existing or new cases of Case Management in the system(see Release Note Case Assignment for Social Applications and Social Service Plans).

- Transfer of request form dataThe Business Add-In CRM_PS_APPLICATION_BADI enables you to transfer the application data,which has been submitted or created, to non-SAP systems.

- Item proposalThe item proposal supports the social application-specific automatic transfer of benefit partsrequested in the request form as social application items (see Release Note Item Proposal for SocialApplications).

- Eligibility checkThe system evaluates requested benefits with regard to the submitted requester data. As a result ofthis evaluation, social application items are given the status 'Eligible' or 'Not Eligible'. Theevaluation is based on rules you define in the Business Rule Framework (see IMG activity DefineEligibility Check Profile).

- Item assessmentItem assessment accommodates an additional check instance in the form of a manual or automaticassessment of social application items. As a result of this assessment, items are given the status'Accepted (SOA)' or 'Rejected (SOA)' (see IMG activity Create Item Assessment Strategy).

- Approval checkYou define the criteria of the approval check for the respective social applications in an approvalstrategy (see IMG activity Create Approval Strategy). Manual approval is carried out in the SocialApplication application. Depending on a caseworker's authorization level, he or she can approve anapplication directly, or forward it to his or her superior for approval. Automatic approval is alsopossible for Web request-based social applications.

- Successor processing

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 359

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Successor processing supports the creation or the update of a social service plan after the relatedsocial application has been approved or changes to the social application data make an updatenecessary (see Release Note Successor Processing of Public Sector Business Transactions).


You define the settings for your social applications in Customizing for CRM by choosing CustomerRelationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> Social Services ->Social Application .

See also

For more information, see the documentation on the business object Social Application in the SAPLibrary.

1.30.10 Business Intelligence Analysis of Social Services Data (New)

Use


An interface for Business Intelligence (BI) is supported in the Social Services component. This makes itpossible to retrieve the data for social applications and social service plans from CRM in SAP BI. Therelated BI content has to be configured in parallel in the customer's Business Intelligence system.

For the analysis of Social Services transaction data, the CRM system provides the following DataSourcesfor transferring header and item transaction data:

DataSource Use

0CRM_PS_SOA_H Social Application Header Data

0CRM_PS_SOA_I Social Application Item Data

0CRM_PS_SSP_H Social Service Plan Header Data

0CRM_PS_SSP_I Social Service Plan Item Data

The Social Services-specific system statuses with the BW object status group SOC are provided formapping BW status objects. For more information, see Customizing for CRM under SAPImplementation Guide -> Integration with Other mySAP Components -> Data Transfer to theSAP Business Information Warehouse -> Settings for Application-Specific Datasources(PI-Basis) -> Status Concept for BP / Product / CRM Objects -> Display System Status.


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 360

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

For the transfer of Social Services data to SAP BI, you need to activate the DataSources in the sourcesystem (CRM):

1. In Customizing for CRM, choose SAP Implementation Guide -> Integration with OthermySAP Components -> Data Transfer to the SAP Business Information Warehouse ->Business Content Datasources -> Transfer Business Content Datasources.

2. Activate the four Social Services DataSources mentioned above by choosing BW DataSources ->Root -> 0CRM -> 0CRM_SERVICE.

1.30.11 User Role Social Services (New)

Use


The user role CASEWORKER is provided for the productive use of the Social Services component inthe CRM WebClient UI.

You can use the role SAP_CRM_UIU_CASEWORKER as a copy template for defining the requiredauthorization profiles in Social Services in the transaction PFCG.

1.30.12 Social Services Eventing (New)

Use


You can use Social Services Eventing (SSE) in the Social Services component. SSE supports theasynchronous execution of SSE subscriptions (parameterized BRF rules). The subscriptions can beincorporated at any exit (BAdI exit, PPF action, and so on) of the respective application components.This makes it possible to define the triggering of automated actions in the Social Services environmentwhenever a particular event occurs. Such actions include the creation of automatic case notes, thenotification of caseworkers, and the changing of business partner data.

Social Services Eventing is based on the Business Rule Framework, which it enhances with its specificfunctions. The control parameters of SSE events are set in a separate Customizing activity independentlyof the BRF settings.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 361

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You make the relevant settings in Customizing for CRM by choosing Customer RelationshipManagement -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> Social Services -> CommonFunctions ->Social Services Eventing.

See also

For more information, see Social Services Eventing in the SAP Library.

1.30.13 Business Object Social Service Plan (New)

Use


The new business object social service plan (SSP) is provided in the Social Services component. In asocial service plan, you map the contractual agreement for benefits for an approved social application inCustomer Relationship Management.

The following functions are supported for the social service plan:

- Social Service Plan applicationYou process social service plans in the Social Service Plans application. This application is part ofthe user role CASEWORKER delivered for Social Services.

- Change processesDefinable change processes enable you to support standardized changes to social service plans (incases of changed scheduling, for example). Change processes are automatically started withinsuccessor processing, or can be manually selected in the Social Service Plan application (see IMGactivity Make Settings for Change Processes).

- Case assignment and categorizationTo ensure that Social Services business transactions are managed comprehensively and efficiently,social service plans can be organized in existing or new cases of Case Management in the system(see Release Note Case Assignment for Social Applications and Social Service Plans).

- Eligibility checkThe system evaluates requested benefits with regard to the submitted requester data. As a result ofthis evaluation, social service plan items are given the status 'Eligible' or 'Not Eligible'. Theevaluation is based on rules you define in the Business Rule Framework (see IMG activity DefineEligibility Check Profile).

- Item assessmentItem assessment accommodates an additional check instance in the form of a manual or automaticassessment of social service plan items. As a result of this assessment, items are given the status'Released (SSP)' or 'Rejected (SSP)' (see IMG activity Create Item Assessment Strategy).

- Approval checkYou define the criteria of the approval check for the respective social service plans in an approvalstrategy (see IMG activity Create Approval Strategy). Manual approval is carried out in the Social

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 362

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Service Plan application. Depending on a caseworker's authorization level, he or she can approve anSSP directly, or forward it to his or her superior for approval. Alternatively, you can stipulate theautomatic approval of an SSP in successor processing.

- Activation of a social service planThe activation of a social service plan and the respective items identifies the currently valid andcomplete SSP version (see IMG activity Configure SSP Activation).


You define the settings for your social service plans in Customizing for CRM by choosing CustomerRelationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> Social Services ->Social Service Plan .

See also

For more information, see the documentation for the business object Social Service Plan in the SAPLibrary.

1.30.14 Successor Processing of Public Sector Business Transactions (New)

Use


Successor processing (SUPR) is supported in the Social Services component. Successor processing isexecuted as a PPF action before the predecessor document is saved.

On the basis of a Web request-basedsocial application (predecessor document), the following functionsare supported within successor processing:

- Create a new social service plan (successor document) based on an approved social application.

- Change or update of an existing social service plan (SSP) based on changed request data. Theupdate can be performed in new SSP versions. You can stipulate in a change processing profilewhich change processes are to be applied to the SSP version.

- Copy document items of a social application to a social service plan by means ofitem copystrategies. You can supplement the item copy strategies provided by SAP with your own(customer-defined) strategies.

In addition to the successor processing functions, a >social service plan determination strategy supportsthe search for existing social service plans that match new or changed social applications. If a matchingsocial service plan is found, the SSP assignment profile creates the document chain linking these twodocuments. The determination strategy is started directly before successor processing. Depending on theresult, successor processing is then executed in create mode or in change mode.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 363

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You define the successor processing settings in a successor processing profile, and assign this profile tothe relevant business transaction types.

You make the settings in Customizing for CRM under Customer Relationship Management ->Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> Social Services -> Successor Processing.

See also

For more information about successor processing in Social Services, see Successor Processing in theSAP Library.

1.30.15 Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management (Enhanced)

Use




Note:





- Payment

- Installment plan

- Promise to pay




Installment Plan

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 364

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Payment Search


Account Balance





- Dunning history


Payment Data


Miscellaneous












______________________________________________________________SAP AG 365

SAP-System______________________________________________________________




















See also

For further information on the functions in the individual business processes in the business scenarioFinancial Customer Care & Dispute Management, see the SAP Library documentation on SAP CRM2007 on the SAP Help-Portal at http://help.sap.com -> Documentation -> SAP Business Suite -> SAP

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 366

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Customer Relationship Mgmt. -> SAP CRM 2007 -> Components and Functions -> SAP CRM forIndustries -> Telecommunications Industry -> Functions in the Interaction Center for FinancialCustomer Care.

1.30.16 Financial Customer Care for Insurance (Enhanced)

Use








1.30.17 Financial Customer Care for Public Sector (Enhanced)

Use

This release information is only relevant if you want to perform an SAP CRM 5.0 upgrade.

Note:All functions listed here need back-end system SAP ECC Industry Extension Public SectorCollection and Disbursement (PSCD) at least on basis SAP ERP 6.0, Enhancement Package 3.However, SAP ERP 6.0 is still supported as back-end system. Read release note for FinancialCustomer Care that is also valid for the industry variant Public Sector.

As of SAP CRM 2007 the business scenario contains the following enhanced processes.

Request Processing in the Interaction Center for Public Sector

If you are using SAP ERP 6.0 with Enhancement Package 3 in the back-end system, you can also displaythe assigned facts for a contract object. The same processing options are available as in the back-endsystem. For more information, see the SAP Library in the SAP Help Portal under the Internet address

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 367

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

http://help.sap.com -> SAP Solutions -> SAP ERP -> SAP ERP Central Component -> SAP enhancementpackage 3 for SAP ERP 6.0 -> SAP Public Sector Collection and Disbursement (PSCD) -> BasicFunctions -> Facts.

Inbound Correspondence Processing

If you are using SAP ERP 6.0 with Enhancement Package 3 in the back-end system, you can use theenhanced functions for inbound correspondence. For example, you can define rules for generatinginbound correspondence and alternative periods when processing a contract object. For more information,see the SAP Library in the SAP Help Portal under the Internet address http://help.sap.com -> SAPSolutions -> SAP ERP -> SAP ERP Central Component -> SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP6.0 -> SAP Public Sector Collection and Disbursement (PSCD) -> Business Transactions -> InboundCorrespondence. Moreover, you can also process the enhanced inbound correspondence in thecorrespondence history.


For more information on Customizing and the configuration of this Business Scenario, see SAP SolutionManager.

See also

For more information on the functions of the individual business processes for Business ScenarioFinancial Customer Care for Public Sector, see SAP Help Portal under Internet addresshttp://help.sap.com -> SAP Business Suite -> SAP Customer Relationship Mgmt. -> SAP CRM 2007 ->Components and functions -> SAP CRM for Industries -> Public Sector -> Functions in InteractionCenter for Financial Customer Care.

1.30.18 Grantor Claims

Use


You can now manage claims submitted by a grantee for services to be rendered or already performed.

A grantor claim is a request from the grantee for payment or reconciliation of payment based onaccounting for incurred expenses, or for meeting other terms or conditions of an agreement. GrantorClaims Management includes a web-based claim form (web request) linked to a new grantor object, thegrantor claim.

After a claim is submitted, it is assigned to a relevant, valid agreement, and then individual claim itemsare assigned to agreement line items. Claim items can then be checked manually for eligibility, forexample, if the claim has been submitted during the proper submission period. You can also useavailability checking against the agreement and any cleared advances. This determines if sufficient fundsare available to pay the claim providing it meets specific criteria. If these checks are successful, the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 368

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

claims are then approved, released and paid.

The claims management process performs the following:

- Programs can include more than one type of claim, such as an advance, an expense and a holdback

- Claims can be a combination of more than one type, such as, expenses and milestone payments andadvances

- Claim evaluation may include manual and/or automated processing

The following payment types are available to the grantor or grantee to process a claim:

- Advance: A payment made in advance of actual work or costs incurred

- Payment: Funds granted to a grantee for costs incurred. If a grantee submits proof of expensesincurred that offset an advance, this is called a clearing payment.


Two new transactions have been created for Grantor Claims Management, GCL and GCR, which are partof the standard delivery. See Customer Relationship Management -> Transactions -> Basic Settings

See also

Case Management for Grantor (Enhanced)

Customizing Enhancements for Grantor Management

1.30.19 CRM-IPS-MD Master Data

1.30.19.1 CRM-IPS-MD-PRG Grantor Programm

1.30.19.1.1 Grantor Delivery Customizing (New and Enhanced)

Use


There are various changes to the standard delivery customizing that affect the Grantor Managementprogram.

- Two new Claim Web Request categories have been added:

- SAPGCLDEMO: Sample claim submission form that is linked to the BAdICRM_SERVICE_WEBREQ for the implementation CRM_WR_SAPGCLDEMO

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 369

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- SAPGCR: Sample change request form that is linked to the BAdI CRM_SERVICE_WEBREQfor the implementation CRM_WR_SAPGCRDEMO

See Define Request Categories for more information.

- New Business Rules Framework (BRF) validation rules for claim have been created for GrantorClaims Management. The BRF is a runtime and maintenance environment for processing,implementing and configuring technical and business rules. It is a central building block for eachsocial services solution. It can be used for automated decision-making, for example, process controlfor case management. The BRF is enhanced with the following features:

- New expressions and events to validate claims (dates, valid submission periods) and claimforms

- New actions to alert the user about maximum number of hours permitted for architect whenmaking a claim

- New expressions to check that hours for work claimed do not exceed maximum amountsdetermined in the program definition

- New events to assess the claim (both header and claim items)

- New PPF action profiles have been created, which you can use with their default settings orcustomize using the Define Action Profiles and Actions activity and Define Conditions activity

- GRM_GAG: Default grant awards action profile, containing action definitions for- printing agreement contracts- displaying the change request form- automatic linking of an agreement to Grantor Management cases- automatic linking of pre-commitment, commitment and billing documents to GrantorManagement cases

- GRM_GAG_ITEM: Grantor agreement item, containing the action definitions for inception ofchanges

- GRM_GAP: Default grant applications action profile, containing the action definitions for- checking the grantor application / applicant eligibility using rules within BRF- executing change requests- printing rejection letters- automatic creation of a Grantor Management case and linking it to the program, applicationand business partners- automatic linking of pre-commitment, commitment and billing documents to GrantorManagement cases

- GRM_GCL: Default grantor claims action profile, containing the action definitions for- automatically linking the claim to the case- checking budget availability- printing rejection letters

- GRM_GCR: Default grantor change request action profile, containing the action definitions for- automatic linking of the agreement change request to the case- manual and automated execution of change processes

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 370

SAP-System______________________________________________________________



Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Program Management -> General Settings -> Define AvailabilityControl Profile


Customer Relationship Management -> E-Commerce -> E-Service -> Web Requests -> DefineRequest Categories

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing- > Financial Execution -> Pricing -> Define FinancialExecution Type

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Define Value Type

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Change Process Management -> Define Input FieldControl

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Change Process Management -> Define ChangeProcesses

Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Business Add-Ins: There are three new BAdIs- BAdI: Customer Enhancements for Grantor Agreement- BAdI: Customer Enhancements for Grantor Application- BAdI: Customer Enhancements for Grantor Claim

See also

Case Management for Grantor (Enhanced)

1.30.20 CRM-IPS-BTX Business Transaction

1.30.20.1 CRM-IPS-BTX-AGR Grantor Agreement

1.30.20.1.1 Change Request (New)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 371

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You can now use a change request to manage the process of changing your agreements. Commonly, theagreement is a legally binding document, and restrictions exist on the changes that can be made once ithas been approved and released. However, since changes are still possible in certain circumstances, achange management system with predefined processes is available. Custom settings determine whichfields on the agreement invoke the change management process. Some fields, for example agreementdescription, may not require the triggering of a review and assessment effort.

If a grantee requests a change to the authorized amount or the validity date after the agreement has beenreleased, the grantee or a responsible grantor employee can fill out a change form and submit it as a Webrequest.

Additionally, the employee responsible is determined via a workflow. The employee receives a workflowmessage that contains the change request ID and the instruction to check the request and to release orreject it. The employee can either manually check whether the required criteria are met or, if theappropriate rules are implemented, trigger a check using the Business Rule Framework (BRF).

Alternatively, a completely automated check of the request using the Business Rule Framework (BRF) ispossible. For this purpose, the BRF rule 7CHANGE_REQUE is delivered in the application class7GRANTOR, which checks whether a newly changed date is still within the validity period of theprogram, for example. You can define additional rules for checking the change request yourself.

Once the request has been approved or rejected, a message is sent to the author of the change request viaa workflow, an action sets the change request status to Released, and approved changes are displayed inthe agreement.

If the effective date of the change request is in the future, the original and the changed amounts remainvisible as items in the agreement until the effective date is reached.

Agreement versions are generated as PDF documents for internal tracking. A sample PDF for externalprocessing of agreements and agreement amendments is also provided.


Example processes for changing the validity date and authorized amount are delivered in Customizingunder Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Public Sector -> GrantorManagement -> Grantor Processing -> Change Process Management. To define processing foradditional fields, you need to enter them here and implement them using a BAdI.

1.31 CRM-IHT High Tech

1.31.1 High Tech: Mass Search and Replace (New for SP02)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 372

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Use


A search and replace function is available for resale and claim reports and inventory reports, enablingmass corrections to be made where the same errors have occurred. From the edit list screen within thetwo applications, the following can be performed for the selected items:

- Search for numeric, alphanumeric, dates, text, and blank fields.

- Replace field values with numeric, alphanumeric, dates, text, and blank fields.

1.31.2 High Tech: Partner Manager Role (New for SP02)

Use


A role is available for partner managers, HT-CHM-PARTNERMANAGER, and is a restricted version ofthe role already available for channel managers, HT-CHM-CHANNELMANAGER.

In design registration, channel partners can:

- Create a new design registration opportunity directly in the channel manager's system and use thestandard functions.

- Work on existing design registrations, with the following restrictions:

- Fields in projects and assemblies are displayed only and cannot be changed.

- Projects and assemblies cannot be created.

- Brand owner information cannot be changed, and there are no hyperlinks to brand ownerpartner functions.

- For projects, there are no Project Stage History and Organization assignment blocks.

- For assemblies, only the assembly details and milestones are displayed.

In resale tracking, channel partners can:

- View channel inventory data and display logs and history details.

- View inventory report data and display the logs.

- View the price buckets in which they are involved and display the logs.

- View resale and claim message details, and display the logs.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 373

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You define the role navigation in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management, by choosingUI Framework -> Technical Role Definition -> Define Navigation Bar Profile.

1.31.3 CRM-IHT-PP Price Protection

1.31.3.1 High Tech: Reverse Price Protection (Enhanced for SP02)

Use


The reverse price protection function has been enhanced to support the same process steps available fornormal price protection.

When a price increase is detected by a reverse price protection run, debit memos are created, and you canupdate the price protection records and affected channel inventory records.

Prior to SAP CRM 2007 SP02, a price protection record was generated with the status "Not Eligible" if aprice increase was detected by a reverse price protection run.

Two modes are available for running reverse price protection:

- ClassicLimited function, as previously available. In this mode, reverse price protection behaves as before.This feature has been retained to provide flexibility to those customers who want to run reverseprice protection as available prior to SAP CRM 5.2.

- EnhancedFull processing, as for normal price protection. In this mode, the reverse price protection behavior isextended to generate debit memos based on the price difference and the quantity held by a certaindistributor/reseller on the effective date. The debit claim amount is calculated based on this data,and a debit memo request is generated reflecting the calculated claim amount.


You select the mode in which you want to run reverse price protection in Customizing for CustomerRelationship Management, by choosing Industry-Specific Solutions -> High Tech -> ResaleTracking -> Price Protection -> Configure Application Parameter for Price Protection. You specify

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 374

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

either "CLASSIC" or "ENHANCED".

1.31.4 CRM-IHT-PDP Partner Design Projects

1.31.4.1 High Tech: Design Registration (Enhanced for SP02)

Use


The Channel Sales for High Tech application was made available in the CRM WebClient UI in SAPCRM 2007 SP01.

The following changes were made in design registration:

- Standard opportunity management functionality is reused fully. Different business objects aretherefore used and certain Customizing objects have changed.The Customizing activities previously available under Customer Relationship Management ->Channel Management -> Channel Sales -> Industry Specific Channel Sales -> ChannelSales for Hi-Tech Industry -> Partner Design Projects have been moved to:Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> High Tech -> DesignRegistration.The activities under Settings for Opportunities are reused from standard Customizing foropportunity management.

- Design registration attributes are no longer stored as partner/product range types (PPR types).Design registration attributes are now provided as follows:

- You define the design registration attributes in High Tech Channel Management Customizing.

- You assign design registration attributes to the relevant products on the Product page in theCRM WebClient UI in the distribution chain data. Two new assignment blocks are availablefor this purpose; "Activity Status" and "Registration Status".

- The assignment blocks are based on the set type functionality available in the product master.The two new set types are as follows. - CRM_CSDR_ACTS (Activity Status) - CRM_CSDR_REGS (Registration Status)The set types have to be assigned to the product category being used for products relevant fordesign registration. Note that the set types are distribution-chain-dependent, and theregistration status is also time-dependent.

- BI reports for design registration can now be accessed directly from the CRM Web Client UI.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 375

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.32 CRM-IM Media

1.32.1 CRM-IM-IPM Intellectual Property Management

1.32.1.1 Applications Available Through the Transaction Launcher (New)

Use

The five applications listed below are available through the transaction launcher and can be accessedfrom the Web-based user interface, the CRM WebClient UI:

- Incoming royalty billing due list

- Incoming royalty billing document

- Outgoing royalty billing due list

- Outgoing royalty billing document

- Usage confirmation


- The billing due list and billing document for incoming royalties are available from the work centerof the Sales Contracts.

- The billing due list and billing document for outgoing royalties are available from the work centerof the Acquisition Contracts.

- Usage Confirmation is available from the work center of Operations.


You require support package SAP_ABA SP12 to use the tranaction launcher .

Check if the entries for OWNLOGSYS are correct in the table for the transcation launcher. Usetransaction CRMS_IC_CROSS_SYS to maintain the entries for the client-dependent view.

There must be one entry for OWNLOGSYS similiar to the example below:

OWNLOGSYS <system> <client> The URL of the ITS should be similar tohttp://<server><port>sap/bc/gui/sap/its/webgui/!?~transaction=IC_LTX&~okcode=ICEXECUTE

If the CCMP_RABOX is maintained, the transactions will not work.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 376

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.32.1.2 Uniform User Interface for Intellectual Property Management (New)

Use

A Web-based user interface, the CRM WebClient UI, is now available for Intellectual PropertyManagement. For more information about the features and functionality offered in the new user interface,see the release note Uniform User Interface in CRM (New).

. The following functionality has now been removed:

- Maintenance of products other than IPs, such as materials, in the license acquisition and the licensesales contracts.


With the exception of migration, system management functions in this release are in the SAP GUI, whichyou access as before through the SAP Easy Access menu.


You can find Customizing information for the SAP CRM Web-based user interface in the release note Uniform User Interface in CRM (New).

The Implementation Guide includes the following changes for Intellectual Property Management:

New IMG activities:




- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Transactions ->Settings for IPM Transactions -> Define User InterfaceScenarios


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 377

SAP-System______________________________________________________________





- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Utilities Industries ->Settings for User Interfaces -> General Functions -> Define Object Hierarchy and ObjectAttributes

- Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Media -> IntellectualProperty Management -> Master Data ->Product -> BAdIs -> Activate Copying of Interlinkages

Moved IMG activities:





See also

You can find more information about which roles are now available for Intellectual PropertyManagement in release note User Role IPM Rights Manager (New).

You can find information about which applications are available through the transaction launcher inrelease note Applications Available Through the Transaction Launcher (New).

For more information about new functions available in Intellectual Property Management, see thefollowing release information:

- Rights Templates (New)

- Rights Consumption (New)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 378

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Outgoing Royalties Settlement without Differential Billing (New)

For application-specific information, see the following release information:

- Intellectual Property Maintenance from SAP GUI (Changed)

- Intellectual Property Rights Maintenance Check (Enhanced)

- Rights Availability Analysis (Changed)

- License Contract Maintenance (Changed)

- Rights Maintenance Check (Enhanced)

1.32.1.3 CRM-IM-IPM-MD Master Data

1.32.1.3.1 Intellectual Property Rights Maintenance Check (Enhanced)

Use

The check within the rights maintenance of an intellectual property (IP) is now enhanced. You have moreflexibility in the checks performed for a right within an IP. For example, in the previous release, thesystem always generated an error message if the release dates were not a subset of the rights owned. Youcan now define the settings in the Customizing so that a warning message displays instead of an errormessage in certain cases, or so that the system will not perform a check at all in other instances.


- In the IMG activity Define Characteristics of IPM IP Check Messages, you can determine the typesof messages the user receives during the rights maintenance check.

See also

For more information about rights maintenance, see Rights Maintenance in Intellectual PropertyManagement (Changed).

1.32.1.3.2 Intellectual Property Maintenance from SAP GUI (Changed)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 379

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can no longer use the SAP GUI for Intellectual Property (IP) maintenance. This functionality is nowavailable for IPs in a Web-based user interface, the CRM WebClient UI.

Rights (Rights Owned, Release Dates, Release Restriction) were displayed in table format when accessedfrom the SAP Easy Access menu. This display format meant that the overview was quickly lost if severalrights groups were required to define the rights owned for an IP. In the new UI, the rights now display ina hierarchy.

For more information about rights maintenance for the Web-based user interface, see the release note forRights Maintenance for Intellectual Property Management.


The new UI also supports IPs that were created in an earlier release. Once you edit this type of IP in thenew UI, the system converts this IP to the new display format. During this process, the system assignseach rights group to a new rights scope created.


Two additional set types (IPM_RGHT_SCP and IPM_RGHT_S_I) are required for the new rights scopegrouping level. Both of these set types must be assigned to all IP product categories, which previouslyalready contained the rights set types (IPM_RIGHTSOWN, IPM_RELDAT, IPM_RELRES,IPM_ROWN_GRANT). Add these set types to the IP product categories in the categories and hierarchymaintenance.

All IP relationships were previously assigned to a category implicitly if an IP relationship was notexplicitly assigned to a category. This rule is no longer supported for the current release. You must assignall relationships that you want to use for this IP to a category.

See also

For more information, see the main release note for Intellectual Property Management.

1.32.1.3.3 Rights Templates (New)

Use

You can define master data objects called rights templates that allow you to restrict the rights to anIntellectual Property (IP) to varying levels. A rights template specifies certain markets, territories,languages, or values in other rights dimensions, but does not specify the IP or the validity period.

You can use a rights template to quickly create contracts, maintain IPs, or perform a rights availabilityanalysis in which the rights to an IP are restricted according to the information defined in the rightstemplate.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 380

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You use IMG activity Define Rights Template Types to classify the rights templates into different rightstemplate types.

1.32.1.3.4 Rights Consumption (New)

Use

In license acquisition contract items, you can specify a quantity ("number of runs") that has beenacquired. These numbers are copied into the intellectual property (IP) when the system carries out therights generation if the generation rule for the IP specifies Union with contract reference (operationtype R instead of +).

If you consume or sell numbered runs, it is necessary to identify the acquisition contract the consumedruns belong to with a granting reference to the contract. This is important if you have several acquisitioncontracts with different conditions (royalties, validity period, etc.). In this instance, the granting referenceallows you to choose the acquisition contract it is most advantageous to use.

If underlying IPs should also be considered for rights availability and royalty calculation, you need to usethe new relationship type Underlying Component (Granting Ref.) in the IP. The system only considersthe subordinate IPs assigned as Underlying Component (Granting Ref.) in the royalty calculation whenyou select the contract linked to the subordinate IP by the granting reference.

The granting reference to the license acquisition contract then appears in any license sales contract thatincludes IPs assigned with this relationship type. (With the old relationship type, UnderlyingComponent, all acquisition contracts for the related IPs were included in the royalties calculation andbenefited from the sales.)

In order to resolve the ambiguity in the license sales contract, the system carries out an extended collisioncheck that allows you to select rights from particular license acquisition contract items for consumption.The system displays the following for the IP sold and the included IPs:

- Open rights

- Available acquisition contracts

- Assigned acquisition contracts

As soon as you select certain rights for consumption, the system removes them from the available rights(if they were also available from another license acquisition contract), so that overlapping acquired rightscannot be consumed more than once. The collision check completes successfully when there are no moremissing rights and open rights have been assigned.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 381

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


In order to execute the extended collision check, the user needs authorization for the new "Authorizationobject for Collision Check" (CRM_IPM_CC). It supports the activities Display (03) and Execute (16).


- In the IMG activity Define Formulas for Generating the Rights Owned, you can assign theavailability profile 0DEF in the dialog box Generation rules. You can also use the operationContract reference in the dialog box Generation steps. These two settings mark IPs with thisgeneration rule for the extended collision check in the license sales contract.

- The BAdI for Availability Profile allows you to override the standard calculation of available rights.(The default is given by the fallback implementation.)

1.32.1.3.5 Rights Maintenance for Intellectual Property Management (Changed)

Use

You can no longer use the SAP GUI for rights maintenance in Intellectual Property Management (IPM).This functionality is now available in a Web-based user interface, the CRM WebClient UI, from thefollowing applications:

- IP maintenance

- License acquisition contracts

- License sales contracts

- Rights availability analysis

The IP contains different types of rights (Rights Owned, Rights Owned (Granting ref), Release Dates,Release Restriction). Rights are displayed in a hierarchy in which the rights scope contains the validitydates and other attributes. The group contains all the dimensions used with their respective attributevalues. All groups within one scope share the same global properties of their common scope.

For most rights types, you can maintain new rights through the templates or by creating them manually.The templates are only supported for the Rights Owned. You can only assign the Rights Owned(Granting ref.) through the rights generation tool in the IP overview.


- In the IMG activity Define Rights Maintenance, you can define the separator used between attributevalues and also if the attribute ID or description displays.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 382

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- In the IMG activity Define Object Hierarchy and Object Attributes, you can define the tree profilesthat are used to display data for rights maintenance.

- In the IMG activity Define Rights Template Types, you can set up a mapping between the rightstemplate types and the rights types. Rights types are specific to the application, whereas you candefine a new template type in addition to the two types delivered for other needs.

See also

For information about rights templates, see the release note for Rights Templates (New).

1.32.1.4 CRM-IM-IPM-BTX Business Transactions Licensing

1.32.1.4.1 Rights Consumption (New)

Use

In license acquisition contract items, you can specify a quantity ("number of runs") that has beenacquired. These numbers are copied into the intellectual property (IP) when the system carries out therights generation if the generation rule for the IP specifies Union with contract reference (operationtype R instead of +).

If you consume or sell numbered runs, it is necessary to identify the acquisition contract the consumedruns belong to with a granting reference to the contract. This is important if you have several acquisitioncontracts with different conditions (royalties, validity period, etc.). In this instance, the granting referenceallows you to choose the acquisition contract it is most advantageous to use.

If underlying IPs should also be considered for rights availability and royalty calculation, you need to usethe new relationship type Underlying Component (Granting Ref.) in the IP. The system only considersthe subordinate IPs assigned as Underlying Component (Granting Ref.) in the royalty calculation whenyou select the contract linked to the subordinate IP by the granting reference.

The granting reference to the license acquisition contract then appears in any license sales contract thatincludes IPs assigned with this relationship type. (With the old relationship type, UnderlyingComponent, all acquisition contracts for the related IPs were included in the royalties calculation andbenefited from the sales.)

In order to resolve the ambiguity in the license sales contract, the system carries out an extended collisioncheck that allows you to select rights from particular license acquisition contract items for consumption.The system displays the following for the IP sold and the included IPs:

- Open rights

- Available acquisition contracts

- Assigned acquisition contracts

As soon as you select certain rights for consumption, the system removes them from the available rights(if they were also available from another license acquisition contract), so that overlapping acquired rightscannot be consumed more than once. The collision check completes successfully when there are no more

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 383

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

missing rights and open rights have been assigned.


In order to execute the extended collision check, the user needs authorization for the new "Authorizationobject for Collision Check" (CRM_IPM_CC). It supports the activities Display (03) and Execute (16).


- In the IMG activity Define Formulas for Generating the Rights Owned, you can assign theavailability profile 0DEF in the dialog box Generation rules. You can also use the operationContract reference in the dialog box Generation steps. These two settings mark IPs with thisgeneration rule for the extended collision check in the license sales contract.

- The BAdI for Availability Profile allows you to override the standard calculation of available rights.(The default is given by the fallback implementation.)

1.32.1.4.2 CRM-IM-IPM-BTX-PUR License Acquisition

1.32.1.4.2.1 License Contract Maintenance (Changed)

Use

You can no longer use the SAP GUI to maintain license acquisition contracts and license sales contracts.This functionality is now available in a Web-based user interface, the CRM WebClient UI.

The full contract structure is displayed in an overview tree grouped by the intellectual property (IP),where you can find the most important information at one glance. Under each IP, you can see the relatedadvance groups, rights scopes, and royalty scopes with detailed information. The items are grouped bycategory. For example, items which are only rights-relevant are displayed as rights scopes, items whichare only royalty-relevant are displayed as royalty scopes, and so on. This means that when you create anew scope, you have more guidance when you assign item categories for a specific scope type. Forexample, if you create a new scope for flat fee royalties, the system only allows you to select the itemcategories that are classified for flat fee royalties.Also, the system now creates the final invoice for an advance group automatically.

Therefore, a new Customizing activity is necessary in which you can define different UI scenarios andassign them to the transaction types. In this Customizing activity, you can select which scope types aresupported and which item categories are allowed for these scope types. For example, if you have acontract type where you need only advance groups and variable rights and royalty scopes, you can definea scenario that only includes the information you need.

If you use reserves for license acquisition contracts, the assignment delivered for reserves expects that thestandard condition types delivered for reserve rates, 17R1 and 17R2, are available in the condition groupassigned to the relevant item category. If you use other condition types, the assignment is not displayed.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 384

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


- In the IMG activity Define User Interface Scenarios, you can define the different UI scenarios,including the tree profile for the overview tree. In the standard the UI scenario IPM is available.This contains all possible item group types and can be used for license sales contracts and licenseacquisition contracts.

- In the IMG activity Define Object Hierarchy and Object Attributes, you can create your own treeprofile for the overview tree. Otherwise, you can use the standard tree profile IPM_LICCON.

- In the IMG activity Define Scale Retroactivity, you can set the scale retroactivity type and assignitem categories allowed for each type.



See also

For more information, see the main release note for Uniform User Interface for Intellectual PropertyManagement (New).

In the license sales contract an extended collision check is supported. For more information, see releasenote Rights Consumption (New).

For more information about the new rights maintenance, see Rights Maintenance for Intellectual PropertyManagement (Changed).

1.32.1.4.3 CRM-IM-IPM-BTX-SAL License Sales

1.32.1.4.3.1 License Contract Maintenance (Changed)

Use

You can no longer use the SAP GUI to maintain license acquisition contracts and license sales contracts.This functionality is now available in a Web-based user interface, the CRM WebClient UI.

The full contract structure is displayed in an overview tree grouped by the intellectual property (IP),where you can find the most important information at one glance. Under each IP, you can see the relatedadvance groups, rights scopes, and royalty scopes with detailed information. The items are grouped bycategory. For example, items which are only rights-relevant are displayed as rights scopes, items whichare only royalty-relevant are displayed as royalty scopes, and so on. This means that when you create anew scope, you have more guidance when you assign item categories for a specific scope type. Forexample, if you create a new scope for flat fee royalties, the system only allows you to select the itemcategories that are classified for flat fee royalties.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 385

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Also, the system now creates the final invoice for an advance group automatically.

Therefore, a new Customizing activity is necessary in which you can define different UI scenarios andassign them to the transaction types. In this Customizing activity, you can select which scope types aresupported and which item categories are allowed for these scope types. For example, if you have acontract type where you need only advance groups and variable rights and royalty scopes, you can definea scenario that only includes the information you need.

If you use reserves for license acquisition contracts, the assignment delivered for reserves expects that thestandard condition types delivered for reserve rates, 17R1 and 17R2, are available in the condition groupassigned to the relevant item category. If you use other condition types, the assignment is not displayed.


- In the IMG activity Define User Interface Scenarios, you can define the different UI scenarios,including the tree profile for the overview tree. In the standard the UI scenario IPM is available.This contains all possible item group types and can be used for license sales contracts and licenseacquisition contracts.

- In the IMG activity Define Object Hierarchy and Object Attributes, you can create your own treeprofile for the overview tree. Otherwise, you can use the standard tree profile IPM_LICCON.

- In the IMG activity Define Scale Retroactivity, you can set the scale retroactivity type and assignitem categories allowed for each type.



See also

For more information, see the main release note for Uniform User Interface for Intellectual PropertyManagement (New).

In the license sales contract an extended collision check is supported. For more information, see releasenote Rights Consumption (New).

For more information about the new rights maintenance, see Rights Maintenance for Intellectual PropertyManagement (Changed).

1.32.1.5 CRM-IM-IPM-RO Royalty Accounting

1.32.1.5.1 CRM-IM-IPM-RO-ROO Outgoing Royalties

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 386

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.32.1.5.1.1 Outgoing Royalties Settlement Without Differential Billing (New)

Use

The Customizing delivered includes the contract item category IPM Rgt+Roy PBP (IEM4). Thiscategory is for usage-dependent outgoing royalties settlement with accruals that do not requiredifferential billing.

The (statistical) condition types on which a percentage royalty calculation is based, such as the salesvolume, must carry the total values from the current billing or settlement period. This is demonstrated inthe example below, which assumes a royalty rate of 10%, increasing to 15% after 20,000 sold pieces, andsales of 10,000 pieces (for $1 per piece) in January and 5,000 in each subsequent month.

Billing Period Month Basis Royalties Result

First quarter Jan 10,000 1,000 Accrued for 1,000

First quarter Feb 15,000 1,500 Accrued foranother 500

First quarter March 20,000 2,000 Accrualsliquidated

Royalties 2,000

Second quarter April 5,000 750 Accrued for 750

Second quarter May 10,000 1,500 Accrued foranother 750

Second quarter June 15,000 2,250 Accrualsliquidated

Royalties 2,250

For such basis values, a new cumulation scope (Per billing period - C) is available.


To use the Per billing period cumulation scope (C), adjust the settings in IMG activity Adjust BillingEngine Application for Settlement of Outgoing Royalties under IPMO -> Object -> DL -> Container ->DLI -> Usage. See also the usage documentation.


The example Customizing contains the following entries:

- Define Item Categories: The IPM Rgt+Roy PBP (IEM4) item category is now available for thisscenario.

In IMG activity Define Settings for IPM Item Categories, this item category is rights-relevant andthe difference relevance is set to PBP: In this billing period (C).

Also evaluate the additional settings for the new item category in the following IMG activities:

- Define Item Category Determination

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 387

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Define Copying Control for Item Categories

- Assign Billing Plan Type to Item Categories

- Define Condition Type: Two new condition types are now available for this scenario:

- NetValuePBPOR (17B0): This holds the cumulative value over one billing period (of the datavalue 1IR1), which can be used as the condition basis for condition type 17PO in a scenariowhere the scale basis is the cumulative ITD value.Note: In this case, the scale basis of 17PO must be set to the value of 17B0 by acustomer-specific scale basis formula.

- PBP Per. w/ Qty OR (17PB): This is a percentage condition which also can have 17BO ascondition basis. But, unlike 17PO, the scale basis of 17PB is the price quantity, which inpricing procedure 17IP14 is the cumulative quantity of value type 1IR3.

- Create Maintenance Group: The condition group IPM Acq. Item PBP (1702) is now available forthis scenario.

- Define Data Values: The new cumulation scope PBP: In this billing period (C) and condition typeNetValuePBPOR (17B0) are assigned to data value Confirmed Sales Volume (1IR1).

- Define Scale Retroactivity: An entry for item category IPM Rgt+Roy PBP (IEM4) is maintainedfor Per Period scale retroactivity (C).

- Create Pricing Procedure: A new pricing procedure, IPM Billing Purchasing PBP (17IP14), is nowavailable.

- Define Billing Types for IPM License Settlements (IPM Outgoing Royalties): Two new billingtypes are available for the IPM Billing Purchasing PBP pricing procedure.Assign one of the following billing types:

- OR Per Billing Period (PBP) (OR04)

- OR Per Billing Period Accruals (OR05)

1.32.1.6 CRM-IM-IPM-RIN Rights Inventory Analysis

1.32.1.6.1 Rights Availability Analysis (Changed)

Use

You can no longer use the SAP GUI for the rights availability analysis (RAA). This functionality is nowavailable in a Web-based user interface, CRM WebClient UI.

The RAA offers functions for searching and analyzing the rights situation of Intellectual Properties (IPs).It is designed like a wizard or guided activity. The wizard typically consists of four steps. The user cannavigate to each subsequent or preceding step.

Step 1 - General Request

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 388

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

In the first step you can maintain the request's header data, for example, the request ID and description.

Step 2 - Availability Criteria

In this step you maintain the rights criteria you are interested in. In contrast to the old RAA, you can nowenter more than one rights group and the number of runs.

In this step you also select the status profile, which defines the type of calculations the RAA will perform.In the current release, only the status profile Available Rights is supported.

Step 3 - IP Search

In this step, you search for IPs that will be analyzed in the calculations. You have the following searchoptions:

- Search in IP Master

- Search in license acquisition and sales contracts

- Filter the IPs by rights

- Add related IPs to the search result

From the list of found IPs, you can select the IPs that are relevant for your analysis.

Step 4 - Availability

In this step, you see a hierarchy of IPs for which the rights situation is calculated. After the execution,you see the rights situation indicated by a status icon. For example, a green status icon indicates that therequested rights for the IP are available, while a red status icon indicates that they are not available. Youalso see a status vector for each IP in the hierarchy, showing sets of existing or missing rights. These setsare called detail statuses. The following detail statuses are currently supported:

- Available rights

- Missing rights

- Not owned rights

- Not released rights

- Restricted rights

- Sold rights

- Acquired rights

In the overview hierarchy, you can also create license acquistion contracts or license sales contracts.

From the overview hierarchy you can navigate to a detail view, which shows you the rights situation foran IP in detail. For each calculated detail status, you see the list of rights grouped into that status. You canuse the status to determine why a requested right is not available or which rights are available in detail.

In addition to the detail view that displays all detail statuses for one IP, an overview for the availablerights of all IPs exists.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 389

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


In order to use the RAA, a user needs authorizations for object CRM_IPMRAA.. The object includes thefields Scenario and Activity. In the Scenario field, you define the RAA-Scenario that the user is allowedto use, and in the Activity field you define the action the user can perform with a request. The followingactions are supported:

- Create / Change

- Display

- Delete


- In the IMG activity Define Rights Availability Scenarios, you can change the default descriptionsand icons for a rights availability scenario.

- In the IMG activity Configure Rights Availability Wizard, you can customize the RightsAvailability Analysis wizard by changing the steps. For example, you can add or delete a step, orchange the description of the steps.

- In the IMG activity Define Number Ranges for Rights Availability Requests, you can maintain thenumber ranges for the rights availability requests through transaction SNRO.The application needs two number ranges:

- 01: This is for internal numbers given from the system.

- AB: This can have the range from 'A' to 'ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ' and must be flagged forexternal use.

You cannot save a request without these number ranges.

See also

For information about rights maintenance, see the release note for Rights Maintenance for IntellectualProperty Management (Changed).

1.33 CRM-IPH Pharmaceuticals

1.33.1 Account Hierarchy Affiliation and Class of Trade (New)

Use


Account Hierarchy Affiliation

The account hierarchy incorporates new features specifically for the Life Sciences industry.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 390

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

When contracting organizations, such as group purchasing organizations (GPOs), negotiate pricing forcertain products on behalf of their members (pharmacies, hospitals), the contracting organizationmaintains a membership list that identifies the customers that belong to the contracting organization. Amember of a membership list can be a customer, another buying group or a subdivision of a buyinggroup, often referred to as a shareholder.

This information can be represented in the system using the account hierarchy, the nodes being used todenote the individual shareholders. This is also known as account hierarchy affiliation. As part of thebusiness process, it is possible to denote that certain accounts belonging to the hierarchy are not valid forcertain contracts or not eligible for special pricing.

Since members can be part of multiple hierarchies, a particular member may not be active for a certaintime period on certain hierarchies for contracting purposes.

The account affiliation details can be displayed and maintained on the account master screen in theHierarchy Affiliation assignment block. It provides the following information:

- Hierarchy Tree: The hierarchy tree to which the account is attached

- Hierarchy Top Node: Text of the top node, generally denoting the owner for the whole hierarchy

- Hierarchy Node: Name of the node to which the account is attached

- Valid From: Date from which the account is active in the hierarchy

- Valid To: Date up to when the account is active in the hierarchy

- Blocked: Active or blocked status of the account

An account can be activated and deactivated on the hierarchy, as required.For example, an account is currently valid from 01.01.2005 to 31.12.2006 and has the status "Active".You now decide to deactivate the account as of 01.01.2006. In the Hierarchy Affiliation assignmentblock on the account master screen, you set the valid-to date for this hierarchy to 31.12.2005, then add anew line and define the additional validity from 01.01.2006 until 31.12.2006 with the status "Blocked".

When changes are made, records are merged if the statuses of the records are the same and the datessequential.

A hierarchy affiliation history is available and shows the entire history of the account assignment.

Class of Trade (COT)

This classifies customers and is used to segment pricing and drive pricing policies. Contracts may beestablished for specified COTs, which are used as filters for contract partner eligibility.In multi-divisional companies, each division may use their own COT designation.

A Class of Trade can be assigned to an account in account maintenance under Classification in theGroup and Subgroup fields.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 391

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.33.2 Contract Management for Life Sciences (Enhanced)

Use


Contract Management for Life Sciences (CM for LS) is a scenario tailored for pharmaceutical, medicaldevice, and diagnostic companies that builds on the Contract Management scenario delivered with CRM5.0. Starting with events that trigger contract creation activities such as negotiation, acceptance andexecution, contract management in CRM leverages the SAP platform to better collaborate, streamline andautomate routine steps in your business process, and improve overall productivity.

The CM for LS solution covers enhancements and new functionality in the following business processes:

- Contract Development

- Contract Administration

- Chargebacks and Distributor Rebates

Contract Development

Contract development begins with initiation, through negotiation, acceptance and execution of a contract.This involves negotiating and capturing contract product prices, determining contract member eligibilityand modelling prices. Once the contract is agreed upon by both parties, the manufacturer will notify thewholesaler / distributor (channel partner) of the contract prices and eligible parties by sending a bidaward document via EDI.

The following are the new and enhanced features supporting this process:Incentive Program Management (New)You can

- Model prices in a contract by using incentive programs. This gives you an open and flexiblestructure for defining price and rebate incentives that are attached to an item on the contractand also allows you to capture processing and tracking attributes.

- Attach pre-defined or custom incentive programs to contracts, making it an effective way ofdeveloping competitive contracts where complex pricing models are involved.

- Use condition generation for price and rebate incentives. Condition records indicate what formyour incentives will take. This means that you define the scope of your concession and theincentive program uses condition generation to translate it to the business document.

Incentive programs are integrated with the CRM Business Rules Framework (BRF), this gives youthe flexibility to add rules to evaluate customer and product eligibility - when considering aconcession. The scenario is shipped with two incentives (that is, floating and fixed prices),illustrating how the Incentive Program object can be used to add new incentives during theimplementation project.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 392

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Contract Administration and Monitoring

This scenario covers processes that begin with contract activation, continue with ongoing maintenance,and end with the expiration of a contract. This includes automating processes that manage contracteligibility by cascading source data changes onto contracts and rebate agreements or adding businesspartner exceptions with varying validity dates.

The following are the new features supporting this process:Cascade Manager (New)Since business in the life sciences industry is largely through indirect channels, that is, viadistributors, operational data in business documents such as contracts and rebate agreements have tobe updated regularly.The cascade manager captures changes in operational data such as list prices, business partnerhierarchy etc., evaluates them and identifies the affected business documents before cascading thesechanges on to the appropriate business documents and generating triggers to notify affectedstakeholders.

Business Partner Exceptions (New) Long-term agreements in life sciences are primarily, with Group Purchasing Organizations (GPO)who negotiate and administer contracts for their members. GPO or member affiliation is maintainedthrough the business partner group hierarchy (BPH). BPH hierarchy nodes can be attached to acontract thus making linked business partners like hospitals, eligible for the contract.It might be necessary to exclude some of the individual business partners belonging to the hierarchynode attached to the contract. Or, individual business partners may have to be added to a contractwith validity dates that differ from the contract header.The Business Partner Exceptions application (BPE) supports this requirement. BPE allows a user toinclude or exclude a business partner with validity dates that differ from the contract header.

Notification Manager (Enhanced)This helps you inform the channel partner of changes in business documents. For example, youcould inform your channel partner of changes in prices or products.You can also use the On-Demand report feature, to inform partners of changes in businessdocuments. Unlike the notification manager, you can use this feature inform any other partner suchas a buying partner, or a hierarchy node partner also - and not just the channel partner.Since the wholesaler invoices the end-customer at the contract rate, the notification process willcontinue through the life of the contract as prices change and customers are added or expired from acontract.

Chargebacks and Distributor Rebates

This scenario covers handling and payment of claims submitted by distributors and wholesalers.Chargeback and distributor rebate management functions enable you to:

- Automatically correct chargeback discrepancies

- Validate claims in a timely fashion

- Reduce disputes and resubmissions

The following are the enhanced features supporting this process:Resale Tracking Engine (Enhanced)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 393

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Receive ClaimsChargebacks have been enhanced to handle submissions of the EDI 867 document. Thiscontains both claim and resale report transactions that are also known as sales tracings. TheRTE also allows you to define edit rules by transaction type.

- Validate ClaimsYou can support service or administrative fees that are calculated when claim lines aresubmitted. You can use predefined condition types to include service fees in a contract.Condition types support a variety of calculation types that is, dollar per unit, percent ofcontract price and so on.

In addition to supporting service fee calculations, you have additional options to edit lines -especially in the context of overriding a contract and/or a WAC price as well as contractnumber.Claim lines where the manufacturer pays a different amount or rejects due to submission errors(with respect to contract eligibility, or a missing shipping date ) are sent back to the wholesalerin a reconciliation report via EDI.


- Once the contract is agreed upon by both parties, the manufacturer will notify the wholesaler /distributor (channel partner) of the contract prices and eligible parties by sending a bid awarddocument via EDI.Since the wholesaler invoices the end-customer at the contract rate, the notification process willcontinue through the life of the contract as prices change and customers are added or expired from acontract.

- Claim lines where the manufacturer pays a different amount or rejects due to submission errors(with respect to contract eligibility, or a missing shipping date ) are sent back to the wholesaler in areconciliation report via EDI.


You have made all the relevant customizing settings under Life Sciences/ Pharmaceutical Industry bychoosing transaction SPRO, Customer Relationship Management -> Industry-Specific Solutions .

See also

Account Hierarchy Affiliation and Class of Trade (New)

Products: Pharmaceutical Attributes and NDC (New)

BI Extractors for Chargebacks (New)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 394

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.33.3 Products: Pharmaceutical Attributes and NDC (New)

Use


The product master now provides set types designed specifically for the pharmaceuticals industry. Theseare the set types CMS_PROD_ATTR, which contains the pharmaceutical attributes, and the set typeCMS_NDC_ALTID, which is used as the alternative ID for pharmaceutical products, the National DrugCode (NDC).

Pharma Attributes

CRM delivers only a number of predefined attributes as examples, allowing further attributes to bedefined according to company-specific requirements. The attributes provided are limited to the standardvalues available with the FDB's NDDF file (First Data Bank National Data Drug File).

The following attributes are available in the set type CMS_PROD_ATTR:

- CMS_THERA_CODE: Therapeutic Class Code (Drug Category)The American Hospital Formulary Service (AHFS) code is a six-digit hierarchical classification thatrefers to a specific type of therapeutic activity for a drug. The AHFS therapeutic class coderepresents a three-level hierarchy, where level 1 is the anatomical group and other groups, level 2the drug group, and level 3 the drug class.

- CMS_GENERIC_CODE: Generic CodeA random number (six digits) representing the generic formulation specific to the ingredientcombination, route of administration, dosage form, and drug strength.

- CMS_PROD_STR: Product StrengthFor products with a single active ingredient, the strength may be comprised of a single metricstrength value and unit of measure, or an ingredient metric strength, unit of measure, and a liquiddilution. For multiple active ingredient products, the strength comprises multiple metric strengthvalues and units of measure,with or without a liquid dilution. Up to five separate ingredientstrengths are possible.

- CMS_DOSAGE: Dosage FormThis is an abbreviation for the product dosage form. The dosage form is how the product isdelivered, that is liquid, solid, or gas.

- CMS_ROUTE_ADM: Route of AdminIdentifies how the product, in the defined dosage form, is administered to the patient.

- CMS_HICL: HICL: HICLThe six-position hierarchical ingredient code list (HICL) contains a maximum of nine sequencedingredient codes, hierarchical ingredient codes (HICs). Each six-character HIC identifies a specificingredient, therapeutic class, pharmacological class, and organ system to which the drug is targeted.

- CMS_UNITDOSE: Unit DoseIndicates if the product is provided in a single unit dose packaging.

Package size and package quantity are represented as units of measure:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 395

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Package Size: The unit or number of units that make up a package. This represents the number ofraw units contained in a package, for example the number of tablets in a bottle.

- Package Quantity: This is a unit of measure. For example, a package contains six bottles that in turncontain raw units.

Pharmaceutical attributes can be defined using the standard set types and attributes functionality inCustomizing.

Alternative IDs

CRM delivers a predefined alternative ID type 'NDC'.Each listed drug product is assigned a unique 10-digit, 3-segment number, the NDC. This number can berepresented in the product master using alternative IDs.The NDC can be represented in the various different formats shown below:

- N1 - National Drug Code in 4-4-2 Format




The NDC is divided into three segments. The first segment is the labeler code that identifies any firm thatmanufactures, re-packs, or distributes a drug product. The second segment is the product code. Itidentifies the strength, dosage form, and formulation. The third segment is the package code. Thissegment identifies package size. The 11-position format 5-4-2 (N4) has been adopted as the standard inthe CRM system.

The different formats are converted during communication between the various parties involved. TheNDC codes used by manufacturers to maintain their own products are specified in Customizing, thoseused by channel partners are specified in the business partner master data in the IDs Used forCommunication assignment block.

The alternative ID is available as a search criterion.

1.33.4 Time Dependencies for Business Partners (Telco) - New

Use


Previously it was only possible to maintain current data for a business partner. However, it is now

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 396

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

possible to maintain data in advance if that information is already known and available. For example, abusiness partner may be changing address or changing bank account.

This information is particularly important for those working in a call center where it needs to be readilyavailable.

The following information is time-dependent and can therefore be maintained in advance.

- General data such as names

- Address data

- Address usage

- Bank details

Multiple changes are possible for one date in the future. But it is only possible to maintain one futuredate.

1.33.5 CRM-IPH-CB Chargebacks

1.33.5.1 Chargeback Claims BI Extractors (New)

Use


You can use BI extractors to transfer data from the source system to the SAP NetWeaver BusinessIntelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) system so you have a basis on which to build your BI content. Thisdocument provides information about BI extractors for the Contract Management for Life Sciencesscenario.

In the chargebacks / distributor rebate business process, chargeback claims occur when the wholesalersells the manufacturer's material at a contract price, which is lower than the wholesaler acquisition cost(WAC). The chargeback requested by the wholesaler is the difference between the WAC and the contractprice paid by the customer at the time of sale. The SAP CRM and SAP ECC systems perform varioussystem edits and processes to validate claims, process claims for credit approval, generate chargebackcredit memo requests and reconciliations, and store chargeback data for historical purposes.

Extractor Name: 0CMS_CB_TRAN

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 397

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Type of Datasource - TRAN

- Application Component - 0CRM_PH

- Extract Structure - CMST_CB_BW

You can extract data from the chargeback application, by performing a full extraction or by performing adelta extraction. These requests may be made with specific data filtering criteria.

1.34 CRM-IT Telecommunications

1.34.1 Functions in Dispute Management (New for SP02)

Use

- Link Objects to DisputesFor certain objects, such as bills, you can create a relationship with a dispute by clicking thepushbutton Link to Dispute, and so enter additional information for the dispute. As long as thedispute for a confirmed account is being processed, each new document is assigned to this dispute,even when you create a document using the navigation frame. The interlinkage of objects with thedispute is saved in the transaction history.The following business object types are supported as standard:

- Billing document (BUS20810)

- Billing item (BUS20820)

- Event detail record (EDR) (CRM_EDR_12)

- CRM complaint (BUS2000120)

- Correspondence (SOFM, CRMICLETTR, CRMICFAX)You can find more information in SAP CRM Customizing, at Customer Relationship Management-> Industry-Specific Solutions -> Telecommunications -> Dispute Management -> Define Profilesfor Dispute Management.

- Displaying Related ObjectsObjects related to a dispute can be displayed in the detail view of the dispute by pushing the buttonRelated Objects. If you click the link in the column Object ID of the list you can display the detail ofthe related object. Correspondence like e-mails, letters, and fax related to a dispute are listed underCorrespondence.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 398

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Maintaining CorrespondenceBy clicking the More pushbutton in the dispute header overview, you can create documents such ase-mails, faxes, or letters, and so manage your correspondence directly in the dispute. For example, ifyou want to create a letter, the system opens a Word document in which appropriate data from thedispute is already available. Document templates can be made available for you to use. When yousave the document, the system automatically creates a link between the dispute and the document,and the document is assigned to the open dispute.If you choose the Correspondence pushbutton in the detail view, the newly created document isdisplayed in the list.As long as a dispute for a confirmed account is being processed, each new document can assigned tothis dispute, even when you create a document using the navigation frame. In each detail view inwhich documents (e-mails, faxes, or letters) are displayed for the confirmed account, you can createan assignment to the respective dispute by using the Link to Dispute pushbutton.Using the Correspondence pushbutton, you can display the previous correspondence for therespective dispute. If you click the document link you can go to the corresponding document and,for example, submit documents that are still in process.

- Using Different CurrenciesIn a dispute, you can enter items with different currencies. If the currency in the disputed bill differsfrom the currency defined at header level, the system automatically translates the amounts for thecurrency specified at header level. The currency at header level is determined using the sales areadata. You can manually change the currency at header level. If you change the currency at headerlevel, the system also automatically translates the amounts at item level if the currency there differsfrom the header level currency.

1.34.2 Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management (Enhanced)

Use




Note:


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 399

SAP-System______________________________________________________________




- Payment

- Installment plan

- Promise to pay




Installment Plan


Payment Search


Account Balance





- Dunning history


Payment Data


Miscellaneous


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 400

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


























If you use an external credit management system that is not connected to SAP CRM using XI, the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 401

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

automatic credit limit check and commitment notification functions are available.




See also


1.34.3 Financial Customer Care for Insurance (Enhanced)

Use








______________________________________________________________SAP AG 402

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.34.4 CRM-IT-CI Billing

1.34.4.1 Dispute Management (Enhanced)

Use

As of CRM 5.1, you can use dispute management to create adjustment requests for invoices, invoiceitems, or event detail records (EDRs). Previously, you could do this for invoices only.

In addition, you can do the following:

- Search for invoices and EDRs in an external system

- Display invoices and EDRs originating from an external system


You make settings for dispute management in Customizing for Customer Relationship Management(CRM), by choosing Industry-Specific Solutions -> Telecommunications -> Dispute Management.

1.35 CRM-IU Utilities Industry

1.35.1 CRM-IU-IC Utilities Industry: Interaction Center

1.35.1.1 Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management (Enhanced)

Use




Note:



______________________________________________________________SAP AG 403

SAP-System______________________________________________________________



- Payment

- Installment plan

- Promise to pay




Installment Plan


Payment Search


Account Balance





- Dunning history


Payment Data


Miscellaneous



______________________________________________________________SAP AG 404

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


























For further information on Credit Management integration, see the SAP Library documentation on SAP

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 405

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

CRM 2007 on the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com -> Documentation -> SAP Business Suite ->SAP Customer Relationship Mgmt. -> SAP CRM 2007 -> Components and Functions -> Basic Functions-> Credit Management.



See also


1.35.1.2 Financial Customer Care for Insurance (Enhanced)

Use








______________________________________________________________SAP AG 406

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.36 CRM-MW Middleware

1.36.1 CRM-MW-MON Monitoring

1.36.1.1 Data Integrity Manager (Enhanced for SP02)

Use

The Data Integrity Manager (DIMa) is a tool that helps you detect and repair inconsistencies betweenobjects across components within the SAP CRM system landscape.

As of Release CRM 2007 SP02:

- You can use accelerated data extractors for the following business objects:

- Customer

- Contacts

- Material master

- Service master

- Business partner

- Business partner relationships

- Partner functions

- Sales documents (Quotes and Orders)

- Sales contracts

- You can filter contacts based on the sales area of the customer. For example, extract only contactsfor customers with sales area values VKORG, VTWEG, SPART; filtering is possible for singlevalues also.

- You can directly navigate to the monitoring transactions R3AR2 and R3AR3 after the creation ofDIMa requests.

- You can manually number DIMa requests.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 407

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

1.36.2 CRM-MW-GWI Groupware Integration

1.36.2.1 Migration of GWI Data from the Java-Based MapBox to theABAP-Based MapBox (New)

Use


In server-based Groupware integration, you can perform data conversion of BDoc messages to thestandard Groupware formats (iCalendar and vCard) by using the ABAP-based MapBox. TheABAP-based MapBox framework thereby replaces the Java-based MapBox framework and is completelyintegrated in the CRM server.

If you use the Java-based MapBox, you can migrate your data to the ABAP-based MapBox. It is thereforeno longer necessary to separately install the Java MapBox or the SAP NetWeaver Application ServerJava, and so you can considerably reduce installation- and support effort for server-based Groupwareintegration.

This data migration is largely based on the conversion of XML data in DDIC structures. The Userlist dataand BUPA (business partner relevant) data are transferred from table MDMANDTSTORE, used by theJava-based MapBox, to tables CRMD_MBA_GUISTOR and CRMD_MBA_MSGSTOR.

To process the migration you call transaction MIGRATE. An application opens in which you can choosewhether you want to migrate activities or business partners as well. You can either transfer all activitiesor just activities within a defined period. If you want to migrate activities, you must also select theUserlist indicator. Otherwise, you cannot synchronize the activities with the Groupware system.

Note: After the data migration (transaction MIGRATE), you must perform an initial load for allCustomizing objects.

1.37 CRM-CA CRM Cross-Application Components

1.37.1 Survey Suite (Enhanced)

Use


The Survey Suite is available for the following roles:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 408

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Marketing Professional

- Service Professional

- Sales Professional

The Survey Suite has been enhanced with the following features:

Search

The Search function has been enhanced so you can select search criteria from dropdown lists. You canadd or remove selection criteria to refine your search.

Editable overview page

You can use the editable overview page to edit the details of existing surveys.

1.37.2 Multilevel Categorization (Enhanced)

Use


Multilevel categorization has been enhanced to include flexible category labels. You can now customizethe labels of the categories you have defined in the category modeler to suit your business needs. Onceyou have defined the labels in Customizing, you can then assign your new label texts to different categorylevels using the Categorization Schema in the Interaction Center WebClient under the IC Manager role.


You can define the categorization labels in Customizing for SAP CRM by choosing CustomerRelationship Management -> CRM Cross-Application Components -> Multilevel Categorization-> Define Categorization Labels.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 409

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

rn_crm_60_02_en

Documents

sap crm new

account new

worklist new

bprole new

interlinkages new

new knowledge base new

dependent components

qualification requirements